¶The Grounde of Arte …

¶The Grounde of Artes: teaching the perfecte vvorke and practise of Arithmetike, both in whole nū ­bers and fractions, after a more easie and exact sort, than hitherto hath bene set forth.

Made by M. ROBERT RECORDE, D. in Physick, and afterwards augmented by M. IOHN DEE.

And now lately diligently corrected, & beau­tified with some newe Rules and necessarie Additions: And further endowed with a thirde part, of Rules of Practize, abridged into a briefer methode than hitherto hath bene published: with diuerse such necessary Rules, as are incident to the trade of Merchandize.

Whervnto are also added diuers Tables & instructions that will bring great profite and delight vnto Mer­chants, Gentlemen, and others, as by the con­tents of this treatise shal appeare.

By Iohn Mellis of Southwark, Scholemaster.

‘CERVA CHARISSIMA ET GRATISSIMVS PRO [...]

Imprinted by I. Harison, and H. Bynneman. ANNO DOM. 1582.

To the Reader.
THat which my friend hath well begon
For verie loue to common weale,
Of good will hath bene ouer runne
directing ech part euerie deale.
And bewtified for thy behoofe
With breifer wayes for practise lore,
As by the triall and the proofe
Was neuer yet in print before.
Of numbers vse the endlesse might
No wit nor language can expresse,
Apply, and trie, both day and night
And then this truth thou wilt confesse.
The Bookes Verdicte.
To please or displease sure I am,
But not of one sort to euerie man.
To please the best sort would I faine,
The froward displease shal I certaine.
Yet wish I wil, though not with hope,
All eares and mouthes to please or stoppe.

To the Right worshipfull M. ROBERT FORTH Doctor of Law, and one of the Maisters of the Queenes Ma­iesties high Court of Chauncerie.

BIAS the wise Philosopher of Greece, when his Country was spoyled, and the people caried their goods away, be­ing demaunded why he did not the like? answered, that he caried all that he had with him, meaning his vertue and learning: So I (my Right worshipful & singular good Master) hauing nothing of value in substance to bestow, doe here present you with such treasure as the Lord hath vouchsafed vpon me, which according to Bias opinion and mine owne likewise, is the greatest Iewell I haue, not doubting but you wil accept the giuers mind more than the gift, which I confesse is small. But being throughly acquainted with the great fauor your Worship bereth to such as delight in any good exercise, it hath imboldned me to put forth this simple Addition vnder your Wor­ships defence. The entyre loue & exercise of this excellēt Arte, with drawing of proportions, Mappes, Cardes, Buildings, Plattes, &c. were the only studies whereunto I euermore haue bene enclined. Touching Drawing it was onely Dei beneficio, naturally giuen me from my youth, without instruction of any man, more than Loue thereof, dele­ctation, desire, and practise. In this Art also hauing great delight, I had no other instruction at my first begin­ning but onely this good Authors Booke, but after­wards I greatly encreased the same during the time I [Page] serued your Worship in Cambridge, in going to the A­rithmeticke Lecture at the common Schoole: And more furthered since the time that I left your Worships ser­uice, which is about 18. yeares past, by continuall exer­cise therein (the mother and nurse of Science,) during which time my onely vocation hath bene (thinking it a meete exercise for a common welth) in training vp of youth to write and draw, with teaching of them the in­fallable principles and briefe practises of this worthie Science, hauing (I praise God for it) brought vp a num­ber to become faithfull and seruiceable to their masters in great affaires, and many of them good members of a common wealth, which is no small comfort to me in Christ. Amongst which number, a countriman of mine hath oftentimes bene verie inportunate with me, to do a deede of Charitie vpon the ground of Arts, vz. to per­use and amende it of the imperfections and faultes, that haue crept into it through negligence of often printing. Which ernest request of his bred two strifes in me: The one was, I was loth to do it, knowing my selfe inferior to a great number that might better do it than I. And yet considering it is a Booke hath done many a thousand good, which when a young beginner com­meth to a confused or mistaken figure, it bringeth him into a wonderful discoragement and maze: which thing considered, for meere loue to a common wealth, and to the Booke, being my first Author, I willingly graunted to do my goodwill. And passing vnder the file of corre­ction, I heere and there encreast it with such necessarie Additions as I knewe might encorage a yong learner, and more woulde haue done, but for feare the Booke would rise too thicke or grow too dere. And being thus entered into the vaine thereof, and knowing that this Author was the onely light and the chiefest Lodestone [Page] vnto the vulgar sort of English men in this worthy sci­ence, that euer writ in our naturall tong, I haue (accor­ding to my simple knowledge) yelded againe some part of my receiued talent with aduantage: and endowed him to the further encrease of his memorie, with Rules of breuitie and practize, abridged into a briefer me­thod than hitherto hath bene published in our English tongue, with other right necessarie Additions, Rules and Tables, whiche I truste will doe my countrie good, and be right commodious to all sorts of men: all which I commit to the fauorable censure of your worship, and al such as loue knowledge, desiring their fauorable corre­ction herein if ought be amisse. The which with greater affection than I am able to vtter, I Dedicate to your Worship, as a meete Patrone, both for lerning godlines, and loue of the same, which comming from your wor­ship into the hands of many (shall I doubt not) do many good, as heretofore it hath alreadie done. So shall you (as the best benefactor of these labors) be partaker of all their prayers that shall reape profite or knowledge by this worthy Art, in Commendation whereof if I should write, I should rather blemish thā adorne it. For the Authors Epistle vnto that famous Prince of wor­thy memorie K. Edward the sixt, and his Preface to the Reader, are sufficient.

Thus crauing fauourable acceptation of this my homely and dutifull present, I humblie leaue you to the conduction of the Almightie, whom I beseech long to preserue you in continuall health, with dayly encrease of worship, to the glorie of his name, and to the ioy of all such as loue you.

Your Worships most bounden to command, IOHN MELLIS.

TO THE MOSTE mightie Prince Edwarde the sixt, by the grace of God King of Englande, Fraunce, and Irelande. &c.

THe excellencie of mans na­ture, being such, as it is by Gods diuine fauoure (most mightie Prince) not onely created in highnesse of de­gree farre aboue all other corporall things, but by per­fection of reason and search of wit, much approching to­ward the image of God, as not onely the holy Scriptures doe testifie, but also those naturall Philosophers, which exactly did consider the na­ture of man, and namely the farre reach and infinite com­passe of the workes of the minde, were inforced to con­fesse, that man scarcely was able to knowe himselfe. And if he would duly ponder the nature of himselfe, he woulde finde it so strange, that it might seeme vnto him a verie miracle. And thereof sprang that saying: magnum mi­raculum est homo, maximum mariculum sapiens homo. [Page] For vndoubtedly as man is one of the greatest mira­cles that euer God wrought, so a wise man is plainely the greatest.

And therefore was it that some did account the heade of a man the greatest miracle in the worlde, because not onely of the straunge workemanshippe that is in it, but much more of the efficacie of reason, witte, memorie, ima­gination, and such other powers and works of the mind, which can more easily conceiue any thing in a manner, than vnderstande it selfe. And amongst all the creatures of God it findeth none more difficult to be perceiued than these same powers of it selfe, whereby it doth conceiue and iudge as it may be well coniectured by the diuersitie of opinions, that the wisest Philosophers did vtter tou­ching the spirite of man and the substance of it: whereof at this present I intende to make no rehearsall, but who so sisteth to reade thereof, may finde it largely set forth not onely in Aristotle his bookes De anima; but also in Galene his booke called Historia philosophica, & againe in Plutarch his worke, De philosophorum placitis, whose wordes are also repeared of Eusebius in the xv. booke, [...], vnto whom I remi [...] them that haue desired to vnderstande the intricate diffi­cultie of knowing our owne selues, as touching our best part, and that part whereby we deserue to beare the name of men.

This matter seemed so obscure and difficulte, in know­ledge, that Galen, who for his excellent wisedome and iudgement in naturall workes, is called of many men a Miracle in nature, yet in searching the nature and sub­stance of the spirite of man, he not onely confesseth him­selfe ignorant, but counteth it plaine temeritie to attempt to finde it: so farre aboue the hope of mans knowledge is that parte, whereby man doth knowe and iudge of [Page] things. And although the ignorant sort (which hate all things that they knowe not) doe little esteeme the pro­foundnesse of mans spirit and of reason, the chiefe power and facultie of it, yet as there is a kind of feare and obedi­ence of vnreasonable beastes vnto man by the working power of God, so is there in those small reasoned persons a certaine kinde of reuerence towarde wisedome and re­asons, which they doe shewe oftentimes, and by power of persuasion are inforced to obey reason, will they nil they.

And hereby came it to passe, that ye rudenesse of the first age of man was brought vnto some more ciuill trade, as it is well declared by Cicero in the beginning of his first booke De inuentione Rethorica, where he saith thus:

Nam suit quoddam tempus quum in agris homines passion bestiarum more vagahantur, & sibi victu ferino vitam pro­pagabant, nec ratione animi quicquam, sed plera (que) viribus corporis administrabant. N [...]ndum diuine religionis, non hu­mani officij ratio colebatur: Nemo legitimas viderat nuptias, non cer [...]os quisquam inspexerat liberos, n [...]n ius aequabile quid vnlitatis haberet, acceperat: ita propter errorem atque insci­tiam. caeca ac [...]emeraria dominatrix animi cupiditas, ad se ex­ple [...]dam viribus corporis abutebatur, perniciosissimis satelli­tibus.

Quo tempore quidam, magnus videlicet vir & sapiens, cog­nouit quae ma [...]ria esset, & quanta ad maximas res oportunitas in animis iness [...] th [...]ninum, si quis eam posset elicere, & praeci­piendo me [...]r [...]n reddere: Qui dispersos homines in agris, & in tectis syluestribus abditos ratione quadam compulit in v­num locum, & congregauit: & eos in vnamquamque rem in­ducens v [...]ilē atque honestam primo propter insolentiam recla­mantes, deinde propter rationem atque orationem studiosius au­dientes, ex feris & immanibus mites reddidit, & mansue­tos.

This long repetition of Tullies wordes will seeme te­dious [Page] to them which loue but little, and care much lesse for the knowledge of reason, but vnto your Maiestie (I dare say) it is a delectable remembrance, and vnto mee it seemed so pleasant, that I coulde scarse staye my penne from writing all that mine eyes did so greedily reade.

This sentence of Cicero am I lothe to translate into Englishe, partly for that vnto your Maiestie it needeth no translation, but especially knowing howe farre that grace of Tullies eloquence doth excell any English mans tongue, and much more exceedeth the basenesse of my bar­barous style, yet for the fruite of the sentence, I had ra­ther vnto my meere English Countrymen vtter the rude­nesse of my translation, than to defraud them of the bene­fite of so good a lesson, trusting they will also gladly and greedily imbrace all good sciences that may helpe to the iust furniture of the same, when they consider that infor­med reason was the onely Instrument, or ar least ye chiefe meane to bring men vnto Ciuile regiment, from barba­rous manners and beastly conditions.

For the time was (saith Tullie) that men wandered a­broad in the fields vp and downe like beasts, and vsed no better order in feeding than they, so that by reasons rule they wrought nothing, but moste of their doing did they atchiue by force of strēgth. At this time there was no iust regarde of religion towarde God, nor of duetie towarde man. No man had seene right vse of mariage, neither did any man knowe their owne children from other, nor no man had felt the commodity of iust lawes: so that through errour and ignorance, wilfull lust, like a blinde and heady ruler, abused bodily strength as a most mortall minister for the satisfying of his desire. At that time was there one, which not onely in power, but also in wisedome was great: and he considered, howe that in the mindes of men was bothe apte instrumentes, and greate occasion to the [Page] due accomplishment of most weightie affaires, if a man coulde applie them to vse, and by teaching of rules frame them to better trade. This man with persuasion of rea­son, gathered into one place the people that were wan­dring about the fieldes, and lay lurking in wilde cotages and woods: And bringing them into one common socie­tie, did trade them to all such things, as either were pro­fitable or honest, although not without repyning at ye first, by reason that they had not beene so accustomed before. Yet at length through reason and persuasion of wordes they obeyed him more diligently, and so of a wilde and cruell people, he made them curteous and gentle.

Thus hath Tullie set forth the efficacie of reason and persuasion, howe it was able to conuert wilde people to a mildenesse, and to change their furious cruelnesse into gen [...]le cur [...]e. Were it not nowe a great reproch in this our time (when knowledge raigneth so large) that men should shewe themselues lesse obsequious to reason? vn­lesse it may be thought, that now euery man hauing suffi­cient knowledge of himselfe, needeth not to hearken to the persuasion of others.

Indeede he that thinketh himself wise, will not esteeme the reason of any other, be he neuer so wise, so that of such one it may well be saide, He that thinketh himselfe wiser than he is, may iustly be counted a double foole: where­fore such men are not to bee permitted in open audience to talke, but must be put to silence, and made to giue eare to reason, which reason consisteth not in a multitude of words, heaped rashly together, and applyed for one pur­pose, but reason is the expressing of a iust matter with wittie persuasions, furnished with learned knowledge. Such knowledge had Moses being expert in all learning of the Aegyptians, as the Scriptures declare, and there­fore was able to persuade the stubborne people of the [Page] Iewes, although not without great paine.Druis vvas sonne to K. Sarron, & succeeded him in his kingdome. Such know­ledge and such reasons did Druys shewe, which was the first lawe maker of all the West partes of Europe. Like reason and wisedome did Xamolxis vse amongest the Gothes: Lycurgus vnto the Lacedemonians, Zeleucus to the Locrians, Solon to the Athenienses, and Donwallo Molmitius two thousande yeares past, amongst the olde Britanes of this realme. And therby ti came to passe, that their lawes continued long, till more perfite reason alte­red many of them, and wilfull power oppressed moste of them.

At the beginning when these wise men perceiued howe harde it was to bring the rude people to vnderstande rea­son, they iudged the best meanes to attaine this honest purpose to depende of learning in euerie kind, for by lear­ning, as Ouid saith: Pectora moiles [...]unt, asperitas (que) fugit: Stoute stomackes doe waxe milde, and sharpe fiercenesse is exiled. Therefore as Berosus doth testifie, Sarron ▪ that was the thirde King ouer all this West parte of Eu­rope, for to bring the people from beastly rage to manly reason, did erect Schooles of liberall Artes which tooke so good successe, that his name continued in that sort fa­mous aboue two thousand yeares after: for Diodorus Si­culus, which was in the time of Iulius Caesar maketh mē tion of the learned men of the Gothes, and named them Sarronides, that is to say, Sarron his Scholers and fo [...] ­lowers.

Among these Artes that then were taught, some did in forme the tongue, and make men able both to vtter aptly their minde, and also to persuade, as Grammer, Logike, and Rhethorike, although not so couriously as in this time: some other did appertaine to the iust order of parti­tion of Landes, the true vsing of waights, measures, and reckenings in all sorts of bargaines, and for order of buil­ding [Page] and sundrie other vses, those were Arithmerike and Geometrie. Againe, to incourage men to the honour of God, they taught Astronomie, whereby the wonderfull workes of God were so manifestly set forth, that no mans tongue nor pen can in like sort expresse his infinite pow­er, his vnspeakable wisedome, and his exceeding good­nesse toward man, wherby he doth bauntifully prouide for man all necessaries, not onely to liue, but also to liue plea­santly. And so was their confidence in Gods prouidence strongly stayed, knowing his goodnesse to be such, that he woulde helpe man as he coulde, and his power to bee so great, that he could doe what he woulde: and thirdly his wisedome to be so pure, that he would doe nothing, but that was best. Beside these Sciences they taught also Mu­sike, which most commonly they did apply partely to reli­gious Sciences, to drawe men to delight therein, & part­ly to songs made of the maners of men in praise of Ver­tue, and discommendation of Vice, whereby it came to passe, that no man would displease them, nor do any thing euill that might come to their hearing:This Bar­dus Drui­dius the v. king of the Celtes, raigned 69. yeres, and died 1832. yeares be­fore Christ. for their Songs did make euill men more abhorred in that time, than any excommunication doeth in this time. The posteritle of these Musitians continue yet both in Wales and Ireland called Bardes vnto this day, by the auncient name of Bar­dus, their first founder.

And as these Sciences did encrease, so did vertue in­crease thereby. Againe, as these sciences did decaye, so vertue lost hir estimation, and consequently was little in vse: whereof to make a ful declaration, were a thing meet for a Prince to heare, but it woulde require a peculiar treatise. Wherefore at this present I count it sufficient lightly to haue touched this matter in generall wordes, and to say no more of the particularitie thereof, but onely touching one of those sciences, that is, Arithmetike, by [Page] which not onely iust partition of landes was made, but also touching buying an selling, all assises, weights, and measures were deuised, and all reckenings and accounts driuen: yea by proportion of it, were the true orders of Iu­stice limited, as (Aristotle in his Ethikes doth declare) & the degrees of estates in the common wealth established. Although that proportion be called Geometricall, and not Arithmeticall, yet doth that proportion appertaine to the Art of Arithmetike: & in Arithmetike is taught the Pro­gression of such proportions, and all things thereto be­longing. Wherefore I may well say, that seeing Arith­metike is so many wayes needefull vnto the first planting of a common wealth, it must needes be as much required to the preseruation of it also: for by the same meanes is any common wealth continued, by which it was erected and established. And if I shall in smal matters in appea­rance, but in deede verie waightie, put one example or two, what shall we say for the statutes of this realme, which be the onely staie of good order in maner nowe? As touching the mesuring of ground by length and bredth, there is a good and an auncient statute made by Arte of Arithmetike, and now it shalbe to little vse, if by the same Art it be not practised and tried. For the assyse of breade and drinke, the two most common and most necessarie thinges for the sustentation of man, there was a goodly ordinance in the Lawe made, which by ignorance hath so growen out of knowledge and vse, that fewe men doe vn­derstand it, and therefore the statute bookes wonderfully corrupted, & the commons cruelly oppressed: notwithstan­ding some mē haue written, that it is too doubtful a mat­ter to execute those Assises by those statutes, by reason they depend of the standerd of the coine, whiche is muche chaunged from the state of that time when those statutes were made. Thus shall euerie man reade that listeth in [Page] the Abridgement of Statutes in the title of Waightes and Measures, in the seauenth number of the Englishe Booke, where hee shoulde haue translated a good ordi­nance, which is set forth in the French booke: but no maruaile if the Abridgement doth omit it, seeing the great booke of Statutes doth omitte the same Statute, as it hath done diuers other verie good lawes. And this is the fruite of ignorance, to reiect all that it vnderstan­deth not, although they vse some clokes for it: but such clokes, as being allowed, might serue to repell all good lawes, which God forbid.

Againe there is an auncient order for assise of fyre wood, and coales, which was renued not many yeares past, and nowe howe Auarice and Ignorance doth canuas the statute, it is too pitifull to talke of, and more misera­ble to feele.

Furthermore, for the Statute of Coinage, and the standerd thereof, if the people vnderstoode rightly the statute, they shoulde not, nor woulde not (as they often doe) gather an excuse for their follie therby, but as I said, these statutes by wisedome and good knowledge of Arith­metike were made, & by the same must they be continued. And let Ignorance no more meddle with the vse of them, than it did with the making of them. Oh in how misera­ble case is that Realme, where the Ministers and inter­preters of the Lawes are destitute of all good sciences, which be the keyes of the laws? How can they either make good Laws, or maintaine them, that lack that true know­ledge wherby to iudge them? And happie may that realme be accounted where the Prince himselfe is studious of learning, and desireth to vnderstande equitie in all lawes. Therefore most happy are we the louing subiectes of your Maiestie which may see in your highnesse not onely such towardnesse, but also such knowledge of diuers Artes as [Page] seldome hath bene seene in any Prince of such yeares, whereby we are inforced to conceiue this hope: Certain­ly, that he which in those yeares seeketh knowledge when knowledge is least esteemed, and of such an age can di­scerne them, to be enimes both to his royall person, and to his realme, which labour to withdrawe him from know­ledge to exeessiue pastime, and from reasonable studie to ydle or noysome pleasures, he must needes, when he com­meth to more mature yeares, be a most prudent Prince, a most iust Gouernour, and a right Iudge, not onely of his subiectes commonly, but also of the ministers of his lawes, yea, and of the Lawes themselues. And to be able to conceiue the true equitie and exact vnderstanding of al his Lawes and Statutes, to the comfort of his good sub­iectes, and the confusion and reproch of them which labour to obscure or peruerte the equitie of the same lawes and statutes. Howe some of those statutes may bee applied to vse, as well in our time, as in any other time, I haue particularly declared in this Booke, & some other I haue omitted for iust considerations, till I may of­fer them first vnto your Maiestie, to weigh them, as to your Highnesse shall seeme good: for many things in them are not to be published without your highnesse knowledge and approbation, namely because in them is declared all the rates of alloyes for all standerds from one ounce vp­warde, with other mysteries of Mynte matters, and also most part of the varieties of coynes, that haue beene cur­rant in this your Maiesties realme by the space of sixe hundred yeares last past, and many of them that were cur­rant in the time that the Romaines ruled here.

All which, with the auncient description of Englande and Irelande and my simple censure of the same, I haue almost compleated to be exhibited to your Highnesse.

In the meane season most humbly beseeching your Ma­iestie, [Page] to accept this simple treatise, not worthy to be pre­sented to so high a Prince, but that my lowly request to your maiestie is, that this amongst other of my bookes may passe vnder the protection of your highnesse, whom I beseeche God most earnestly and dayly, according to my duetie, to aduaunce in all honour and prince­ly regalitie, and to increase in all know­ledge, iustice, and godly policie. Amen.

Your Maiesties most obedient subiect and seruant, ROBERT RECORDE.

TO THE LOVING Reader. The Preface of Maister Ro: RECORD.

SORE oftetimes haue I la­mented with my selfe the infortunate cōdition of En­gland, seeing so many great Clerks to arise in sundrie o­ther partes of the world, and so few to appeare in this our nation: whereas for preg­nancie of naturall witte (I thinke) few nations doe ex­cell English men: But I cannot impute the cause to any other thing than to the contēpt or misseregard of lear­ning. For as Englishmen are inferior to no men in mo­ther witte, so they passe all men in vaine pleasures, to which they may attaine with great paine or labour: and are as slacke to any, neuer so great commoditie, if there hang of it any paineful studie or trauelsome labour.

Howbeit, yet all men are not of that sort, though the most part be, the more pitie it is: but of them that are so glad, not onlie with paineful studie and studious paine to attaine learning, but also with as great studie & paine to communicate their learning to others, and make all England, if it might be, partakers of the same, the moste part are suche, that vnneth they can support their owne [Page] necessarie charges, so that they are not able to beare any charges in doing of that good, that else they desire to do.

But a greater cause of lamentation is this: that when learned men haue taken paines to do things for the aide of the vnlearned, scarce they shall be allowed for their wel doing, but derided and scorned, and so vtterlye dis­couraged to take in hand any like enterprice againe. So that if any be founde (as there are some) that do fauour learning and learned wittes, and can bee content to fur­ther knowledge, yea only with their word, such persons, though they bee rare, yet shall they encourage learned men to enterprise some things, at the least, that Englād may reioice of. And I haue good hope that England wil (after she hath taken some sure taste of learning) not only bring forth more fauorers of it, but also such lear­ned men, that she shall bee able to compare with anie realme in the world. But in the meane season, where so few regarders of learning are, how greatly they are to be esteemed that doe fauour and further it, my penne wyll not suffice at ful to declare.

Therefore, gentle reader, where as I doe vppon moste iust occasion iudge, yea and know assuredlie, that there be some men in this realme, which both loue, and also much desire to further good learning, and yet am not well able to write their condigne praise for the same, I thinke it better with silence to ouerpasse it, then eyther to say too little of it, or to prouoke againste them the malice of suche other, which do nothing themselues that is praise worthie, and therfore can not abide to heare the praise of any other mans good deede.

And considering their greate fauour vnto learning, though I my selfe be not worthie to be reckoned in the number of great learned men, yet am I bolde to put my selfe in preace with such abilitie, as God hath lent mee [Page] thoughe not with so greate cunning as manye men, yet with as great affection as any man, to help my country­men, and wil not cease dayly, (as much as my small abi­litie wil suffer me) to endite some such thing, that shall be to the instruction, though not of learned men. yet at the least of the vulgare sort, whose argument alwayes shall be such, that it shall delight al learned wits, though they do not learne any great things out of it.

But to speake of this present Booke of Arithmetick, I dare not nor wil not set it foorth with any words, but remit it to the iudgement of all gentle readers, & name­lie such as loue good learning, beseeching them so to e­steeme it, as it doth seeme worthie. And so either to ac­cept the thing for it selfe, either at the leaste to allowe my good endeauour. But I perceiue I neede not vse anye persuasions vnto them, whose gentle nature and fauou­rable minde is readie to receiue thankefullye, and inter­preate to the best, of al suche enterprices attempted for lo good an ende, though the thing do not alwayes satis­fie mens expectation.

This considered, did bolden me to publish abroade this little Booke of the Arte of numbring, which if you shal receiue fauourablie, you shal encourage me to gra­tifie you hereafter with some greater thing.

And as I iudge some menne of so louing a minde to their natiue countrey that they woulde much reioyce to see it to prosper in good learning and wittie Artes, so I hope well of all the rest of Englishmen, that they wyl not be vnmindeful of his due praise, by whose meanes they are helped and furthered in anye thing. Neither ought to esteeme this thing of so little value, as manye men of little discretion oftentimes do: For who so set­teth small price by the wittie deuise and knowlege of numbring, he little considereth it to be the chiefe point (in manner) wherby men differ from all bruite beastes: [Page] for as in al other things, (almost) beastes are partakers with vs, so in numbring we differ cleane from them, and in manner peculiarlie, fith that in manie things they ex­cel vs againe.

The Fox in craftie witte exceedeth most men,
A dogge in smelling hath no man his peere,
To foresight of weather if you looke then,
Many beastes excel man, this is cleere.
The wittinesse of Elephants doth letters attaine,
But what cunning doth there in the Beeremaine?
The Emmet foreseeing the hardenesse of winter,
Prouideth vitailer in the time of Sommer.
The Nightingale, the Lines, the Thrush, the Larke,
In Musical harmonie passe manie a Clarke.
The Hedgehog of Astronomie seemeth to knowe
And stoppeth his caue, where the wind doth blowe
The Spider in weauing such are doth show,
No man can him mende, nor follow I trow.
When a house wil fall, the Mice right quicke,
Flee thence before, can man do the like?

Many things else of the wittinesse of beasts & byrdes might I heere saye, saue that another time I entende to write wherein they excel in manner all men, as it is day­lie seene: but in number was there neuer beast found so cunning, that coulde know or discerne one thing from manye, as by daylie experience you may well consider, when a Bitch hath manie whelpes, or a Hen many Chic­kens: and likewise of other whatsoeuer they be, take frō them al their yong, sauing onlie one, and you shall per­ceiue plainly, that they misse none, though they wil re­sist you in taking them away, and wil seeke them again if they may know where they bee, but else they wil ne­uer misse hem truelye, but take awaie that one that is [Page] left, and then wil they crie and complaine: and restore to them that one, then are they pleased againe: so that of nūber this may I iustlie say, It is the only thing (almost) that separateth man from beastes. He therefore that shal contemne number, he declareth himselfe as brutish as a beast, and vnworthy to be counted in felowship of men. But I trust there is no man so foule ouerseene, thoughe manie right smallie do it regarde.

Therefore wil I now stay to write against suche, and returne againe to this booke, whiche I haue written in the forme of a Dialogue, bicause I iudge that to bee the easiest way of instruction, when the Scholer may aske e­uerie doubt orderlie, and the maister may answer to his question plainelie.

Howbeit I thinke not the contrary, but as it is easier to blame an other mans worke than to make the lyke, so there wil be some that wil finde fault, bicause I write in a Dialogue: but as I coniecture, those shal be suche, as doe not, cannot, either will not perceiue the reason of right teaching and therefore are vnmeete to be aunswe­red vnto, for such men with no reason wil be satisfied.

And if any man obiect that other bookes haue bene written of Arithmetike alreadie so sufficientlie, that I needed not now to put pen to the booke, except I will condemn other mens writings: to them I aunswer. That as I condemne no mans diligence, so I know that no one mā can satisfie euerie man, and therefore like as manye do esteme greatly other Bookes, so I doubt not but some wil like this my Booke aboue any other English Arith­metike hitherto wrtiten, and namely such as shall lacke instructers, for whose sake I haue so plainely set foorthe the examples, as no Booke (that I haue seene) hath done hitherto: whyche thing shall bee greate ease to the rude readers.

Therefore gentle reader, though this booke can bee [Page] small aide to the learned sorte, yet vnto the simple ig­norant (which needeth most help) it may be a good fur­therance and meane vnto knowledge. And though vnto the King his Maiestie priuatelye I doe it dedicate, yet I doubt not (suche is his clemencie) but that hee can bee content, yea and much desirous, that all his louing sub­iects shal take the vse of it, and employ the same to their most profit: Which thing if I perceiue that they thanke­fullie do, and receiue with as good will as it was written, then wil I shortly with no lesse kindnesse set forth suche introductions in to Geometry and Cosmography, as I haue at other times promised, and as hitherto in English hath not bene enterprised, wherwith I dare say al honest heartes wil be pleased, and all studious wittes greatlye delighted.

I wil say no more▪ but let euerie man iudge as he shal see cause. And thus for this time I will staye my penne, committing you all to that true fountaine of per­fect number, which wrought the whole world by number and measure: he is Trinitie in Vnitie, and Vnitie in Trinitie: To whom be all praise, ho­nor and glorie. AMEN.

Here folovveth a Table of al the Contents of this Booke.

The Contents of the firste Dialogue containeth the Declaration of the profite of Arithmetike.

  • Numeration with an easie & large Table.
    • Addition.
    • Subtraction.
    • Multiplicatiō.
    • Diuision.
    with diuers Exāples, and all their proofs, and some newe formes of workings, &c.
  • Reduction, with diuers declarations of Coines Waights and Measures of sundrie formes newly added, with a newe Table, containing most part of the golde Coines throughout Christendome, with the true waight and valuation of them in currant money English, &c.
  • Progression both Arithmeticall and Geome­tricall, with diuers sundrie questions tou­ching the same.
  • The Golden Rule of thrée: and the Backer Rule of thrée: with diuers questions there­vnto belonging, newly added & augmēted.
  • The double Rule of Proportion.
  • The Rule of thrée composed of 5 numbers.
  • The Rule of Felowship, both with time, and without time.
  • Vnto all these are added their proofes.

The second Dialogue containeth

  • The first 5 kindes of Arithmetike wroughte by Counters.
  • The common kindes of casting of accomptes after the Merchants fashiō, & Auditors also.
  • Numbring by the hande newly added.
The Contents of the second parte, touching Fractions.
  • What a Fraction is.
  • Numeration in Fractiōs.
  • The order of working fractions. with diuers fami­liar questiōs pro­poned for ye perfit vnderstanding, & proof of ech of thē.
  • Multiplication.
  • Diuision.
  • Reduction of diuers fractions into one de­nomination in 3 varieties.
    • Fractions of Fractions.
    • Improper Fractions.
    • Fractions to the smallest de­nomination, with easie rules how to conuert thē thervnto.
    • Fractions in other partes of things, with a Table demō ­stratiue of their proportiōs.
    • Fraction, and how it may bée turned into any other Fracti­on, or into what Denomina­tion you liste.
  • [Page]Againe of
    • Multiplication
    • Duplation
    • Diuision
    • Mediation
    • Addition
    • Subtraction.
  • The Golden Rule with diuers questions, and their proofes.
  • The Backer Rule.
  • A question of Loane.
  • The statute of Assise of Breade and Ale recog­nised and applied to this time, with newe tables therevnto annexed.
  • The Statute of Measuring of ground, with a table thereof faithfully calculated and cor­rected.
  • Questions of Societie, with the reason of the Rules and proofes of their workes.
  • To finde thrée numbers in any proportion.
  • The Rule of Alligation, with diuers questi­ons and the proofes of their workes, with many varieties of such solutions.
  • The rule of Falshode, or false Position, with diuers questions, and their proofes.

The Contents of the third Addition to this Booke.

  • The first Chapter entreteth of Rules of Bre­uity and Practise, after a briefer Methode than euer yet was published in the English tong.
  • The second Chapter treateth of ye briefer Re­duction of diuers Measures, as Elles, Yeards, Braces, &c. by Rules of Practise.
  • The third Chapter entreateth of the Rule of thrée in Broken numbers after the trade of Merchaunts, somthing differing from Ma­ster Records order, which is comprehended in 3 Rules.
  • The fourth Chapiter entreateth of Losse and Gaine in the trade of Merchandize.
  • The fifth Chapter entreateth of Losse & Gain in the trade of Merchandize vppon time, &c. with necessarie questions therein wrought by the double Rule of thrée, or the Rule of 3 composed.
  • The sixth Chapter entreateth of Rules of pay­ment, and of the necessariest Rules that ap­pertaineth to buying and selling, &c.
  • The seauenth Chapter entreateth of Buying [Page] and Selling in the Trade of Merchandize, wherein is taken part ready mony, and di­uers dayes of payments giuen for the rest, and what is won or loste in the 100 lb for­bearance for 12 moneths, &c.
  • The eight Chapter entreateth of Tares and alowances in the trade of Merchandize sold by waight, and of their Losses and Gaines therein, &c.
  • The ninth Chapter entreteth of Lengths and Breadths of Arras, and other Clothes, with diuers questions incident therevnto.
  • The tenth Chapter entreateth of reducing of Pawnes of Geanes into English yeards.
  • The eleauenth Chapter entreateth of Rules of Loane and Interest with diuers questi­ons incident therevnto.
  • The twelfth Chapiter entreateth of the ma­king of Factors.
  • The thirtéenth Chapiter entreateth of Rules of Barter or Exchange of Merchandize, wherein is taken parte ware, & part readie money with their proofes, and diuers other necessarie questions therevnto belonging.
  • The fourtéenth Chapter entreateth of exchan­ging of mony from one place to an other, with diuers necessarie questions incident [Page] therevnto.
  • The fiftéeeth Chapter entreateth of sixe sun­drie formes of practise for the Reduction of English, Flemish, and French money, and howe eche of them may easily be broughte to others money sterling.
  • The sixteenth Chapter containeth a brief note of the ordinarie Coines of moste places of Christendome for traffique, and the man­ner of their exchaunging from one Citie or towne to an other, which knowen the Ita­lians call Pary: whereby they finde the gaine or losse vpon the Exchange.
  • The seauentéenth Chapiter containeth also a Declaration of ye diuersitie of the waights and measures of moste places of Christen­dome for traffique, at the ende wherof are two Tables, the one for waight, and the o­ther for measure, proportionated to an e­qualitie vnto our Englishe measure and waight, wherby the ingenious practitioner may easily reduce the waight and measure of eche Countrey into other.
  • The eightéenth Chapiter entreateth of diuers Sportes and Pastimes, done by Number.
FINIS.

A Collection of suche Tables as are contai­ned in this Treatise.

  • A large Table of Numeration.
  • A Table of Multiplication.
  • A Table of Diuision.
  • A Table of the money currant in this Realm when the Author first published this booke.
  • A Table of all the vsuall siluer Coines nowe currant in this Realm, newly added.
  • A Table of all the golde Coines in this realm with all the most vsuall Golde Coines tho­roughout Christendome, with their seue­rall waights of Pence and Graines, and what they are worth in currant mony En­glishe.
  • Certaine Tables or Notes of the contentes of Ale, Béere, Wine, Butter, Sope, Salmō, Eeles, &c. both what suche vessels ought to containe by the Statute, and what those vesselles emptie ought to wey.
  • A Table of the quantitie of drie measures, as Peckes, Bushels, Quarters, Weyes, &c.
  • A Table of the proportion of measure, tou­ching Lengths or breadths: to wit, from the inche to the foote, and so to the yeard, the [Page] Ell with their partes: the perch, the rod- the furlong, the myle, &c.
  • A Table made by Progression Arithmetical, whyche contayneth a double table of Mul­tiplication.
  • A Table of the Arte of Numbring by the hande.
  • A Table or demonstration of a figure or mea­sure for the perfect vnderstanding of Fra­ctions of Fractions.
  • A Table of the contents of the Statute for the assise of the waight of bread. From 1 s the quarter to 20 s faithfully corrected, and a­mended.
  • A necessarie Table of the Statute of measu­ring of grounde, vpon the breadth giuen, what length it ought to containe: faithful­ly corrected according to the equitie of the statute: wherein the Author declareth how necessarie this worthie Art of Arithmetike is vnto Gentlemen Students of the lawe, and suche other as are desirous of infallible trueth.
  • Briefe Tables of the ready reducing of Eng­lishe, French, and Flemish money, eache into others common currant monies.
  • A briefe Table or collection of the common & [Page] vsuall monies of moste places of Christen­dome for traffique, the maner of their pay­mentes or exchaunging from one Citie or towne, to an other: right necessarie for Merchants, and other Occupiers, Trauel­uellers, &c.
  • Tables of the Waightes, Measures, and Cu­stomes of moste places of Europe for traffi­que.
  • 2 Tables, the one for waight, the other for measure, reduced to an equalitie, vnto our Measures and waight here at London, with the helpe of whiche 2 Tables, and the aide of the rule of 3, the ingenious may easilye reduce our measure to the perfect valuation of other Countries measure or waight, and likewise theirs to ours.
  • Lastly, a Table demonstrating the true solu­tion of thrée diuers things hidden of 3 seue­rall persons in pastime.

A dialogue betwene THE MAYSTER and the Scholer, teaching the Arte and vse of Arithmetike with penne.

THE SCHOLER SPEAKETH.

SYR, SVCH is your authoritie in myne estimation, yt I am content to con­sent to your saying, and to receyue it as truthe, thoughe I sée none other reason that doth leade me there vnto: wheras else in mine owne conceite it appeareth but vaine, to bestowe any time priuately in learning of that thing, that euery childe maye and doeth learne at all times and houres, when he doeth anye thyng hymselfe alone, and [Page] much more when he talketh or reasoneth wt other.

Maister.

Lo this is the fashion and chance of all them that séeke to defende their blynde ignoraunce: that when they thinke they haue made strong reason for themselfe, than haue they proued quite cōtrary. For if nūbring be so cōmon (as you grant it to be) that no man can do any thing alone, and much lesse talke or bargayne with other, but he shall stil haue to do with Number: this proueth not Num­ber to be contemptible and vile, but rather right excellent and of high reputation, sith it is the grounde of all mens affayres, so that without it no tale can be tolde, no commu­nication wythout it can be long continued, no bargayning without it can duely bée en­ded, or no busynesse that man hathe, iustlye completed. These commodities (if there wer none other) are sufficiente to approue the worthynesse of Number. But there are o­ther vnnumerable farre passing all these, whyche declare Number to excéede al praise. Wherefore, in all great workes are Clerkes so muche desired? Wherefore are Audi­tours so richely fedde? What causeth Geo­metrians so highlye to be enhaunced? Why [Page] are Astronomers so greately aduaunced? Bycause that by Number suche things they doe finde, whiche else shoulde far excel mans minde.

Scholer.

Verilye Syr if it be so, that these men, by numbring their cunning do at­taine, at whose great workes most men doe wonder, then I see well I was much decey­ued, and numbring is a more cunning thing then I toke it to be.

Maister.

If Number were so vile a thing as you did estéeme it, then néede it not to bée vsed so muche in mennes communication. Exclude Number and aunsweare to thys question. Howe manye yeares olde are you?

Scholer.

Mum.

Maister.

Howe manye dayes in a wéeke? howe many wéekes in a yeare? What lands hath your father? Howe manye men doth hée kéepe? How long is it sith you came frō hym to me?

Scholer.

Mum.

Maister.

So that if Number want, you an­sweare all by Mummes: How many myle to London?

Schole.

A pooke ful of Plummes.

Maister.
[Page]

Why, thus you may sée, what rule Number beareth, and that if Number be lacking, it maketh men dumbe, so that to moste questions, they muste aunswere Mum.

Scholer.

This is the cause sir, that I iudged it so vile, bycause it is so common in talking euery while: For plentie is not deintie, as the common saying is.

Maister.

No, nor Store is no sore: perceiue you this? The more common that a thing is, being néedefully required, the better is the thyng, and the more to be desired. But in Numbring as some of it is light and playn, so the most parte is difficulte, and not easye to attaine. The easyer parte serueth al men in commune, and the other parte requireth some learning. Wherefore as without Nū ­bring a man can doe almoste nothing, so wyth the helpe of it, you maye attaine to all things.

Sc.

Yea sir? Why? then it wer best to learn the Art of Numbring firste of all other lear­ning, and then a man neede learn no more, if all other come with it.

Maister.

Nay not so: but if it be firste lear­ned, then shall a manne be able (I meane) [Page] to learne, perceyue, and attayne to other sciences, whiche without it, he shoulde neuer get.

Scholer.

I perceyue by your former words, that Astronomie and Geometrie de­pende muche of the helpe of Numbring, but that other Sciences, as Musicke, Phi­sicke, Lawe, and Grammer and such like, haue any helpe of Arithmetike, I perceyue not.

Maister.

I maye perceyue youre greate Clerkelinesse by the ordering of your Sci­ences: but I wil let that passe now, bycause it toucheth not the matter that I entend, and I wyll shewe you howe Arithmetike doeth profit in all these, somewhat grossely, accor­ding to your small vnderstanding, omitting other reasons more substantial.

Fyrste (as you recken them) Musicke hath not only greate healpe of Arithmetike, but is made, and hath his perfectnesse of it: for all Musicke standeth by Number & Pro­portion.

And in Phisicke, beside the calculation of Criticall dayes, with other things whi­che I omitte, howe can anye manne iudge the Pulse rightlye, that is ignoraunte of the [Page] proportion of Numbers?

And as for the Lawe, it is playne, that the man that is ignorant of Arithmetike, is nei­ther méete to be a Iudge, neyther an Aduo­cate, nor yet a Proctour. For howe can hée wel vnderstande another mannes cause ap­pertayning to distribution of goods, or other dettes, or of summes of money, if he bée ignorante of Arithmetike? This oftentimes causeth righte to be hindered, when the Iudge either deliteth not to heare of a mat­ter that he peceyueth not, or cannot Iudge it for lacke of vnderstanding: This commeth by the ignoraunce of Arithme­ti [...]e.

Nowe as for Grammer, mée thinketh you shoulde not doubte in what it néedeth number, sith you haue learned that Nounes of al sorts, Pronouns, Verbs, & Participles, are distinct diuersly by Numbers: besides the varietie of Nounes of Numbre, and Ad­uerbs. And if you take away Number from Grammer, then is all the quantitie of Syl­lables loste. And manye other wayes dothe Number helpe Grammer. Whereby were al kindes of meters found and made? Was it not by Number?

[Page]But howe néedefull Arithmetike is to all parts of Philosophie, they may soone sée, that doe reade eyther Aristotle, Plato, or anye o­ther Philosophers writing. For all theyr examples almoste, and their probations, de­pende of Arithmetike. It is the saying of A­ristotle, that he that is ignorante of Arith­metike is méete for no science. And Plato his Mayster wrote a like sentence ouer hys Schoolehouse dore. Let none enter in hy­ther (quoth he) that is ignorant of Geome­trie. Séeyng he woulde haue al his Scho­lers experte in Geometrie, much rather he woulds the same in Arithmetike, wythoute whyche Geometrie cannot stande.

And howe needefull Arithmeti [...]e is to Di­uinitie, it appeareth, seeing so many Doctors gather so greate mysteries out of Number, and so muche doe write of it. And if I should goe about to write all the commodities of A­rithmetike in ciuil actes, as in gouernaunce of common weales in time of peace, and in due prouision and order of armyes in time of warre: For numbring of the ho [...] ̄e, summing of their wages, prouisions of victualles, ve­wing of Artillerie, wyth other armoure: [Page] Beside the cunningest pointe of all, for ca­sting of ground, for encamping of men, with such other like. And howe manye wayes al­so Arithmetike is conducible for all priuate weales, of Lordes and all possessioners, of marchauntes, and all other occupyers, and generallye, for all estates of men, besides Auditours, treasorers, receyuers, stewards, bayliffes, and suche lyke, whose offices without Arithmetike is nothing. If I should (I saye) particularlye repeate all suche com­modities of this noble Science of Arithme­tike, it were ynoughe to make a verye great booke.

Scholer.

No, no sir, you shall not néede: For I doubt not, but this that you haue said, were ynoughe to perswade anye manne to thinke this Arte to be righte excellent and good, and so necessarie for man, that (as I thinke nowe) so muche as a man lacketh of it, so muche he lacketh of his sense and witte.

Maister.

What? are you so farre chaun­ged since, by hearing the fewe commodities in generall? By likelihode you woulde be far chaunged, if you knew all the commodi­ties particular.

Scholer.
[Page]

I beséeche you sir, reserue those commodities that rest yet behynd, vnto their place more conuenient. And if ye will be so good as to vtter at thys tyme thys excellente treasure, so that I maye bée somewhat enri­ched thereby, and if euer I shall be able, I wil requite your paine.

Mayster,

I am very glad of your requeste, and I will doe it spéedely, sith that to learne it you be so ready.

Scholer.

And I to youre authoritie my witte doe subdue, whatsoever you say, I take it for true.

Mayster.

That is too muche, and méete for no man to be beléeued in all things, without shewing of reason. Thoughe I mighte of my Scholler some credence require, yet except I shew reason, I do it not desire. But now sith you are so earnestly set this Arte to attaine, beste it is to omitte no time, least some other passion, coole this greate heate, and then you leaue off before you sée the ende.

Scholer.

Thoughe manye there be so vn­constant of mind, that flitter and turne with euerye winde, whyche often beginne, and neuer come to the ende, I am none of their sorte, as I truste you partelye knowe. [Page] For by my good will what I ons beginne till I haue it fully ended I woulde neuer blin

Mayster.

So haue I Founde you hytherto in deede and I truste you will increase ra­ther than go backe. For better it were ne­uer to assaye, than to shrinke and flée in the middle way. But I trust you wil not so do, therefore tel me briefly. What call you the science that you desiere so greatly?

Scholer

Why sir? you knowe.

Mayster.

That maketh no matter. I woulde heare whether you knowe, and ther­fore I aske you. For, greate rebuke it were to haue studied a Science, and yet cannot tel howe it is named,

Scholer.

Some call it Arsmetrik, and some Augrime.

Maister.

And what dothe those names be­token?

Scholer.

That if it please you, of you wold I learne.

Maister.

Bothe names are coruptly writ­ten, Arsmetrike for Arithmetik, as the Gréekes call it, & Augrim for Algorisme, as the Arabians sound it, whiche bothe betoken the science of Numbring. For Arithmos in [Page] Gréeke, is called number: and of it commeth Arithmetike, the Art of Numbring. So that Arithmetike is a science or arte teaching the maner and vse of Numbring. This Art may be wrought diuersly, with Penne or wyth Counters. But I wil first shew you the wor­king wyth the Penne, and then the other in order.

Scholer.

This I wil remember. But how many thinges are to be learned, to attayne this Arte fullye?

Maister.

There are reckened commonlye seauen partes or workes of it.

Numeration, Addition, Subtraction, Mul­tiplication Diuision, Progression, and extra­ction of rootes: to these some men adde Du­plation, Triplation, and Mediation. But as for these laste thrée, they are contained vnder the other seauen. For Duplation and Tri­plation, are contained vnder Multiplication, as it shall appeare in their place. And Media­tion is contained vnder Diuision, as I wyl declare in his place also.

Scholer.

Yet then there remaine the firste seauen kindes of Numbring.

Maister.

So there dothe: Howbeit, if I shall speake exactelye of partes of Num­bring [Page] I muste make but fiue of them: For Progression is a compound operation of Ad­dition, Multiplication and Diuision. And so is the extraction of roots. But it is no harme to name them as kindes seuerall, séeing they appéere to haue some seueral workīg. For it forceth not so much to contēd for the number of them, as for the due knowledge and practi­sing of them.

Scholer.

Then you wil, that I shall name them as seauen kindes distinct. But nowe I desyre you to instructe me in the vse of ech of them.

Mayster.

So will I, but it muste be done in order: for you maye not learne the last as soone as the firste, but you must learne them in that order, as I did rehearse them, if you wyll learne them spéedily and well.

Scholer,

Euen as you please. Then to be­gin, Numeration is the firste in order: what shall I doe with it?

Maister.

Firste you muste know what the thing is, and then after learne the vse of the same.

NVMERATION.

NVMERATION is that A­rithmeticall skill, whereby we may duely value, expresse and reade anye number or summe propounded: or else in apte fi­gures and places, set down any number kno­wen or named.

Scholer.

Why? then me thinketh you put a difference vetwéene the value and the Fy­gures?

Mayster.

Yea so doe I: For the valewe is one thing, and the figures are an other thing: and that commeth partely by the diuersity of figures, but chieflye of the places wherein they be set.

Scholer.

Then I muste knowe there thrée thinges: the Value, the Figure, and the Place.

Mayster.

Euen so: but yet adde Order to them as the fourth. And firste marke, that there are but tenne figures, that are vsed in Arithmetike: and of those tenne, one doth sig­nifie nothing, whiche is made like an 0, and is called priuately a Cyphre, thoughe all the [Page] other sometime he likewise named. The o­ther nine are called Signifying figures, and be thus figured.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 And this is their value. j.ij.iij.iiij.v.vj.vij.viij.ix.

But here muste you marke, that euery Fi­gure hathe two values: One alwayes cer­tain that it signifieth properly, which it hath of his forme: and the other vncertaine, which he taketh of his place.

A Place is called the seate or roome that a Figure standeth in. And looke howe manye Figures are written in one summe, so ma­nye places hathe that whole number. And the firste place muste bée called that that is nexte to the ryghte hande, and so recko­ning by order towardes the lefte hande, so that that place is laste, that is nexte to the lefte hande. As for example: If there stoode before you sixe men in a rowe, side by side, and you shoulde tell them as they stand in order, beginning wyth the man that were nexte to youre righte hande: then hée that were nexte hym shoulde bée called the se­conde, and so foorthe to the farthest from [Page] your ryghte hande, whyche is the sixt and the laste.

Scholer.

Syr, I perceiue you well: so might I recken letters or anye other thing. As if I shoulde write eight letters after this order, a, b, c, d, e, f, g, h, now muste I say h, is the first g the ij, f the iij, e the iiij, d the v, c the vj, b the vij, and a the viij.

Maister.

That is wel done. And after the same sort vse hereafter, that what I declare by one example, doe you expresse by an other, and so I shall perceyue whether you vnder­stande it or no. And so passe ouer nothing, till you perceiue it well, and be experte therein.

Scholer.

Sir, I pray you howe manye of these places be there in all?

Maister.

There is no certaine number of them, but they are sometimes more and som­times fewer, according to the summe that is expressed. For so many as the figures are, so many are the places: and the laste place is so called, not bycause it is laste of all other, but it is the laste of that present summe, and it maye bée the middle place in an other summe.

Scholer.

Me séemeth I perceiue this verye well, as touchyng the order of reckoning [Page] of the places: But as for the number of them, you say there is no certaintie. Nowe there resteth to declare the value of the figures by diuersity of places, which you called, the Va­lue vncertaine.

Maister.

But firste let me heare whether you knowe perfectly the certaine value.

Scholer.

Yes sir, as you wrote them, so I marked them.

Maister.

Howe write you then fiue?

Scholer.

By this figure 5.

Maister.

And howe sixe?

Scholer.

Thus, 6.

Maister.

Write these thrée numbers eache by it selfe as I speake them .vij.iiij.iij.

Scholer.

7.4.3.

Maister.

How write you these foure other, ij, j, ix, viij?

Scholer.

Thus (I trow,) 2, 1, 6, 8.

Maister.

Nay, there you misse: Looke on mine example againe.

Scholer.

Sir, truth it is, I was too blame, I tooke 6 for 9, but I will be warer héreaf­ter.

Mayster.

Nowe then take héede, these cer­taine valewes euerye figure representeth, when it is alone written withoute other Fy­gures [Page] ioyned to him. And also when it is in the firste place, though manye other doe fol­lowe: as for example: This figure 9 is ix. standing now alone.

Scholer.

Howe? is he alone and standeth in the middle of so many letters?

Maister.

The letters are none of hys fel­lowes. For if you were in Fraunce in the middle of a M. Frenche men, if there were no English man with you, you woulde rec­ken your selfe to be alone.

Scholer,

So it is. Then 9 without more figures of Arithmetike, betokeneth ix, what­soeuer other letters be aboute it.

Maister.

Euen so, and so dothe it, if it be in the firste place ioyned with other, how many soeuer do followe, as in this example, 3679. you sée 9 in the firste place, and doth betoken nine, as if he were alone.

Scholer.

I perceiue that. And dothe not 7 that standeth in the seconde place, betoke vij? and 6 in the third place, betoken vj? And so 3 in the fourth place, betoken thrée?

Maister.

Their places be as you haue said, but their valewes are not so. For as in the firste place, euerye figure betokeneth hys owne value certaine onelye, so in the second [Page] place euery figure betokeneth hys owne va­lew certaine ten times: as in the example, 7 in the seconde place is seuen times x, that is, lxx. And in the third place, euery figure beto­keneth his owne valewe a hundreth times, so that 6 in that place betokneth vj.C. And in the fourth place, euery figure betokeneth his owne value a M. tymes, as in the foresaid number 3. in the fourth place, standeth for [...]. M. And in the fi [...]th place, euerye figure stan­deth for his owne valewe x.M. times. And in the vj place a C.M. times. And in ye v [...]. place a M.M. times: And in ye viij. place x.M.M. so yt euerye place excéedeth the former x. times.

Scholer.

As thus: if I make th [...]s Number at al aduentures, 9 [...]359 [...]84, heere are eyght places. In the first place is 4, and betokeneth but foure: in the second place is 8, and betok­neth x. times 8, that is, 80: In the third place is 6, and betokeneth sixe hundreth: In the 4. fourth place 9 is nine thousand. And [...] in the fifth place is x.M. times 5, that is, fiftie M. So [...] in the sixte place, is a C.M. times [...], that is CCC.M. Them in the seuēth place, a M.M. And 9 in the eighte place tenne thousande thousande times 9, that is xc.M.M. But nowe I can not easily nor quicklye [Page] reade it in order.

Mayster,

That shall you practise by thys meanes. First putte a pric [...]e ouer the fourth figure, and so ouer the seauenth. And (if you haue so many) ouer the tenth, thirtéenth, six­teenth, and so forth, still leauing two figures betwéene eche two prickes. And those twoo roomes between ye pricks, are called ternaries.

Then begin at the last pricke, and see how many figures are betwéene him and the end, which can not passe thrée, reconing hymselfe for one: then pronounce them as if they were written alone from the reste, and adde at the end of theyr valewe so many times thousand as your number hath prickes.

After that come to the nexte thrée figures, and sounde them as if they were aparte from the rest, and adde to their valewe so manye tunes thousandes, and there are prickes bée­twene them, and the first place of your whole number. And so do by euery other three Fi­gures following, if you haue moe. As in ex­ample, 91359684. this was your number.

Put a pricke ouer [...] in the fourth place, and ouer in the seauenth place, and then no more, (for your places come not to tenne) as thus: 91359684.

[Page]Nowe go to the last pricke ouer 1, and take it and the figure 9 that foloweth it, and value them alone.

Scholer.

91 that is xcj.

Maister.

So is it: but then adde for the number of your prickes twice M.

Scholer.

That is xcj, thousande thousande.

Maister.

So is it. Then take the thrée o­ther figures from one to the next pricke, and value them.

Scholer.

359. that is CCC.lix.

Maister.

Now adde for the one pricke▪ that is betwéene them and the firste place, M.

Scholer.

CCC.lix. thousande.

Maister.

Then come to the other thrée f [...] ­gures that remaine.

Scholer.

684. that is, vj.C.lxxxiiii.

Maister.

Nowe haue you valued all. And at the end of the laste number you shall adde nothing, bicause there remayneth no pricke nor number after it: yet proue in an other number, as thus, 2 3 0 8 6 4 0 8 9 10 5 3 4 0.

Scholer.

2 3 0 8 6 4 0 8 9 1 0 5 3 4 0. I haue pricked them as you taught me: but I am in doubt, whether I haue done well or no, by­cause of the Cyphars: for I remember, you tolde me that they doe signifie nothing, and [Page] therefore I doubte whether I shoulde recken them for a figure in setting of the pricks: and againe, I know not wherefore they serue.

Maister.

That wil I tel you now. Indéede they are of no value themselues, but they serue to make vppe number of places, and so maketh the figure following them to bée in a further place, and therefore to signify the more value: as in this example 90, the Ciphre is of no value, but yet he occupieth the fyrste place, and causeth 9 to be in the se­conde place, and so to signifie tenne times 9, that is, xc, so that two Ciphres thrusteth the figure following them, into the thirde place, and so forth.

Scholer.

Then I perceiue in the example aboue I haue pricked wel ynough: for tho gh that Ciphre that is pricked signifie nothing, yet must he haue the pricke, bicause he came in the xiij place. Then wil I proue to num­ber that sūme. First there is 230 M.M.M.M. and then foloweth 864 M.M.M. And what shall I nowe doe? There is a Cyphre in the third place, and no figure after him, but they that haue reckened.

Maister.

He didde serue for them that you haue alreadye reckened, to make them in a [Page] place further than they shoulde be if he were away: and therefore nowe you shall let him goe. And so doe alwayes when he occupieth that place next before any pricke, whiche is the laste of that Ternarie, and a Cyphre in the laste place doth nothing.

Scholer.

Then shal I saye but 89 M.M.

Maister.

So, but goe forth.

Scholer.

105 thousande. Nowe are all my prickes spent, and yet remaine 340, so that I muste value them CCC.xl. only.

Mayster.

Nowe can you recken after thys sorte: and remember, that euery such roume so parted, is called a Ternarie or Trinitie.

Some doe parte such great numbers with letters, after this manner.

2c 3b 0a 8b 6c 4a 0b 8c 9a 1b 0c 5a 3b 4c 0a. In whyche example yée maye sée, that a supplyeth the roume of your pricke. And some doe parte the numbers with lines after this forme. [...]. where you sée as many lines as you made prickes, and is one intente, saue that the lines doe more plainely parte euery thrée figures, according as they shoulde be valewed vnder one Deno­mination.

Scholer.
[Page]

Yea sir, but if you shoulde shewe me a number so parted, I shoulde take it for many numbers, and not for one.

Maister

So might you doe, not knowing my meaning. But what if I didde set forth the number without lines, and your selfe (for the ease of reckning) did so part it with lines, woulde you forget wherefore ye did it, and then take them for many numbers?

Scholer.

No I trowe not, but yet I doubte.

Mayster.

Thou vse that that you like best, for all the thrée wayes are to one intent, saue (as I said) that the lines vs more plainely di­stinct the denominations.

Scholer.

What call you Denominations?

Maister.

It is the laste value or name ad­ded to any summe. As when I saye: CC.xxii. pounds: pounds is the Denomination. And likewise in saying: as men, men is the Denomination, and so of other. But in this place (that I spake of before) the laste number of euery Ternarie, is the Deno­mination of it. As of the first Ternarie, the denomination is vnites, and of the seconde. Ternarie, the Denomination is thou­sandes: and of the thirde Ternarie, thousand [Page] thousandes, or millions: of the iiij. thousande thousand thousandes, or thousande Milli­ons: and soforth.

Scholer.

And what shall I call the value of the iij. figures that maye bée pronounced before the Denominators? as in saying: 203 000000, that is CCiij. millions. I perceyue by youre wordes, that millions is the De­nomination: but what shal I call the CCiij. ioyned before the Millions?

Maister.

That is called the Numerator or valewer, and the whole summe that resul­teth of them bothe, is called the Summe, va­lue or number.

Scholer.

Nowe is there anye thing else to be learned in Numeration? or else haue I learned it sully?

Maister.

I might here shew you who were the firste inuentors of this Arte, and the rea­sons of all these things that I haue taughte you, but that wil I reserue till ye haue lear­ned ouer all the practise of this Arte, leaste I shoulde trouble your witte, with ouer many things at the firste.

But yet this muste you marke, that there are thrée kindes of number: one called Di­gits, an other articles, and the thirde mixte [Page] numbers.

A Digit is any number vnder 10, as this: 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9.

And 10 with al other that maye be diuided into tenne parts iust, and nothing remaine, are called Articles: suche are 10, 20, 30, 40, 50, &c. 100, 200, &c. 1000. &c.

And that number is called mixt, that con­taineth Articles, or at the leaste one article, and a digit: as 12, 16, 19, 21, 38, 107, 1005. and so forth. And for the more ease of vnderstan­ding and remembraunce marke this: The diget number is neuer written wyth more than one figure, but the article and the mixt number are euer wrytten wyth more than one figure. And thus they differ, that the ar­ticle hathe euermore this Cyphre c, in the firste place: and the mixte number hathe e­uer there some Diget.

Scholer.

By these laste wordes, I perceiue it muche better than I did before, and now (I thinke) I wil neuer misse to knowe those thrée asunder.

Maister.

If you remember nowe all that I haue sayde, you haue learned sufficientlye this firste kinde of Arithmetike, called Nu­meration, Howbeit, I will yet exhorte you [Page] nowe, to remember bothe this that I haue saide, and all that I shall saye, and to exer­cise your selfe in the practise of it: For Rules without practise, are but a light knowledge: and practise it is, that maketh menne perfect and prompt in all things.

And as you haue learned to gather and ex­presse the value of a summe propounded, and set downe before you: so muste you practise to marke note, or write downe, with apte fi­gures, and in due places, any number, onely named or recited to you, or of your selfe ima­gined: as for a proofe: How note you, or write downe this summe, fiue thousande, two hun­dreth, fiftie and seuen.

Scholer.

This troubleth me nowe, whe­ther I shoulde beginne at the firste figure or at the last. For reason (me thinketh) should cause me to beginnne at the firste: and yet if I write it as you speake it, I muste beginne at the laste.

Maister.

When you knowe youre places perfectly, you maye beginne where you list. But the more ease for your hande is to begin with the laste, that is to say, as I did speake them. Yet for the more suretie, a while you maye beginne with the firste, repeating my [Page] wordes backewarde thus: Seauen, Fiftie, two hundreth, fiue thousande: or else soun­ding them all by their diget or valewer, as thus: seauen, fiue, two, fiue: for that way is easiest. But then muste you looke wel, whe­ther there be any Ciphre in your summe that he may be sette in his place. As if youre last valewer of youre summe (as you speake it) be aboue 9, then is there a Cyphre in the first place. And if it be a hundred or aboue, then is there two Cyphres one in the first place, & an other in the seconde, and so forth.

But bicause this thing is such that cannot be set forth without manye wordes, I think beste here nowe at the ende of Numeration to adde a table easie and ready for the first ex­ercise of it.

Lo, this is the Table. [Page]

The lefte side or hande. The names of the digits, valewes certaine, or valewers.
The de­nominatours of the place or valewe vncertainNine.Eyght.Seuen.Sixe.Fiue.Foure.Thrée.Twoo.One.Ciphre.The or­der of the places.
Vnites.9876543210First.
Tennes.9876543210Second.
Hundreds.9876543210Third.
Thousandes.9876543210Fourth.
x. Thousandes.9876543210Fifte.
C. of thousādes.9876543210Sixte.
Millions.9876543210Seuenth.
x. of millions.9876543210Eighth.
C. of millions.9876543210Ninth.
M. of millions.9876543210Tenth
x. M. of millīos.9876543210Eleuenth.

The [...]

This Table (as you may sée) hathe eleuen places, and in eche of them are sette al the di­gites, whose certaine value is written in the right hande of the Table, & the value vncer­taine [Page] on the left hande. So that by this table you may learne bothe howe to expresse anye number that you liste, (if that it excéede not eleauen places) that is to say, lxxxx. thousand Millions, and so maye you by the helpe of it, value all summes proposed vnder the sayde number.

For example: take the summe that I pro­posed before, which was fiue thousand, two hundred, fiftie and seauen. And if you wil ex­presse it, take the firste number (as I speake it) which is fiue M. whose valuer or certaine value is v. and his vncertaine value or de­nomination is M. First you shall séeke at the right hand of the valuer v. Then séeke along vnder the tytle of Denomination towarde the left hande, til you find thousands, and vn­der it right at the soote of the Table, is the number of the place, that is the fourthe, wherein you muste write youre diget or va­luer fiue.

Afterwarde come to the seconde parte of the number, two hundred, whose valuer is 2, and his denomination C. Séeke two at the right hande of the Table, and goe along vnder the denominations towarde the lefte hande, til you come vnder C: then looke to [Page] the table, and there shall you sée the number of the place, that is to say, thrée, wherein you muste set your diget 2.

Then doe so by your other two numbers that remaine, and you shall finde fiue in the second place for your fiftie, and 7 in the first place for your seauen. And thus maye you doe with other numbers.

Scholer.

Maister I thanke you hartilye. I perceiue you séeke to instruct me most plain­ly and brieflye, and not to hide youre know­ledge with subtile wordes as many doe. For this rule is so plaine, that I can desire it no plainer. And though it seeme somwhat long, yet I perceiue it to be a sure way.

Maister.

So is it, and thoughe it be long, yet it is neyther too long, neyther too plaine for yong learners that lacke practise: for this table is in steade of a teacher, to them that lacke one. But nowe I truste I haue said y­nough of Numeration: which after you haue wel practised, then may you learne forth.

Scholer.

Yet I praye you in one thing to tel me your iudgement. Why do men recken the order of the places backewarde, from the right hand to the lefte?

Maister.

In that thing all men doe agrée, [Page] that the Chaldeyes, which first inuented this Arte did set these figures as they set all their letters: for they wryte backewarde as you terme it, and so do they reade. And that may appeare in all Hebrue, Chaldeye, and Ara­bike bookes, for they bée not only written frō the right hande to the lefte, and so muste bée read, but also the right end of the booke is the beginning of it: whereas the Gréekes La­tines, and all nations of Europe, do write & reade from the left hande towarde the right: And all their bookes begin at the left side.

Scholer.

That reason doth satisfie me.

Maister.

It neyther sact [...]fieth mée, neyther lyketh me well, bycause I sée that the Chal­deys and Hebrues doe not so vse their owne numbers, as at another tyme I will declare. But this playne reason may best satisfie you presently: That séeing in pronouncing of numbers we kéep the order of our owne rea­ding, from the lefte hande to the right: And againe, we doe euer name the greater num­bers before ye smaller: it was reason, that the lesser places conteyning the lesser numbers, should be set on the right hand, and the grea­ter places conteining the greater numbers, to procéede toward the left hande.

Scholer.
[Page]

This reason is to me so plaine, that it séemeth now againste reason to make a doubte of that order. So that nowe for Numeration I am satisfied: so that onelye practise shal make me fully ready and expert in it. And in the meane season, I desire to learne the other kindes of Arithmetike.

Maister.

That is well saide: but what should you next learne can you tel?

Scholer.

I remember you said that Addi­tion was nexte.

Maister.

Euen so, and what that is muste you firste knowe,

ADDITION.

ADditiō is the gathering to­gither and bringing of twoo numbers or more into one totall summe: as if I haue 160 Bookes in the Latyne tong, and 136 in the Gréeke tongue, and would know how many they be in all, I muste write these two numbers one ouer an other, writing the greatest number highest, so that the first figure of the one, bée vnder the firste figure of the other. And the [Page] seconde vnder the seconde, and so forth in or­der.

When you haue so done, draw vnder them a right line, then wil they stand thus. [...] Nowe beginne at the firste places, toward the right hande alwayes, and putte togither the two first figures of those two numbers, and looke what commeth of them, write vnder them, right vn­der [...] the line. As in saying, 6 and 0, is 6. Write 6 vnder 6: as thus.

And then go to the second figures, [...] and doe likewise: as in saying, 3 and 6 is 9: write 9 vnder 6 and 3, as here you sée.

And like wise do you with the fi­gures [...] that be in the third place, say­ing: 1 and 1 be 2: write [...] vnder thē, and then will your whole summe appeare thus.

So that now you sée, that 160, and 136 doe make in all, 296.

Scholer.

What? this is very easie to doe, me thinketh I can do it euen sith.

There came thorough Cheapeside twoo droues of cattell: in the first was 848 shéepe, and in the second was 186 other beastes.

[Page]Those two summes I muste [...] write as you taughte me, thus.

Then if I put the two first fi­gures [...] togither, saying: 6 and 8 they make 14. That muste I write vnder 6 and 8, thus.

Mayster.

Not so, and here are you twice deceiued. First, in going about to adde togy­ther two summes of sundrie things, whiche you ought not to doe, excepte you séeke onelis the number of them, & care not for the things. For the summe that should resulte of that ad­dition, should be a summe neither of shéepe, nor other beastes, but a confused summe of both. Howbeit sometimes yée shal haue sum­mes of diuers denominations to be added, of which I will tell you anone: but first I will shew you, where you were deceiued in an o­ther pointe, and that was in writing 14, (which came of 6 and 8) vnder 6 and 8, which is vnpossible. For, howe can twoo figures of twoo places be written vnder one figure, and one place?

Scholer.

Truth it is: but yet I did so vn­derstand you.

Mayster.

I saide indéede, that you shoulde write that vnder them, that did resulte of thē [Page] both togither: which saying is alwayes true, if that summe do not excéede a Digit. But if it be a mixte number, then muste you write the Digit of it vnder your figures, as I haue said before: but and if it be an Article, then write 0 vnder them, and in both sortes you shall kepe the article in your mind. And ther­fore when you haue added your seconde fi­gures, which occupy the place of tennes, you shall put that 1 therto, which you kept in your minde: for though it were ten indéede, yet in that place it is but as one, because, that euerie 1 of that place, is ten, for it is the place of tens. And in like manner: if you haue in the se­cond place so great a number, that it amoun­teth aboue 9, then write the digite, and re­serue the article in your mind, euer adding it to the next place following: and so of all o­ther places, how many so euer you haue. And if you haue a mixt number, when you haue added your last figures, then write the digit vnder the last figures, and the article in the next place beyond them: so shall your number resulting of Addition, haue one place more than the numbers which you should adde to­gither.

Scholer.

Now doe I perceiue you, and the [Page] reason of this is, (as I vnderstande) because that no one place can contain aboue 9, which is the greatest figure that is, and then all tens or articles must be put to the next place follo­wing: for euerie place (as I may sée) excée­deth the other place next before him, by 10.

Now (if it please you) I will returne to my example of Cattell. But I remember you saide, I might not adde summes of sundry things togither, and that might I sée by rea­son.

Maister.

Trueth it is, if you séeke the due summe of anie things, but if you onelie seeke a bare summe, & haue no respect to the thing, then were it better to name the summe onely without anie thing, as in saying 848, wyth­out naming shepe, or any thing else. And like­wise 186, naming nothing.

Now let me see: howe can you adde those two summes?

Scholer.

I must first set them so, that the two first figures stand one ouer an other, and the other each one ouer his fellow of the same place: then shall I drawe a line vnder them both. And so likewise of other figures, set­ting alwayes the greatest number highest, thus, as foloweth:

[Page]Then must I adde 6 to 8, which [...] maketh 14, that is mixte number: therefore muste I take the diget which is 4, and write it vnder 6 & 8 kéeping ye article 1 in my mind thus.

Nexte that doe I come to the se­cond figures, adding them togither, saying, 8 and 4, make 12, to which I put the 1 reserued in my minde, and that maketh 13, of which number I write the diget 3 vnder 8, and 4, & kepe the article in my mind thus: [...] Then come I to the thirde figures, saying: 1 and 8, [...] make 9, and 1 in my minde maketh 10. Sir, shall I write the cipher vnder 1 and 8?

Mayster

Yea.

Scholer.

Then of 10 I write the cipher vn­der 1 and 8, and kéepe the article in my mind.

Mayster.

What néedeth that, séeing there followeth no more figures?

Scholer.

Sir, I had forgotten, but I will remember better hereafter. Thē séeing I am come to the last figures, I muste write the cipher vnder them, and the article [...] in a further place after the cipher, thus:

Mayster.
[Page]

So now ye sée, that of 848, and [...]86 added together, there amounteth 1034.

Scholer.

Nowe I thinke I am perfite in Addition.

Mayst.

That wil I proue by this example.

There are two armies of souldiours: in the one are 106800, and in the other 9400: How many are there in both armies say you?

Scholer.

Firste I sette them one ouer an other, beginning with the firste [...] numbers at the right hād, thus. But the neather nūber wil not match the ouer number.

Mayster.

That forceth not.

Scholer.

Then doe I adde 0 [...] to 0, and there amounteth 0, that must I write vnder ye first place, thus.

Mayster.

Well saide.

Scholer.

Then likewise in the seconde place I adde 0 to 0, and there [...] ariseth 0, which I write vnder the second place, thus.

Then I come to the thirde place saying: 4 and 8 make 12, of whiche I write the diget 2, and kéepe the [...] article 1 in my minde, thus.

[Page]Then adde I 9 to 6, whiche [...] maketh 15, to that I adde the article 1 that was in my mind, and it is 16. I write 6 vnder 6 and 9, and keepe one in my minde, thus.

Mayster.

Why doe you not write bothe figures, séeing you are come to the last couple of numbers?

Scholer.

Nay reason sheweth me, that I must adde that article that is in minde, vn­to the next figure of the ouer summe, thoughe there be no more in the neather summe.

Ma.

That is well considered: then doe so.

Scholer.

Then say I, 0 in the ouer summe, and in my minde, maketh 1, that I write vn­der 0: Then foloweth there yet one more in the ouer summe, which hath none to be added to it, for there is none in the neather summe, nor yet in my mind, therfore I thinke I must write that euen as it is.

Mayster.

Yea.

Scholer.

Then doth my whole summe ap­peare, [...] thus.

Mayster.

If you marke this, you haue learned perfectly the cōmon addition of all summes [Page] which are of one denomination: so that ye ob­serue this also, that in Additiō you must haue two numbers at the least, or else how cā you say that you do adde? And euer let the greatest number be writtē highest, for that is the best way, though it be not necessarie.

And forget not this, that if you haue many numbers to adde togither, you shall haue of­tentimes an article of a greater value thā 10: sometimes 20, sometimes 30, sometimes more, yea, peraduenture 100. Therefore, as you did with the article 10, so do with them, reseruing them in your minde, and adding to the number next following, so many as their valuer or value certaine is: that is to say, 2 for 20, 3 for 30, and so forth of other. But if the article be 100, then must you not adde the ar­ticle to the next figures following, but to the third figures from them, as I will shewe you anone by example. And if it chaunce the number to be such, that it doe comprehende twoo sundrie articles, (that is, one of tennes, and an other of hundreds) then muste you reserue them both in your minde, and adde the article of tennes, to the figures that fo­low next, and the article of hundreds, to the figure of the third place from thence.

[Page]Nowe take this example for [...] all. I would ad these xiij. sūmes in one, whiche I set after thys maner. Then do I beginne and gather the summe of the first fi­gures, whiche commeth to 107. For first I take 9. ther x. times, and that is 90: then 9 and 8 is 17, that is in all 107. of whiche summe I write the 7 vnder the firste figures, and then haue I an article of an hundred in my minde, whyche eyther I must kéepe in my minde till I come to the thirde figures, which are in the roomes of hundreds, or else I maye for feare of forgetting, write this one (béeing of the third place in your of come) vnder the third rowe of figures, making two lines, as you see here done. And then must I write the digites vnder the lowest line: and this is the surest way, when the summe is so great, that the addition of one row passeth 100.

When I haue so done, I must then come to the seconde rowe of figures, and adde them togither, whiche doeth make 115. of whyche [Page] summe I write the dygitte 5 [...] vnder the same seconde row, and then I haue a mixt num­ber remaining of two figu­res, of which the 1 (that stan­deth for 10) must be added to the second or next place after them that I did last adde. And the other yt standeth for 100) muste be added to the thirde place from thence.

Scholer.

That is to say, the fourth place from ye first line or row of figures.

Maister.

Euen so. And thē wil the sum appeare thus. Then adde the third row of figures, with the two vnities betwéene the line, and the summe amoūteth to 50: of which I write the Cypher vnder the same thyrde rowe, and the 5 vnder the nexte figures to­ward the lefte hand. And with my pen I giue a dashe to the two vnities betwéene ye lines, whose valew I haue already added vnder the lowest line.

Then I adde the figures of the fourth row, with the 1 and 5 that are vnder them betwéen [Page] the two lines, & they make 29: [...] then dashe I the [...], & the 5, with my penne, as I did before the two vnities: & so write vnder ye lowest line the 9 (yt is the digit) vnder the fourth place: & the 2, that is the article, beyonde it, toward the left hand. So those summes doe make 29057.

Scholer.

This seemeth some­what harde, by the reason of so many nūbers togither. How­beit I think if I do often proue euē with this same example I shal be able to do so shortly, wc any other summe.

Maister.

So shall you. For it is often practise that maketh a man quicke and ripe in all things: But bycause of suche great summes there may chaunce to be some errour. I will teach you howe you shal proue whether you haue done wel or no.

Scholer.

That were a great helpe and ease.

Maister.

Begin first with the highest num­ber, and then to all the other orderlie, & adde them togither, not hauing regarde to theyr places, but as though they were all vnities: [Page] and still as your number encreaseth aboue 9, cast away 9. Then goe forth, euer casting a­way 9 as often as it amounteth thereto: and so do till you haue gone ouer all the numbers that you intended first to adde, and whatsoe­uer remaineth after such addition and casting awaie of 9, write it in some void place by the ende of a line for the better remembraunce: & then putte togither the figures that result of the Addition, still casting away 9 also. And then that that remayneth, write at the other ende of that line: and if those two figures be like, then haue you well done by likelihoode: but if they be vnlike, then haue you missed. As for example in this present summe: The firste figure of the ouer line is 9, lette him go: then 8 and 8 is 16, take awaye 9, and there remayneth 7, adde to it 4 that followeth, and that maketh 11. from whiche if you take 9, there resteth 2: then come to the next row, whose first and seconde number are 9, there­ore ouerpasse them both, and take the 5 to [...]che 2 which did remaine in the first row, that maketh 7, putte thereto the 4 folowing, that maketh 11, thence take 9, and there remay­neth 2 [...]: nexte that, goe to the thirde line, whose two firste numbers you maye lette [Page] passe, bycause they are nines: then take the twoo whiche with the other two that remay­ned in the seconde rowe, make 6: then goe to the fourth rowe, whose two firste numbers let goe, and take the 6, to the [...] that remay­ned, and that maketh [...], take awaie 9, and there resteth 3, which with the 3, that is next, maketh 6. And so goe throughe all the other numbers, and you shall finde that there re­maineth 5, after you haue cast away 9 as of­ten as you find it: therfore write 5 at one end of a line in a voide place thus. [...]

Then gather all the figures of the totall summe which is vnder the lowest line, and cast away 9 as often as you finde it, as thus: seauen and 5 make 12, take awaie 9, and there resteth [...], to that if you adde the 2 that is laste (for you may let goe the 9) then doth it make 5, whiche you must write at the other ende of the line that you made in the voide place, and it wil be thus. [...]

And then you see that those two figures bée like, whereby you maye knowe that you haue done well, and so maye you proue in a­nie other.

Scholer.

If it please you, I wil proue in an other summe.

Mayster.
[Page]

With a good will.

Scholer.

Then wil I take one of your for­mer examples, which was this.

First in the highest line, 8 and 6 make 14, then 9 taken away, there re­maine [...] 5, to which I adde the 1 that foloweth, and that ma­keth 6. Then come I to the second line, where I finde first 4 which with 6, maketh 10, from that I take 9, and there resteth 1, the next figure is 9, and therefore I let him alone, so find I one remaining, which I set at the ende of a line thus. [...] Then I come to the totall summe, and there I finde that al the figures put together make 10, from which I take 9 and there resseth 1 al­so, which I put at the other ende of the line thus, [...]

And because they be like, I know that I haue wel added.

Mayster.

So you knowe nowe both howe to adde two sūmes or more together: and al­so how to proue whether you haue done well or no:Addition of nūbers of diuerse denomi­nations. which thing also you may doe best by Subtraction. But because you cannot yet skil of it, I will let that passe till anone, and will teache you now how to adde sūmes of diuers [Page] denominations: whiche thing can neuer be but whē the one denomination is such that it conteineth the other certain times. And yet you shal adde them to the other, not after this sort as you did them that were of one deno­mination, but after such a sort as I will now shew you, that is to say.

If you haue a summe of diuers denominati­ons, then loke that ye set euery denomination by himself, with some note or figure of his de­nomination, as they be wont to be written. Then write your other sūmes so vnder that first, that euery one be set vnder the other of the same denominations, as for example: if your denominations be poundes, shillings, & pens, write pounds vnder poundes, shillings vnder shillings, and pens vnder pens, and not shillings vnder pens, nor pens vnder pounds.

Scholer.

Nowe that you haue spoken it, me thinketh it needeth not to warne me of it, for it were against reasō so to cōfound sūmes: but yet if you had not spoken of it, peraduen­ure I should haue bene deceiued in it.

Mayster.

If you doe say it is so plaine, I will speake no more of it, but with an exam­ple make the matter to appeare euidently.

[Page]Firste, one man oweth me 22 lb, 6 s, 8 d. An other oweth mée 5 lb, 16 s, 6 d. And an other oweth mée 4 lb, 3 s, I would know what this is altoge­ther. [...] Therfore must I first set down my greatest sum & thē the other, euery one vnder his denomination gréeing to the greatest summe, as here you see.

Then muste I beginne at smallest num­bers, (whiche must alwayes be set nexte the right hand) and adde them togither, and if the summe of them will make one of the next denomination, then muste I kéepe it in my minde till I come to that place, or else for more easinesse write it vnder that place be­twéene the double line, and vnder that place must I note the residue, if there remaine a­nie of the same denomination, but if there remaine none, then néede I to write vnder it nothing. And this is all that you muste marke in this Addition: for all other things are like to the other manner of Addition be­fore mentioned. Therefore the chiefest point of this Addition is, to knowe the valewes of common coynes and rated summes. As how [Page] many shillinges be in a pounde: how many pence in a shilling, of which and of other like things, I will instruct you hereafter, in tea­ching of Reduction: But now I maye not disturb your wit from the thing that we are about.

Therefore let vs returne to [...] that former example, which I proposed of thrée detters, whi­che summes when I had sette orderly they stoode thus, with a double line vnder them.

Then to adde them vnto one sum, I must begin at the right hand, where the smallest denomination is, and adde thē togither first, saying: 6 and 8 make 14. Nowe séeing these 14 are pennies, and that 1 [...] pence make one shilling, which is the next [...] valewer, I take awaye 12 from 14, and there resteth 2, which I write vnder the pennies, and for the other 12, which maketh 1 shilling I write vnder the tytle of shillings, thus:

Then do I adde all the shillings togither, and finde them 25, to whiche I adde that 1, [Page] betwéene the two lynes, [...] that maketh 26, but bi­cause that 20 shillinges do make 1 pound, I take away 20 from 26, and for that 20 I write 1 vnder the pounds betwéene the two lines, and the other 6 that remayneth, I write vnder the shillings, as appeareth in the exāple before.

Then come I to the pounds, adding them all togither, and finde them to be 31: thereto I adde the 1 betwéene the [...] two lines, & that maketh 32, whiche sūme I write downe whole, because there resteth no greater denomination, and then my whole sūme appea­reth thus.

So is my totall summe, 32 lb. 6 s. 2 d. And this maye you prooue in an other lyke summe.

Sc.

Then will I caste the whole charge of one moneths commons at Oxforde wyth batteling also.

Mayster.

Goe to, let me sée how you can doe.

Scholerr.
[Page]

One wéekes commons was 11 d. ob. q and my batling that wéeke was 2 d. q. q. The secōd wéekes commons was 12 d. and my batling 3 d. The third wéekes commons 10 d. ob. and my batling 2 d. q. c. The fourth wéekes commons 11 d, q. and my batling 1 d. ob. [...]. [...] These eyghte summes woulde I adde into one whole summe, and therefore I will sette them one ouer another, thus.

But I had forgot­ten, I shoulde haue set the greatest summe highest.

Maister.

So is it commonly best, howe­beit, here it forceth not: and in such summes as this is, that go by order of wéekes, dayes, or yeares, it is better to kéepe that order, than to alter them, and to sette the greatest number highest, for that serueth for such summes as go not by order.

Scholer.

Then if I haue set them well ynough, I will begin to ad them thus.

[Page]Firste of the smallest [...] valewers at the right hande, which are called cées, I find [...], and séeing that 2 cées, do make one q, I wil write nothing vnder the cées, but will write 1 q for 2 cées, vn­der the kewes betwéen the lynes, as the exam­ple sheweth.

Then come I to ye next valewers, where I finde 2 q, and to [...] them I adde the q that is betwéene the lines, and so are they 3 q: but because 2 q, maketh one q, I write one q vnder the farthynges be­twéene the lines, and the q that remaineth must I write beneth the nethermoste line vnder the kewes, thus.

Then come I to the farthinges, where I [Page] finde 3, and the other q that is betwéene the lines, maketh 4 farthings. And bicause 4 q make iust 1 pennie, I shall write nothing vnder the farthings, but must write 1 vnder the pens, betwéene the lines.

Next that must I adde the halfe pence to­gither, of which there are 3. but séeing that 2. ob. make 1 d, I must write 1 vnder the pens betwene the lines: but how shal I do it, for there is 1 alreadie?

Maister.

Haue you forgotten how I didde in addition of the great summe before? you must set it vnder the other, so shal they bothe stande for 2. For if you shoulde set it before or behinde the other, they should make 11.

Scholer.

I remember it nowe, and I per­ceiue the reason. Then I wil write 1 ob, vn­der the halfepence, and for the other two halfepens, which make 1 d, I write 1 vnder the pens: Then come I to the pens, & finde, that there are of them 52. then put I to them the 2 betwene the lines, and that maketh 54, which amoūteth to 4. s. 6 d: the 6 d I must write vnder the pens, and the 4 s. I must set (I suppose) farther toward the left hande by themselues.

Maister.

Euen so.

Scholer.
[Page]

Then ap­peareth [...] all my addi­tion thus. And the summe is 4 s 6 d. ob. q.

M.

Now haue you done this well. But tell me, why did you writ kewe, cée, thus, q, c. & not rather thus qc, as the fashion is?

Schol.

Because I thoughte it was the best way for due ga­thering of euery denomination by himselfe.

Mayster.

So was it in déede. Wel now, can you tell how to proue this addition, and such other like of diuers denominatiōs, and to trie whether you haue done well or no?

Scholer.

I would I could.

Mayster.

That shall you doe by this meanes. First as you did begin to ad so rec­ken agayne euery denomination by it selfe, and when you finde so many small that doe make any other denomination, let them go, and kéepe in minde only the residue that wil make no greater denomination, and looke [Page] whether there be any such like value vnder the nether lyne, and if there bée, you haue well done, and so goe from one denominati­on to an other, vnto the ende.

But here must you note, that in gathering of the summes, ye must recken those figures that are written betwéene the lynes, with them that are written aboue them: as for an example, I will examine the summe that I did last adde, which stoode [...] thus.

Firste I finde 6 and 8, whiche maketh 14, from whiche I take 12, bicause it maketh one of the next denomination, and there remayneth 2, and vnder that place I sée a like figure, therefore I knowe that well to be done. Then come I to the s, where I find 1, 3, 16, and 6, that maketh 26, I cast away 20, for they make another denomination, that is to saye poundes: and the 6 which remai­neth, is lyke to the 6 that is written vnder them beneathe the lowest lyne, there­fore▪ that is well done also. And thence I goe to poundes, where I finde 1, 4, 5, 22, that is 32, to whiche summe agréeth another lyke [Page] vnder it. Therefore I iudge all well done.

Scholer.

I perceiue reason in this proba­tion. Nowe will I attempte the same in the summe that I did adde, whiche when I had ended adding, stoode as you maye sée in the example following.

Firste amongest the cées I find but two, which make one q euen, therfore there must nothing bee vnder the line for them: And amongste the kewes [...] I fynde 3, of whiche two make 1 q, there­fore I let them goe, and the one q, that is lefte, hath an o­ther lyke vnder his place, therefore that is well done.

Then the Far­thinges are iuste 4, which make 1 d. and therefore I let them goe. Amongst the halfe pence there is one od (for 2. must I cast away, bycause they made one penny) and vnto it answereth a like sum vnder it. The pens are 54. frō which I take away 48, that makes 4, s, and the 6 remay­ning [Page] agrée to a like figure set vnder thē. And last of all remayneth the 4 s, which the abie­cted pens did make: so I perceiue that I haue wel done. Now this will I not forget. But will this examination serue in all addi­tion?

Mayster.

It serueth for all addition of sun­drie denominations, if the addition be made with two lines, (as were these) else it wil not serue, bycause that those summes whyche are here added betwéene the lines, in Addition by one line, are vnderstanded and not written: but I let that way passe, bicause as it is com­mō, so is it more deceiueable than this way, namelye if a mans memorie be either dull or troubled.

Scholer.

Yet it were good to knowe that way also.

Maister.

If you desire to knowe it,Another forme of Addition. this it is in fewe wordes. Doe euerie thing as you did in this sorte of Addittion, saue that where you made here two lines, you shall make there but one: and those summes that you did here write betwéene the lynes, you must kepe in your memorie, and vse them (as you dydde here) each one when you come to his place.

Scholer.

Then they differ not, but in this, [Page] that this addition with two lines leaueth no­thing to memorie, but writeth downe all: and the other way committeth certaine numbers to memorie, as you taughte me in the first ex­amples of addition of small summes of one denomination. But what if a man vse it (as you say men do commonly) how shal it be ex­amined?

Maister.

Séeing you are so desirous of it, I will shewe both an example of the additi­on, and also the manner to examine it.

I propose these thrée summes [...] to be added, and I gather firste the pence, as I did in the other sort, and I finde of them 8, 3, 9, that is 20, of which summe I bate away 12, whiche make 1 s, and kepe that 1 in my minde, and the rest, that is 8, I write vnder the pence.

Then do I adde the shillings togither, and finde of them 6, 7, 8, that is 21, whereof I bate 20, that make 1 lb, whiche I kéepe in minde, and to the other 1 that remaineth, I adde that one that came of ye pens & was in my mind, whiche make 2, and them I write vnder the shillings.

Then doe I recken the pounds togither, 3, [Page] 6, 12, that is 21, and to them I adde the 1 in my mind that remayneth of [...] the shillings, which make 22, them doe I write vnder the poundes, and then my summe totall appeareth to be 22 lb, 2 s, 8 d.

Now to examine this sum and all suche like, you shall doe thus. Firste beginne at the lefte hande with the poundes,Another forme of proofe. and take from them that are aboue the lyne, 9, as often as you can: then that that remay­neth shall you double, and ioyne it with the shillings, and take awaye 9 from that as of­ten as you can, and whatsoeuer remayneth, yée shall take for it thrée tymes so muche, and putte to the pence: then take from all that summe 9, as often as you can, and what so remayneth after you haue wythdrawen 9 as often as you can, write that at the ende of a line, as I taughte you in the other Addi­tion.

And then come to the sum vnder the lire, beginning with the pounds, and doe euen as you did with the summes aboue the line, till you come to your pennies: and if the figure of [Page] the summe that remayneth after casting a­waye 9, (as often as you can) doe agrée wyth the other that remayned before of the other summe, whyche you did write at the ende of the line, then haue you done well, else not: and for an example, I will examine that laste summe which was thus:

First I shal begin at the [...] left hād with the pounds, putting them togither, whiche make 21, in which summe I finde 9 twice, (for twice 9 is 18) that I deducte, and there remayneth 3: that 3 must I double (as I saide) bicause it is the remay­ner of the poundes, and it will be 6. Then ga­ther I the summe of the shillings, whiche is 21, to the whiche I adde the foresaide 6, and then it is 27, wherein I finde 9 thrée times, and there remayneth nothing. This remay­ner should I take thrée times, but thrée times nothing, is nothing: therefore in this place is there nothing left to be added to the pennies. Wherefore I muste take the summe of penies alone, whiche is 20, from thence if I take 9 twice, there remayneth but 2, whych I putte vnto the ende of a lyne [Page] thus. [...]

Then I come to the poundes of the vnder number or totall summe, and there I finds 22, from whiche I take awaye 9 twice, and there remayneth 4: that 4 I double, and it is 8, then doe I adde that 8 to the shillings, and it maketh 10, from which I withdrawe 9, and there resteth one: then doe I take that 1 thráe times, and it maketh 3, whyche I adde to the 8 d. and it maketh 11, frō whi­che if I bate 9, there resteth 2, which is equal to the number noted at the ende of the line: and therby I perceiue that I haue done well.

Scholer.

But I doe not sée the reason of this.

Maister.

No?The reason of this proofe. no more doe you of manye things else, but hereafter will I shewe you the reasons of all Arithmeticall operations: for this I iudge to be the beste trade of tea­ching, first by some briefe precepts to instruct a learner somewhat in the vse of the Arte,The best trade of teaching. be­fore he learne the reasons of the Art, and then may you afterward more sooner make him to perceiue the reasons: for harde it is to occu­pie a young learned witte with both the arte and the reasons of it all at once: howbeit hée [Page] shall neuer be cunning in déede in an arte, that knoweth not the reason of euerie thing touching it. But for this worke, bycause the reason is easie, I wil shew it you nowe. You knowe that if one pounde do remaine, it be­ing tourned into shillings, woulde make 20 s, in whiche number there is 9 contained twice, and 2 s beside. And therefore for one pounde you shal take 2 s, and so for euerie one pound 2 s.

Scholer.

I sée it well, for if there remained 7 lb, after the nines were cast away, I must take 14 s for that 7 lb. And so haue I caste a­way 14 times 9 s, and yet remayneth of eue­rie pound 2 s which maketh 14 s.

Maister.

Like wayes in shillings, whiche containe 12 d: for euerie shilling, if you abate 9 pence there resteth 3 pence.

Scholer.

It is plaine ynoughe. And so if [...] shillings doe remaine, I muste take for it 15 d, that is thrée pence for euerie shilling, and yet in that so doing, I haue caste awaye fiue times nine pence.

Maister.

Other workes haue as good rea­son, but I wil not stande aboute yéelding rea­sons now.

Scholer.

Yet one thing more I praye you [Page] shewe me, why did you write your number that remayned (after you hadde withdrawen all the nines) at the ende of a line? for I sawe no reason why that line did serue.

Maister.

Did you euer marke a Carpen­ter when he wrought?

Scholer.

Yea many times.

Maister.

And haue you not séene him when he hath taken measure of a boarde, that hée hath pricked it, and hath with a twitch of his hande drawen a line from the pricke that hée made?

Scholer.

Yes I haue marked that and haue séene some marke 3 or 4 lines by the pricke, some also haue I séene make a crosse by it, but that I perceiued was for the easie finding of their pricke.

Maister.

And euen so is this line for the ea­sie finding of your remainer, and therefore some doe make a crosse, thus.

[figure]

And set the one remainer aboue the crosse, and the other vnder the nether part of the crosse, as if I should set my two remainers thus. [...]

But there is another sort of proofe of Addition;Another kind of proofe most vsu­all and ap­test of all. to whiche the crosse serueth more méeter: & that is whe [Page] the addition is of diuerse denominations: and I would examine euerie denomination by it selfe, which waye though it be not much vn­like to the first proofe that I brought of suche diuerse summes, yet will I declare it, leasts you shoulde thinke that I would hide it from you.

You muste make so manie lines in your crosse, as you haue sundrie denominations: as if you haue but two denominations, then you may make it thus, that the ouer

[figure]

part and the nether part may serue for one denomination, and the two sides for the other. And if you haue thrée de­nominations, as poundes, shillings, and pen­nies, then muste you make thrée

[figure]

lines thus. The vpright line may serue for poundes, and the highest thwart line for shillings, and the lowest for pens: as for example I will take a summe thus added.

[...]

[Page]For the proofe of the which, bycause it con­tayneth thrée denominations, I must make a crosse of thrée lines, as in the page afore. Thē I recken first at the righte hand the pennies: 7, 1, 5, make 13, from whiche I take 12 for the next denomination, that is to saie, a shilling, and there resteth 1, which I muste write at one end of the neather thwart line.

After that I gather the summe of the shyl­lings, 2, 8, 12, which maketh 22. to them I put one that I toke of the pennies, and that ma­keth 23: from those I take [...]0, the quantitie of the next greater denomination, that is to say, a pound, and there resteth 3, which I write at the ende of the highest thwart line.

Thirdlie, I adde togither the pounds, 9, 12, 16, whiche make 37, to them I adde the 1 that came of the shillings, and then there is 38, wherein I finde 4 times 9, and 2 ouer, that 2 I write on the vpright line.

That doone, I come to the totall summe, and examine it, beginning at the pennies, where I finde but one, and cannot take 9 frō him, therfore I set him at the other ende of ye neather thwart line: Then I come to the shillings, where I finde only 3, which bicause it is lesse than 9, I sette it at the other ende [Page] of the line of shillings, that is, the ouermoste thwart line.

Last of all, of the 38 lb, I take foure times 9, which is 36, and there remayneth 2, which I write vnder the vpright line.

Thē I consider euerie number, comparing it to the number that is againste it, and by­cause I finde them to be euerie one like hys match, I know that I haue wel done.

Scholer.

This crosse I perceiue doeth serue for those thrée denominations, pounds, shil­linges, pennies. But what if I had ob, q̄, q, and c?

Maister

You thinke you be at Oxforde stil, you bring forth so faste your q and c. These lines, as I haue saide, doe serue for thrée de­nominations, such as they be: as here they do serue for poundes, shillings, and pennies: but if yée haue no poundes in your summe, then may they serue for shillings, pennies, and halfe pennies: yea for q, q and c, if you haue no greter denomination, so that you remem­ber that the vpright line serueth for the grea­test denomination, and the highest thwarte line, for the nexte, and the lowest for the least,

And so if you haue foure denominations [Page] you must make your crosse with

[figure]

so many lines. And if that your summe be of more denominati­ons, make so many lines in your crosse. And thus will I make an ende of Ad­dition.

Examples of Addition. [...]

The Proofes. [...]

An other Example. [...]

SVBTRACTION.

Scholer.

THen haue I learned the two first kindes of Arithmetike: nowe as I remember, doeth fo­lowe Subtraction, whose name me thin­keth doth sounde con­trarie to Addition.

Maister.

So is it in déede: for as Addition encreaseth one grosse summe by bringing manye into one, so contrarie waies, Sub­traction diminisheth a grosse summe by with­drawing of other from it, so that Subtracti­on or Rebating is nothing else, but an art to withdrawe and abate one summe from an o­ther, that the Remainer may appeare.

Scholer.

What do you call the Remai­ner?

Maister.

That you maye perceyue by the name.

Scholer.

So me thinketh: but yet it is good to aske the trouth of all such things, leaste in trusting to myne owne coniecture, I bée de­ceyued.

Maister.
[Page]

So is it the surest waye. And as I sée cause, I wyll still declare thyngs vnto you so plainelie, that you shall not neede to doubte. Howbeit, if I doe ouer­passe it sometimes (as the manner of men is to forget the small knowledge of them to whome they speake) then do you putte me in remembraunce your selfe, and that way is surest.

And as for this worde that you laste asked me, take you this description:Remainer. The Remai­ner is a summe lefte after due Subtraction made, which declareth the excesse or differēce of the two other numbers: as if I woulde abate or subtract 14 out of 18, there should re­maine 4, which is called the remayner, and is the difference betwéen those two numbers 14 & 18.

Scholer.

I perceiue then what Subtracti­on is: Nowe resteth to knowe the order to worke it,

Maister.

That shall you doe by this mea­nes. Firste you muste consider, that if you should go about to rebate, you must haue two sundrie summes proposed, the firste which is your grosse summe or summe totall: (and it must be set highest) and then the rebatement [Page] or summe to be withdrawen, which must be set vnder the firste (whether it bée in one par­cel or in many) and that in suche sort, that the firste figures be one iuste ouer an other and so the seconde and thirde, and all other folo­wing, as you did in Addition: then shal you drawe vnder them a line, and so are your summes duelie set to beginne youre wor­king.

Then beginne you at the righte hande (as you did in Addition) and withdrawe the ne­ther number out of the higher, and if there remaine anye thing, write that righte vnder them beneth the line: and if ther remaine no­thing (by reason that ye 2 figures were equal) then write vnder them a ciphar of noughte. And so doe you with all the other figures, e­uermore abating the lower out of the higher, and write vnder them the Remainer still, til you come to the ende. And so will there appeare vnder the line what remayneth of youre grosse summe, after you haue dedu­cted the other summe from it, as in this ex­ample.

I receiued of your father 48 s, of whiche I haue layde out for you 36 s: nowe woulde I knowe what doeth remaine? and therefore I [Page] set my numbers thus in order: First I write the greatest summe, and vnder him [...] the lesser, so that the figures at the right side be euen one vnder ano­ther, and so the other, thus.

Then do I rebate 6 out of 8, and [...] there resteth two, which I write vnder them right beneath the line, thus.

Then I go to the second figures, [...] and do rebate 3, out of 4, where there remaineth 1, which I write vnder them righte, and then the whole summe and operation ap­peareth thus.

Whereby it appeareth, that if I withdraw 36, out of 48, there remaineth 2.

Scholer.

Nowe will I proue in a greater summe: And I wil Subtract 2367924 out of 3468946. Those summes I set in order thus. [...]

Then doe I beginne at the righte side, and deducte 4 out of 6, and there resteth 2, whiche I write vn­der them. Then goe I to the seconde figures, and withdrawe 2 out of 4, and there remaine [Page] two, whiche I set vnder thē also: then I take 9 out of 9, and there resteth 0, which I write vnder them: for you say, that if the figures be equall, so that nothing remain, I must write this ciphar 0 vnder them.

Maister.

It was well remembred, nowe go foorth.

Scholer.

Then I come to the fourth place and draw 7 out of 8, and there remayneth 1, which I write vnder them also. Then in the fifte place I take 6 from 6, and there resteth nought, for it I write vnder them a ciphar, 0: Then in the sixt place 3 rebated from 4, there remayneth 1, which I write vnder them: and likewise in the vij. & last place, 2 taken from 3, there is lefte 1, whiche I [...] write vnder them: so haue I done my whole working, and my summes appeare thus. Whereby I sée, that if I rebate 2367924, out of 3468946, there re­mayneth 1101022.

Maister.

Thys is well done. And that you maye be sure to perceiue fullye the Art of Subtractiō. let me see how can you subtract 52984732 out of 8250003456.

Scholer.

Firste I sette downe the greatest [Page] summe, and after that I write vnder if the lesser number, beginning [...] at the righte syde: and then my figures will stand thus.

Then take I 2 from 6, and the reste is 4 whiche I write vnder them: then doe I withdrawe 3 from 5, and there remayne 2, which I write vnder them. Then take I 7 out of 4, but that I cannot, what shal I now doe?

Mayster.

Marke well what I shall tell you now,Note. how you shall doe in this case and in all other like. If any figure of the nether summe be greater than the figure of the summe that is ouer him, so that it cannot be taken out of the figure ouer him, then muste you put 10 to the ouer figure, and then consi­der how muche it is, and out of that whole summe withdrawe the nether figure, and write the rest vnder them. Can you remem­ber this?

Scholer.

Yes, that I trust I shall. Now then in mine example where I shoulde haue taken 7 out of 4 and coulde not, I put 10 to that 4, which maketh 14, from it I take a­waye, 7, and there resteth 7 also, whiche I [Page] write vnder them.

Mayster.

So haue you done well, but nowe muste you marke another thing also: that whensoeuer you doe so put 10 to any fi­gure of the ouer number, you must adde one stil to the figure or place that followeth next in the nether line, as in this example there followeth 4, to which you must put 1, and make him 5, & then go on as I haue taught you.

Schol.

Then shall I say: 4 and 1 (which I must put to him for the 10 that I added to 4 before) make [...], which I should take out of 3, but that cannot be, therefore must I put to it also 10, & then it will be 13, from whiche I take 5, and there resteth 8 to be written vnder them: and because of that 10 added to the 3, I must ad 1 to 8 that followeth in the nether line, & that maketh 9, which I should take out of 0, and cannot, therefore I put thereto 10, and that maketh 10: from 10 I take 9, and there remayneth 1, whiche I write vnder them.

Then doe I adde likewise to the nexte figure beneath, which is 9, and that maketh 10, that 10 should I take out of the figure a­boue, but I cannot, for it is 0, therefore I [Page] put 10 to it, and so take I 10 out of 10, & there resteth 0 to be written vnder them. Then come I to the next figure which is 2, and to him doe I ad 1, which maketh 3, that 3 I can not take out of nought, therefore of yt nought I make 10, and thence do I take 3, so remai­neth there 7 to be written vnder them. Like­wise do I put 1 to 5 that followeth, and then is it 6, that would I take out of 5, and can­not, therefore I adde 10 to that 5, and make it 15, from which I rebate 6, and there re­maineth 9, which I write vnder them. Now haue I spent all the nether figures, & what shall I doe more?

Maister.

You should haue added to the next figure following (if there had bene any) because you added 10 to the last figure before of the ouer line: but seeing there is no figure following, you must adde that to the place following, and then deducte that from the number aboue.

Scholer.

Then shall I saye because I borrowed 10 to the ouer 5, I muste put in the next place beneath, that is vnder 2: then must I subtracte that [...] from [...], and there re­steth 1, to be written vnder that, in the ninth place. Nowe I haue no more to subtracte, [Page] for there is neuer any figure remayning be­neath, nether yet any vnite to be added, be­cause I borrowed not 10 to the figure laste before, and yet is there 8 remayning in the ouer line, which (I thinke by reason) shoulde be set at the ende of the figures in the lowest row whiche is vnder the line, for because there was nothing taken from it.

Mayst.

That is wel considered, and rea­son teacheth so in dáede.

Scholer.

But syr I beséeche you, shall I alwayes when any number so remayneth a­lone (as this [...] did) write him vnder the lyne straight against his owne place?

M.

Yea, what else? Whether they bée one or many: and this wel remembred, you haue sufficiently learned Subtractiō. How be it, because of certaine thinges that might deceiue you, if you did not take good héede to your working, I wil propose to you another example of many numbers to be subtracted, as thus,

I receyued of a friende of mine to kéepe [...]869 Crounes, of which at one time I deli­uered him againe 500, at one time 368, and at another time 440, and an other tyme 80, and an other time 64: nowe would I know [Page] how many doeth rest behinde. Therefore firste I set downe my [...] grosse sum, and a lyne vnder it: & vnderneath it I set all the parcels, thus: and vnder them a double line.

Then firste I begin at the first place, & ga­ther togither the sum of al those lynes (saue the ouermost) in their first figures, and so do I with all the figures of the second place, & so forth as I did in Ad­dition, saue that I leaue out the highest row of numbers (as the line warneth me) and that summe so gathered betwéen the double line, doe I subtract out of the highest row of numbers, and the remayner doe I sette vn­der ye nethermost line: [...] as for example.

I set the summes as before: than doe I ga­ther the first figures to­gether, where I fynde but 4 & 8, that make 12, (for thrée Cyphers increaseth no summe [Page] in addition, as you learned before) of the 12 therefore doe I write the digite 2, betwéene the double line, and kéepe the article in my mind, til I come to the seconde place, where I finde 6, 8, 4, 6, that make 24, to them I put the article in my mind, and it is 25, of which I write 5 vnder the seconde place, and kéepe the digite 2 in my minde for the third place, where I finde 4, 3, 5, that make 12, to the which I adde the 2 in my minde, and it ma­keth 14, thereof I write the 4 vnder the thirde place: and because there remayneth no more figures to be added, I write the digit 1 in the fourth place, as you see in the example.

Then come I to subtracting of this sūme betwéene the lines, for by Addition it is e­quall to the fiue parcels ouer it. Therefore I procéede to subtracte it from the ouermoste summe, saying: 2 from 9, remayne 7, to bée written vnder thē beneath the lowest line. Then in the seconde place I take 5 from 6, and there resteth, to be written vnder thē. Then in the third place, 4 from 8, resteth 4. Last of all in the fourth place, 1 from 2, re­mayneth 1. And thus I sée that after those 5 summes are subtracted from 2869, the Re­mainer [Page] is 1417.

Scholer.

This I perceyue: but is there no shorter way and more spéedier?

Mayst.

Yes,An a­bridgemēt of the for­mer maner of Subtra­ction. when you are a while ex­ercised in it: for you may as fast as you can gather the numbers togither, withdrawe them out of the highest sūme if so be it, that all the parcels which you doe gather, do not excéede nine, but and if they excéede nyne, then must you subtract onelye the digit that is in it, and reserue the article till the nexte place, where you shall adde it with the other figures and so subtract the whole out of the figure aboue them: but and if in this place the summe of the parcels do excéede 9, then (as I sayd before) subtract the digit only, and reserue the article to the nexte place, and so still goe forth, till you haue ended your working.

As for example: In the last summe pro­posed, I gather firste in the firste place 4 and 8, that maketh 12, of whiche I deducte the digitte 2 out of 9, and write vnder the remayner, which is 7, and the article 1 I kéepe in my minde. Then in the second place I gather the parcels 6, 8, 4, 6, which amount to 24, to that I adde the article 1, which I [Page] haue in my minde, and then is it 25, then do I take 5 (that is the digitte in this number) frō 6, that is in the seconde place of the high­est summe, and there remayneth but 1 to bée written vnder them, and nowe doe I kéepe the article 2 in my minde still. Then in the thirde place, 4, 3, 5, maketh 12, and the arti­cle 2 in my minde maketh 14: then take I 4 (which is the digitte) from 8, that is ouer them, and there resteth 4, whiche I write vnder them. Then haue I the article 1 yet in my minde, which I shoulde adde to the par­cels next following, but séeing there is no number following, I take that digit alone, and deduct him out of the next sūme aboue, which is 2, and then is the remayner 1, which I write in the fourth place vnder 2. Loe, now haue you a shorter way.

Scholer.

I like both wayes well, and I perceiue both well, yet as in the one the working séemeth somewhat long, so in the other it leaneth very much (me séemeth) to remembrance, and therefore maye cause er­rour quickly, except a man haue a quick and an exercised remembraunce.

Mayster.

What? would you then haue suche a way that should not be so long as the [Page] one, nor so short as the other?

Scholer.

Yea, if there were any suche.

Mai.

Than doe thus: [...] still as you gather your parcels, when they excéed a digit, & ma­keth him 10 or more, take the article, and write him betwéene two lines (as in the first example) vnder the next place towarde the left hande: and then deducte the digitte from the figure that is ouer him, and wryte the remayner. And then when you gather the next parcels, you shall adde to them the figure that is vnder them, betwéen the two lines. And if it excéede 9, do as I said before, write the article vnder ye next place betwéen ye lynes, and subtracte the digitte from the Figure that is ouer those parcelles: and if that all the parcelles togither and the num­ber betwéene the lines do make but a digit, then deduct it wholy from the figure aboue: as in this example. I would subtracte oute of 40308964, [...] these thrée parcelles

Therefore I set thē firste in order due: & [Page] then I gather the parcels of the firste place, which are 8, 2, 1, that is 11: of whiche I take away the article, and sette him vnder the se­cond place betweene the lines: and the digit 1 that remaineth, I deduct out of 4, and there resteth 3 to be written vnder the first place beneath the lowest line. Then come I to the second place, and gather the parcels of it, 6, 4, 2, and the 1 betweene the lines, which make 13, of whiche I take the article, and set him vnder the third place betwéen the lines, and the digit 3 I take from 6, and there remai­neth 3, which I write vnder the second place beneth the lowest line. Than in the thirde place I find 4, 3, 4. which with the 1 between the lines, doe make 12, therefore I write the article agayne vnder the fourth place, and the digit 2 I take from 9, and there remay­neth 7 which I write vnder them beneath the lowest line.

And thē come I to the fourth place, where I gather 1, 2, 3 & h [...] 1 betwéene the lines, that maketh 7, which because it is but a digitte I plucke from 8, and the Remayner is 1. and must be written vnder them in the fourthe place. After that come I to the fifte place, where are onely three cyphars, which make [Page] nothing, thē should I take that, that is to say nothing, from the figure ouer them, whiche is also a cyphre, therefore I must saye thus: if I take nought from nought, there remay­neth nought: so must I write a cyphre vnder them. Thē in ye sixt place I find but 1, which I take out of 3 ouer him, and the Remainer is 2, that must be written beneth the lowest line in the sixt place. So I go to the seuenth, where I find only cyphres, and in the grosse sum ouer them a cyphre also, therefore must I write their remainer (whiche is nothing) with a cyphre also. Then in the eighte and last place, I gather 1, 1, 2, that make 4, which if I take out of that 4 that is ouer thē, there will nothing remaine. And that must be no­ted with a cyphre beneath the lowest line, as I haue often sayde, and so haue I ended my worke, and the figures [...] stand thus.

Scholer.

Syr, I re­member you taughte me that cyphers shoulde not come in the last place, for because they serue onelye to encrease the valewe of other Figures whiche followe [Page] them, and serue not for those figures that goe before them: and nowe in your exam­ple you haue set two ciphers in the two laste places.

Maister.

I commende you for your re­membraunce. And truth it is, I should not haue set them here, but only because that I would make you plainly to perceiue the art of Subtraction. Therfore séeing that you do now perceiue it, whensoeuer you shoulde write downe a cyphar, looke whether anye other figures be yet behinde. And if not than let go the cyphar also, for it néedeth notto write him in any latter places, where no other figure doth followe, excepte it be (as I did) to teache the vse of Subtraction the playner.

Therefore my fi­gures [...] must stande thus when I haue ended my worke.

Scholer.

So I woulde thinke by yt you taughte me before. And now I beléeue I could subtract any summes.

Mayster.

So may you if you haue mar­ked [Page] what I haue taught you. But because this thing (as all other) must be learned surely by often practise, I will propounde here two examples to you, wherein if you often exercise your selfe, you shalbe ripe and perfecte to subtract any other summe lightly, for in them is contained all the obseruaun­ces of whole number. And because you shal perceaue somewhat both how to doe it, and also whether it be well done when you haue prooued to doe it, therefore haue I written vnder them, both the Remayners: And to one of them also adioyned his proofe.

[...]

Scholer.

Sir, I thank you. But I thinke I might the better doe it, if you did shewe me the working of it.

Mayster.
[Page]

Yea, but you must proue your selfe to doe some thinges that you were ne­uer taught, or else you shall not be able to doe any more than you were taughte: And that were rather to learne by rote (as they call it) then by reason. And agayne there is nothing in this example or anye other of whole number, but I haue taughte you the rules of them alreadie.

Scholer.

Then I trust by practise to at­taine the vse of it. And is this all that I shall learne of Subtraction?

Mayster,

Yea, sauing that (as you haue séene in Addition) there are numbers of di­uers denominations, in whiche the wor­king is not muche vnlike, yet without some instructions be giuen of it, it might séeme to a learner more difficulte, then in déede it is. Therefore I will brieflye shewe you the vse of it onely, by one example or two.

A certayne man owed to me 14 lb, 12 s, 8 d, of which he paide me at one tyme 4 lb, 6 s, 8 d: at an other time 3 lb, and at an other 2 lb, 3 s, 4 d, and last of all, 6 s, 8 d. Now would I know what remaineth vn­payde [Page] yet, therefore I set my [...] summes thus.

Scholer.

Syr, I pray you why doe you write 2 lb. for the common spéeche vseth rather to say 40 s.

Maister.

We must here vse the denomination that is greatest in any summe, so that we maye not write according as we vse to speake, saying: 16 d. 18 d: or likewayes, 7 grotes, 8 grotes: 24 s. 40 s 48 s. and suche other, but we muste write euerye denomination that is in any summe by it self, namely shil­linges and poundes. So must we write for these summes now named, 1 s, 4 d: 1 s, 6 d: 2 s. 4 d: 2 s, 8 d: 1 lb, 4 .s: 2 lb, 8 s: and so foorth of other like.

Scholer.

So that we maye not write in Arithmetike pennies, when the summe a­mounteth to shillings, nor shillinges when tho sum maketh poundes. Nowe if it please you, ende your example.

May.

When my summes are so set as I shewed, then must I begin with the smal­lest denomination, saying: 8, 4, 8, are 20. which summe because it is pence, & 12 pence [Page] doe make 1 s, I must take [...] from that 20 (which com­meth of the parcels) 12. & for them write betwéene ye lines vnder ye shillings, than the 8 d, that remay­neth I take out of ye high­est sum, which is 8 also, & then remayneth nought: wherfore vnder the pence I write nothing. Then come I to the shil­linges, and gather the parcels 6, 3, 6. whiche with the 1 betwéene the lines, make 16, that must I take out of the summe that is ouer it. But séeing that summe is but 12, I cannot take 16 out of 12, I must borrow one of the 14 lb, and put to the 12, and that maketh 32, for 1 lb is worth 20 s, then take I 16 out of 32 and there resteth 16 to be written vnder the shillinges. Then come I to the poundes, whose parcels are 2, 3, 4. that is in all 9, and one more must I adde therto, because of the 1 that I borrowed before vnto the 12 s, and than is there 10, whiche I must take oute of 14, so doth there remain 4 to be written vn­der the poundes: so doeth my remainer ap­peare to be 4 lb, 16 s.

Scholer.
[Page]

This doe I perceiue verie well, and if there be none other thing to be learned in Subtraction, then maye I come to Multi­plication, for that you reckened to bée in or­der next.

Maister.

We haue done in déede wyth the arte of Subtraction, as touching the wor­king. But yet before we go to multiplication,A proofe of Subtra­ction in numbers of one deno­mination. I wil instruct you how to examine your work whether it be well done or no, and that is by casting away 9 as oftē as you can finde it, as you did in Addition, sauing that you muste here examine the highest number alone, and note the residue of it at a lines end, as you did in Addition.

And when you haue done with the highest number, then examine all the other togither, casting thence 9 as often as you can: and if the last remayner be like the other, then haue you done wel.

But if you haue diuerse denominations in your summe,A proofe in Subtra­ction amōg diuerse de­nomina­tions. yet for them all shall you make but one seuerall line, as you did in Addition, remembring to begin the examination at the greatest denomination, and to double the re­mayner of pounds, and triple the remainer of shillings, as you did also in Addition.

[Page]As for a proofe, I will exa­min [...] this work where in the highest line I finde of poūds 14. from thence I bate 9, & there resteth 5, which I doe double, because they are pounds, and thē are they 10 thereto I ad the 12 & it ma­keth 22 frō whiche I take 9 twise, & there resteth 4, whiche because they are shillinges, I triple, and then are they 12, thereto I adde the 8, & then are they 20 thēce take I twise 9, and yet resteth 2, whiche I write at the one ende of a line thus, 2—

Then I examine all the other parcelles & the remayner together, euery denominatiō by it selfe. And first of poundes I finde 4, 3, 2, 4 that is 13. from which I take 9, & there resteth 4. that doe I double, and it maketh 8, to it doe I put the shillinges, 6, 3, 6.16. that is 31 (for the one betwéen the lines must not be reckoned nor none in that space) and that maketh in all 39. Where hence I take 9, foure times, and there remayneth 3. yt doe I take thrée times, and it is 9, wherfore I cast it away: then doe I take the pennies 8, 4, 8. that maketh 20, from which I take 9 twise, [Page] and there resteth 2. whiche I write at the o­ther end of the proofe lyne. And bicause I sée that those two numbers are equall, I saye that I haue well wrought.

And if you will you may make for euerye denomination a line, as you learned in Ad­dition: but then must you beginne your ex­amination at the smallest denomination, as you did in Addition, for their proofe is alto­gither like, sauing that in Addition you ex­amine the nethermost summe alone, and all the other togither: and in Subtraction yée must examine the highest number alone, & al the other togither. And if you marke it wel, it is euen all one, for that summe that in Ad­dition is lowest, in Subtraction is highest:Grosse or total sume▪ and that summe is called the Grosse or To­tall summe.

Therefore if you marke what I sayde in Addition, you may easilye perceiue what is to be done for the proofe of Subtractiō. And to the intent that you may perceaue it ye bet­ter, I will shew you an other proofe of Sub­traction, and that shall be by Addition, thus. Draw vnder ye lowest nūber (which is your remayner) a line: then ad that number,An other proofe of Subtractiō. and all the other that you did subtract before, to­gether, [Page] and write that that amounteth, vnder the lowest line: and if the summe that com­meth thereof, be equall to the highest of the subtraction, than was the [...] subtraction well wrought, or else not. As for exam­ple: in the laste summes, which stoode thus.

First I adde 8, 4, 8, that maketh 20. whereof I take 12 awaye, bycause they make one shilling, and write for them vn­der the shillings: and the 8 that is lefte, I write beneath the lowest line, then adde I the shillings 6.3.6.1.16. that make 32: from whiche I take 20, and for it I write 1 vnder the poundes, and the 12 that remayneth, I write vnder the shillings. Then come I to the poundes, adding them togither, which are 4.3 2.1.4. that maketh 14: then doe I write 14 vnder the lb, and so haue I ended the Ad­dition. And I sée that the lowest line of num­ber and the highest be like, wherfore I know that I haue wel done. For my figures ap­peare as you may plainlie sée in the page fo­lowing.

[Page]And thus nowe haue I [...] taughte you the arte of Subtraction, and the means to proue whether it be well wroughte or not.

And this last proofe of Subtraction is most ap­test and beste allowed of any other proofe: whe­ther it be of lb s d. or any other grosse some whatsoeuer.

Nowe and you remember, I omitted in teaching the proofe of Addition one way whi: che I said was by subtraction.

Scholer

Trueth it is, and then was it de­ferred, because that I had not thē learned the feate of Subtraction, whereby I should haue proued it, but now I thanke you, I haue wel learned the arte of Subtraction, & the proues of it, both by 9. and by addition. And nowe I would be glad to know, howe I may proue Addition by Subtraction.

Maister.

Then marke you this.The profe of Additi­on by Sub­traction. Whē you haue ended your addition: take the numbers all that you did adde, to the highest summe, and deduct or subtract them from the grosse [Page] summe that doth resulte, and if the remay­ner be like to the highest number, then haue you done well, else not.

As for example. I take one of the summes that I did adde before, which [...] was this that followeth here.

Then doe I come to the middle number (because here in this example are onelye thrée numbers) and subtracte that from the nether nūber, beginning at the right hande, and first I saye, 0 out of 0, there remaineth 0: that write I vnder an other line. Then againe, 0 in the second place from 0, remai­neth 0 vnder it I write 0 also. Next that in the third place, 4 out of 2 wil not be, therfore I ad to that 2, 10, and make it 12 from that I take 4 and there resteth 8. Then saye I farther: 9 in the fourth place, and 1 (whiche I must adde for the 10, borrowed before) make 10, that must I take from 6: and be­cause I canne not, I adde to the 6.10, and then is it 16: from then I take 10, and there resteth 6. to be written vnder them. Againe in the fift place where I finde nothing writ­ten, I must sette 1 for the 10 last borrowed, and that 1 doe I take from the 1 vnder him, [Page] and so remaineth noughte, wherefore I write downe a cypher 0. Now haue I done with the subtraction: and yet in the grosse summe remayneth 1, whiche I must sette right in the same place, in the remayner, and so the remayner appeareth to bee lyke vnto the highest summe of [...] the Addition, as here ap­peareth. Wherefore I say that the Additiō was wel wroughte. And note, that if you had subtracted the vppermost from the product or totall sūme, then the residue thereof woulde be equall to that middlemost number. But if the parcelles which you added, be more then two: (as thrée foure, fiue, sixe, or more) than from your grosse or totall summe subtracte first one of the percels: and note that newe residue. Out of that new residue, subtract an other of your percels, (whiche you will) and Note that second new residue. And if you haue no mo percels added, but three, than is that second new residue equall & alike to the thirde parcel, whiche you haue not (as yet) subtracted, if you haue wrought wel: both in your first Addition, and now in youre sub­tracting. [Page] And so in this wise, (if you haue foure, fiue, or more parcels) maye you pro­céede to make your selfe sure of your totall summe, first, by Addition of the saide par­cels, produced and gathered. And thus may you doe in any other summe of one denomi­nation or many: Sauing that I wil tel you by the way, the laste manner of proofe that was shewed you in Addition, is the beste, and the aptest proofe for the Rule of Addi­tion.

Scholer.

Sir, I thanke you moste hear­tily,

Maister.

Therefore nowe will I make an ende of Subtraction, and will instructe you in Multiplication.

MVLTIPLICATION.

MVltiplication is such an operation, that by two summes produ­ceth the third: whiche third summe so many times shall containe the firste, as there are vnities in the se­cond. [Page] And it serueth in the steade of manye Additions. As for example. When I would know how many are 30 times 48: if I should ad 48, thirtie times, it would be a lōg work. Therfore was this worke of Multiplication deuised, which shall doe that at once, that Ad­dition should do at many times.

Scholer.

I perceiue the commoditie of it partlie, but I shall not sée the full profit of it, till I know the whole vse of it. Therefore sir I beséech you, teache me the working of it.

Maister.

So I iudge it beste, but because that greate summes can not be multiplyed, but by the multiplication of digits, therefore I thinke it best to shewe you first the way of multiplying them: As when I saye, 8 times 8, or 8 times 9. &c. And as for the small digits vnder 5, it were but follie to teach any rule, seing they are so easie, that euerie childe can doe it. But for the multiplication of the grea­ter digits, thus shal you do.

Firste set your digittes one ouer the other righte, then from the vppermost downward, and from the neathermost vpwarde, drawe straighte lines, so that they make a crosse, commonlie called Saincte Andrewes crosse, [Page] as you sée here. Then looke how many eche of them lacketh of 10, and write that a­gaynst eche of them,The diffe­rence. at the end of the lynes, and that is called the Diffe­rences, [...] as if I would know how many are 7 times 8, I muste write those digittes thus.

Then doe I looke how much 8 doth differ from 10, and I [...] finde it to be 2, that 2 doe I write at the right hande of 8, at the end of the line, thus.

After that, I take the diffe­rence of 7 like­wise [...] from 10, that is 3, and I write that at the righte side of 7, as you see in this example.

Then doe I drawe a lyne vnder them, as in Addition, thus.

Laste of all I multiplie the two differen­ces, saying: 2 times [...] make 6, that muste I euer set vnder the differences, beneth ye line: then must I take the one of the differences (whiche I will, for all is like) from the o­ther digit (not from his own) as the lines of [Page] the crosse warne me, and that [...] that is left, must I write vn­der the digits. As in this ex­ample. If I take 2 from 7, or 3 from 8, there remaineth 5: that 5 must I write vnder the digits: and then there appeareth the multi­plication of 7 times 8, to be 56. And so like­wyse of anye other digits, if they be aboue 5, for if they be vnder 5, then will their diffe­rences be greater than themselfe, so that they cannot be taken out of them. And a­gayne, such little summes euerye childe can multiply, as to say: 2 times 3, or 4 times 5, and such like.

Scholer.

Truth it is. And séeing me sée­meth that I vnderstand the multiplying of the greater digits, I will proue by an exam­ple how I can doe it. I would knowe howe many are 9 times 6.

Mayster.

It is all one in value to saye 9 times 6, or 6 times 9: but yet the order is best to put the lesse summe firste, saying: 6 times 9, and so of al other summes.

Sch.

Then would I know, howe [...] many are 6 times 9: therefore I set ye digits thus, & make the crosse thus.

[Page]Then doe I set their differences [...] at the right side: the difference of 9 which is againste it, and the dif­ference of 6, whiche is 4 againste it also, as in this example.

And vnder them I drawe a line. Then doe I multiplie the [...] digites togither, saying: one tyme 4 maketh 4, that 4 doe I write vn­der the differences thus.

Then take I one of the diffe­rences from the other digite, as one from 6, or else 4 from 9, and eache wayes there resteth 5, which [...] I do write vnder the digits thus. And so appeareth the multiplica­tion of 6 times 9, to bée 54. Thus I see the feate of this man­ner of multiplication of digittes.

Maister.

Now mighte you goe straight to the multiplication of greater numbers, saue that both for your ease and suertie in wor­king, I wil draw you here a table, whereby shall appeare the multiplication of all digits, and this is it that followeth in the next page.

[Page]

MVLTIPLICATION.
1123456789
 24681012141618
 39121318212427
 4162024283236
 52530354045
 636424854
 7495663
 86472
 981

In which figure, when you would knowe the producte in anye multiplication of digits, séeke your first or last digit in the greater fi­gures, and from it go righte forthe towarde the right hande, til you come vnder the num­ber of your second digite, which is in the high­est rowe: and then the number that is in the méeting of the rowes of little squares (whiche some directlie from both your propounded di­gits) is the multiplication that amounteth of them. As if I woulde knowe by this table the multiplication of 7 times 9, séeke first 7 in the greater figures, and then go right foorthe to­ward the right hand, till you come vnder 9 of [Page] the highest rowe, in which place where y [...] so come vnder the other digit (as here for ex­ample you come vnder 9) is alwaies contai­ned the of come or product, which you séeke and that place we tearme to be in the com­mon angle, in respect of the two numbers [...] taken on the outsides, as here in that com­mon angle, where ye rewes of little squares (directly procéeding from 7 and 9) do méete▪ you haue 63, which 63 is the summe of the multiplication of 9 by 7.

Scholer.

This is very good and ready [...]. And so may I find the multiplication of any digits. But now how shall I doe in greater summes?

Maister.

When you would multiplie a­ny summe by an other, you shal marke that it is the méetest order to set the greatest nū ­ber highest, which is the place of the nūber yt must be multiplied: and likewyse the lesser number vnder it, for that is the place of the Multiplier or multiplicatour, that is to say, the nūber by which multiplicatiō is made: and is in Englishe alwayes put before this worde, Tymes: in suche speaking when I say, 20 times 70. And the number that fol­loweth this word, Times, is that whiche [Page] must be multiplied.

Therefore when I would multiplie one number by another, I must write the grea­test highest, and the lesser vnder it, as in Ad­dition. And vnder them must I draw a line. As for example: If I would multiplie 264 by 29, I must set them thus. [...]

Then must I multiplie e­uery figure of the higher row by euery figure of the nether rowe: and that that amounteth, I must set vnder the line, as thus. First I doe multiplie 4 by [...] 9, saying: 9 times 4 (or 4 times 9, whiche is all one) and that maketh 36, as the table before of digittes doeth declare, of that 36 I muste write the 6 that is the digitte, vnder the 9, and the 3 in the next place towarde the lefte hande.

Then come I to the seconde figure of the higher rowe, and saye: 9 times 6 make 54, of which I write the 4 vnder the 3, and the 5 vnder the next place (as the rea­son [...] willeth me) thus.

After that come I to the next figure, which is 2, and do mul­tiply it by 9, & that maketh 18: [Page] whereof I write 8 vnder the [...] thirde place, and the article 1 in the fourth place, thus.

And so haue I ended the first figure of ye multiplier. Wher­fore I giue it now a fine dash with my pen.

Then beginne I with the [...] nexte figure, and multiply it into all the higher figures, as thus,

First, 2 times 4 make 8, that doe I write vnder the second place: for euermore the digite or first figure of multiplication that amoun­teth of the first figure of the higher number, must be set vnder the multiplier of it, and the other in their order, toward the left hand.

Scholer.

I vnderstande you thus: that the digit of the summe amounting of the multi­plication of the first figure of the higher row, by the firste figure of the lower row or multi­plyer, must be set vnder the first place: & that that amounteth of the same first figure by the seconde multiplier, muste be set vnder the se­conde place, & so of the other, if there be more multiplyers.

Maister.

So meane I indéede: and if [Page] there amount but a digit, then must it be set vnder the multiplyer.

And now to go forth: I multiplie by the same 2, the second figure of the higher rowe, which is 6, saying: 2 times 6, [...] make 12: whereof I write the digit 2 vnder the thirde place, & the artice 1, I write vnder the fourth place.

Then do I multiplye the last figure of the higher sum, by that same 2, saying: 2 times 2 is 4: whiche I write vnder the [...] fourth place. And so haue I ended the whole multipli­cation: wherefore I also giue the 2 a dashe with my pen, thus: and so I do euer assoone as I haue dispatched any digit by whiche I multiplie. And the summs stand thus.

Than must I draw a line [...] vnder all those summes that amount of the multiplicati­cation, and must ad all them into one summe, as in this example you may sée.

[Page]Where in the first place I find but 6, and therefore write I it vnder the line. Then in the seconde place 843, make 15, whereof I write 5, and kéepe one in my minde, and so forth, as you learned in Addition. And so ap­peareth the whole summe to be 7656, which amounteth of the multiplication of 264 by 29.

Scholer.

If there be no more to be ob­serued in it, then can I do it, I suppose, as by this example I shall proue. I would [...] multiplie 1365, by 236, wherefore I set them thus.

Then doe I multiplie 5 by 6, saying: 6 times 5 make 30: of whiche I write the ciphre in the first place, [...] and the article 3 in the seconde place.

Then do I by the same 6. mul­tiplie [...] the seconde fygure of the higher summe, whiche is 6, say­inge: 6 tymes 6 make 36: of which I write the 6 vnder the se­conde place, and the 3 vnder the thirde place.

[Page]Then doe I multiplie the [...] thirde figure whiche is 3, by the same 6, and that maketh 18: of that I sette the 8 vn­der the thirde place, and the 1 in the fourth place.

Then come I to the last [...] Figure of the higher sum, and multiplie it by 6, say­ing: 6 tymes 1 make 6: that doe I write vnder the fourth place. And so haue I ended the firste multiplier, and dash him slightly with my pen.

Then begin I with the se­cond [...] multiplier, and say first 3 times 5, that maketh 15, of which I sette the 5 vnder the second place, because that the multiplier is there, and the 1 I set vnder the thirde place.

Then come I to the seconde [...] figure, that is 6, and multiplie it by 3, whiche maketh 18, of which I sette the 8 vnder the thirde place, and the article 1 in the fourth place.

[Page]Than come I to the third [...] figure, which is 3, and multi­ply it by 3, saying: 3 times 3, make 9, whiche because it is but one digit, I set vnder the fourth place.

And then comming to the laste figure 1, I multiplye it by 3, and it maketh 3. which I set in the [...] fift place, and then haue I [...]nded two of the multiply­ers, and the summes stande thus. And then I giue 3 his dashe.

[...] Then come I to the thirde multiplier, and multiplye it into euery figure of the higher summe, and firste I saye: 2 times 5 makes 10, of whiche I set the cipher vnder the mul­tiplyer in the third place, and the article 1 in the fourthe place.

And so multiplying the seconde figure 6, by that same 2, there amounteth 12: where­of [Page] I write the digitte 2, vnder [...] the fourth place, and the arti­cle 1, vnder in the fift place.

Nowe doe I multiplye by the thirde figure of the high­er summe, which is 3, and that maketh 6: which I set vnder the fifte place, as ap­peareth in the example following.

[...] Than come I to the last place, and multiplye that 1 by 2, and there a­mounteth 2, which I sette in the sixte place, and then doth the sum stande thus.

And so haue I [...] ended the whole multipli­cation.

But now (as you taughte mee) to knowe what this whole summe is, I must ad all those parcelles together, and then vnder the line will appeare as you maye see the grosse or totall summe, that is, 322140.

Mai.
[Page]

That is well done.

Sch.

Then me thinketh I would call it well done, when I knew whether I had well done or no.

Maister

It may be tryed by 9, as additi­on was, but the surest proofe is by Diuision, and therefore I will reserue that till you haue learned the art of Deuision.

And before we passe from Multiplicati­on I wil yet shew you another way of mul­tiplication, which is counted of some men, and is in déede, both more readyer, and more certayne, whiche differeth nothing from this that I haue taughte you, saue that it doeth vnderstande alwayes the ar­ticles, and ioyne them to the nexte summe, and therefore I will declare it onelye by an example.

If I woulde multiplie 1542, by 365, I must set them as I sayde before, and then do I multiply 2 by 5, and it maketh 10, [...] of which I write the article vnder the firste place, and kéepe the digit 1 in my mind.

Then saye I forth: 5 times 4 doe make 20, and the 1 in my minde, are 21, [Page] thereof I write the 1 vnder the [...] second place, and kéepe the 2 in my minde.

Then come I to the third fi­gure [...] 5 saying: 5 times 5 make 25, & the 2 in my minde make 27, whereof I write the 7 vn­der the thirde place, and kéepe the article 2 in my mynd.

Then comming to the last figure, [...] I saye: 5 times 1 make 5, and 2 in my mind make 7: that doe I write vnder the fourth place.

And then haue I ended my firste multiplier, and therefore I dashe it. Then doe I likewise with the second mul­tiplier, saying: 6 times 2 make 12, [...] therof I write the digit 2 vnder the seconde place, and keepe the article [...] in my minde.

Then say I forth: 6 times 4 ma­keth [...] 24 and 1 in my minde make 25. so I set that 5 vnder the thirde place, and kéepe the 2 in my minde.

Then multiplie I forth, saying: 6 times 5, maketh 30, and 2 in minde make 32, whereof I write [Page] the 2 vnder the fourth place and, [...] kéepe the 5 in my minde.

Then do I multiplie the last fi­gure [...] 1 by 6, and it maketh 6, to ye I adde the 3 in my minde, and it maketh 9, whiche I write in the fift place.

And so haue I ended ij. figures of the multiplier.

Than with the thirde & [...] last multiplier, do I like­wayes, and say first: 3 times 2 make 6: which I write in the thirde place vnder the multiplyer.

[...] Than by that 3 doe I multiplye likewaies the seconde figure 4, and it maketh 12, whereof I write the digitte 2 vnder the fourth place, and the article 1 I kéepe in minde.

Than come I to the thirde fi­gure [...] 5 saying: 3 times 5 maketh 15, and the 1 in my minde make 16, thereof I write the 6 vnder the fift place, and kéepe the ar­ticle 1 in my minde.

[Page]Then come I to the last figure, which is 1 and multiply it by 3, & it ma­keth [...] 3, thereto I adde the 1 in my mynde, and it maketh 4, which I write in the 6 place. And then haue I ended ye mul­tiplicatiō, and the figures stand in order thus.

Which parcels if I adde into one summe, it will be 562830, which is the grosse or total sum of al that multiplication

Scholer.

Well, this maner of multipli­catiō I perceaue: but what other sorts haue you?

Mai.

There is one way that is wrought

[figure]

by a checker Table, made thus.

Looke howe manye places your sūme hath that you woulde mul­tiplie so many squares must you make in your table, from the righte side to the lefte:Another vvay of multiplica­tion. and so manye from the higher parte to the lower, as there be places in your multipli­er. Then set downe your greatest summe first on the toppe of the table, euery figure in due order, in a square alone: I mean in those [Page] squares that be opē and vncrossed. And like­wise in those like squares at the right hand, set downe your multiplicatour or multipli­er, the last figure in the highest place, and so downward, that the first figure maye bée in the lowest place.

Scholer.

Sir if it please you, me thin­keth then I vnderstand you best, when you doe not stand long in telling the rule before examples: But propose, some example, and then in declaring it, bring in the rules withall.

Mai.

In déede, that way is easiest for a yong learner, therefore will I euen so doe. Take this example: now I would multi­plie 2 [...]36 by 2,

First I consider that my

[figure]

greatest number hath foure figures or places, & therfore I make so manye roumes betwéene lines, thus. Than I sée that of my multipliers there

[figure]

are two, wherefore I drawe so manye lines a crosse the o­ther, that there maye be two roumes betwéene them thus.

But you must not forget to [Page] let the endes of the lines run out, as if ap­peareth in this Patron, for in those open squares must your two first numbers, and al the total summe be set.

[figure]

Thē draw a crosse bar through euerye close square, so that it maye reache down to the lo­west ouerthwart lyne, as in this form. And than is your checker forme prepared.

Then sette downe your firste or greatest summe on the top, [...] & your multiplyer on ye right side in ye open squares thus.

Then begin to multiplie the first figure of the higher sum, by the highest of the multi­plier, saying: 2 times 6 make 12, that 12 must you write in the square that is against the 2 [...] and the 6, but in suche manner that the digit be sette in the nether corner of the square, & the article in the higher corner: as you may sée in this example.

And so of euery other multiplicatiō, what euer amounteth you muste write in the [Page] common square, which is against both those figures, by which you doe multiplie. And if that summe doe make but one digitte, than must it be set in yt lower corner of ye square, but if it make an article, than write the ar­ticle in the higher corner, and let the cipher go (if you will) euermore, for here it serueth for nothing, seing the lines doe distincte the places: but if the summe amounting of such multiplication doe make a mixte number, then write the article in the higher corner, and the digitte in the lower corner, as I did by that 2.

Then when you haue multiplied and en­ded the first figure, come to the nexte, & mul­tiplie it in like maner, as in saying: 2 times 3, is 6: that 6, because [...] it is but a digitt, you shal set in the nether corner of the square, next vnder 3, thus.

Then go forth, saying: 2 times 0 is 0: set [...] that vnder the barre (if you list) in the third square.

Then forth and say: [...] times 2 make 4, that set in the last square vnder the [Page] barre, so haue you ended the first multiply­er: Dashe him.

Come nowe to the seconde multiplier, and saye: 3 times 6, make 18, of whiche summe, the article 1 must [...] be set aboue the barre, in the square that is nexte to the 3 (as you sée here) and the 8 vnder the barre.

Then say 3 times thrée make 9, set it in ye next suqare beneth the bar. Then 3 times 0 is 0. write it in the next square, or let it go, for all is one.

Scholer.

I perceiue it well [...] for here the lines distinct the places, wherefore ciphers do only serue, and therefore here they neede not to be.

Mayster.

Then saye farther: 3 tymes 2, make 6: write that in the [...] last square, then will the whole figure stand thus.

Sch.

Now could I (me séemeth) do like againe. But how shal I do now to gather the summe?

Mai.

Marke firste the order of the places in this figure, and so shall you perceaue the reason of gathering them into a summe.

[Page]The sloape barres do part the places; so yt the first place is the lowest corner in al such figures (of the nethermost square nexte the right hand: & all the halfe squares betwéene that barre and the next, standeth for the se­cond place, and so the roome betwéene that & the next bar, is the third place: & so forth. Now if you perceaue this, then must you ad all the figures of one place together, as if you had an Addition of diuers summes.

Scholer.

If I vnderstand you right, then must I take here in this example 8 to be in the first place: 9, 1 and 2, in the second: 0, 6, 1, in the third: 6, 0, in the fourth: 4 in the fift: and the sixt place hath no figure.

Mai.

You say well, and the reason is bi­cause the multiplication seruing to ye square, made but a digit.

Scholer

Then it is all one, [...] as if they stoode thus.

Mayster.

Euen so it is: and now adde this sum, and there wil appeare the totall of the multiplication to be 46828.

A proofe vvithout squares.And if you will sée the agréement of this maner of multiplication, and the other that you learned before, then multiply those two [Page] summes (that is 2036, by 23) [...] after the first maner without squares.

Scholer.

You meane to set them thus in order.

And then multiplie 3 into 6 [...] make 18: 3 times 3 make 9, 3 times 0 is 0 then 3 times 2 make 6: whiche must be set thus.

Then do I likewise with the second mul­tiplier, saying: 2 times 6 make 12, 2 times 3 make 6 2 times 0 is 0, & 2 times 2 make 4, which when I adde to the other then will the whole multiplication stād [...] thus.

Mai.

So that you may sée in euery place the same figures, as they were in the multipli­cation by squares, though they differ in heighte and lownesse of places, but being added to­gither, they make one summe.

And thus now ye haue learned thrée sorts of multiplicatiō, which liketh you best, that may you vse.

Yet are there other forms, but sith they no­thing [Page] differ from these thrée in effect, but only in setting of the nūbers, I will ouerpasse them till a more méeter place and time. And now wil I instruct you in Diuision, so that you thinke your self sufficiently to perceaue what I haue taught you.

Sch

Yes sir I thanke you, but I doe not perceaue how to examine my worke, to trie whether I haue well done or no.

Mai.

That is commonly vsed by ye proofe of 9, as you learned before in Addition and Subtraction, saue that it hath this wayes diuers from them.

Firste you must make a crosse after

[figure]

this maner.

Then must you examine your sum that shoulde be multiplyed, and looke what remaineth after casting awaye of 9, that sette you at the one side of the crosse: then examine the multiplier, and whatsoe­uer remayneth in it, after casting away 9 as often as you can, write that at the other side of the crosse: then must you multiplie those two numbers togither, and looke what amounteth thereof, if it be vnder 9, write it at ye higher part of ye crosse: but if it be aboue 9, then take thence 9 as often as you canne, [Page] and write the reste at the heade of the crosse. As in the laste example of multiplication, the number to be multiplied is 2036, wherein is once 9, and 2 remaineth, which I [...] write at one side of a crosse thus.

Then doe I examine the mul­tiplier, [...] which is 23, wherin there is no 9 but 5 in al, that 5 therfore I set at the other side of the crosse, thus.

Then doe I multiplie by 2 and it maketh 10, from whiche I withdraw 9 and there re­steth 1 that 1 do I set at the head of the crosse, then doe I examine the grosse summe, amounting of the multiplication, whiche is 46828. wherein I finde 9 three times and 1 remayning, that .1. I set at the foote of the crosse and then I see it to agree [...] with the other 1 at the toppe of the crosse, and so know I that I haue done well: for if they two did differ, then were my worke vaine, and the multipli­cation false.

This is the common proofe, but the moste certaine proofe is by Diuision, of which I wil anone instruct you.

Scholer

Sir, what is the chiefe vse of Mul­tiplication?

Maister.
[Page]

The vse of it is greater then you can yet vnderstand: howbeit, these plaine cō ­modities it hath, that if you would resolue a­nye great and whole valure into many small and lesse portions: as if you woulde chaunge poundes into shillings, pence or anye other greater or smaller parcels, by multiplication, yée shal do it spéedely and easily. Also if you shoulde néede to adde one summe to it selfe, or to anye other oftentimes, you shall doe it by Multiplication muche more spéedelie, readily, easily and surelye, then by often and sundrye Additions. Take you these commodities grossely shewed for an answere at this time, and hereafter I wil more abundantlye make you to perceiue the vse of it.

DIVISION.

Scholer.

WEll sir, then in Diui­sion I praye you to instructe mée. But me thinketh by the name of it, that it shoulde be al one with Multiplication: for I call that Diuision, when any thing is parted into diuerse & ma­ny partes.

Maister.

You take it as it is taken com­monlye, howbeit, if you marke wel, you shall perceiue that it is quite contrary to Multipli­cation, and doth not parte one thing or fewe things into many, but contrary ways it brin­geth many parcels in to fewe, but yet so, that these fewe taken togither, are equal in valure to the other many: for by Diuision pence are tourned into shillings, and shillings into poundes: as for example of 1 [...]0 shillings, it [Page] maketh 6 pounds, so are 120 tourned into 6, which is a smaller number: but then if you consider the denominatours, you shal sée that they are such, that one of the latter is equal to 20 of the first, and so in value the summes are one, though in number they doe farre differ, and the latter summe is the lesser, and so is it alwaies in diuision how be it, yet in the wor­king, the summe is parted by an other, & ther­of doth it take the name.

Scholer

I thinke I shal better vnderstand the reason of the name, when I know the vse of the worke, therefore now would I gladlye learne that.

Maister.

Diuision vvhat it is.Diuision is a distributing of a greater summe by the vnities of a lesser Or Diuision is an Arithmetical producing of a thyrde number, in respect of two propounded numbers: which thirde number shal so oftē containe an vnit, as the greater of the two propounded numbers doth contain the lesser. So that, euen as Multiplication did séeme to serue in stéede of manye Additions, so Diui­sion maye seeme to be in place of many Sub­tractions: Bicause that third number briefly expresseth, how many times the lesser of your two propounded nūbers may be Subtracted, [Page] from ye greater: As in practise wil more plain­ly appeare. Therefore (as you may perceyue) vnto Diuision are required three nūbers: the first, which should be diuided, and that muste (generally) be the greater: and the seconde, by which the other must be diuided, and that is (generallie) the lesser, & is called ye Diuisor. And the thirde which aunswereth to the que­stion, How many times: and therefore is cal­led the Quotient.

The first must be firste written and the se­conde so set vnder it that the last figure of the lower number be right vnder the laste of the higher,A generall rule for placing the figures. contrarie ways to the worke of the o­ther kindes of Arithmetike: for in them the two first figures were set euer méete one vn­der the other, but in Diuision the last figures must be set méet, except it chance so,An excep­tion. yt the last figure of the Diuisor be greater then ye last of the higher number, for then you shal set the last of the Diuisor, vnder the last (saue one) of the higher number, as for example.

If you shoulde diuide 365 (whithe are the summe of the dayes of a yeare) [...] by 2 [...] which are the dayes of a common moneth, then shoulde you set them thus.

[Page]But if you would diuide those [...] 365 dayes, by 52. whiche is the number of wéekes in one yeare, then should you set them thus.

Likewayes if I would di­uide [...] the same 365 by 4, whiche is the summe of the quarters of a yeare, then muste I set them thus.

Scholer.

Syr, this doe I vnderstande, but howe nowe shoulde I do to diuide the one by the other?

Maister.

You must beginne with the laste figure next the left hande, and see howe many times the last figure of the diuisor may be ta­ken out of the last figure of the ouer number, and that shall you note within a crooked line toward your right hand. As for example.

I woulde diuide 365 by 28, [...] then set I those two summes thus.

And I looke howe manye times I may find 2 (which is the last figure of the diuisor) in 3, (which is the last of the num­ber to be diuided) and considering that I can take 2 out of 3 but once, I make a crooked line at the right hande of the numbers, & with [Page] in it I set 1, and that is called the Quotiente number, as I tolde you.Quotient number. Then bycause that when 2 is taken out of 3, there [...] remaineth 1, I must write that 1 ouer 3, and deface or cancell the 3 and the 2, then will the fi­gures stand thus.

Then must I goe to the nexte figure of the diuisor, and take it likewayes so many times out of the figures that be ouer it, and looke what doth remaine, that I must write ouer them, and cancel them, as in this example.

Therefore now I do take once 8 out of 16, and there remayneth 8, whiche I must set o­uer the 6, and cancel or crosse [...] out the 15. and the 8 of the diuisor: And then will the fi­gures stande thus.

And so haue I once wrought.

Scholer.

So I perceiue that you take the nether figure not only out of the other that is right ouer him, but out of that with the other also that remayneth before, and are written toward the left hand.

Maister.

So must you doe: for you must so take the diuisor out of the ouer number, that there remain not ouer it so great a summe as [Page] it selfe is, for then were your worke in vaine.

But yet againe here must you marke, that when you seeke how many times the laste fi­gure of the diuisor may be found in the num­ber ouer him,Note. that you looke also whether you may as often finde al the figures folowing in those that are aboue them, (considering al the remainders if there be any) if not, take youre Quotient lesse by one and then proue again, and so stil, til you find a moete Quotient: And by that moete quotiēt must you alwaies mul­tiplye your diuisor, and the product set vnder your diuisor, so yt his first figure stand vnder the firste figure of your diuisor, and the second vnder the second, and so foorth: and then sub­tract that product from the number to be di­uided, that standeth directlie ouer it, as you haue séene me do.

When you haue thus wrought once, than must you beginne againe and write your di­uisour a newe, nearer towarde [...] the righte hande by one place, as in this example, you shall sette 2 vnder 8, and 8 vnder 5, thus

Then (as before) séeke how many times you may take your diuisor out of [Page] the number ouer him now.

Scholer.

That may I do here 4 times.

Maister.

Truth it is that you may finde 2, foure times in 8: but then marke whether you can finde the figure following so manye times in the other that is ouer him: Can you finde 8 foure times in 5?

Scholer.

No, neither yet once.

Maister.

Therefore take [...] out of [...], once lesse.

Scho.

That is 3 times.

Ma.

Well, then 3 times 2 make 6:Marke hovv to consider this kind of remainer. if I take 6 out of 8, there remayneth 2: which 2 wyth the 5 following, make 25, in whiche summe I finde 8 in times also, and therefore I take 3 as a true quotient, and write [...] it within the crooked line of the quotient, before the one thus.

Then saye I: 3 times 2 [...] make 6, then 6 out of 8 resteth 2, therefore I cancel the 2 and the 8 and write ouer it the 2 yt doth remaine, thus.

Then do I take 8 as many times out of 2 [...], saying: 3 times 8 make 24, and if I take 24 [Page] out of 25, there remaineth 1: [...] so then I cancell 25 and 8, and ouer the 5 I set 1, thus. Or you mought (after you founde 3 to be a fit quotiēt) straight way haue multi­plied the whole diuisor 28, by that 3, at once: which giueth 84, whiche being set vnder 28, and duelie subtracted from 85, [...] of the number diuided, gi­ueth 1, ye remainer of ye whole diuision: as before you hadde. Worke which waye you list: here you sée also the forme.

And now haue I done with diuiding, for I can finde my diuisor 28 no more in the ouer summe.

Scho.

No, except you would part the 1 that remayneth, into 28 partes.

Mai

That is wel saide, and so must we doe in such cases, whē there remaineth any thing: but I wil let that passe nowe, and wil make you perfect in diuision of whole numbers, and wil hereafter teach you particularly of brokē numbers, called Fractions.

Now if you do perceiue the order of diui­sion, then do you diuide this summe, 136280 [Page] by 452.

Scho.

Firste I set downe the number that should be diuided, then doe I set the diuisour vnder it, so that the laste figure of it be righte vnder the last figure of the [...] ouer number. Then wil it be thus.

Maister.

Can you take the last of your diuisour (which is 4) out of 1, which is the last of the ouer number?

Sch.

I had forgotten, because the last of the diuisor cannot be taken out of the laste of the ouer number, in so much as it is the greater, therefore must I set the diui­sor [...] one place more foreward, toward the right hande thus.

And then muste I looke how often I maye finde the last figure of the diuisour (that is 4) in 13, which thing I maye do 3 times, ther­fore doe I say: 3 times 4 is 12, whiche I take out of 13, and there remaineth 1. Then do I make at the right hande of my summes a cro­ked line, and write before it my quotient 3: and I cancell 13 and 4, [...] and ouer the 3 I set ye 1 that remaineth, and thē the figures stand thus.

[Page]Then do I multiplie the same quotient in­to euerie figure of the diuisor, and withdraw the summe that amounteth out of ye numbers ouer them, as first I saye: [...] times [...] make 15, which I take from 46, and there resteth 1, I cancell therefore 16 and 5, [...] and write ouer the 6 that 1 that remaineth, thus.

Then doe I say lyke­waies, 3 times 2 makes 6, whiche I take out of 12 and there resteth 6, therefore I cancell the 12 [...] and the 2. and ouer the 2 I write 6 that remay­neth, thus.

Then should I set for­ward [...] the diuisor, into the next place toward ye right hand, thus.

Maister.

But you maye sée, that ouer the 4 is no figure, therfore must I set the diuisor yet fore­warder by an other place.

And marke, when soeuer it chanceth so, yt you should set forwarde the diuisor, and that it can not stande there, bycause there is no nū ­ber ouer the laste place, or if there be any, it is [Page] lesser then the laste figure of the diuisor, then must you remoue the diuisor yet once again: and because that his firste place of remouing serued not to subtracte him so much as once, therefore shal you write in the quotient a Ci­pher 0. And if you should by chaunce néede to do so oftētimes, for euerie time write a cipher in the quoitente. The reason of this, will I shew you hereafter.

Scholer.

Then must I [...] set my summes thus.

And bicause I remoued [...] the diuisor, so yt I ouer­skipped one place, A must write a cipher in the quo­tient: & then must I séeke a new quotient, as in this exāple I must say, How many times 4 is there in 6? and sith it can be but once, therfore do I write 1 in the quotient, and then saye I: 1 time 4; ta­kē [...] out of 6, remaineth 2, I cancel the 6 and the 4, & write 2 ouer thē thus.

Then saye I againe, once 5 out of 28, remai­neth [Page] 23, I let the 2 stande as it did, and ouer ye 8 I set 3, cancelling the 8 [...] and the 5 vnder it, thus.

Maist.

You might as well haue saide, once 5 out of 8. & so remayneth 3 but now go foorth.

Scho.

Then once 2 out of 0, can not be, what shal I now doe?

Ma.

Borow of the next number that is be­hinde (for there is 230) and doe as you lear­ned in Subtraction in a like case.

Scholer.

Then must I borrowe 1 of the 3 comming behinde nexte, and make that 0 to be 10: and then take I 2 out of 10, and there resteth 8. And because I borrowed one of the 3. I must cancel the 3, and [...] write 2 ouer it: then doth the figure stand thus.

Maister.

Nowe haue you done, and yet remai­neth 228, and your quoti­ent shew you, that if you diuide 136280 by 452 you shal finde your diuisour in your gre­ter number 301. that is CCC times & once and 228 remaining.

And in the other example, where I diuided [Page] 365 by [...], the quotient was 13, & 1 remay­ned: whereby I know that in a yeare (which containeth 365 daies) there are 13 monthes reckening 28 dayes (or 4 wéekes) iuste to a moneth, and 1 day more.

Sch.

Why then do we cal a yeare but 12 monethes.

Ma.

Of that at a more conuenient time wil I fullie instruct you: but nowe it is not con­uenient to entangle your minde with other things, than do directlie pertaine to your mat­ter. Therefore if you remember what you haue hearde, you haue learned a short mone [...] of diuision, which I would haue you often to practise, so that you maie be perfect in it, and hereafter I wil shew you certaine other pro­per points touching it,

Scholer.

Then I pray you, yet tel me, how I shal examine and trie my worke, whether I haue done wel or no, that thoughe no man be by me to tell me, yet I may perceiue it my selfe.

Maister.

Some men (yea and commonlie) do trie it by the rule of 9, as in all the other kinds, saue that their order is this. First they cast away 9, as often as they can, out of the diuisor, and that remaineth, they set at [Page] one side of a crosse: As in our first example, the diuisor was 28, from which you [...] may take 9 thrée times and 1 re­maineth which they set by a crosse, thus.

Then do they likewise examine the quo­tient (which in our example is 13) and from thence they cast away 9 as oftē as they can, and the remainer they set at the other side of the crosse, and then multiplie they toge­ther those ij. remainers: and to it that a­mounteth they adde the remainer of the di­uision; if there were any, from that whole summe they withdraw 9 as often as they [...]an, and the rest they set at the head of the crosse: as in our example the quotient is 13, from which take 9, and there remaineth on­ly 4 and therefore must you set 4 [...] at the other side of the crosse, thus.

Then multiplie 4 by 1, and it yieldeth but 4 thereto adde the remainer of the diuision (which was 1) and it will bée 5, which summe doth not amounte to 9, and therefore must be set wholy at [...] the head of the crosse, as you sée here.

And this number on the [Page] heade of the crosse, is the first proofe, to whych if you finde an other like in the number that was diuided, then haue you done wel.

Therefore now shal you likewise examine the whole summe that was diuided, and take away 9 as often as you can, and that that re­maineth, set at the foote of the crosse: and if it be equal to that in the head of the crosse, then haue you wel done, else not.

As in our example the whole summe was 365, which maketh 1 [...], from [...] that take 9, & there resteth 5, which set at the foote of the crosse, thus.

And you shal sée that they agrée: therefore haue you wel done.

Scholer.

Nowe will I likewise examine our second example, where ye diuisor was 452 whiche maketh 11: from thence [...] I take 9, and the 2 that remai­neth I set at the right side of a crosse, thus.

Then examine I the quoti­tient, which was 301, where I finde but only 4. that do I set at the other side [...] of the crosse thus.

Then do I multiplie 4 by 2, [Page] and it maketh 8, to that do I ad the remay­ner of the diuision (which was 228, and ma­keth 12) and they two make 20, wherein I finde twise 9, and 2 remaining, that [...] 2 must I sette at the heade of the crosse, thus.

Then doe I examine the whole number to be diuided, which was 136280, where I finde twise 9, and 2 re­maining, [...] which I set at the foote of the crosse, thus.

And because that it doeth agrée with the figure at the head of the crosse, I know that the diuision was well wrought.

Mai.

This is the common proofe, howbe­it, the more certaine working is by the con­trary kinde, as to prooue Diuision by mul­tiplication, thus.

Multiplie the quotient by the diuisor, and if the summe that amounteth be equall to the sum that should be diuided, then haue you well diuided, else not.

Howbeit, this must you marke, yt if there remained any thing after the diuision, that muste you adde to the sum that amounteth of the multiplication: as in our first exāple [Page] the quotient was 13, and the diuisor was 28: Now multiplie the one by the other, & the summe will bée 364: to that if you adde the one that remained after the diuision, than will it be 363, which was the summe that should be diuided, & therefore I knowe that I haue well done.

Scholer.

Now will I prooue the same in the second example, whose diuisor was 452, and the quotient 301: these doe I multiplye together, and there amounteth 136052, to which if I adde the 228 that remayned, then will it be 136280, which was the whole summe to be diuided, and therefore I per­ceiue that I haue well done.

Mai.

This is the surest way to examine Diuision by Multiplication: and contrarie waies the surest proofe of Multiplication, is Diuision.

And therefore now wil I shew how you may proue Multiplication by Diuision.

When you haue ended multiplicatiō,A proofe of Multi­plication by Diuisi­on. and would know whether you haue well done or not, set the grosse sum that amounteth of the Multiplication ouermost, and diuide it by the multiplier: and if the quotient be the same number that shoulde be multiplied, [Page] then haue you well wrought, else not: as in that example where we multiplied 264, by 29, the grosse summe was 7656.

Nowe if you will knowe whether that multiplication be true, you shall diuide that 7656 by the multiplier, 29: and you shall perceiue that the quotient will bée 264, and that is a token that you haue well wrought.

Scholer.

By your patience I wil proue that: and first I set down the grosse summe & the multiplier, not after the rule of multi­plication, but after the rule of diuision, for now that nūber is become the diuisor, that was before the multiplier, I shall [...] set them therefore thus.

Then shall I séeke howe many times 2 in 7, that may be 3 times, and 1 remayneth: but then maye not 9 bée found so often in 16, therefore must I take a lesser quotient, that is to say, 2 [...] then say I twise 2 maketh 4, which I take out of 7, & there remaineth 3, then do I cancell 7 and 2, and ouer 7 I write 3 and in [...] the quotient I set 2, so the fi­gures stand thus.

Then say I forth, 2 times [Page] 9 make 18 which I bate out of 36, and there resteth 18 then cancell I 3 and ouer him set 1, and likewise I cancell 6 and 9, and ouer them I set 8, so that thus stand [...] the figures.

Then doe I sette forwarde the diuisor by one place, and séeke a newe quotient, that is to saye, how many times 2 are in 18, which I finde to be 9 times, but then can I not finde 9 so many times in 5, therefore I take a lesser quotient, as to say, 8: but yet is that to greate, for if I take 8 times 2 out of 18, there remaineth but 2 and I can not finde 8 tymes 9 in 25, therefore yet I take a lesser quotient, that is 7, which is also to great, for if I take 7 times 2 out of 18, there resteth 4, but nowe I cannot take▪ 7 tymes 9 out of 45, therefore yet I séeke a lesser quotient, as to saye, 6: then saye I▪ 6 times 2, make 2, that I [...] take out of 18, and there re­maineth 6, so I cancell the 18 & the 2 and write 6 ouer 8, thus

Then say I forth: 6 times 9 maketh 54, that take I out of 65 and there remaineth 11 [Page] [...] and the figures stand thus.

Then must I set forth the diuisor againe, and séeke a newe quotient, whiche will be 4: for though I maye finde 2 in 11 fiue tymes, and 1 remayne, [...] yet I cannot finde 9 so often in 16, therefore I set the figures thus.

And ye 4 in the quotiēt I multiplie into the fi­gures of the diuisor, saying: 4 times 2 ma­keth 8, which I take out of [...] 11, & there resteth 3, there­fore I cancell the 11 & the 2 and set 3 ouer the firste place of 11, thus.

And then doe I say forth, 4 times 9 maketh 36, which I take frō 36, and there remaineth nothing, so that ye quo­tient of this diuisiō, where 7656 is diuided by 29, is 264, which doth declare that if 264 be multiplied by 29, the sum will be 7656. And thus I perceiue now how both Multi­plication is proued by Diuision, & diuision also by Multiplication.

Mayster.
[Page]

Nowe haue I ended the fiue cōmon kinds of Arithmetike: for as toucing Mediation, Duplation, triplation, and such other, they are no seueral kinds of Arithme­tike, but are contained vnder the other: for Mediation is contained vnder Diuision, & is nothing else but diuiding by 2: and so are duplation and Triplation contained vnder Multiplication: for Duplation is nothing else but multiplying by 2, and triplation is multiplying by 3, of which I wil only pro­pose an exāple,An exam­ple of Me­diation. for the rules you haue heard alreadie.

If you woulde mediate or diuide into [...], this sum, 4531010, you shal set 2 for the di­uisor, & work as you lear­ned [...] before, as thus.

Then I finde 2 in 4 two times, therefore my quotient must be 2: so I cancell 4 & 2, and remoue the diuisor [...] forward, thus.

Then againe I finde 2 in 5 twise, and 1 remaining, so I write 2 againe for my secōd num­ber [...] of the quotiente, and cancell 5 and 2, and o­uer 5 I set 1, thus.

[Page]Then remoue I the diuisor forward and séeke a new quotient, which is 6: then saye I, 6 times 2 make 12, take that out of 13, and there resteth 1, so I [...] cancell 2 and 13, and ouer 3 I sette 1 thus. Then remoue I the diuisor forward; and séeke a new quotient which is 5. then take I twise [...] out of it; and there resteth 1, so I cancell the 2 and the [...] last figure of 1, and let the firste stande thus.

Then remoue I the diuisor forward, and séeke a newe quo­tient, which is 5: then take I 2 fiue times out of 10, and there resteth nothing.

Then remooue [...] I againe the di­uisor forwarde, thus.

But bicause I can not finde the diuisor in the number ouer it, I muste sette a cipher in the quotiente, and remooue [Page] the diuisor to the [...] next place, as ap­peareth in the fi­gure before.

Then séeke I a new quotient which I finde to be 5, for so many times maye I haue 2 in 10. Then haue I fully ended this Mediation or Di­uision by 2, and the quotiēt is this, 2265505, which is the halfe of 4531010, as you maye trie by Duplation: for double that quotiēt,Duplation. or multiplie it by 2, and the same number will amount.

I will no longer tarry about these, séeing they are but members of the other kindes.Easie for­mes of multipli­cation. But here now wil I teache you certayn ea­sie formes both of Multiplication & of diui­sion, and first of multiplication.

If you would therfore multiplie any sum by 10, you shall néede to doe no more but ad a cypher before his first place, as for exāple: 36 multiplied by 10, make 360.

Likewise if you wil multiplie any summe by 100 put two ciphers at his beginning.

So if you would multiplie any sum by a thousand, ad thrée ciphers to the beginning of it.

Scholer.
[Page]

This doe I well perceiue, and also the reason of it.

Mai.

I will omit all reasons till our next méeting, when I shall tell you the reason of all other partes of Arithmetike also: and as to our matter now, looke (as I haue tolde you) that you both remember it, and also of­ten practise it.

But if you would multiplie any number by 5, marke first whether the number be e­uen or odde: and if it be euen take the halfe of it, and write a cipher at the beginning of it, as for example: I would multiplie 2564 by 5, I take the half of it, which is 1282 (as you may know by Mediation) and before it I set a cipher, thus, 12820, and this is fiue times 2564.

And thus may you do with any other euē summe, that you would multiplie by 5.

But if the summe be od, as for example 2563, thē must you take the lesser half of it, or (if you wil) take away 1 from the first fi­gure (as here take 1 from 3) & then take the halfe of the rest, and sette before it 5: as of 2563, the lesser half is 1281, for here I take but 1 for the half of 3: and if I put 5 before that lesser halfe, then haue I multiplied it 5 [Page] times, as thus, 12815.

Scholer.

What meane you by the lesser halfe.

Mai.

There is no iust half of any od num­ber, therefore if we diuide an od number in­to 2 parts, as nigh equall as can be, yet will the one halfe excéede the other halfe by one, as for example. The two nearest halfs of 9, are 5 and 4: and likewise of 15, are 7, & 8, where you sée that ye one part still is greater then ye other by 1. Now it is easie to knowe which is the greater halfe, and which is the lesser halfe.

Scho.

Then I perceaue you, and can doe likewise (I doubt not) with anye summe. For if it be not very easie to part into halfs, then will I doe it by Mediation easilye y­nough.

Mai.

That is a sure way. And now haue you learned howe to multiplie easilie by 5, 10, 100, 1000: and of like maner maye you doe with any other of that sort.

But now if you will multiplie by 20, 30, 40, and so forth: or by 200, 300, and suche like, where there is one cipher in the firste place, or many orderly in ye first places, you shal take away those ciphers, and multiplie [Page] the sum only by the other figure or figures, (if they be many) & then at the beginning of the sum that amounteth, shal you set so ma­ny cyphers as you tooke away.

Example of 2873, which I would multi­plie by 300. First I cast away the 2 ciphers from the multiplier, & I multiplie the sum by only 3 that is left, and it amounteth to 8619: before which I put the two ciphers that I toke awaye before, and then is it 861900. And that is the summe that amoū ­teth, when 2873 is multiplied by 300.

Scholer.

And if there were two or more figures beside the ciphers, I must only take away the cyphers, and multiplie by ye other figures, as I learned before: as if I woulde multiplie 93648 by 25000, I should take away the thrée cyphers, and multiplie the same by 25, and then at the beginning of that totall summe, should I adde the thrée cyphers againe.

Mai.

Euen so: but and if it chaunce the number that should be multiplied, or both the summes as wel the number that should be multiplyed as the multiplier, to haue ciphers in their first places, euermore caste away the Ciphers, and worke by the rest. [Page] But remember to restore as many ciphers to ye amounting sūme, as you bated before, as in this example: 30200 shall be multi­plied by 206: I shall only take awaye the two ciphers from the greater number, and then multiplie 302 by 206, and afterwarde ad the two cyphers againe. But if I would multiplie the same 30200 by 2060, I shall not onely take awaye the two ciphers from the number that should be multiplied, but also I may take away the one cipher from the multiplier, and then must I adde 3 Ci­phers to the summe that amounteth: but take héed that you take away no cipher that commeth after any signifying figure, as in this last example, you may not take awaye that in the fourth place of the higher num­ber, neither that in the third place of ye mul­tiplier: how be it, yet this you may doe: If one cipher or more come in the middest of your summes, you may multiplie by ye other figures, and ouerskippe [...] them, but so, that you giue euerye figure his due place, as thus: I will multiplie 3026 by 2004, therfore I set them thus.

[Page]And thus doe I multiplie then: Firste 4 times 6 make 24: I sette the 4 vnder the first place, and kéepe the 2 still in my mind: Then saye I againe: 4 times 2 maketh 8, and the 2 that is in my minde, maketh 10, I sette downe the Cypher 0, and kéepe the article one in my minde. Then 3 tymes 4, is 12, and the 1 in my minde maketh 13, I sette downe the Figure 3, and kéeping the 1 still in my minde hauing no more places of ye vpper number to mul­tiplie it withall: I put it downe nexte 2 in the fift place.

But now when I come to the next place being a Cipher 0: I let it go, because it multiplieth nothing: And likewise the se­cond cipher.

But then when I doe come to the 2, and multiplie it into the 6 of the ouer number, you must take héede (according as I taught you in multiplication) that the first number amounting of the multipli­cation, [...] be sette righte vn­der the multiplier, and the other orderly towarde the left hand, according as you may sée in this example. [Page] whiche being finished with the Addition thereof gathered togither, will stand as this example sheweth.

Which is indéede wrought [...] so muche sooner and shor­ter by ouerskipping of the two ciphers whiche else woulde haue hadde two workinges more as by the same example here also set down doth appeare.

Scholer.

Sir, I thanke you: for I sée greate ease in this waye of Multiplicati­on, and if you canne shewe mée suche like in Diuision, you shall greatlye further me.

Mayster.

Yes, I will teache you some easie ways in diuision also, and first this: If you would diuide any summe by 10, you shall onely with your penne make a square line,Easie forme [...] of Diuision. betwéen the first figure of your summe and the seconde, and than haue you done: for the whole number that followeth the line, standeth for the quotient and the figure that is before the line, is the remainer: as for example, 3648 diuided by 10, [...] will stand thus.

[Page]Where 364 is the quotient, and betoke­neth that so many times are 10 in 3648: and the 8 after the line, is the remainer, which cannot be diuided into 10, but by breaking it into fractions, wherwith I wil not meddle yet.

And so likewise if you would diuide any summe by 100, with your pen, you shal cut away the two first figures, & if ye would di­uide by 1000, you must cut away the 3 first figures, & so of any other diuisor, whose last figure is 1, & the other be ciphers, looke how many ciphers the diuisor hath, and so many figures at the beginning shal you cut away with the squire line, and they stand alwaies for the remainer because they are lesse than the diuisor, and cannot be diuided by it, and the other figures that be behinde ye line, stād for the Quotient.

But now if your diuisor haue any other fi­gure in his last place than 1, and in al his o­ther places haue ciphers, looke howe manye ciphers there be, cut away so many of ye first figures of the nūber that should be diuided, and diuide the rest that followeth the line, by that figure that is in the last place, as if it were the whole diuisor.

[Page]Example of 64284, whiche I would di­uide by 300, here must I cut away the two first figures, (for so many ciphers my diuisor hath) and must diuide the rest by 3 whiche is the figure in the last place of the diuisor. First therefore I part away the two firste [...] figures, & the summe standeth thus.

Then do I diuide 642, by 3, and the quotient is 214, for in 6 I finde twice 3, & in 4 once, and 1 remayning, which 1 with the 2 next before, doth make 1 [...], wherein I finde 3 foure times: and this is a readie way to turne shillings into pounds: for sith one pound doth contain 20 shillings, I must diuide the whole nūber of shillings by 20 therfore easilie to do it, I see that my diuisor hath one ciphre, and therefore I cut away one figure from the be­ginning of the whole summe of shillings, & then I do mediate or diuide by 2 the other fi­gures or summe that foloweth.

Scho.

I wil put an example.

If you would diuide 64287 shillings by 20, that is to say: If I would turne so many shil­lings into poundes, I must cast away ye first figure, that is 7. & diuide the rest, that is 6428 by 2 so shal the Quotient be 3214, whereby I know that 64287 shillings, make 3 [...]14 poūds, [Page] and 7 shillings remayning.

Mai.

Nowe proue by Multiplication whe­ther you haue wel done or no.

Scho.

The quotient is 3214. whiche I doe multiplie by the diuisor 2, and it doth amoūt to 6428.

Maist.

Hereby may you perceiue not onlie that you haue wel done, but also how by diui­siō you may turn shillings easilie into poūds: And contrarie waies, by Multiplication you may turne pounds into shillings.

But here shal you sée amongst diuers men, diuerse formes of suche diuision, but if you marke what I haue tolde you, you shall per­ceiue easilie al their waies: for some men doe not cut away so manie of the first figures of the sum yt they would diuide,An other manner of the abridg­ment. as there are cy­phers in the firste places of their diuisor, but they set al their ciphers orderly vnder the first places of the number that they would diuide, and then with the other figure (or figures if they be manye) they diuide the reste of their summe. Example. If they [...] would diuide 725931, by 3400, they set their sums thus.

And then doe they diuide orderlie till they [Page] come to the ciphers: for there they stay & ende their worke, as in this example: They seeke how often 3 may be founde in 7, which is 2 times, and one remayning, therefore they set 2 in the quotient, and can­cel [...] 3 and 7, & ouer 7 they set ye 1 yt remained, thus.

Then do they go forthe [...] saying: two times 4 ma­keth 8, whiche they take out of 12, and there re­maineth 4, thus.

Then renew they the diuisor forward, and séeke how often 3 maye be founde in 4, which is but once, and 1 remaineth, then set they 1 in the quotient, and can­cell [...] 3 and 4, & ouer them they set that 1, thus.

Then take they once 4 [...] out of 15, & there resteth 11. Or else more easilie: Take once 4 out of 5, & there resteth 1, so they cancel the 4 & 5, and set 1 ouer them, thus.

Then set they forth ye diuisor againe, & seeke [Page] how manye times 3 are in 11, whiche they finde 3 times, and 2 remayning: so they set 3 in the quotient, and [...] cancell 11 and 3, and ouer them setteth 2, thus.

Then do they mul­tiplie [...] 4 by 3, whiche maketh 12, that with drawe they out of 29, and there resteth 17. of whiche the 7 must be set ouer the 9, and the 1 ouer the 2, thus.

And now are the two ciphers next ensuing, so that the diuisor can no more be set forward, and therefore is the diuision ended, and the remainer is 1731.

Nowe the quotient, which is 213, doth de­clare, that if you diuide 725931, by 3400▪ you shall finde it therein 213 times, and there remayneth 1731, so shall you finde it, if you worke as I taught you, by cutting away the two firste figures, bycause of the two ciphers. But this must you marke (as you maye per­ceiue by this last example) that if there be left any other remainer in the summe that was [Page] behinde the squire line, that the remayner must be set to the latter ende of the firste re­mayner, whiche was cut [...] awaye wyth the squire line: as if you woulde diuide 725931 by 3400, after the forme that I taught you, then woulde your summes appeare thus.

So that 17, whiche remayneth after the line, must be sette to the 31 (that was cut a­way wyth the line) in higher places, as you sée here: where that 17 with the 31, do make 1731.

And here woulde I make an ende of Diui­sion, sauing that there commeth to my minde one late inuention of easie Diuision whiche I will brieflie set foorthe to you,An other inuention of easie Diuision. so that if you finde ease in it, you maye vse it. Bicause that the hardest point in Diuision, is the rea­die and easie finding of the quotient number: and againe, if that be truely knowen, all the rest is but light to be done: therfore this way­es shall you quickelye and truelye finde the quotient.

[Page]Firsts write the nine figures of [...] number: I meane 123456789, not a long as I haue set them now, but vp and downe as in this forme. And at the left side of them draw a long line, as you sée here: Then consider the diuisor, by whiche you intende to worke, and sette it on the lefte side of the long line, righte againste 1, and for a distin­ction drawe a line vnder it: then multiplye your diuisor orderlie by eache of those figures, beginning with 2, and so goe downewarde till you haue ended all. And looke what doth amount of the multiplicatiō of each figure into the diuisor, then write it a­gainst the figure wherby you did multiply.

Sc.

By example I may perceiue it better.

Maister.

Take this example [...] 263845 to be diuided by 64 thē must I set the 9 figures as I saide before, and the diuisour must I set against the 1, thus.

Thē must I multiply ye diui­sor byech figure orderly: first by 2 and it maketh 128, which I must sette against 2 at the left [Page] hande.

Then multiplie 64 by 3, and it maketh 192, whiche is sette against 3. Then 4 times 64, make 256, ye set I by 4 Then saie I, 5 times 64 make 320, that set I againste 5. Then 6 times 64, make 384, that sette I againste 6. Then 7 times 64 make 448, whiche I set a­gainst 7.

Further I say: 8 times 64, [...] make 512, which I set by 8. And last of all I saye: 9 times 64, make 576, whiche I sette againste 9. And then the will stand thus.

And so is the table ended, by which you may easilie find the Quotient, as you shal sée by example now.

Do you set down ye numbers (as you lear­ned before) according to the order of diuision.

Sch

That is thus. [...]

Mai

Now looke what number standeth ouer the diuisor, reckning therto al them that be behinde it toward the left hand.

Scholer

Then are there ouer the diuisour, 263.

Maister.
[Page]

That is iuste: nowe séeke in the table on the lefte side, whether you can finde 263.

Sch.

It is not there.

Maister.

Then take the number that is next to it, beneath it: I meane a lesser number than 263, but of all the lesser numbers that the table hath, take you that that goeth nigh­est to 263.

Sch.

That is 256.

Maister.

So is it: and marke this euer­more, when you can not finde iustlie in the table that summe that is ouer your diuisour, then note that that is nexte beneath it of any summe that is in the table, and looke at the righte hande of the line what figure or digit that is against that summe, and take that di­git for your quotient, and then worke on, as you learned before: for now haue I tolde you the whole vse of this table.

Howbeit, yet that you maye be sure to vn­derstande it, I will sée you end thys example of Diuision by it.

Nowe therefore begin againe.

Scholer.

First I sette downe [...] the summes after the common maner, thus.

[Page]Then do I looke ouer the diuisor, and [...]nd there 263▪ Now to know howe many times 64 may be taken out of 263; I resorte to the table aforesaid; and seeke for the number 263; but it is not there, therefore as you [...]ad me, I take a lesser number, the nexte to it that I can finde in the table, and that is 256, which number hath againste it on the righte hande this digite 4 which I must take for the first figure of my quotient.

Then do I (as I learned before) multiply that quotient into eneme figure of the diuisor orderly, withdrawing the summe thereof, a­mounting out of the ouer sum: as here I say first: 4 times 6 make 24, so I take yt out of 26, saying: 4 out of 6 remaineth 2, whych I write ouer ye 6: then 2 out of 2 remaineth no­thing, then cancel I 2 and 6, [...] and also 6 in the diuisor, and the summe standeth thus.

Then doe I likewise say forth: 4 times 4 make 16. which I take out of 23, & there resteth 7 to be set ouer 3, & that 3 with the 2 behinde it and [...] the 4 vnder it, must be can­celled, as you sée here.

Then haue I done wyth [Page] the figure of the quotient.

Maister.

Nowe sette forwarde your diui­sour, and séeke a newe [...] quotiente, as you sought this.

Scho [...]

Then thus standeth the figures so that ouer the diuisour I sée 78, which I séeke in the table, and cānot finde it: therefore I take the next lesser, and that is 64 the diuisor it selfe.

Mai.

So must you do when there is none o­ther.

Sch.

Then againste [...] it I finde this digit 1, which I muste set in the quotient before 4, thus.

Then multiplie I 6 by 1, and it is but 6 stil.

Maister.

Note.You néede not goe about to mul­tiplie when the Quotient is 1, for 1 doth nei­ther multiplie nor diuide, but in such case on­ly subtract the diuisor out of the number that is ouer it,

Scholer.

Then I take 4 out of 8, and there resteth 4, & 6 out of 7 there remayneth 1, so I [Page] cancel those numbres, & [...] write the remainers o­uer their places, thus.

Then set I forward the diuisor again, thus.

[...] Where I sée ouer the diuisour 144, whiche I séeke in the table, and finde it not: therefore I take the nūber in ye ta­ble yt is nexte thereto, beneathe it, whiche I finde to be 128, against which in the right side I finde 2, which I take for my quotient, and that doe I multiplie firste into 6, and thereof commeth 12, which I take out of 14, and then remaineth 2, that 2 I set [...] ouer 4, and cancell the other figures, 1, 4 and 6, thus.

Then say I for the: 2 [...] times 4 are 8, whiche I take out of 24, and there remaineth 16, of whiche I write the 6 ouer 4, & the 1 ouer 2 and cancell 2, 4 and 4, thus.

[Page]Now againe I set for­warde [...] the diuisor thus. And séeing ouer it 165 I séeke that in ye table, but finde it not, therefore I take ye next lesser, which is 128, against which I find [...]: that do I set into the quotiēt, and by it I [...] multiplie first 6, & ther­of cōmeth, 12, which I take out of 16 and ther resteth 4 thē cācel I 1, 6, and 6, & ouer 6 I set 4 thus.

Then do I multiply [...] 4 by 2, and it maketh 8, which I take out of 45, & there remaineth 37, as in this example.

And nowe haue I done.

Mai.

Well, now I sée that you can worke by this kinde of diuision, as farre forth as I taught you.

Scho

Yea sir, I thanke you, and I find in it much ease and certainenes.

M
[Page]

Yet one thing I doubt whether you per­ceiue: what if you did find in the table the nū ­ber that standeth ouer the diuisor, what wold you next do?

Scho.

I thinke I shoulde take the digitte a­gainst it on the left hand for the quotient.

Ma.

So is it: and as often as you seeke in the table and finde your number iust,Marke the diuersitie be­tvveene a true quotient and a iust quotient. the di­git against it is your true and iust quotiente. I cal that a true quotient also, if it be ye right quotient that you shoulde take [...] though your diuisor multiplied by the same, do not cleare­ly subtract the number ouer it, but there doth somewhat remaine, as it chaunced in al the examples that you did worke by. But if it shoulde ch [...]nce (as it doth often) that your di­uisor multiplied by your quotient, do subtract clean the number ouer it, thē cal I that quo­tient not only a true quotient, but also a iuste quotient, because it doth iustlie consume the number ouer the diuisor: and that chaunceth euermore when the nūber ouer the diuisor is iustly found in the table.

Scho.

This I shal remember.

Mr.

But yet one easie pointe more I wyll tel you in this sort of diuision, therfore marke it wel.

[Page]When you haue founde in the table, other the same sum that is ouer the diuisor, other ye next beneath, (for lack of the other) thē loke what digit standeth againste it, take that for your quotient. And bicause it is some paine to multiply the diuisor by the quotient, you shal not neede to doe it, but only take the number that you founde in the table, and subtract that from the ouer number: for if you do multiply the diuisor by the quotient, that will be the number that shal amounte, therefore is this way more easier.

S.

So is it, and also more cetainer for such as I am, yt might quicklie erre in multiplying, especiallie being smallye practised therein.

M.

Thē proue in some brief exāple whether you can do it, and so wil we make an ende.

Scholer.

I would diuide [...] 38468 by 24, therefore first I set ye table as here foloweth: Then set I the two sums of Diuision thus.

And ouer the diuisor I finde 38, which I seeke in the table & finde it not, therefore I take the nexte beneath it which the table hath, & yt is 24, the diui­sor it self: against which is set [Page] 1, which I take for the quotient, which I set in his place. And now I néede not to multi­plie the diuisor by it, but only [...] to withdrawe the diuisor out of the 38, that is ouer it, & so remaineth 14, as thus.

Then set I forwarde the [...] diuisor, and finde ouer it 144, as appeareth [...]: then séeke I ye number in the ta­ble and finde it, and against it is 6, therefore I set 6 before 1 for my quo­tient, and I take that 144 for the iuste mul­tiplication of the diuisor by that quotient, and therefore without any newe [...] multiplication I do subtract the 144, from the other 144, and there resteth nothing, as you may sée.

Therfore I set forward the diuisor: but se­ing it will not bée in the next place, (for then ouer 2 woulde be nothing) [...] I set it forwarde twice, as you sée here.

And for because that I could not set it in ye nexte place following, therefore [Page] I set a cipher in the quotient, as you sée.

Then loke I ouer the diuisor, and find 68, which I can not finde in the table, therefore take I the next beneth it; which I finde in the table, and that is 48, and against it standeth 2, whiche I take for the quotient▪ And then without any multiplying of the quotient in­to the diuisor, I doe sub­tract [...] that 48 from 68, & there resteth 20, as here appeareth.

And so haue I ended the whole diuision.

Maister.

In verie great summes to be di­uided by great diuisors; I thinke there is no better way thā this for any mā to vse, though he be neuer so expert. And that especiallie, if one great diuisor be oftē to be occupied about diuiding many and diuers great summes. As commonly happeneth in Astronomical wor­kings, and Geometricall, about the signes, both straight and reuersed: as if it be your for­tune and desire to wade to the profoundnes of Geometricall and Astronomicall calculati­ons demonstratiue, you will soone confesse. Whereof, an other time shall better serue to speake. Now can you sufficiently skil in these [Page] kinds of Arithmetike. And now for the far­ther vse of these two last, that is multipli­cation and diuision. I will briefly shew you the feate of Reduction, by the way.

REDVCTION.

REduction is, by which al summes of grosse denominati­on maye be turned into sums of more subtile denomina­tion. And contrarye waies, all summes of subtile denomi­nation, maye be brōught to sums of grosser denomination.

Scho

What cal you grosse denomination, and subtile denomination?

Mai [...]

That I call a grosse denomination,G [...]osse de­nominatiō. whiche doeth containe vnder it many other subtiller or smaller: As a pound in respecte to shillinges, is a grosse denomination: for it is greater than shillings, and contayneth many of them. And shillings in comparison [Page] to poundes,Subtile de­nominatiō. or a subtile denomination, for because they are lesser then pounds, and many of them are contained in one of the o­ther: as so, likewyse of other thinges, whatsoeuer thing is compared to other, if it be greater and containeth many of them, it is a grosser denomination: but if it bée lesser, so that manye of them are in the o­ther, then are they called subtile denomina­tions: whereby you may perceaue, that one denomination may be called a grosse deno­mination, and also a subtile (that is to say, a great and small) in diuers comparisons. For shillinges compared to poundes are a Subtile or small denomination: but com­pared to pennies, they are a grosse or greate denomination.

Scho.

Nowe I vnderstande the name, I pray you teache me the vse.

Mai.

The vse is easily learned, if you re­mēber what you haue learned before. For if you will reduce any summe of a grosse de­nomination,To reduce grosse de­nominatiōs to subtile. into a summe of a smaller or subtiller denomination, you must consi­der howe many of that subtiler denomina­tion doe make one of the grosser denomina­tion, and by that number or numerator doe [Page] you multiplie the other summe: as if you woulde reduce 20 poundes into shillinges, you must consider that in a pound are inclu­ded 20 shillings, therfore multiplie the one 20 by the other 20, and there will amounte 400, whereby you may knowe, that in 20 pounde are contained 400 shillinges. Like­wise if you would reduce 30 shillinges into pennies, considering that in 1. shilling, are 12 pennies, you must multiplie 30 by 12, and it will be 360: whereby you find, that in 30 shillings, are contained 360 pennies. And thus may you reduce any grosse deno­mination into a more subtiller, by multi­plication, if you know how many of the les­ser doe make the greater: of which thing I will anone giue you a bréefe table for the most accustomed kinds of money, weights, measures, and tyme, and such like, whereby you maye knowe howe often eche subtile denomination is contained in the Grosser, when you shall néede it for the foresayde kinde of Reduction. And also the same shall serue you, if you would reduce any summe of a subtiler denomination,To reduce subtile de­nominatiō to grosse. into a summe of a grosser denomination: For in suche Reduction you must consider (as in the o­ther [Page] forme) howe manye of the smaller doe make the greater, and by that number must you diuide the other summe, and the quoti­ent will declare howe many of the greater denomination, are comprehended in that summe, as for example: If you woulde know how many shillinges are contayned in 3240 pence, consider that 12 pennies doe make 1 shilling: you must diuide that 3240 by 12, and your quotient wil be 270, wher­by you know that so many shillinges are in 3240 pennies. But and you would knowe farther, how many pounds are in those 270 shillinges, séing that euery pound contay­neth 20 shillinges, diuide that 270 by 30, and it will be 13, and 10 remaining, wher­by you may, know that in 3240 pennies, or 270 shillings, are 13 poundes and 10 shil­lings. For euermore the remainer muste be named by the name or denomination of the summe that was diuided, which in this place were shillinges. And thus maye you doe with any other kindes of denomi­nations.

Wherefore to the intent that you maye haue a lighte knowledge in the common Coines, weights, measures, and such other, [Page] I haue prepared here a briefe table, whiche shall suffise to you at this time, til hereafter at more conueniente opportunitie I maye instruct you more exactlie in the same.

Note (gentle Reader) these valewes of Englishe comes, as they were when this Authour first publi­shed his Booke. But in our time (namelie An. 1582)▪ they are much diuerse. Therefore something to plea­sure thee in this purpose. I haue for thy benefit at the end of Reduction, set downe and annexed a Table, not onlie of our coines, but also of the most parte of Christendome, with their iust waighte and values, currant in this Realme of England, as by the same shall plainlie appeare.

A Table for English coines. An, 1540.
  • A Soueraine.
  • Half a Soueraine.
  • A Roiall.
  • Halfe a Roiall.
  • A quarter Roiall.
  • An old Noble.
  • Halfe an old Noble.
  • An Angell.
  • Halfe an Angell.
  • A George Noble.
  • Half a George Noble.
  • A quarter Noble.
    Englishe Coines.
  • A Croune.
  • Halfe a Crowne.
  • A Croune.
  • A Grote.
  • A harpe Grote.
  • A pēnie of 2 pence.
  • A dandie pratte.
  • A pennie.
  • An half pennie.
  • A Farthing.
The valew of English Coynes.

The value of English Coines.A Soueraine is the greatest english coin, and containeth 2 Roials, or 3 Angels, ey­ther 9 halfe Crounes, or 4 Crounes and an halfe, that is to say, 22 s 6 d.

Half a Souerain is equall with a Royall.

A Royall containeth an Angell and a halfe, that is to say: 11 s, [...] d.

Halfe a Royal containeth 5 s, 7 d, ob.

A quarter of a Royall containeth 2 s, 9 d, ob. q.

An old Noble, called an Henrie, is worth 2 Crounes, or a Noble and half, that is 10 s.

Halfe an old Noble is worth 5 s.

An Angell containeth a Croune and halfe, or 3 halfe Crownes, that is 7 s 6 d.

Half an Angell is worth 3 s, 9 d.

A Noble called a George, is worth 6 s 8 d.

Half a Noble is worth 3 s, 4 d.

A quarter of a Noble (which in the old Sta­tute is called a Farthing) containeth 20 d.

A Crowne containeth 5 s: and the halfe Croun 2 s 6 d. Howbeit there is an other Croun of 4 s. 6 d which is knowne by the rose side, for the Rose hath no Crowne ouer [Page] it, as in the other Crowne, but it is enuiro­ned on the 4 quarters with 4 floure delu­ces, whereby you may best know it. But I will returne to speake of the value of the coynes, for I intend not now to describe the formes of them. Now of gold are there no more common coynes.

In siluer the greatest is a Grote, whiche containeth 4 pennies. Thē is there another Grote called an Harp, which goeth for 3 d. Then next is a pennie of 2 d. And then a Dandiprat, worth 3 halfe pence. Nexte it a pennie, then half a pennie, and last and least of all a Farthing, whose coine is on the one side a crosse, & on the other side a purculles. This I tell you, because I sée manye that cannot know a farthing from a small halfe penie.

Now haue I tolde you all the Englishe coynes both of gold and siluer, but yet of the thrée most cōmon valewers of money spake I nothing, that is to say, of pounds, Marks, and shillinges, whiche though they haue no Coynes, yet is there no name more in vse then they: of whiche the shilling con­tayneth 12 pennies or 3 grotes: and the pound 2 old Nobles, 3 George Nobles, [Page] or 4 Crownes, that is to saye, 20 s. A Marke, two George Nobles, that is 13 s. 4 d.

Here would I now expresse the valewes of sundrie other coines of diuers countries, but for three causes I now refrau [...]e. The first and chiefest is, because they are not cor­rant by the Statutes of this Realme. An other cause is, by reason they are so vncer­taine, that they be neuer long at one rate. And againe they are so different in so many places, that it were matter inough for a great booke, to speake sufficientlie of them all. Howebeit, yet because you shall not bée altogither ignoraunt of them, I will shewe you the valewes of some that are moste in vse, and first of Fraunce.

Frenche coines.The most common money are Deniers, Soulx and Franks, 12 Deniers make 1 s. 20 soulx make 1 Frank, so that as you see, these thrée kindes are like in the rate: to pe­nies, shillinges, and pounds with vs, but that this is the difference, that their Denier is but the 9 part of our pennie, and so their soulx (commonly called sowses) go 9 to our shilling, and 9 of their Frankes to an En­glishe pounde of money: So that 3 of their [Page] Franks make a noble. And by those 3 may you practise how to reduce French mony in­to English mony. And as for the rest of their coynes I will omit till an other time, when I intend to shewe you the rate of sundry o­ther kindes of mony.

But now as for the coynes of Flaunders they be so chaungeable,Flaunde is Coynes. that you must know thē from time to time, els you cannot reduce them into our money certainely. But yet that you may haue an example of their mony to exercise you withall, you shall take those that be most common as Stiuers both single and double, Grotes Flemmish, Carolus, and Gyldens: A Flemish Grose is a litle aboue 3 farthings English. A single stiuer is 1 d, ob, q. The double Stiuer is [...] d q. The siluer Carolus single, 2 d q. q. c. The double stiuer Carolus is 4 d ob, q, q. Then is there also ye Carolus Gyldē which is worth 20 Stiuers And the Flemish noble is worth 3 Carolus Gildens, and 12 Styuers.

Touching Danske mony, they haue their soulx wherof 20 is a Liuer, which is 2 s ster­ling. They haue also their Grashe where­of 30 makes a Gylderne, which is foure s. [Page] sterling: They haue also Dollors, and their common or olde Dollor is 35 Grashe: new Dollors they haue, whiche be diuers, some valued at 24 Grashe, some at 26, and some at 30: and thus much I thought good to adde to the Author touching Danske mony.

But I will let them passe now, exhorting you to practise to reduce those kinds into En­glish money, according as I haue sette forthe here following: 2100 deniers, make 240 d: or 20 s: 3240 deniers, make 360 d, or 30 s 8352 deniers, make 928 d, or 2 lb 17 s, 4 d: 2160 soulx, make 240 shillings: and so of o­ther the [...] in [...]ilie rate.

But if you wil reduce Flemmish money iustly, you muste reduce it first into the smal­lest parte of Englishe money that is in that come, as for example. If I would reduce 368 double stiuers into English money, conside­ring that a double Stiuer containeth 131 d q, you shall firste looke howe many q bee in the double Stiuer, and you shall finde them 12, therefore multiply the summe of the stiuers by 13, and then haue you their valew in far­things, which is 4784. Nowe if you diuide that by 4, then will there appeare the num­ber of pence: but better it were to diuide it [Page] by 48 (for so manye farthings are in 1 shil­ling) and then will the quotient declare the summe of the shillings.

Likewise, if you would reduce any summe of single styuers into Englishe money, you must multiply the summe first by 13, & then haue you a certaine summe, which summe if you diuide by 8, then wil amount the summe of pence: or if you diuide it by 96, the summe of shillings will appeare.

But this marke in al diuision, when ye do reduce to bring one denomination into an o­ther, if there be any remayner after the diui­sion, that must be named by the denomina­tion of the grosse summe that was diuided: as for example: I woulde bring 254 q into pence, therefore I do diuide that 254 by 4, for so many farthings make 1 penny, and the quotient is 63, whiche is the summe of the pence, and then remaineth yet 2, whiche are farthings still, as one maye proue by diui­ding. And this must be marked in all Di­uision, namely when it is done for Redu­ction.

Yet two words more added to the Author [Page] Cōcerning Spanish mony, wherof the most common mony are Cornados, Marueides Ryalls and Duckets: 6 Cornados make a Marueide, 34 Marueids maketh one Ryall, and 11 Rialls maketh one Duckate, so the Ducket containeth 374 Marueids, which to reduce into sterling mony English, 34 Cor­nados maketh our penny: or 5 Marueides & 4 Cornados &c.

VVeights.Thus muche haue I sayde of Mony, nowe will I shew you in like sorte the distinction of weyghts, after the statutes of Englande, where the leaste portion of weight is com­mōly a grayne, meaning a grayne of Corne or wheate,A Graine. dry and gathered out of the mid­dle of the eare.A Penny of Troy. Of these graynes in time pas­sed [...]2 wayed iust 1 peny of Troy, and then was but 10 pennies in an Ounce.An Ounce. But nowe are there 46 pennies in an Ounce, so that there are not fully 14 graynes in one penny.

But now of Ounces after Troy rate (which is the standard of Englande) 12 doe make 1 pound.

Haberde­poise vveights.But commonly there is vsed another weight called Haberdepoise, in which 16 ounces make a pounde. Therfore when you would reduce ounces into poundes, you [Page] must cōsider whether your weyghts be troy weighte or Haberdepoise: and if it bée Troy weyght you must diuide your ounces by 12, to bring them to pounds: but if it bée Haber­depoise, you must diuide them by 16. Now a­gaine, there bée greater weights which are called an hundred, halfe a hundred,A hundred vva [...]ght. & a quar­terne, and also a halfe quarterne &c.

Scholler.

Why? so there may be reckened 20 pounde, 40 pounde, 200 pounde and such innumerable.

Maister.

All these are numbers of weyght, but they haue not common weights made to their rate, as the other haue. And agayne, these that I did name are not iust in number as they séeme by their name, for an hundred is not iust 100, but is 112 pounde. And so the halfe hundred is 56: the quarter 28, and the halfe quarter 14. And these be the common weights vsed in most things that are solde by weight.

Howbeit there are in some things other nams, as in wool,VVool [...] vveights. Todde Stone· 28 poūd is not called a quarterne but a Todde: and 14 pounde is not na­med half a quarterne but a Stone, and the 7 pound halfe a Stone. Other names bycause they differ in many places, and agrée in few, [Page] I let them passe.

Sacke.But a Sacke of Wooll by the Statutes, is limited to be 26 Stone.

Cheese vvaights.Now in chéese, though it be solde by the hundreth, and by the Stone in some places, yet the very waightes of it are Cloues and Weys. So that a Cloue containeth 8 pound: and a Wey 32 Cloues, which is 256 pound, that is 12 score and 16 pound: And so muche weigheth the Wey of Suffolke chéese: And the like waight is or shoulde be the Barrell of Suffolke Butter.

The Wey of Essex Chéese containeth 16 score, and 16 pound: And so much is also the barrell of Essex Butter.

Measures for liquor.Now of waights are made other measures, both for graine and liquor. For a pounde in waight maketh a Pinte in measure,A Pinte. Gallon. Pottell. Quarte. so that 8 pound (or 8 Pintes) doe make a Gallon: half a Gallon is named a Pottle: and half a Pot­tel is called a Quarte, which containeth two pintes.Fyrkin. Tertian. Kilderkin. Barrell. Now aboue a Gallon the nexte mea­sure is a Firken: then a Tertian, a Kilder­kin or halfe Barrell and a Barrell. And by those measures are solde commonly, Ale, Béere, Wine, and Oyle, Butter, and Soy [...] Salmon, Herrings, and Eeles.

[Page]But as these be vnlike things,Ale measures so the mea­sure of their vesselles doe differ: for the mea­sures of Ale are as followeth: Of Ale.

  • the Fyrken
  • ye Kilderkē
  • the Barrell

contei­neth

  • 8
  • 16
  • 32

gallons Of Béer

  • the Fyrken
  • ye Kilderken
  • the Barrell

contei­neth

  • 9
  • 18
  • 36

gallōs

Sope measures, both Firken, Kilderken,Sope mea­sures. and Barrell, should be equall to al Ale mea­sures. Moreouer the Statutes do limitte the waight of euery of those thrée vessels being empty.

  • A Barrell
  • Halfe Barrell
  • A Firken

to weigh empty

  • 26
  • 13
  • 6 ½

pounds. Herrings also be solde by the same measures that Ale and Sope be solde by.Herring.

Herrings also are solde by the tale, 120, to the hundred, ten thousand to the laste.

Salmon & Eeles haue a greater measure.Salmon and Eeles. [Page] Salmon & Eeles

  • the butte
  • ye barrell
  • halfe bar.
  • the firken

hol­deth

  • 84
  • 42
  • 21
  • 10 ½

Gallons.

Howbeit, some Statutes did limitte Eele vessels equall with Herring vessels.

VVine mea­sures.Nowe as for wine vesselles seldome are smaller than Hogges heads, which are of 63 gallons: euery Hogges head is two Barels: yet there are many other wine vessels, but of them all, sée this table, and marke the mea­sures one to an other.

Of wine and oile.

  • the Rondlet
  • the Barrell
  • ye hogges hed
  • the Tertian
  • the Pipe
  • the Tonne

hol­deth

  • [...]8 ½
  • [...]1 ½
  • 63
  • 84
  • 126
  • 252

Gallons.

Tertians.But you shall marke, that there be other kindes of Tertians: for there be Tertians (that is to say) Thirdles of Pipes, of hogges heads, and of Barrels, as wel of other things as of wine.

B [...]tte.Also of Malueseys, and S [...]cke, &c. the [Page] half Tonne is not called a Pipe, but rather a Butte.

And thus much haue I thoughte méete to tell you at this time.

Scholer.

And is that alwayes true?

Maister.

I haue tolde you howe it shoulde be, but howe it is I may not say: howe they doe differ daily from their iust measure, that Gagiers can tell you better than I. But I wil let this passe now, and speake briefly of the other measures.

And as of waights there did spring the li­quide measures, (whereof I spake laste) so of the same springeth dry measures: as Pecks,Drie mea­sures. Bushels, Quarters, and suche like, whereby are measured corne and like grains: also salt, lime, coales and other like. And this is the order and quantitie of them.

  • A Pecke is the measure of two Gallons.
    A Pecke▪
  • A Bushel containeth foure Peckes.
    A Bushel.
  • A Quarter holdeth eight Bushels.
    Quarter.
  • A Wey containeth sixe quarters.

These are the commō names & measures,VVey. but in diuers places there be diuers sortes.

The bushel in many places is 2 bushels: but then is the bushell there called a Strike.Strike▪ And in some places half a quarter is called a [Page] a Cornoke. But these diuersities are to many to tel you briefly them al. And again, sith they are against the law and Statutes, I counte them vnméete to be vsed.

But now remaineth yet an other kinde of Measures,Measure to meat lēgth, breaden, & thicknes. wherby men met length & bredth, and thicknesse, and those are an Ynch, a foote, and such other: whose names and quantities this table sheweth.

  • An ynch.
    3 Graines of barly in lēgth, make an inch.
  • 12 Ynches make a foote.
  • Foote. Yeard. Elle. Perch.
    3 Foote make a yearde.
  • 3 Foote and 9 ynches make an Elle.
  • 5 Yeards and a halfe, make a Perch.

1 Perche in breadth and 40 in length, doe make a Rod of lande, which some cal a roode, some a yeard land and some a Farthendele.

  • Acre.
    2 Farthēdels, make half an acre of groūd.
  • 4 Farthendels make an Acre.

More 40 Rods in length do make a furlōg: 8, furlongs make a mile whiche conteyneth 320 Perches.

So that an English mile grounded vppon the Statute is in length 1760 yeardes, 5280 foote, and 63360 ynches.

Somewhat greater then the Italian mile [Page] 1000 paces, and 5 foote to a pace.

Here might I tell you many things else touching measure, and also howe to reduce strange measures to our measures, but by­cause it can not well bee done wythout the knowledge of Fractions, whiche as yet you haue not learned, I will let them passe til an other time, when I shal instruct you in Geo­metrie, wherein I should be enforced else to repeate the same often againe.

Scholer.

But yet sir of the partes of time I pray you tell me somewhat.The partes of time. A Day. An houre. VVeeke. Moneth. Yeare.

Maister.

You know that a naturall daye hath 24 houres, and euery houre hath 60 mi­nutes. It néedeth not to tel you, that 7 dayes make a wéeke, and 4 wéekes make a commō moneth, and 13 moneths make a yeare, lac­king 1 day, & certaine houres, and minutes: But of that I shall instruct you hereafter.

Here wil I make an end of Reduction for this time, whiche thoughe it be counted no kind seueral of Arithmetike, yet you sée it is no lesse néedefull to be knowen, or easier to be done, than of any of the other.

Scholer.

Mary sir, it séemeth vnto mée much harder than any other sort, for it requi­reth the knowledge of so many things: but [Page] now sir when you sée time, I am readie to learne forth: for as much of Reductiō as you haue taught me, I remember, but and if I doe at any time forget, I shall haue recourse to the tables which you haue set forth for me.

Maister.

So do you, for it wil not be re­membred without exercise.

And now according to promise here follo­weth the Table which I haue added to this Author for thy vtilitie, intending at the lat­ter ends of my Addition to this Booke, to write of the ordinarie money vsed in moste partes of Christendome: and their common values currant for traffique in those places, with the manner of their exchaunges, as also their vsuall waights and measures, which I hope will be as gratefully taken of Gentle­men, merchants, and other my Countrey­men in generall as I of good will sette forth the same.

[Page]

A Table of the names and valua­tiō of the most vsuall Gold coines through­out Christendome, with their seuerall waight of Pence and Grains: and what they are worth of cur­rant mony Englishe.
The names and titles of the gold.The vveight. Pēny. Grains.The valevve. Shil. Pence.
Royall423150
Halfe Royall21186
Olde Noble49134
Halfe old Noble2468
Angell37100
Halfe Angel11550
Salute2564
2. parts of Salute11142
George Noble3090
half George noble11246
First crown K. H.2964
Base crown K H.2050
Great Soueraine100300
Souera. K.H best00108
Edward Souera314100
Souera. K.E.314100
Vnichorne of Scot21066
Elizab. Soueraine314100
Elizab. crowne11950
Scottish crowne2560
French Noble416134
Al the sorts of Frenche crownes2560
Old French cro.2560
Flaunders Rider2666
Gelders Rider2236
Phillips Royal310100
Phillips crowne2550
Collyn Gilden2248
New Andr Gyld:2350
Flanders noble41012 
Flem. Angel best369 
Fland. real, or Key31010 
Carolles, Gylden12136
Flanders Royal265 
Saxon, Gylden2248
Flanders crowne256 
Phillips Gylde.2342
Golden Lyon21678
3. parts of gol. Ly. 2125
2.3 parts gol. Ly.119411
Dauids Gylden22 [...] 
Horne Gylden112411
Old Andre, Gyld.24410
Crusado long cros.266 
Crus. short cros2662
Myl rayes420134
Half Mill rayes21068
Portigu. 1. ounce2163 lb. 8 s. 
Portigu. 1. ounce218  
Golden Castilio223810
Ducket of Castile    
Ducket of Arags2666
Hungarie Ducket2764
Double Pistolate48118
Single Pistolate24510
Ducket of Valens26  
Ducket of Floren.2564
Double Ducate41113 
Single Ducket2666
Dou. duc. of Rome413128
Of siluer coines currant in this Realme
  • The Edward Crowne of 5 s
  • The Edward halfe crowne of 2 s 6 d.
  • The Edward shilling, halfe shilling, and the 3 d.
  • Philip and Maries shilling and half shilling.
  • The Marie groat, and Marie 2 d.
  • Quéene Elizabeths shillings 6 d. 4 d. 3 d. 2 d. 1 d. 3. ob. and 3 q.

It is to be vnderstoode (gentle Reader) that whereas the waight is called by the name of a penny,Note. it is not meant a penny of siluer money, but a penny of Goldsmithes waight, which is 24 Barly cornes drie. And xx. of these pence make an ounce: and twelue of these ounces make a poūd Troy: So that if a man haue not the waight where with to wey any péece that may come to his hand, hée may do it with the Barly graines or cornes being drie and taken out of the middle of the eare. Nowe to Progression.

PROGRESSION.

ALthoughe vntill this day the most parte of writers haue defined Progression as a cō ­pendious kinde of Addition, yet truelye it is not so: for pro­gression (as the verie nature of the worde doth informe any man) is a going forwarde and proceeding in num­bers, and that regularlie and orderlie, whose place is aptlye chosen to be verie [...]eare, or ra­ther next after the exposition of the four prin­cipal partes of Arithmetike, for in it after a moste easie manner, are all the foure former partes exercised and practised: and not one­lye Addition, as customablie is done. Whiche custome hathe bene the cause, why it hathe so speciallye bene named a kinde of Addition▪ and defined to bée a quicke and briefe Addition of diuerse summes, procéeding by some certayne and reasonable order.

[Page]You shall also vnderstande, that there are infinite kinds of progressions, but for you (as yet) two are sufficiente to be exercised in: of which the one I cal Arithmeticall, and the o­ther Geometricall.

Arithmetical progression.Arithmetical progression is a rehearsing or placing downe of manye numbers, number after number, in such sort, that betwéene eue­rie two nexte numbers rehearsed or placed downe, the difference, diuersitie, or excesse, be equal and alike.

Scho.

Syr, I thanke you for that you haue both opened vnto me what Progression is, truly, and also why it is here placed. But I pray you with an example make plaine your definition.

Ma.

Examples can not want, séeing al rea­sonable creatures naturallie vse the order of one kind of Arithmetical progression (whiche therefore is also named Naturall) when so e­uer they distinctlie doe counte or number any multitude one by one, saying: 1.2.3.4.5.6. wherby the procéeding from number to num­ber, and euerie one surmounting and excée­ding his fellow next before by a like quantity (which here is 1) declareth the same to be A­rithmeticall [Page] progression. And for the more plainnesse, I set it down in this maner.

[...]

Sc.

This is most euidēt. And I thinke that I am able to tel you now of any progression Arithmetical propounded, what is that com­mon excesse or difference wherby it procéedeth if this order be kept in it.

M.

What say you of 3.6.9.12.15?

Sc.

They excéede eche other by 3. And that may I set down in such euident order, as you did your example of Natural progression, in this wise.

[...]

Maister.

And doe you not also nowe per­ceiue, that the whole table of Multiplication maye be made by the order of progression A­rithmetical? either if you wil begin at the first number of any of them on the left hande, and so procéede right ouerthwarte: or at any of the first numbers of the vpper rowe, and goe di­rectly [Page] downward?

Sch.

I pray you let me consider the thing a little, and I wil answere you.

12345678910
2468101214161820
36912151821242730
481216202428323640
5101520253035404550
6121824303642485460
7142128354249566370
8162432404856647280
9182736455463728190
102030405060708090100

By this triall I perceiue it nowe verie well: for the common excesse or difference be­twéene any two next, is continually as much as the firste number of euerie rowe, either from the lefte hande ouerthwarte taken, or from any of the vppermost ouerthwart rows downward.

Ma.

Nowe then if of any suche progression you woulde spéedelie knowe the totall summe, muche quicklier thā by common ad­ditions [Page] rules:To knovv the total sum of an Arith­meticall pro­gression. first tell howe many numbers there are (which numbers here we cal places or parcels) and if they be odde, write theyr summe downe by it selfe, as in this example, 2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 12, 14, where the numbers are 7, as you may sée, therefore set done 7 in a place alone: then adde togither the firste number and the laste, as in this example: adde 2 to 14, and that maketh 16, take halfe of it, and mul­tiplie by the 7, whiche you noted for the nū ­ber of the places, and the sum that amoun­teth, is the summe of all those figures added togither, as in this example: 8 multiplied by 7 make 56: and that is the summe of al the figures.

Scholer.

That will I worke by an other example. I would know how much this sum is, 5, 8, 11, 14, 17, 20, 23, 26, 29. I tel the pla­ces and they are 9, that I note. Then I putte the first number 5 and the last 29, togither, and they make 34. I take the halfe of it, that is, 17, and multiplie by 9, and it maketh 153. That you saye is the summe of all the numbers.

Ma.

So shal you finde it if you trie it.

Sc.

How shal I trie it?

Maister.

By your common addition: for [Page] if you adde all the parcels togither, you shall see the same summe amounte, if you dydde worke well. And that manner of Additi­on trieth all kindes of summing anye Pro­gression.

Sc.

Then can I summe a progression, if the numbers of the parcels be odde. But what if they be euen? as in this example, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8?

Ma.

When the number of the parcels is euen, then note that also as you did before, and likewise adde the first summe to the last, and by the halfe of the number of the places do you multiplie it: as in your example, the parcels are 8, that note I? then adding ye firste summe to the last, there amounteth 9, that do I multiplie by the halfe of parcels, that is by 4, and it maketh 36, whiche is the summe of the 8 parcels.

But if you wil take one rule for these both, doe thus. Multiplie the halfe of the one by the other whole, and the summe wil amounte al one. For sometime it chanceth that the num­ber of the parcels be odde, so that their halfe can not be taken: and sometime it chaunceth the Addition of the firste number and the last, to bring forthe an odde number, so that the [Page] halfe of it can not be taken: but they will neuer be both odde.

Sc.

Thē I perceiue this, if there be no more longing to it.

Maister.

As accustomablie it hath bene taughte, thys hath bene the chiefe and onelie exercise in Progression vsed. But that you maye perceiue howe diuerse wayes and to howe great profitte so simple a thing (as this Arithmetical Progression is) maye be consi­dered and vsed, I will here propounde you sixe propositions, of which four of them were inuented by a friende of mine, and neuer be­fore this published: and the firste two, were neuer to my knowledge written of, but by thrée men.

Sch.

This dothe greatlie encourage me to be attentife vnto your wordes, seeing I shall not onelye be instructed at your hands in the common knowen rules of this excellent art, but besids that, so aboundantlie in other new rules informed, as my verie entrance shall séeme to passe a great many mēs farther stu­die, and longer continuance. Therefore sir, I beséech you, let me know your sixe propositi­ons.

Ma.

These they are.

  • [Page]1 To know the last number without pro­ceeding by continual addition, til you come vnto it, [...]o that the common excesse, the first number and the number of the places bee knowne.
  • 2 The first number of the Progression and the laste being knowen, with the com­mon excesse, to finde the number of the places.
  • 3 The excesse being giuen, and the firste or laste, to know the quantitie of anye middle number, whose place is giuen from the first or last.
  • 4 The totall summe being giuen, and the first and last, to finde out the number of the places.
  • 5 The total sum of any Arithmetical pro­gression being giuen, and the first and last, to finde out the common excesse.
  • 6 The totall summe being giuen, and the mutual excesse, with the number of the pla­ces, to giue the firste or laste number of the same progression.

Many moe considerations could I propoūd you in these Arithmeticall progressions, but these are sufficiēt to giue you occasiō to think, [Page] that rules of knowledge and artes are infi­nitely capable of enlargement.

Sen.

Happie were I, if I did but well vnderstand that which is alreadie inuented and written. And yet in my simple fantasie. these thinges offer themselues (in manner) to be studied for about Progression, there­fore I pray you to procéede to the rules an­swering to these propositions.

Mayster.

I will orderlye for euerye of these sixe propositions giue you rules, and with euery one an example, vnlesse ye plain­nesse and easinesse need no further exemple­fying.

For the Solution of the firste. Multiplie the excesse by a number lesse by 1 than the number of the places, and the offcome adde to the firste number, so shall you haue the laste number, whiche is soughte for.

As (for example) if there were seuen pla­ces in a progression Arithmeticall, whose continuall encrease, or mutual excesse were 5 and the first number were 5, and I would know what the last & seuenth number is, I multiplie 6, which is lesse then 7, (the nū ­ber of the places by 4, thereof commeth 24, [Page] whiche I adde to 5, that maketh 29: and that is the last number, whiche I desired to know. And this you maye straighte waye proue, by continuall procéeding from 5 till the seuenth place, encreasing euerye one by 4, as thus.

5 9 13 17 21 25 29.

Lo here, the last, being also the seuenth, is 29.

Sc.

I perceiue already one good proper­tie in this rule, which in all workes is to be desired: yt is, it wil ease one frō great labor, if a progression were propounded of 100 or 200 places, or moe, And also it is verye ea­sie to worke, and most necessarie for the to­tall summe finding, in a very long progres­sion.

Mai.

The second rule is this. From the 2 last subtract the first, the remainer diuide by the common excesse, to the Quotient ad 1, and you haue the number of the places, which you wold know: As in this progres­sion.

6 11 16 21 26 31.

If I know only 6 and 31, and that they en­crease by 5, than according to the rule, from 31 I subtract 6, there remaineth 25, which [Page] 25 I diuide by 5 (the common excesse) the quotient commeth forth 5, to which I ad 1, that maketh 6: and so many are the places, as you sée.

Schol.

This rule is so easie, that I were muche to blame, if I coulde not remember it.

Ma.

The third proposition may alwaies 3 thus be soluted: Multiplye the excesse by a number lesse by 1. than the distaunce of the place is from the first or the last number gi­uen: the of come ad to the first, if the distance be reckned from the first, and the firste also known or subtract from the last: if the di­staunce be from the last counted, and ye laste giuen also, and that whiche commeth forth, either in that addition to the first, or subtra­ction from the last, is the number sought As for example I propound you this progres­sion.

8 15 22 29 36 43 50 57.

And for the apt considering ye maner of this questiō, I will note ouer euery place his di­stance from the first and vnder euery place his distance inclusiuely from the last, thus.

[Page]

12345678
815222936435057
87654321

Now, if that excesse whereby this Pro­gression standeth, be knowne to be 7, and the first number giuen, being 8, I woulde know what number standeth vnder 4, that is to say in the fourth place. I multiplie 7 by 3 (which is lesse by 1, than the number of the place propounded) that yéeldeth 21, to which I adde 8 (the first number) so com­meth 29: which I say to belōg to the fourth place, as ye sée in the example it also doeth: or if in the third place from the last, you would know what number in this example should stand, the last number being known to be 57, and the common excesse 7, than by 2 (which is lesse by 1 than the place propoū ­ded) I multiplie 7, that giueth 14: whiche I subtract from 57, so remaineth 43: which appertaineth to the thirde place inclusiuely reckned from the last, & so my example gi­ueth you.

Scholer.

I perceiue right good vse of this rule: for if I had forgotten what the firste number were, and remember still but the laste, the common excesse, and the number [Page] of the places, then mighte I come by the knowledge of my first number againe. And me thinketh, that it differeth not much from the first proposition sauing that which you make here a middle number, there was made the last: and also in this point it diffe­reth, that in it the last was only sought, and no consideration hadde in numbring the places from the last, as here I marke in your numbers noted vnder your progressi­on.

Mayster.

And thinke you not the mid­dle numbers of a Progression standing of a hundred or thrée hundred places or moe, may as much cumber a man to come to the knowledge of them by continuall encrea­sing from the first (by the common excesse) or abating from the last continually (the common excesse) as the very final numbers in a shorter Progression would doe?

Scholer.

Yes sir, that I thinke righte well, and therefore I am glad of this newe framed proposition, and the maner of the working of it.

Mayster.

The rule of the fourth is this.4 Adde the first and the last together, and by the ofcome diuide the totall summe. Dou­ble [Page] the quotient, and that will be the num­ber of the places.

Scho.

Then if in a Progression, whose sum were 207, and the first number 12, and the last 57, if I adde 57 and 12 together, that maketh 69: and by it I diuide 207, the Quotient will be 3, which I double, and so I haue 6, and so many must be the number of the places, that this progression standeth on.

Mai.

Whether it be so or no, howe will you trie?

Scho.

Halfe 6, whiche is 3, being multi­plied by 69, must make 207, the totall sum, if 6 be the number of the places. For so the whole worke of your rule in summing any Arithmeticall progression did en­forme [...] me. I will than multiplie by 3, thus.

It commeth forth iustlye.

Maist.

I must muche herein commende your promptnes, both in memorie and in well applying your rule: although in ma­nifest wordes if did contayne no suche mat­ter.

Scho.

Sir, I praye you heare me frame one example more.

Maist.
[Page]

I am well pleased, so that ye be short, for you make me more longer here, then willinglie I would haue bene: but I can not perceaue how I could haue omitted any thing as yet, without your greate lacke thereof.

Sch.

If I had receiued 85 pounds of cer­taine men but of how many▪ I haue forgot­ten, yet I remember that the first gaue mée 7 lb, and the last 27 lb, and euerye paymente after other did rise by a like sum. And the man for whom I receiued this money, con­ditioned with me, that of euery payment I should haue 12 pence for my labour: nowe vnlesse I can by arte find the trueth of this case, I am like to lose the moste parte of my reward.

Maister.

I perceaue you can hansomly frame an example, which shoulde concerne your owne gayne: I praye you lette me sée howe you woulde doe Iustice in this poynte.

Scholer.

I adde the firste [...] and the laste together that maketh 34: by which I di­uide 85, thus.

Why how now? Sir, here [Page] is a remnant of 17, in which 34 cannot bée had, so that nowe I am in the briars for doubling of my quotient, and farewell then both my Iustice, and a good lumpe of my gaines.

Ma.

Ye are neuer the farther from the matter, though it fall into a fraction. For you shall vnderstand that the fractiō which of any such worke procéedeth, is euer halfe of one such, as the vnits of the quotient be­fore are. And that you may trie, if you double that which so remaineth, for then it will be equal to your diuisor, as if ye double 17 (the remnāt) it maketh 34, and your diuisor al­so was 34, this noteth the remainder to bée half of one.

Sch.

Now I am glad of this hard exam­ple. For with it I haue a generall rule for the Fraction that maye hap in this worke. So that the quotient being two & a halfe, I double that, & it maketh 5, therefore shoulde my gaine be 5 shillinges. And to be sure (by your leaue) I will trie it for I [...] will multiplie halfe of 34, (whiche is the firste and laste number ioyned together) by 5 thus. It is moste true (I see) [Page] that I shoulde léese nothing by the former working.

Mai.

The fift proposition hath this rule 5 appertaining vnto it: By the fourthe rule finde the number of the places, that béeing done, from the last subtract the firste, and the residue diuide by a number lesse by 1, than the number of the places, and the quotient will shewe the excesse whiche is sought for.

An example hereof shal be this: If ye had disbursed 685 lb. to a certaine number of men, you neither can tell howe manye they were or how muche the ones money excée­ded his next before, but you are sure that ye excesse was equal betwéen euery two next: & also you remember that the firste had 19, and the last 118 poundes, how woulde you finde both the number of the men & the ex­cesse, continually obserued in the succession of their reiments.

Scholer▪

Your rule doth plainlie bid, first to find the number of the places, [...] whiche I will doe according to she fourth rule. I adde 19 and 118 together, thus.

[Page]By this 137, I diuide 685, [...] thus.

Seing there is no fraction, [...] but a whole nūber, being 5. I double that, and than muste the number of ye places be 10 Now from ye last I subtracte the first, as 19 frō 118, thus: And so remaineth 99.

This 99 I diuide by a number lesse by 1 than the number of the places, and seing the places were 10, I diuide 99 [...] by 9, thus.

The quotient is 11, and so was the excesse, if I haue followed your rule right.

May.

You haue wrought euery part of this question both well in order and truely in the practise of your rules.

Sch.

I will than set it downe also for­mablie, so that the number of the places, the excesse and the total sum may streighte ap­peare, as your first example stoode.

The cōmon excesse. The Pro­gression.

11111111111111111111
1930415263748596107118

That the places be 10, and that from [Page] the first to the last the commō excesse is 11, I perceiue most euidently, but whether the total summe be 685, I haue not yet proued, which I will now doe. I adds 19 and 118 togither that maketh 137: I multiplie that by halfe the number of the pla­ces [...] thus.

All thinges agrée most ex­actlye, so that I am perfecte y­nough in these rules, if I forget thē not a­gayne.

Mai.

Vse maketh all things perfect.6

Your sixt rule is this. By the number of the places diuide the totall summe, double the quotient, and that will be the first and the last ioined in one sum. Than by a num­ber lesse by 1, than the number of the places multiplie the excesse, that ofcome subtracte from the first doubled quotient, and the half of the residue is the first number. The laste number you may diuerslye finde out, as by the first of our sixe rules, or by subtracting this first number from the sum which here contained both the firste and the last ioynt­lye (or thirdly) by continuall adding the ex­cesse.

Scho.

I pray you make this somewhat [Page] more plaine with an example.

Mai.

If euery moneth in the yeare (coun­ting them now as thirtéene) you gayned clearely 40 shillinges more than you didde the moneth next going before, and at the yeares ende you find the whole gaine 5720 shillinges, but yée remember not howe much either the gaine of the first moneth, or the last was, by this rule it maye be tried out.

Sc.

So that here ye séeme to applie the 13 moneths to 13 places ye 40 shillings euery one more then the other next before it, to be the common excesse, and 5700 s. to be the totall summe.

Mai.

It is true: by 13, [...] then I diuide 5710, in this maner.

I double this quotient, so haue I 880 for the firste, and the last sinne ioyned togither, by 12, which is lesse by one than the [...] number of the places, I multi­plie 40, (the common excesse) so commeth 480.

This 480 I subtract from 880, so remaineth 400: halfe whereof [Page] is the firste number whiche we desired to know, that is 200.

And as for the last number, I can giue you it 3 wayes: As by the first of my sire rules, I multiplie the excesse by a number lesse by 1 than the number of the places: as 40 by 12, that giueth 480, whiche I adde to the first being 200, so shall the laste bée 680.

The same sum commeth forth, if yée sub­tract 200 from 880.

And thirdly, if I beginne 200, and so pro­céede, encreasing by 40, I shall at the thir­téenth place haue 680, as thus.

200.240.280.320.360.400.
440.480.520.560.600.640.
680.     
Sc

I thank you most hartilye for these 6 rules. Now if it be your pleasure, I would heare and learne somwhat of Progression Geometricall.

Mai.

There are yet very many rules and propositions, which fall into this Arithme­ticall progression: but these shall suffise for this time.

[Page]And in Geometricall progression I will be more briefe, both because I haue bene so long in this part of Arithmeticall progres­sion, and also for that it woulde require the knowledge of Rootes, and numbers surde, (whereof ye haue yet learned nothing) if I shoulde frame the like propositions in them as I haue done in these. Therefore I will only teache you two practises, aboute it, and so ende the considerations & works of these progressions.Progression Geometri­call. Progression Geometricall is when the numbers increase by a like pro­portion, that is, if the second number con­taine the first, 2, 3, or 4 times, and so foorth: then the third containeth the seconde so ma­nye times also: and so the fourth the third, and the fifth the fourth: [...] wherefore I sette these thrée examples.

Here in the firste ex­ample you see, that e­uery number containeth the other (that go­eth next before him) 2 times: and in the se­conde example 3 times in the thirde exam­ple 5 times. Now if you will know how to finde easilye the summe of any suche num­bers, do thus. Consider by what nūber thoy [Page] bée multiplyed, whether by 2, 3, 4, 5, or a­nye other, and by the same number doe you multiplie the last summe in the Progressi­on.

Sc.

I pray you worke it by this example, 2, 8, 32, 128, 512, 2048, whiche I haue fra­med by procéeding from 2, and continually multiplying by 4.

Mai.

Then must I multiplie the last sum (which is 2048) by 4 also, and it will bée 8192. Nowe must I bate from this summe the first number of the progression, whiche here is 2, then resteth 8190, which summe I must diuide by 1 lesse then was the num­ber that I multiplied by. Seing then I multiplied by 4, I must diuide by 3, so diui­ding 8190 by 3, the quotient will be 2730, which is the summe of all the Progression. And now to proue whether you can doe the same, I giue you these numbers to adde by this rule, 3, 15, 75, 375, 1875, 9375, 46875.

Sch.

I cannot well tell by what number this Progression doth increase.

Maister.

In any such doubte, doe thus: Diuide the seconde number by the first, and the quotiente will shewe you the number [Page] that engendreth the Progression.

Sc.

Then is that number in this exam­ple 5, for so many times is 3 in 15.

Mayster.

So is it. Nowe worke as I taught you.

Scholer.

The laste number is 46875, whiche I multiplie be 5, and it yéeldeth 234375, from which I abate the first num­ber of the Progression, that is 3, and there resteth 234372, which I diuide by 4, for yt is one lesse thē 5, & the quotient is 58593, which is the whole summe of the progressi­on.

Mai.

Now that you know the summing of Geometricall Progression, I will shewe you a compendious manner eyther to pro­céede by, or to finde out the quantitye of a number whose distance from the first may be very greate,An abridge­ment in progression. whiche to doe by continu­all multiplication, would be very tedious, if the numbers be great and the places ma­ny.

Sc.

Nothing can pleasure me more then breuitie, if it be playne.

Mayster.

I thinke I am not yet in a­nye point so darke or hard, that you néede to feare any obscuritie now. The manner is [Page] this: set downe of your progression foure or fiue of the first places, and vnder the first put a cipher, vnder the seconde 1, vnder the third 2, &c. as if yee had a progression encreasing by a fiue folde quantitie: as here, 2, 10, 50, 250, 1250: then vnder 2 I put a cipher, and vnder 10 the figure of [...] 4: and so foorthe if yée will: but to a wise and warie worker, a fewe places were sufficient to procéed by to any number of places in this sorte, if anye two of your numbers progres­sional be multiplied the one by the other, and the ofcome diuided by the firste of your progression, the quotient is one of your num­bers progressionall, and belonging to ye place of your vnder numbers, that is equal to that summe, that is made of Addition togither of your two numbers which stoode vnder these two of your Progressionall numbers; that were multiplied the one by the o­ther, [...] as in thys example.

If I multiplie 10 by 50. thereof commeth [Page] 300, whiche I diuide by 2, (the firste number of the Progression,) and the quotient is 250: whiche 250, muste stande in the thirde place, because the number whiche standeth vnder 10 is 1, and that vnder 50. is 2: and 2 and 1 maketh 3. Therefore I say, that 250 belon­geth to the thirde [...] place of this pro­gression, as yée sée also here it doeth. Moreo­uer If I multi­plie 50, into it selfe, thereof commeth 2500: that 2500 I diuide by 2, the Quotiente is 1500, whiche muste be sette in the fourthe place: bicause 2 added to himselfe againe, ma­keth 4, and in our example 1250 occupieth the fourth place.

Sc.

Then for that fifth place I multiplie the Progressionall numbers ouer 2 and 3 one by the other: and for the sixt, I multiplie that o­uer 3 in it selfe. &c.

M.

Yée must wel remēber that these places that we nowe speake of, belong to the vnder numbers, for the true places of the vpper nū ­bers is euer one place more.

Scholer.

That I sée the reason of, by­cause [Page] the vnder numbers begin one after, and againste the first place of my progression stā ­deth a cypher, so that the 250 which you saide before did belong to the third place, I sée be­longeth to the number of 3 among your vn­der numbers, but from the true progressions beginning, it is the fourth.

Maister

You vnderstand me as I meane. Therefore for your exercise of both the rules here giuen for Geometricall progression, I will aske you a question, muche vsed among the common people, (as they haue a greate many the like) If I woulde sell you a Horse, hauing 4 shoes, and in euerie shoe six nailes, with this condition, that you shal pay for the first naile 1 ob, for the second 2 ob, for ye thirde 4, and for the fourth 8, and so forth dubbling vntil the last naile. Now I demaunde of you how muche the price of the Horse woulde a­mount vnto?

Scholer.

Seing the Horse hathe 4 shoes, and in euerie shoe 6 nayles, I perceyue here wil bée 24 places. If I coulde nowe haue the laste number, I woulde quicklie dispatch this question. I wil therefore with as fewe multiplicatiōs as I can deuise, to come to the [Page] knowledge of the laste number of thys pro­gression. In double [...] I set foorth than a few of my progres­sion, thus.

If I nowe multiplie the numbers ouer 5 and 6, the one by the other, I shall haue the number of the eleuenth place for the vnder numbers, but of the twelfth for the vpper nū ­bers in which my progression standeth, and then that of ye eleuenth place vnder, if I mul­tiplie in it selfe, I shal haue for the 22 place vnder, but for the 23 of that aboue, whiche I multiplie by that ouer 1 of my nether places, and I shall haue the 23 of my nether places, and the 24 of the vpper, which is the number I séeke for.

Maister.

Me thinketh you haue forgotten youre rule for abridging your multiplicati­ons: for in it, the ofcome ouer of anye multi­plication, is to be diuided by the firste of the progression. And you now speake of no diui­sion.

Scholer.

Sir I néede not, as my progressiō beginneth now: for if I should diuide by 1, it maketh no other quotient, then the number is, it doth diuide.

Maister.
[Page]

It is verie wel remem­bred [...] and noted of you, to youre worke then according to youre prescribed manner, which I like well.

S.

I multiply 64 by 32 as here. And it maketh 2048. whiche is the eleuenth place vnder, but the twelfth [...] aboue, and this, I multiply in it selfe, in this manner. And this is the 22 place vnder but the 23 aboue. I multiplie this then by 2, as héere.

And this of come [...] 8388608, is my foure and twentith place, whiche I haue found now by 3 multiplications.

Then doe I resort to the rule of summing this Progression, where I consider that the encrease of this summe procéedeth by multi­plication of 2, and therefore I doe multiplie the laste summe by 2 also, and it yéeldeth 16777216. from whiche 1 I abate the firste nūber which is 1, and then resteth 1677715, whiche I shoulde diuide by 1 lesse then I did [Page] [...] multiplie: but séeing that it is 1, I néede not to diuide it, for 1 (as I haue before saide) doth neither multiply nor diuide, therefore I take that summe 16777215 for the whole summe of the pence, which by Reduction I finde to be 699050 s, and 7 d, ob: that is 34952 lb, 10 s, 7 d, ob.

Maister.

That is well done, but I thinke you wil buy no horse of the price.

Scholer.

No sir if I bée wise. Yet for my assurance wil I take so muche paine, as to come to this laste 8388608 by cōtinual mul­tiplication by 2, as in thys example you maye beholde my worke till I haue done.

Mayster.

Well, are you not almost weary?

Scholler.

Well fare my shorte rule, for introth it hathe more cunning and more [Page] ease.

Mayster.

Well, then answeare me to this question.

A Lorde deliuered to a Bricklayer a certayne number of loades of bricke, wher­of he willed him to make 12. walles, of such sorte, that the first wall shoulde receiue 2 thirdeles of the whole number: and the se­conde 2 thirdles of that that was left. And so euerie other 2 thirdles of that that remained: and so did the bricklayer: And when the 12 walles, were made, there remaineth one lode of Bricke.

Nowe I aske you, howe many loade went to euery wall, and howe many loade was in the whole?

Scholer.

Why sir, it is impossible for me to tel.

Mayster.

Nay, it is very easie, if you marke it well. Marke well that I saide, that euery wall shoulde receiue [...] thirdeles of the sum that was lefte. Nowe take away 2 thir­dels from anye summe and you must néedes graunt that that whiche remaineth is 1 thir­dle of the summe laste before: example of [...] ▪ from which if you take 2 thirdels, there will remaine 3, whiche is one thirdel of 9. Like­waies [Page] from 3 bate 2 thirdels: and there will remaine 1.

Scholer.

This is true, and nowe I per­ceiue, that the leaste wall had but two loade of bricke.

Maister.

And by the same reason maye you knowe howe manie loade euerie wall hadde, according as this figure folowing doth shew, and likewayes what the whole summe of briekes was: for if you make 1 [...] summes, multiplying by 2, stil frō the last remayner, as you maye sée here on the lefte side of the table, there will appeare all the remayners of euerie wall: and if you multiplie the last of those 12 summes by [...], also, then will that be the sum of the loades whiche were deliue­red to the bricklayer.

Againe, if you doe double euery remainer, as you maye sée at the right side of this table, those numbers will showe the sum of loades that went to eache wall: whereby you maye perceiue, that each wall was 3 times so great as the next lesser.

Sc.

Loe, nowe it appeareth easie ynoughe. Now surely I sée that Arithmetike is a right excellent arte.

Ma.

You will say so when you know more [Page] of the vse of it: For this is nothing in com­parison to other points that may be wrought by it.

Scholer.

Then I beséech you sir, cease not to instruct me further in this wonderful cun­ning.

The remainer after euerie wal. 1122 Loades due to each wal.
3116
91018
27954
818162
2437486
72961458
218754374
6561413122
19683339366
590492118098
1771471354294
Some of the 531441 Loades deliuered.

THE GOLDEN Rule.

Maister.

BY order of the science (as men haue taughte it) there should fellow nexte the extraction of Rootes of number, whiche because it is somewhat harde for you, yet I will let it passe for a while, and will teache you the feate of the rule of Proportions, whiche for his ex­cellencie is called the Golden rule. Whose vse is, by thrée numbers knowen, to finde out an other vnknowen, whiche you desire to knowe: as thus. If you pay for your boorde for thrée moneths 16 shillings, howe muche shal you pay for 8 moneths.

To know this and all such like questions, you shall consider which two of your 3 num­bers be of one denominatiō, and set those two the one ouer the other, so that the vndermoste [Page] be it that the question is asked of: as in my question 3 and 8 be both of one denominati­on, for they both be monethes, and because 8 is the number that the question is asked of, I set them one ouer the other, [...] and 8 vndermoste, thus, with suche a crooked draught of lines. Then doe I set the other number whiche is 16, a­gainste 3, at the right side of [...] the line, thus.

And nowe to knowe my question, thys must I doe: I muste multiplie the lowermost on the left side, by that on the right side, and the summe that amounteth I muste diuide by the highest, on the left side. Or in playner wordes thus: I shall multiplie the number of whiche the question is asked (whyche is called the Thirde number) by the number of an other denomination,The third number. The seconde number. The first number. (whiche is cal­led the Seconde) and that summe that amoū ­teth muste I diuide by the summe of lyke denomination, whiche is called the Firste. Then for the knowledge of this question, I multiplie 8 into 16, and there amoūteth 128, whiche I diuide by 3, and it yéeldeth 42 shil­lings, and 2 s remaineth, whiche I turne into pennies, and they be 24 d, of whiche [Page] the third part is 8 d, so the third part of 128 s is 42 s, 8 d: which summe I write at the right hande of the figure a­gainst [...] 8, thus.

Hereby I knowe, that if thée monethes boording doe come to 16 s, that 8 monethes bording wil come to 42 s, 8 d: and likewise of any other like question.

But here must you marke, that the firste number and the thirde be of one denominati­on, and also the seconde and the fourth, the whiche you séeke: or else be of suche denomi­nations, that you in working may bring thē into one. As if a man shoulde aske me thys question.

*Twelue wéekes iournying coste me four­téene French Crownes at 6 s. the péece, how many poundes is that in one yeare. Here you sée no two nūbers of one denomination, But yet in working, you may turne them in­to like denominations, as thus: turne the one yeare into 52 weekes, and the fourth summe wil be French Crownes, by the order of the working: Then to knowe this question, multiplie the thirde summe 52 by the second 14: and the summe will be 728: that diuide by your firste number 12: and the quotiente [Page] will be 60. Crownes: And 8 Crownes re­mayning: whiche if you turne into shillings they will be 48 shillings which if you doe di­uide by your firste number 12 the quotiente will be 4: whiche signifyeth 4 s. put these 60. French Crownes (which make 18 poundes) with the 4 shillings: for [...] the summe that answe­reth to the question: And it is the iust expē ­ces of a yeare: And the summe wil be thus.

And take this euermore for a general Rule touching this whole Arte, That the doubtful or vnknowen number, that you woulde be resolued of, shall alwayes be set in the thirde place, note also the first number and the third, must euer be of one nature and denominati­on, or else must in working be brought to like denomination and then of necessitie must the other number be in the second place.

Remember also, that the place of the firste number is the highest on the left side: and the place of the seconde right against it on ye right side: the place of the thirde number is vnder the firste, as by those examples you haue séene.

Sc.

This I trust I can do.

Mayster.
[Page]

But and if the question be asked thus: In 8 wéekes I spend 40. s howe long wil 105 shillings serue me? Here you sée that 8 wéekes aunsweres himselfe, and saieth 40 shillings. But how long time 105 shillings wil serue, you know not. Therefore you shal set 105 in the thirde place, according as I tolde you euen now. And the first place must alwayes be of the same nature or Denomi­nation, that the third is of, which here is 40. Then must 8 néeds be that other. Now mul­tiply 105 by 8 and it will be 840 which if you diuide by 40, it will yéelde 21, whiche is the Fourth number, and sheweth howe manye wéekes 105 s. will serue, if you spende 40 s. in eight wéekes.

The figure of thys que­stion [...] is this: as if you should saye: If 40 s. serue for 8 wéekes, 105 serue for 21 wéekes.

Other diuersities there be of working by this rule, but I hadde rather that you woulde learne this one well, than at the beginning to trouble your minde with many formes of working, sith this way can doe as much as al [Page] the other, and hereafter you shall learne the o­ther more conuenientlie.

And for your further aide and instruction to make you better acquainted wyth thys Goldon Rule, I haue here proponed 6 que­stions, and their aunsweres, whiche I thinke moste conueniente and méete to preferre the desirous to perfecte vnderstanding. The firste foure are all braunches of one Question sproong out of the beste trée, (for a young learner to taste of) that groweth in this Grounde of Artes, for that no manner of Question in the Rule of 3 what so euer it bée, can be proponed, but it muste be com­prehended, vnder the reason or style of one of these foure.

The Questions be these.

If 15 elles of Cloth coste 7 lb. 10 s: what comes, 27 elles too at that price: Aunsweare. 13 lb. 10 s.

If 27 elles coste 13 lb. 10 s: what are 15 [Page] elles worth. Answere. 7 lb. 10 s.

If 27 elles coste 13 lb. 10 s: howe manye elles shal I haue for 7 lb. 10 s. Answere 15 elles.

If I sell 15 elles for 7 lb. 10 s howe ma­nye elles are to be deliuered for 13 lb. 10 s. Answere. 27 elles,

If 8 pound of any thing cost 16 s. 6 d. what money is to be receiued for 49 pounde: An­swere. 2 lb 4 s. 11 d.

If 4 lb. of anye thing coste 17 d: what mo­ney wil 8765 pound of that commoditie cost. Answere. 155 lb. 4 s. 3 d. farthing.

Of all which questions I omitte the work of purpose, you shoulde whet your wit there by at conuenient leasure, to climb ech branch and gather the fruite of them: And doe minde nowe, before we make ad ende of this Rule, to giue you some Instructions of the Bac­ker Rule of 3. whose order is quite contra­rye to thys that you haue learned. For in thys Rule hitherto euermore looke how muche the thirde number is greater than the firste, so muche the fourthe number is greater then the seconde. And contrarye wayes: loke howe much the firste summe is greater then the thirde, (if it doe chaunce so) [Page] so much is the second summe greater then the fourth. But in this Rule, there is a con­trary order, as this: That the greater the third summe is aboue the first, the lesser the fourth sum is beneth the seconde: and this rule therfore you may call the Backer rule,The bac­ker rule. as in example.

If I haue boughte 20 yardes of cloth,Question of buying cloth. of 2 yards breadth, and woulde buy canuas of 3 yards brode to line it withall, howe manye yards should I néede?

Sc.

Why, there is none so broade.

Mai.

I doe not care for that, I doe put this example only for your easie vnderstan­ding: For if I should put the example in o­ther measures, it would be harder to vnder­stand. But nowe to the matter: If you woulde know this question, set your num­bers as you did before: but you shall mul­tiplie now the first number by the seconde, and that ariseth thereof, you shall diuide by the third: which thing if you doe here, I meane if you multiplie 30 by 2, it will be 60: which summe if you diuide by 3, there will appeare 20: whereby I knowe, that if 30 yardes of cloth of two yardes broade, should be lined with canuas of thrée yardes [Page] broade, 20 yards of can­uas [...] woulde suffice, as this figure sheweth.

And nowe because yée found fault at my exam­ple, how say you, perceaue you this?

Sc.

Yes sir. I suppose.

Mai.

Then aunswere me to this questiō: how many elles of canuas of elle breadth, will serue to line 20 yards of Saye, of thrée quarters brode.

Sc.

In good faith sir, I cannot tell, for I know not how to bring the summes to like denominations.

Maister.

Then wil I tel you: sith there is mention here of quarters, and againe e­uerye one of the measures both elles and yardes may be parted into quarters, do you parte them so both in the breadth and length, and then put forth the question by quarters.

Scholer.

Then I shall say thus. Howe manye quarters of canuas of fiue quarters broade, wil line 80 quarters of 3 quarters brode.

Mayster.

Now aunswere to the questi­on.

Sc.
[Page]

First I wil set them [...] downe in their forme thus, for 5 is ioyned with ye que­stion, and is therefore the third number: then is 3 the number of the same denomination, I meane because they be both referred to breadth. Now I multi­plie 80 by 3, and it is 240, which I diuide by 5, and it yieldeth 48. Then saye I, that 48 quarters of 5 quarters broad, will suf­fice to line 80 quarters of 3 quarters brode.

Ma.

Turne the quarters againe into elles and yardes.

Sch.

Then I say, that 9 elles and thrée quarters of a yarde of elle [...] broade will serue to lyne 20 yardes of thrée quar­ters brode, as this figure sheweth.

* M.

Now what say you to this questiō: I lent my friend 400 lb for 7 months, now how much money ought he to lēd me again for 12 moneths, to recompence my curtesie shewed him. Can you aun­swere [...] to this.

Sc.

Yes sir I suppose, for I wil set down my nūbers thus [Page] where I multiplie 7 into 400, and it ma­keth 2800, whiche I diuide by 12, and it yieldeth 233 lb and there is 4 lb. remaining of my Diuision, what shall I doe there­with.

Mai.

Turne that same 4 lb into s and then diuide it by 12 as you did before.

Sc.

Well sir it shall be done, so haue I 6 s. for my quotient, and yet remaineth 8 s. vpon my diuision.

Ma.

You must also reduce 8 s. into pence, which maketh 96, and diuide that al­so by your first diuisor.

Sc.

So haue I done, and I finde 8 pence for my quotient and nothing is left.

Ma.

This must you alwayes doe, when any thing remaineth vppon your diuision: whether it be mony, weight, measure, or a­ny kind of thing whatsoeuer. This rule is so profitable for all estates of men, that for this rule onlie (if there were no more but it) all men were bound highly to estéeme A­rithmetike.

By this Rule maye a Captaine in warre worke many things, as Maister Digges in his Stratiaticos doth notably declare: Onlie nowe in this my simple addition, for a taste [Page] and incouragemēt I wil enlarge ye Author with a questiō or ij. more, wishing you, & e­uerie my coūtriemen or Gentlemē, whatso­euer, that by nature be anye thing giuen to Millitarie affaires, to be familier and wel acquainted with this Exceliente Arte, the whiche he shall finde not onely at the Sea, but also in the Campe and Fielde seruices, aboundantly to aide him, either in fortifica­tiō, or in paying of Souldiors wages, how differente soeuer their paye be: Charges of Ordinaunce pouder, shot, Munition and in­strumentes, whatsoeuer, but now to the question.

If it should chaunce a Captaine whiche hath 40000 souldiers,Question of prouisi­on tou­ching a [...] ­a [...]ate. to be so inclosed with his enemie that he could haue no fresh pur­ueiance of vittailes, and that the vittailes which he hath, would serue that armie but only 3 moneths, how many men should hée dimisse, to make the vittaile to suffise ye re­sidue, 8 moneths? [...]

Sc.

As you taught me, I set the nūbers thus, saying: If 3 moneths suffise 40000, to howe manye will 8 mo­neths suffice?

[Page]To know this I multiplie the first num­ber 3 into seconde 40000, & it yieldeth 120000, which sum I diuide by 8, & there wil be in the quotiēt 15000, which if I doe subtract from 40000, the [...] remainer will declare that hée muste dismisse 15000 as this figure sheweth

* Maist.

Nowe aunswere me to this question: If 136 Masons in a moneth bée able to builde a Forte, to preserue the Souldiers from the enemie: And suche expedition requireth that I woulde haue the same finished in eighte dayes, how ma­nye workemen saye you is there to bée ap­pointed.

Sch.

As you taught me I [...] set the numbers thus, saying: If 28 daies require 136 Ma­sons, what number of men by proportion will 8 dayes bring forth.

To know this I multiplie the first nūber 28 into 236: And it yieldeth me 2808: whiche I diuide by 8. And my quotiente is 476, which is the iust number of Masons that shall supplie this worke. And now me think these questions are very easie.

Ma.
[Page]

Truly if you take delectation herein you shall finde this Art not onely easie, but wonderfull pleasant & profitable: Now an­swere me this question, & so wil I make an end of this rule, in whole nūbers hasting ye sooner to broken nūbers. For had you yt vn­derstanding of thē perfectly, not only in this Rule, but in all other: the question in sight might haue ben 10 times more harder to absolue, & yet as easilie & as soone wroughte as this.

Sc.

Your words doth greatly encorage me to be studious to attaine whole numbers, which me think are wōderfull. But might I once attain to be a practicioner in brokē, I should think my self a happy lad.

M.

Now what say you to this, If [...] car­penters in 2 dayes can make [...]00 Staues: estéeming they work but 12 howers a day: And such néede requireth yt 384 carpenters are set to the finishing of these 200 staues, in what time say you wil they make thē vp

Scholer.

I see here that I muste turne my [...] daies into howers, And [...] so doing I sette my numbers thus

Saying, if 48 men are [Page] 24 houres 384 men will make an ende quickely. For it is grounded vpon an olde Prouerbe, many hands make quick spéede.

I multiplie 48 into 24, and it amounteth to 1152, whiche I diuide by 384: and my quotient is 3 houres which is my desire.

Note.I take this for a note worthie the mar­king either in the Rule of thrée, forwarde, or backwarde, when the two numbers art multiplied togither, the Producte is of the same nature, and denomination that the se­cond number is of.

Maister.

Well, sithe you perceiue nowe the vse of this Rule,The dou­ble Rule. I will shewe other which ensue of the same, & firste the double Rule, which is so called, because there is in it double working, by which thing onely it differeth from this.

Sch.

Then by an example I shal vnder­stand it well ynough.

Ma.

Of cariage.So shall you, and let this be the ex­ample: If the cariage of 100 pound weight 30 miles, doe cost 12 d. how much will the cariage of 500 weight cost, being caryed 100 miles?

Scholer.

I pray you shewe me the wor­king of it.

M.
[Page]

You must make 2 workings of it: the first thus. If 100 pound weighte cost 12 d. how much will 500 lb. cost?

Set your figure thus. [...] And multiplie 500 by 12 and therof amoūteth 6000, which if you diuide by 100, the quotiēt wil be 60, that is the price of 500 for 30 miles.

Thē begin the second worke, saying: if 30 miles cost 60 d, how much wil 100 miles cost? Set your figure thus. [...]

Than multiplie a 100 by 60, wherof amoūteth 6000 which being diuided by 30, will yield 200 d. Than you may say, that so many penies shall cost the cariage of 500 pound waighte 100 miles, after the rate of 12 pence for the 100, caried 30 miles.

Scholer.

Now I perceiue it also.

Mai.

These and such other like questiōs, are to be aunswered much quicker, at one working by the Rule of 3 composed of fiue numbers, whiche here I will not trouble you withall. But at the ende of this Rule will shewe you the worke thereof: not on­lye of this and the nexte question, but also I will there deliuer thrée or 4 other exam­ples, [Page] wishing you then to make a com­parison the one with the other: And so to vse which way you thinke good.

Sc.

Sir I thanke you much for your cur­tesie, and I long now til this rule be ended, that I shall sée howe I maye behaue my selfe with that newe Rule of 5 numbers, for that I haue euer since you taughte mée hetherto, in the Golden Rule both forward and backward wroughte but with 3 num­bers only.

Ma.

Question of sovving.Till we haue done with this, lette vs go on forward: and answere me to this question: 30 bushels of wheat sowed, yiel­ded in one yeare 360: how manye will 80 bushels yield in 7 yeare.

Sc.

First I saye, that if 30 bushels will yield 360 in 1 yeare, then 80 bushels will yield 960 in 1 yere. Then for the seconde worke I say: If one yeare yield 960, then 7 yeare will yielde 6720: as these two fi­gures doe shew.

[...]

Question of Corn.But now sir, if I set forth 30 bushels of corne to another man for 7 yeare, agréeing [Page] so that he shall sow euerye yeare the whole encrease of the corne, and I at the ende of those seuen yeares to haue the halfe of the whole increase: I would know how many bushels will there amount to my part sup­posing the increase to be after ye rate of the last question, for 30 bushels in one yeare, 360.

Mai.

In such a question you must haue so manye seuerall workinges, as there be yeres, as for example: In the first yere [...]0 bushels yield 360: then to knowe the yiel­ding of the second yeare, I must say: If 30 yield 360, how many yieldeth 360? Work by your rule, and you shal find 4320. Then say for the third yere: if 30 yield 360, how manye will 4320 yielde? you shall haue 51840, and so euery yeare multiplying the whole encrease by 360, and diuiding it by 30, the increase of the next yere wil amoūt, as these 7 figures (in ye next page) do order­ly declare: where I haue set 7 letters for ye 7 yeres, of which the first is set without art because that is the increase whiche you doe presuppose: & the last number of eche other doth shewe the increase of the yeare that it standeth for; which the letters doe declare, [Page] so that the increase of the seuen yeare, is 1074954240 bushels: how manye quar­ters that is, and also how many wayes, you may by Reduction soone finde. [...] Now with one question more I will proue you. If 6 Mowers doe mowe 45 acres in 5 dayes, how many mowers wil mow 300 acres in 6 dayes?

Sch.

If 45 acres doe require 6 mowers, [Page] then 300 acres requireth 40. Now agayn: if 5 dayes require 40 mowers, then 6 dayes néedeth but 33 mowers.

Mai.

Why do you not make mention of the 2 that remaineth in the last diuision? for the last part of the question is wroughte by the Backer rule, where the first number 5, is multiplied into the seconde that is 40, whereof amounteth 200, whiche if you di­uide by the thirde number 6, the quotiente will be 33, as you said, but then will there remaine 2, which cannot wel be diuided in­to 6 parts: how be it, you may vnderstand by the sixt part of 2, the thirde parte of one mans work, which you must put to the 33, or else you may say, that 33 workemen wil ende all the 300 acres in 6 dayes, saue two mens worke for one day, or 2 dayes worke for one man. But such brokē numbers cal­led Fractions, you shall hereafter more bet­ter perceiue, whē I shal wholy instruct you of them.

Mai.

Yet one question more of field mat­ters I will propone, and so I will make an end of this double Rule of 3.

Sc.

With all my hart sir I thank you, and I wil dispatche it as soone as I can, because [Page] would faine sée the order of the nexte Rule of 5 numbers.

Maist.

Then this is my question, If 300 Pioners in 8 houres, will cast a trenche of 200 Rods: I demaund how manie Labou­rers wil be able with a like trēche in thrée houres to entrench a Camp of 3500 Rods.

Sch.

I thinke I am nowe in the Backe-house diche, for I knowe not well whiche way to go about it: And besides that trulie I think I shall neuer come to prefermente that way my grouth is so small.

Ma.

You know not how God may raise you hereafter by seruice, into the fauour of your Prince, for ye auaile of your Countrie. Example, Sir Francis Drake, as worthy a man as euer England bred, is not the tallest man, and yet hath made the greatest aduē ­ture for the honour of his Prince & Coun­trie, that euer English man did.

Sc.

Sir, I thanke you for your good en­couragement, my mind, though I be little, is as desirous of knowledge, as any other: I haue pondred now a little [...] of it, & thus I set forthe the worke.

Saying if 200 Rod require 3400 [Page] 300 men what shall 3400 Rod require: I multiplie 3400 by 300: and it yieldeth 1020000: which I diuide by 200 and my quotient is 5100 men.

Then must I say for my second work, if in 8 houres 5100 men be able to discharge it, how many shall performe the same in 3 houres? now if I should worke by ye Gol­den Rule of proportion forwarde, I should find a lesse nūber of men, because 3 houres is lesse then 8 houres: but because reasō tea­cheth me that the lesser the time is, wherin ye french must be made, the more Laborers I ought to haue, wherevpon I vse now the backer Rule as in example. And I haue in my quotiēt 5000. So many Pioners must I haue, to entrenche the camp in 3 houres.

Ma.

You haue answered the question ve­ry artificiallie: And truelie I commende you for your diligence and apte vnderstan­ding: and now according to my promise, I will (in whole numbers) giue you a little tast of the Rule of 3 compounded of 5 num­bers.

The Rule of 3 compound of 5 numbers.

THis Rule of 3 com­posed is distinct for most néedefull que­stions into two se­uerall parts or wor­kinges: And there belongeth vnto it al­wayes 5 numbers, wherof in this rule being the first part: the seconde number and the fift are alwayes of one nature and like denomination, which rule is to be wrought thus: you must mul­tiplie the first number by the seconde: And that shalbe your diuisor: Then again, mul­tiplie the other thrée numbers, the one by the other and their product shall be your di­uidend.

And now according to my promise, wée will first work the question of weighte and cariage whiche I deliuered you in ye double rule of 3: to be absolued by this Rule, which was this.

If the cariage of 100 lb. weight 30 miles [Page] coste 12 d, what wil the carriage of 500 lb. weighte stande me in being carried 100 miles.

Then marke [...] wel how these numbers stand: multiplie 100 by 30 as thys figure sheweth: And that number keepe for your diuisor:

Then multiplie the other 3. numbers the one by the other, and they amount as you see to 600000: which you shall diuide by 3000: your quotiēt is 200 d: Now you see it agréeth with the conclusion of the double Rule.

S.

Sir I thanke you most hartely: it is euen so.

Ma

Yet note this for a generalitie in thys Rule,Note. loke what nature or denominatiō your middle number is: and of the like denomina­tion or nature is alwayes your quotient.

Scholer.

Well nowe and it please you by your patience, I will sée howe I can ende, the question then nexte following of 30 Bu­shels of Wheate sowed, yéelded in one yeare 360, how many then will 80 bushels yéelde in seauen yeare: and according to youre rea­sons, I set my numbers thus: [Page] which 201600 [...] I diuide by 30: and my quoti­ente is 6720: bushels my de­sire.

M

Yet one question more I will propound vnto you and so leaue this rule, till it please God hereafter, that I may make you worke it in broken numbers.

What comes the interest of 258 lb for fiue monethes after the rate: of 8 pounde taken in the 100 lb: for 12 monthes:

Sch

Sir as this is a question of gaines So will I warelie worke this question in hope one day to reape someting for my paines: and thus I propone it. But I beseech you if it bée not well set downe to shewe me myne er­rour.

Ma.

Procéede you [...] haue done verye wel

Sch.

Then I doubt not by the grace of God but to ende it: I multiplie 100 by 12 it yéel­deth 1200: and the 3 other numbers multipli­ed togither produceth 10 20: which I diuide by 1200: and my quotient is 8 poundes. Thē [Page] according as you haue taught me heretofore, I turne the 720 lb. that is left: into shillings: and diuiding it by my firste number my quo­tient is 12 s. So I answeare that the lone of 258 lb for 5 monthes, after the rate of 8 lb. in the 100 lb for a yere, comes to 8 lb 12 s.

Mai.

You say true, I commende your dili­gence, now beholde the manner of the second part of this rule.

M.

In the second part of this rule of 3 com­posed: the third number is like vnto the first. And the rule is to be wrought as thus: you shall now contrarie to the last rule multiplie the third number and the fourth togither: and that product shal be your deuisor: Then mul­tiplie the fift by the seconde and the producte therof by the first: and that is ye number that shall be diuided. For example I propond this question: for a proofe of my last question of in­terest. A Merchant hath receiued 8 lb 12 s. for interest for 5 months terme, which he re­ceiued after the rate of 8 lb. in the 100 lb. for a yere. The question is nowe how much mo­nie was deliuered to raise this interest: Be­hold therefore the [...] maner howe the question is set foorth.

Scholer.
[Page]

Sir I perceiue it verie wel: and according to the doctrine whiche you prescri­bed for the working thereof: if it please you nowe it is set downe I thinke I can followe the worke.

M.

Nay staie a while, and afore you worke marke wel how I deliuer a reasō, for the per­fect vnderstanding of this rule which is thus:Note. if 8 lb. in 12 monethes do yéeld me 100 lb To take 8 lb — 12 s. for 5 moneths, muste néedes yéelde a great deale more.

So vpō the knowledge that I haue in this Arte, The first part of this rule is aunswera­ble to the rule of 3 forwarde: And this latter part accordeth to the rule 3 backward.

S.

Sir I yéelde you most hartie thankes for these your last instructions, they haue giuen me great light into these two Rules, wherby I maye the better by deliberation conceiue how to vse them hereafter, whē occasion shall require.

M.

You say wel, go too now if you wil, and trie your cunning in the question:Note. But thys note take with you by the way, in as much as here is mention made of shillings: turne all your mony as you worke, for your more ease in worke.

S.
[Page]

If it please you to behold me a litle, I wil quicklie end it: for I haue but my first: my se­conde: and my last number to be multiplied togither for my diuidende: And my third into my fourth for my diuisor: [...]

Whiche I diuide by 800. and my quotient is 5160 shillings, which in poundes yéeldeth 258 my desire.

M.

I will here for this time in whole num­bers ende this rule, and wil instructe you in the rules of Felowship. You may at your cō ­uenient leasure, for your exercise worke the [Page] same, by the rule of 3. at twice: And for your aide and encouragement therein, I set down here a profer how to apply it.

[...]

The Rule of Felowship.

BVt now wil I shew you of the rule of fe­lowship or Compa­nie, which hath sun­drie operations, ac­cording to the diuers number of the com­panie. This rule is sometime without difference of time, and sometimes there is in it difference of time. Firste I will speake of that without difference of time, of which let this be an example.

Foure Merchaunts of one companie made a banke of money diuerslie, for the first layde [Page] in 50 lb, the seconde 50 lb, the third 60 lb, and the fourthe 100 lb, whiche stocke they occu­pied so long, till it was encreased to 30 [...]0 lb. Nowe I demaunde of you, what shoulde eache man receiue at the parting of this money.

Sch.

I perceiue that this rule is like the o­ther, but yet there is a differēce, which I per­ceiue not

Ma

Then wil I shew it to you. Firste by Addition you shall bring all the particular summes of the Merchaunts into one summe, whiche shall be the first summe in your wor­king by the Golden rule, and the whole sum of the gaines by that stocke shal be the second summe. Now for the third sum, you shall set the portion of each mā one after an other, and then work by the Golden rule, and the fourth sum will shewe you each mans gaines: as in example.

The parcels of those foure Merchaunts make in one sum 240 lb: set that in the firste plare, the gaines in the second, [...] and the firste mans portion of stocke in the place thus.

Now multiplie the second by the third, and it will be 90000, whiche you shall diuide by [Page] 240, and there wil ap­peare [...] 375 lb. thus.

And that the gaines for the first man.

Now for the second man, set the 50 lb. that he brought, in the thirde place, and worke as before: and his part will [...] be 625 lb. as this figure sheweth.

Likewaies for the thirde man set his mo­ny [...] which was 60 lb, and his parte of gaines wyll be 150 lb, as here appea­reth.

And so for the fourth man, if you sette his summe whiche is 1000 lb, [...] his gaines wil be 1250 lb, as the proofe wyll de­clare.

Scholer.

This I perceiue: but is there a­ny way to examine whether I haue wel done er no?

Maister.

That muste you doe by one com­mon proofe which serueth to the Golden rule and al other insuing of the same: and that is this: Change the standings of the numbers, and set the thirde in the first place, the 4 in the seconde place, and the firste in the third place, [Page] and they worke by the Golden rule, and if you haue done well, the fourth number now will be the same that was the seconde before. As for example, I will [...] take the last worke whi­che was this.

[...] Which to examine I alter as I saide, thus:

Nowe if I multiply the second number by the thirde, and diuide that that amounteth by the firste, then will the fourth number be 3000, [...] whiche was the seconde before, as you sée here, whiche is a token, that I haue well done. But as in a single rule one proofe thus is sufficient, so in a rule where many operations be, you must turne euery of them as I haue done with this one.

Scholer.

Then for the [...] proofe of the firste worke of this rule, I shold turn the numbers thus.

[...] And the seconde thus. And for the thirde thus. [...] And in ech of them if the [Page] working were true, the fourth number wyll be still 3000.

Ma.

Wel, nowe an other example will I put to you, not of gaines, but of losse: for one reason serueth for both.

If thrée Merchauntes in one shippe and of one fellowship, had bought marchandise, so that the first had laide out 200 lb, the seconde [...]00 lb, and the thirde 500 lb, and it chaunced by tempest that they did cast ouer board into the sea merchandise of the value of 100 poūd, howe muche shoulde eache man boare in this losse?

Scholer.

If I shal doe in this as you did in the other question, then muste I ioyne theyr thrée portions togither, 200, 300, and 500, whiche maketh [...]000. Then saye I, if 1000 leefe 100, then shal 200 loose 20, and [...]00 shal loose 30, & 500, shall loose 50, as by these thrée figures it doth appeare plaine.

[...]

Ma.

Well sith now you haue done these I [Page] wil propound a questiō of more importance, which shal make you not only ye abler to vn­derstād this Rule, but also it wil greatly aide you in the next rule of fellowship with time, if such néede be that your money be of diuerse denominations.

For this may not be forgottē in al such que­stions, if the number be of diuerse kinds: you must by Reductiō bring it into one kind, that is to say to the leaste value that is named in ye question. And likewaies shall you doe, if the time be of diuerse kinds, as some yeres, some monethes, wéekes and dayes, you shall make al months, wéeks or days according as ye least name of time in ye questiō is: As for example.

First in diuersitie of mony. Thrée cōpaniōs bought 2000 shéepe, and paide for them 241 lb. 13 s, 4. d. of which sum one paide 101 lb,Question of Sheepe. 10 s. The second paid 82 lb. 17 s, 10 d. And the third paide 57 lb, 5 s, 6 d: How many shéepe must each of them haue? Answere: The first shal haue 840. The second 686. And the third 474. And that must you worke thus.Solution.

Firste considering that your money is of diuerse denominations, you shall (by Redu­ction) bring it all into the smallest denomi­nation [Page] whiche is in it, that is to saye, pence, and so will the total sum bée 58000. pence.

Now, if you turne eache mans mony into pennies also, the firste mannes summe will be 24360 pence: The second mans summe 19894. pence. And the third mans mony wil be 13746. pence.

Now to know how many shéepe euery mā shal haue, let the whole sum of money that is 58000. pence, in ye first place & in ye secōd place set the number of shéepe, and then orderly in the thirde place set eache mans money, and then multiplying the thirde and the seconde summes togither, and diuiding that that a­mounteth by the firste, there will appeare the number of shéepe that eche man ought to haue: as these thrée figures do shewe, [...]

Scholer.

Why doe you set the mony in the first place, séeing in the question you saye, [Page] 2000 sheepe cost 58000 d? & not thus, 58000 d cost 2000 sheepe.

Mayster.

You remember, I taught you at the beginning of this Goulden rule, that the firste and thirde numbers must bée of one name, and of like thyngs: and euermore the number that the question is asked of, must bée sette in the third place. Now is the question playnely this: If foure men bought 2000 sheepe for 58000 pence, howe many sheepe shall each man haue?

But seing in this question there ought more respect to be had to the summe of mony, than to the summe of the persons, (for in ye sūmes of mony is there proportion toward ye sheepe, and not in the number of persons) therefore must wée turne the question thus.

If 18000 pence bought 2000 shéepe, how many did 24360 s buy? Agayne, how many did 19894 d buy? & how many bought 13746 pens.

Scholler.

I perciue it reasonable, and so shall I doe in all like questions.

Mayster.

Euen so, But for easinesse of the work marke this:Note. When soeuer the first and second numbers haue ciphers in the first places, you may bothe in the multiplication [Page] and in the diuision leaue out those ciphers, so that you leaue out like manye out of bothe summes, as in this question the first number 58000 hath thrée ciphers, and so hath the se­conde that is 2000: therefore caste awaye their ciphers, and so will the first number bée 58, and the second 2: set them in their places, and worke according to the rule, and you shal perceiue that it wil be al one, sauing that this is the shorter and easier way, as these thrée fi­gures do shew.

[...]

And this you sée is both easier, and also the more certaine waye to know the answere to this question.

S.

Truth it is as you say: but sir, me séemeth I might aske a further question here, not on­lie how manye shéepe eche man should haue, but also what euerie shéepe cost.

Maister.

That question doeth not onelye [Page] belong to this rule, but may also be discussed by Diuision, especiallie if the questions num­ber be one onelie: as thus. Diuide the totall summe 58000 pence, by 2000 (or 58 by 2, omitting the ciphers) and the quotient wil be 29 pence, that is 2 [...] s, 5 d, howbeit, by this rule you maye doe it, and beste when the number of the question doth excéede 1: as if I shoulde aske this question, 2000 shéep [...] coste 58000 d, howe [...] muche did 20 coste? Then shal I set my figure thus.

And doing after the rule, there wil amoūte 580 pence, that is 2 lb 8 s 4 d: the price of one score: But if you wil vse that easie waye that I did teach you, you may [...] change the firste and seconde number thus.

Thus doe you perceiue the vse of the rule without time.The rule of felovv [...]h [...]p vvith time. And that you may as wel [...] perceiue the same with diuersitie of time, I propose this example.

Foure Merchants made a common stocke,Question of a banke. whiche at the yeares ende was encreased to 35145 lb. Nowe to knowe what shall be ech mans portion of gaines, you muste know [Page] eache mans stock and time of continuance.

The first man of these foure laide in 669. lb which hée did take from the stock agayne, at the end of 10. moneths. The second man layd in 810. lb. for 8. moneths. The thirde layde in 900. lb. for 7. moneths. And the fourth layd in 1040. lb. for 12. moneths.

This question shall you examin as you did the other before, sauing that where as in the third place of the figure you did set eche mans summe alone, here you shall set the same bée­ing multiplyed by the number of their time & likewise in the firste place of the figure, you shal set that number which amoūteth of their whole summes so multiplyed by their time, & added into one whole summe as thus.

The first mans summe is 669 lb. which I multiplye by 10. (that was the number of his time) and it maketh 6690. The second mans summe 810. lb. multiplyed by 8, (which was his time) make 6480. The third mans sum 900. lb. multiplied by 7 (for that was his time yeldeth 6300. The fourth mans summe was 1040 lb and his time 12. multiply the one by the other, and and it will be 12480.

These foure summes thus multiplyed by their time, must be set orderly in ye third place [Page] of the figure: and in the first place must bée set the whole summe of all foure, whiche is 31950, and the gaine must be in the second place, which is [...]5145. Now to end the que­stion, I say firste: If 31950 did get 35145, what did 6690 get? [...] Answere, 7359 lb, as by this figure ap­peareth.

Likewise the second man had to his part 7128 lb, the third must haue 6930 lb And the fourth mā shal haue for his part 13728 lb as these figures doe partly declare.

[...]

Scholer.

This I like verye well: but what proofe is there of this worke?

Mai.

The same that I taughte you for the other. Howbeit,Another proofe. there is vsed both for this worke and the other also this manner of proofe, to adde all the portions togither, [Page] and if they agrée to the whole summe, then seemeth it well done: but this is no sure rule.

Sch.

Yet will I prooue it in this example. The foure parcels are these, [...] which if I adde togither, there will amount 35145, and that was the whole summe: so is this rule true here.

Maister.

And so will it be still when the worke is truely done.

Note the imperfecti­on of this kinde of proofe.But if you lift to sée it prooued false, take 10000 lb from the fourth man, and put it to any of the other 3, and then be yée sure that you haue not done well, and yet wil the proofe allow it, for the Addition will still be all one.

Sc.

It must néedes be so: but what haue I now to learne?

Maist.

There are many other excellent partes behinde, of which I will not, as nowe, make mention because that without the knowledge of Fractions, they cannot be duely taught, and much lesse vnderstanded. Therfore wil I propose to you two or thrée questions more, whereby you may practise the better the feate of the rule of felowship, [Page] (that thereby you may better perceiue ye vse of all other) & so make an end for this time.

There is in a Cathedral Church [...]0 Can­nons, and 30 Vicars,Question of Canons. those maye spende by yere 2600 lb, but euery Cānnon must haue to his part 5 times so much as euery Vicar hath: howe muche is euery mans portion say you?

Sc.

I pray you make the aunswere your selfe, so shall I perceiue best the meanes to aunswere to such other like.

Mai.

In this question you must doe as in those that haue diuersitie of time, for here is diuersitie of portions: Therefore shall you multiplye the number of the persons by their difference of portion: (as you did in the other by time) Then must you mul­tiplie the [...]0. (which is the number of Can­nons) by 5, (for that is the number of their portion) so will it be 102: Then [...]0, (that is the number of Vicars) by 1, (that is the number of their portion) and it will be 30: put those two summes togither, and they make 1 [...]0: then say thus: If 130 spēd 2600 lb, what maye 100 spende? The rule sheweth 2000 lb.

Againe for Vicars: If 130 spende 2600 [Page] pound, what may 30 spend? Answer 600 lb as these figures shew, [...]

But if euery Cānon should haue so often times 4 lb as the Vicar should haue 3 lb thē should I multiplie 20 by 4, (that were 80) and 30 by 3 (that were 90) and then both were 170. Then should the figures be sette thus.

[...]

But this sort is to hard for you, by reasō of the Fractions, therefore I will let it rest to that place. And by this rule you sée what the 20 Cannons may spend, which summe if you diuide by 20, you shall sée eche Can­nons portion: and so of the Vicars, if you diuide their summe by 30, the quotient wil declare euery Vicars portion.

The second Dialogue. The accompting by Counters.

Mayster.

NOw that you haue learned the commō kindes of Arithme­tike with ye pen, you shall sée the same art in Counters: whiche feate doth not onely serue for them that cannot write and reade, but also for them that can doe both, but haue not at some times their pen or tables readie with them.

This sort is in two formes commonlye: The one by lines, and the other withoute lines. In that that hath lines, the lines doe stande for the order of places: and in that that hath no lines, there must be set in their steade so many counters as shall néede, for [...]che line one, and they shall supplie ye steade [Page] of the lines.

Sc.

By examples I should better perceiue your meaning.

Mai.

For example of [...] the Lynes, loe héere you see sixe lines, which stande for sixe places, so that the nethermoste standeth for the firste place, and the next aboue it for the seconde, and so vpwarde, til you come to the highest, which is the sixt line, and standeth for the sixt place.

Now what is the value of euery place or line you may perceiue by the figures which I haue set on them, whiche is according as you learned before in Numeration of Fi-figures by the pen: for, the firste place is the place of vnits or ones, and euerye Counter set in that line betokeneth but one: and the second line is the place of 10, for euery coū ­ter there standeth for 10. The thirde lyne the place of hundreds, ye fourth of thousāds, and so forth.

Sc.

Sir, I doe perceiue that the same or­der is here of lines, as was in the other fi­gures by places, so that you shall not néede [Page] longer to stande about Numeration, except there be any other difference.

M.

If you doe vnderstande it, then [...] how will you set 1543?

Sc.

Thus as I suppose.

Ma.

You haue set the places truly but your figures be not méete for

[figure]

this vse: for the méetest figure in this behalf, is the figure of a Counter round, as you sée here, where I haue expressed that same summe.

Scholer.

So that you haue not one figure for 2 nor 3, nor 4 and so forth, but as ma­ny digits as you haue, so many Counters you set in the lowest line: and for euery 101 you sette one in the seconde line: and so of o­ther. But I knowe not by what reason you set that one counter for 500 betwéene two lines.

Maist.

You shall remember this, that whensoeuer you néede to sette downe 5, 50, or 500 or 5000, or so forth any number whose Numerator is 5, you shall sette one counter for it in the next space aboue ye line that it hath his denomination of: as in this [Page] example of that 500, because the numera­tor is 5, it must be set in a voyde space: and bicause ye denominator is hundred, I know that his place is the voyde space next aboue hundreds, that is to say, aboue the thirde line.

And farther you shall marke, that in all working by this sorte, if you shall set down any summe between 4 and

[figure]

10, for the first part of that number you shal set downe 5, and then so many Coun­ters more, as there rest nū ­bers aboue 5. And this is true both of digits and ar­ticles. And for example I will set downe this summe 287965, whiche summe if you marke well you néede none other examples for to learne the Nu­ration of this forme,

But this shall you marke, that as you didde in the other kindes of Arithmetike, sette a pricke in the places of thousandes, in this worke you shal set a Starre, as you sée before.

Scholer.
[Page]

Then I perceiue Numeration: but I pray you how shall I doe in this art to adde two summes or more togither.

ADDITION.

Maister.

THe easiest waye in this art, is to ad but two sums at once togither: howbeit, you may add more, as I wil tel you a­non. Therefore whē you wil add 2 sums you shall first set down one of thē, it forceth not which, and then by it draw a line crosse the other lines. And afterward set down the other sum, so that that line may be between them:Addition of 2 summes. as if you woulde

[figure]

add 2659 to 8342, you must set your sums as you sée here.

And then if you list, you maye adde the one [Page] to the other in the same place: or else you may ad them both togither in a new place: which way, because it is most playnest, I will shew you first.

Therefore will I beginne at the vnits, which in the first sume is but 2, and in the second summe 9, that maketh 11. Those do I take vp, and for them I sette 11 in the new roome, thus.

[figure]

Then doe I take vp all the Articles vn­der a hundred, which in the first summe are 40, and in the second summe 50, that ma­keth 90: or you may say better, that in the first summe there are 4 articles of 10, and in the seconde summe 5, whiche maketh 9, but then take héede that you set thē in their [Page] right lines as you sée here.

[figure]

Where I haue taken away 40 from the firste summe, and 50 from the seconde, and in their stéede I haue sette 90 in the thirde roome, which I haue set plainelye that you might well perceiue it: how be it, seeing that 90 with the 10 that was in the thirde roome already, doth make

[figure]

100, I might better for those 6 Counters set 1 in the thirde line, thus.

For it is all in one sum as you maye sée, but it is best neuer to sette fyue counters in any line, for that maye be done with one Counter in a higher place.

Scholer.
[Page]

I iudge that good reason, for manye are vnnéedefull where one will serue.

Maister.

Well, then will I adde forth of hundreds: I finde 3 in the first summe, and 6 in the second which maketh 900, them do I take vp, and set in the third roome, where is one hundred alreadie, to whiche I putte 900 and it will be 1000, therfore I set one counter in the fourth line for them all, as you sée here.

[figure]

Then adde I the thousandes together, which in the first summe are 8000, and in the second 2000, that maketh 10000: them doe I take vp from those two places, and for them I set one counter in the fifte line, and then appeareth as you sée to be 11001, [Page]

[figure]

for so manye doth a­mount of the Addition of 8342 to 2659.

Scholer.

Syr,To ad 8 summes to­gither. this I doe perceiue: but howe shall I sette one sūme to an other, not chaunging them to a third place?

Mai.

Marke well how I doe it: I will adde togither 65436 and 3245, which firste I set down thus.

[figure]

Then do I begin with the smallest, which in the first sūme is 5, that do I take vp, and would put to the other 5 in the second sum, [Page] sauing that two Counters cannot be set in a voyd place of 5 but for them both I must set 1 in the second lyne, which is the place of 10: therefore I take vp the fiue of the first summe, and the 5 of the second, and for them I set 1 in the secounde line, as you see here.

[figure]

Then doe I likewise take vp the 4 coun­ters of the first sum and second line (which make 40) and ad them to the 4 counters of the same line, in the seconde summe, and it maketh 80, but as I sayde, I maye not conuenientlye set aboue 4 counters in one line, therefore to those 4 that I tooke vp in the first summe, I take one also of the se­cond [Page] summe, and then haue I taken vp 50, for which 5 Counters I sette down one in the space ouer the second line, as here doth appeare.

[figure]

And then is there 80, as well with those 4 counters, as if you had set downe the other 4 also.

Now do I take the 200 in the first sum, and adde them to the 40 in the second sum, and it maketh 600, therefore I take vp the 2 counters in the first summe, and 3 of thē in the second summe, and for them 5, I set 1 in the space aboue, thus.

[Page]

[figure]

Then I take the 3000 in the first sūme, vnto which there are none in the seconde summe agréeing, therefore I doe onelye remoue those thrée Counters from the first sum into the seconde, as here doth ap­peare.

[figure]

And so you sée the whole summe that amounteth of the Addition of 65416 with 3245, to bée 68681.

[Page]And if you haue marked these two exam­ples well, you neede no further instruction in Addition of 2 onely summes: but if you haue more than two summes to adde, you may ad them thus.

Firste adde two of them, and then adde the thirde and the fourth, or more if there be so many: as if I woulde adde 2679 with 4286 and 1391. First I adde the two first summes thus.

[figure]

And then I adde the third therto thus.

[figure]

And so of more, if you haue them.

Scho.

Nowe I thinke beste that you passe [Page] forthe to Subtraction, excepte there be anye wayes to examine this manner of Addition, then I thinke that were good to be knowen next.

Maister.

A prooef.There is the same proofe here that is in the other Addition by the penne, I meane Subtraction, for that onelie is a sure waye: but considering that Subtraction muste be first knowen, I will first teach you the arte of Subtraction, and that by this ex­ample.

SVBTRACTION.

I Woulde subtracte 2892 out of 8746. These summes muste I sette downe as I did in Addition: but here it is beste to sette the lesser number first thus.

[Page]

[figure]

Then shal I beginne to subtract the grea­test numbers first (contrarie to the vse of the pen) that is the thousandes in this example: therefore I finde amongst the thousands 2, for which I withdraw so manye from the se­cond summe (where are 8) and so remayneth there 6, as this example sheweth.

[figure]

[Page]Then do I likewayes with the hundreds, of whiche in the firste summe I finde 8, and in the seconde summe but 7, out of whyche I can not take 8, therefore this must I doe: I muste looke howe muche my summe diffe­reth from 10, whiche I finde here to be 2, then muste I bate for my summe of 800, one thousande, and set downe the excesse of hun­dreds, that is to saye, 2, for so muche 1000 is more than I shoulde take vp. Therefore from the firste summe I take that 800, and from the seconde summe (where are 6000) I take vppe one thousande, and leaue 5000, but then set I downe the 200, vnto the 700 that are there alreadie, and make them 900, thus.

[figure]

Then come I to the articles of tennes, where in the firste summe I finde 90, and in [Page] the seconde summe but onely 40. Now consi­dering that 90 can be bated from 40, I looke how muche that 90 doth differ from the next summe aboue it, that is 100, or else (which is all to one effecte) I looke howe much 9 doeth differ from 10, and I finde it to be 1, then in the steade of that 90, I doe take from the seconde summe 100: but considering that is 10 too muche, I set downe 1 in the nexte line beneth for it, as you sée

[figure]

here.

Sauing that here I haue set one counter in the space, in steade of 5, in the next line.

And thus haue I subtract al, saue two whiche I muste bate from the 6 in the se­cond

[figure]

summe and there will remaine 4, thus.

So that if I subtract 2892 from 8746, the remainer wil be 5854

And that this is tru­lie wrought you may proue by addition: for if you adde to this remainer the same summe [Page] that you did subtracte, then will the former summe 8746, amount againe.

Scho.

That wil I proue: and first I set the sum that was Subtracted, which was 2892, and then the remainer 5854, thus.

[figure]

Then doe I adde the first 2 to 4, which ma­keth 6: so take I vp 5 of those counters, and in their stead I set 1 in the space, and 1 in the lowest line, as here appeareth.

[figure]

[Page]Then doe I adde the 90 next aboue to the 50, and it maketh 140, therefore I take vppe those 6 counters, and for them I set 1, to the hundreds in the thirde line, and foure in the second line thus.

[figure]

Then do I come to the hundreds, of which I finde 8 in the first sum, & 9 in the seconde, yt maketh 1700: therefore I take vp those 9 counters, & in their steade, I set 1 in ye fourth line, and 1 in the space next beneath, and 2 in the third line as you sée here.

[figure]

[Page]Then is there lefte in the firste summe but onelie 2000, whiche I shall take vppe from thence, and set in the same line in the

[figure]

seconde summe, to the one that is there al­readie: and then wyll the whole summe ap­peare as you maye well sée, to be 8746, whiche was the firste grosse summe, and therefore I do perceiue that I had wel subtrac­ted before.

And thus you may sée, howe Subtraction may be tried by Addition.

Scho.

I perceiue the same order here wyth Counters, that I learned before in figures.

Ma.

Then let me sée how you can trie Ad­dition by Subtraction.

Scholer.

Firste I will sette forth thys ex­ample of Additiō, where I haue added 2189, to 4988. And the whole summe appeareth to be 7177.

[Page]

[figure]

Nowe to trie whether that summe be wel added or no, I wil subtract one of the first two summes from the thirde, and if I haue well done, ye remainer wil be like that other sum, as for example. I wil subtracte the first sum from the thirde, which I set thus in their or­der.

[figure]

[Page]Then doe I subtract 2000 of the firste sum from the second summe, and then remaineth there 5000, thus.

[figure]

Then in the third line I subtracte the 100 of the firste sum from the seconde sum where is onely 100 also: and thē in the third line resteth nothing, as you maye sée in the example following.

[figure]

Then the in seconde line with his space o­uer him, I finde 80, whiche I shoulde sub­tract from the other sū then séeing ther are but onelie 70, I must take it out of some higher sum, which is here only 5000: therefore I take vp 5000: and séeing that is too much by 4920, I set down so many in the second roome, which with the 70 being there alreadie, do make 4990, and then the summes do stand thus.

[Page]

[figure]

Yet remaineth there in the firste sum, 9 to be abated from the second sum, wherein that place of vnits doth appeare only 7: then must I bate a higher summe, that is to saye 10, but séeing that 10 is more than 9 (whiche I shoulde abate) by 1, therefore shall I take vp one counter from the

[figure]

second, and set down the same in the firste or lowest line, as you see here.

And so haue I en­ded this worke, and the summe appea­reth to be the same whyche was the se­conde summe of mine Addition, and therefore I perceiue I [Page] haue wel done.

May

To stande longer about this, it is but folly, [...]nother [...]ay of ad­ [...]tion. except that this you may also vnderstād, that many do begin to subtract with counters not at the highest summe as I haue taughte you, but at the neathermost, as they do vse to adds: and when the summe to be abated in a­nye line appeareth greater than the other, thē do they borrow one of the next higher roome, as for example.

[figure]

If I shoulde abate 1846 from 2378, they set the summes thus.

First they take 6, whiche is the lower line, and his space, from 8 in the same roomes in the seconde summe, and yet there remay­neth 2 counters in the lowest line. Then in the seconde line must 4 be subtracted from 7, and so remaineth there 3. Then 800 in the thirde line, and his space, from 300 of the se­conde summe can not be, therefore doe they bate it frō a higher roome, that is from 1000: and because that 1000 is too muche by [...]0 [...], therfore must I set downe 200 in the thirde line, after I haue taken vp 1000 from the [Page] fourth line. Then is there yet 1000 in the fourth line of the first sum, whiche if I with­drawe from the seconde sum, then doth al the figures stand in order, thus.

So that (as you

[figure]

sée) it differeth not greatly whe­ther you beginne subtraction at the higher lines, or at the lower.

Howe be it, as some men like ye one way beste, so some like the other: therefore you nowe knowing bothe, maye vse whyche you liste.

MVLTIPLICA­TION.

BVt nowe touchyng Multiplication: you shall sette your num­bers in two roomes (as you did in those other kindes) but 2 so yt the multiplier be set in the first roome, then shall you begin with the highest numbers of the seconde roome, and multiplie them firste, after this sort. Take ye ouermost line in your first working, as if it were the lowest line, setting on it some moueable marke (as you list) and looke how many counters be in him, take them vp, and for them sette downe the whole multiplier so many times as you tooke vp counters: reckning (I say) that line for the Vnites. And when you haue done with the highest number, then come to the nexte lyne beneath, and do euen so with it, and so with the nexte, till you haue done all. And if there be anye number in a space, then for it shall [Page] you take the multiplier 5 times: and then muste you recken that line for the Vnites, whiche is next beneath that space. Or else after a shorter waye, you shall take onelie halfe the multiplier, but thē shal you take the line next aboue that space for the line of Vnites. But in suche working, if by chaunce your multi­rlyer be an odde number, so that you can not take the halfe of it iustlye, then muste you take the greater halfe, and set downe that, as if that it were the iuste halfe: and further you shall sette one Counter in the space beneath that line, which you recken for the line of V­nits, or else onely remoue forwarde the same that is to be multiplied.

S.

If you set forth an exāple hereto, I think I shal perceiue you.

Maaster.

Take

[figure]

this example: I woulde multi­plie 1 5 4 2 by 2 6 5, therfore I set the numbers thus.

[Page]Then firste I beginne at the 1000 in the highest roome, as if it were the first place, and I take it vp, setting downe for it so often (that is once) the multiplyer, which is 365, thus as you sée here: where, for the one counter ta­ken vp from the fourth line, I haue set down other 6, which make ye sum of the multiplier, reckening that fourth line as if it were the first, which thing I haue marked by the hand set at the beginning of the same.

[figure]
Scholer.

I perceiue this well, for in déede this sum that you haue set down is 265000: for so much doth amounte of 1000, multiplied by 365.

Maister.

Well, then to goe foorth, in the [Page] next space I finde one counter, whiche I re­moue forward, but take it not vp, but doe (as in such case I must) set down the greater half of my multiplier (séeing it is an od number) which is 182, and here I doe still lette that fourth place stand, as if it were the first: as in these examples you shall sée.

[figure]

Where I haue set this multiplication with other, but for the ease of your vnderstāding, I haue set a little line betwéene them. Now should they both in one summe stand thus.

[figure]

[Page] An other forme of Multiplica­tion.

[figure]

Howbeit, an other fourme to multiplye such coūters in space, is this: Firste to re­moue ye finger to the line next beneth that space, and thē to take vp that Counter, and to set down the mul­tiplier fiue times: as here you see.

Which summes if you do adde togither into one summe, you shall perceiue that it will be the same that appeareth of the o­ther working before, so that both sorts are to one intente: but as the other is shor­ter, so this is play­ner to reason for such as haue had smal ex­ercise in this arte. Notwithstāding you [Page] may adde them in your minde before you set them downe: as in this example you might haue sayde, 5 times 300 is 1500, and 5 times 60 is [...]00 also 5 times 5 is 25, which all put togither, doe make 1825, whiche you may at one time set downe if you list.

But now to go forth, I must remoue the hande to the next counters whiche are in the second lyne, and there must I take vp those 4 counters setting downe for them my mul­tiplier 4 times seuerally, or else I maye ga­ther that whole sum in my mynde firste, and then set it downe: as to say, 4 times 300 is 1200: 4 times 60 are 240: and 4 times 5 make 20, that is in all 1460, that shall I set downe also, as here you sée.

[figure]

Which if I ioyne in one sum with the for­mer [Page] numbers it will appeare thus,

[figure]

Then to ende this Multiplication, I re­moue the finger to the lowest line, where are only 2, them do I take vp, and in their stéede doe I set downe twice 365, that is 730, for which I set one in the space aboue the thirde line for 500, and 2 more in the thirde lyne with that one that is there alreadie, and the rest in their order, and so haue I ended the whole summe, thus.

[figure]

[Page]Whereby you sée, that 1542 (whiche is the number of yeares sith Christe his incarnati­on) being multiplyed by 365 (which is the number of dayes in one yeare) doth amounte vnto 562830,The summe of the daies sith Christs incarnation which declareth the nūber of dayes sith Christes incarnation vnto the end of 1542 yeares, (beside 385 dayes and 12 houres for leape yeares.)

Sc.

Now will I prooue by an other exam­ple, as this: 40 labourers (after 6 d the day for eche man) haue wroughte 28 dayes: I would know what their wages doth amoūt vnto.

In this case must I worke doublye: first I must multiplie the number of the labou­rers by the wages of a man for one daye, so will the charge of one day amount. Then secōdarily shal I multiplie the charge of one daye by the

[figure]

whole number of dayes, and so wil ye whole sum appear: first therfore I shal set the sūmes thus:

Where in the firste place is the Multiplier (that is 1 dayes wages for one man) & in the seconde space is [Page] set the nūber of ye warkmē to be multiplied.

Then saye I: 6 times 4 (reckoning that second line of the line of Vnits) maketh 24, for which summe I

[figure]

should set 2 counters in the third line, and 4 in the second there­fore doe I set 2 in the third line, and let the 4 stand still in the se­cond line thus.

So appeareth the whole dayes wages to be 240 d yt is 20 s.

Then doe I multi­plye

[figure]

agayne the same summe by the nūber of dayes, and firste I set the nūbers thus, Thē because ther are

[figure]

counters in diuerse lines, I shall begin with the highest, and take them vp, setting for them the multi­plier so many times as I tooke vp coun­ters, that is twise, then wil ye sum stād thus.

[Page]Then come I to the second line, and take vp those 4 Counters, setting for thē the mul­tiplier foure times, so

[figure]

wil the whole summe appeare thus.

So is the whole wa­ges of 40 workemen for 28 days (after 6 d eche daye for a man) 6720 d that is 560 s or 28 pound.

Ma.

Now if you would prooue Multipli­cation, the surest way is by Diuision: there­fore will I ouerpasse it, till I haue taughte you the arte of Diuision, whiche, you shall worke thus.

DIVISION.

FIrst set downe the diuisor, for feare of forgetting, and thē set the nūber that shal be diuided, at the right side, so farre from the Diuisor, that the quotient may be set betwéene them: as for example.

If 225 shéepe cost 45 lb. what did euerye [Page] shéepe cost? To know this, I shoulde diuide the whole summe that is 45 lb, by 225, but that cannot be: therefore must I firste reduce that 45 lb into a lesser denomination, as into shillinges, then I multiplie 45 by 20, and it is 900: that summe shall I diuide by the number of sheepe, which is 225, these two numbers therefore I set thus.

[figure]

Then begin I at the highest lyne of the di­uident, and séeke how often I maye haue the diuisour therein, and that maye I doe foure times: then saye I, foure times 2 are 8, whi­the if I take from 9, there resteth but 1, thus.

[figure]

[Page]And because I founde the diuisor 4 times in the diuident, I haue set as you sée, 4 in the middle roome, which is the place of the quotient: but now must I take the rest of ye diuisour as often out of the remayner, there­fore come I to the seconde line of the diuisor, saying: 2 foure times make 8, take 8 from 10, and there resteth 2, thus.

[figure]

Then come I to the lowest number which is 5, and multiplie it 4 times, so is it 20, that take I from 20, & there remayneth nothing, so that I sée my quotient to be 4, which are in valewe shillings, for so was the diuident: and therby I know yt if 225 Shéepe did cost 45 lb, euery shéepe cost 4 s.

Sch.

This can I doe,Example of vvages as you shall per­ceiue by this exāple. If 100 soldiours do spēd euery moneth 68 lb, what spendeth ech man?

First because I cannot diuide the 68, by 160, therefore I will turne the lb into pen­nies [Page] by multiplicatiō, so shal there be 16320 d. Now must I diuide this summe by the number of souldiors, therefore I set them in order thus.

[figure]

Then beginne I at the highest place of the diuidend, séeking my Diuisor there, which I finde once, therefore sette I 1 in the nether line.

Ma.

Not in the nether line of the whole summe, but in the nether lyne of that worke which is the third line.

Sc.

So standeth it with reason.

Ma.

Then thus doe they stand.

[figure]

[Page]Then séeke I agayne the rest, how often I may finde my diuisour: and I sée that in the 300 I mighte finde 100 thrée tymes, but then the 60 will not be so often found in [...]0, therefore I take 2 for my quotient: thē take I 100 twice frō 300, and there resteth 100, out of which with the 20 (that maketh 120) I may take 60 also twice, and then standeth the numbers thus.

[figure]

Where I haue set the quotient 2 in the lowest line: So is euery Souldiors portion 102 d that is 8 s, 6 d.

Ma.

But yet because you shall iustlye perceiue the reason of Diuision, it shall bée good that you doe set your diuisor stil agaynst those numbers from which you doe take it, as by this example I will declare.

If the purchase of 20 acres of ground did cost 290 pound, what did one acre cost?Example of purchase.

First will I turne the poundes into pen­nies, [Page] so will there be 69600 pence. Then in setting down these numbers, I shal do thus. First set the diuidend on the right hand as it ought, and then the diuisor on the lefte hande agaynst those numbers from which I intend to take him firste as here you sée, where I haue set the diuisor two lines higher than is his owne place.

[figure]
Scho.

This is like the order of Diuision by the pen.

Ma.

Truth you say, and now must I sette the quotient of this worke in the thirde line, for that is the lyne of vnits in respecte to the diuisor in this worke.

Then I séeke how often the diuisor maye be found in the diuident, and that I fynd 3 tymes, then set I 3 in the third lyne for the quotient and take awaye that 60000 from the diuidend, and farther I do set the diuisor [Page] one line lower, as you see here.

[figure]

And then séeke I howe often the diuisor will be taken from the number agaynste it, which will be 4 times and 1 remaining.

Scho.

But what if it chaunce that when the diuisor is so remoued, it cannot be ones taken out of the diuident against it?

Ma.

Then muste the diuisour be set in an other line lower.

Sc.

So was it in diuision by the pen, and therefore was there a cipher set in the quoti­ent: but how shall that be noted here?

Ma.

Here néedeth no token, for the lines doe represent the places: onely looke that you set your quotient in that place whiche stan­deth for vnits in respect of ye diuisor: but now to returne to the example. I finde the diuisor 4 times in the diuident, and 1 remaining, for 4 times 2 make 8, which I take frō 9, & there [Page] resteth 1, as this figure following sheweth; and in the middle space for the quotient I set 4 in the second line [...] he is in this worke the place of vnits.

[figure]

Then remoue I the diuisour to the next lo­wer line, & seeke how often I may haue it in the diuident, which I may doe here 8 tymes iust, and nothing remain, as in this fourme.

[figure]

Where you may sée, that the whole quoti­ent is 348 d, that is 29 s, whereby I knowe that so much cost the purchase of one acre.

Sc.

Now resteth the proues of Multiplica­tion, and also of Diuision.

Ma.
[Page]

Their best proues are eche one by the other: for multiplication is prooued by Di­uision, and Diuision by Multiplication, as in the worke by the pen you learned.

Sc.

If that be all, you shall not néede to re­peate agayn that that was sufficiētly taught alreadie: and except you will teache me any other feate, here maye you make an ende of this art, I suppose.

Ma.

So will I doe as touching whole number: and as for brokē number, I will not trouble your wit with it, till you haue pra­ctised this so well, that you be full perfect, so that you néede not to doubt in any point that I haue taught you, and then maye I boldlye instruct you in the arte of Fractions or Bro­ken number: wherein I will also shew you the reasons of al that you haue now learned. But yet before I make an end, I will shew you the order of common casting, wherin are both pennies, shillings, and poundes, procée­ding by no grounded reason, but onelye by a receyued forme, and that diuerslye of diuerse men: for the Marchantes vse one forme, and Auditours an other.

Marchantes vse.

BVt first for Mar­chantes

[figure]

fourme, marke this ex­ample here, in whiche I haue expressed this sum 198 lb 19 s 11 d. So that you maye sée that the lowest line serueth for pen­nies, the nexte aboue for shillings, the third for pounds, and the fourth for scores of poun­des.

And further you may sée, that the space be­twéene d and s may receiue but one counter (as al other spaces likewise do) and that one standeth in that place for 6 d.

Likewise betwéene the shillinges and the poundes, one counter standeth for 10 s.

And betwéene the poundes and 20 lb. one counter standeth for 10 lb.

But beside those you maye sée at the lefte side of shillinges, that one counter standeth alone, and betokeneth 5 s.

So agaynst the poundes, that one counter standeth for 5 lb. And against the 20 pounds, the one counter standeth for 5 score pounds, that is 100 pounde, so that euery side coūter [Page] is 5 times so muche as one of them againste which he standeth.

Auditours Accompt.

NOwe for the accompte of Auditours, take this example.

[figure]

Where I haue expressed the same summe 198 lb 19 s 11 d.Auditours accompt.

But here you see the pence stand towardes the right hande, and the other increasing or­derlie toward the left hande.

Againe you maye sée that Auditours wyll make 2 lines (yea and more) for pence, shil­lings, and all other values, if their summes extende thereto. Also you see that they set one counter at the right ende of each rowe, which so set there, standeth for 5 of that roome: and on the lefte corner of the rowe it standeth for 10 of the same row.

But now if you would adde other subtract after any of both those sortes, if you marke the order of the other feate which I taughte you, you may easilie doe ye same here without [Page] muche teaching: for in Addition you muste firste sette down one summe, and to the same set the other orderlie, and in like maner if you haue manye: but in Subtraction you muste set downe first the greatest summe, and from it muste you abate the other, euerie denomi­nation from his due place.

Sc.

I do not doubt but with a little practise I shal attain these both: but how shal I mul­tiplie and diuide after these formes?

M.

You can not duelie doe anye of both by these sortes, therefore in such case you muste resort to your other artes.

S.

Sir, yet I sée not by these sortes howe to expresse hundreds, if they excéed one hundred, neither yet thousands.

Maister.

They that vse suche accomptes that it excéede 200 in one summe, they sette not 5 at the left hande of the scores of pounds, but they set all the hundreds in an other far­ther rowe, and 500 at the lefte hande thereof, and the thousandes they set in a farther rowe yet, and at the lefte side thereof they sette the 5000, and in the space ouer they sette the 10000, and in a higher rowe 20000, whiche all I haue expressed in this example, whyche is 97869 lb, 12 s, 9 d, ob, q. Ninetye seauen [Page] thousande, eighte hundred, thrée score & myne pounde, twelue shillings and nine pence half­peny farthing, for I had not tolde you before, where, neither how you should set down far­things, which (as you sée here)

[figure]

must be set [...]e in a voide space sideling beneath the pens: for q one counter, for ob, 2 coun­ters: for ob, q, 3 counters: and more there cannot be: for 4 farthings make 1 d, which must be set in his due place.

And if you desire the same summe after Auditours man­ner: Lo here it is.

But in this thing you shall take this for sufficient, and the rest you shal obserue as you may sée by the working of ech sort: for the di­uerse wits of men haue inuented diuerse and sundrie wayes, almost vnnumerable.

THE ARTE OF NVM­bring on the hande.

BVt one feate I shall teach you, which not onely for ye strange­nesse and secretenesse is muche pleasant, but also for the good commoditie of it, right worthy to be wel marked.

This feate hath bin vsed aboue 2000 yeres at the least, and yet was it neuer commonlie knowen, especiallie in Englishe it was neuer taught yet. This is the arte of numbring on the hand, with diuerse gestures of ye fingers, expressing anye sum conceiued in the minde. And first to beginne.

If you will expresse anye sum vnder 100, you shall expresse it with your left hand and from 100 vnto 1000, you shal expresse it with your right hand, as here or­derly by this Table follo­wing you maye perceiue.

Here followeth the Table of the Art of the hande.

[Page]

[hand gesture]
1
[hand gesture]
2
[hand gesture]
3
[hand gesture]
4
[hand gesture]
5
[hand gesture]
6
[hand gesture]
7
[hand gesture]
8
[hand gesture]
9
[hand gesture]
10
[hand gesture]
20
[hand gesture]
30
[hand gesture]
40
[hand gesture]
50
[hand gesture]
60
[hand gesture]
70
[hand gesture]
80
[hand gesture]
90
[hand gesture]
100
[hand gesture]
200
[hand gesture]
300
[hand gesture]
400
[hand gesture]
500
[hand gesture]
600
[hand gesture]
700
[hand gesture]
800
[hand gesture]
900
[hand gesture]
1000
[hand gesture]
2000
[hand gesture]
3000
[hand gesture]
4000
[hand gesture]
5000
[hand gesture]
6000
[hand gesture]
7000
[hand gesture]
8000
[hand gesture]
9000

[Page] 1 1 In which (as you may sée) 1 is expressed by the little finger of the left hand, closely and harde crooked.

2 2 Is declared by like bowing of the wed­ding finger (which is the next to the little fin­ger) togither with the little finger.

3 3 Is signifyed by the middle finger, bowed in like manner with these two.

4 4 Is declared by the bowing of the middle finger, and the ring finger or wedding finger, with the other all stretched forth.

5 5 Is represented by the middle finger one­ly bowed.

6 And 6 by the wedding finger onlie crooked: and thus you may mark in these a certain or­der. But now 7, 8, and 9, are expressed wyth the bowing of the same fingers, as are 1, 2, & 3, but after another forme.

7 For 7 is declared by the bowing of ye little finger as is 1, saue that for 1 the finger is clasped in, hard and round, but for to expresse 7, you shall bow the middle ioynt of the little finger onelye, and holde the other ioyntes straight.

Sch.

If you wil giue me leaue to expresse it after my rude maner, thus I vnderstād your meaning: that one is expressed by crooking in [Page] the little finger, like the head of a Bishoppes bagle: and 7 is declared by the same finger bowed like a gibbet.

M

So I perceiue you vnderstand it.

Then to expresse 8, you shall bowe after 8 the same maner both the little finger, and the ring finger.

And if you bowe likewise with them the 9 middle finger, then doth it betoken 9.

Nowe to expresse 10, you shal bowe your 10 forefinger rounde, and set the end of it on the highest iointe of the thumbe.

And for to expresse 20, you muste set youre 20 fingers straight, and the end of your thumb to the partition of the formost & middle finger.

30 Is represented by the ioyning togither 30 of the heads of the foremost finger & the thūb.

40 Is declared by setting of the thumbe 40 crossewaies on the formost finger.

50 Is signified by right stretching foorth of 50 the fingers iointly and applying of ye thumbs ende to the partition of the middle finger, and the ring finger or wedding finger.

60 Is formed by bending of the thumbe 60 crooked, and crossing it with the forefinger.

70 Is expressed by the bowing of the fore­most 70 finger and setting the ende of the thūbe [Page] betwéene the 2 formost or highest ioints of it.

80 80 Is expressed by setting of the foremoste finger crossewayes on the thumbe, so that 80 differeth thus frō 40: for that 80, the forefin­ger is set crossewayes on the thumbe and for 40 the thumb is set crosse ouer the forefinger.

90 90 Is signified by bending the forefinger, and setting the end of it in ye innermost ioint of the thumbe, that is euen at the foote of it. And thus are al the nūbers ended vnder 1 [...]0.

Sc.

In déed these be al he numbers from 1 to 10, & then all the tenthes within 100, but 11, 12, 13, 21, 22, 23, this teacheth me not how to expresse 11, 12, 13, &c. 21, 22, 23, &c. and such like.

Ma.

You can little vnderstand, if you cā not doe that without teaching. What is 11? is it not 10 and 1? then expresse 10 as you were taught and 1 also, that is 11: and for 12 ex­presse 10 and 2: for 23 set 20 and [...]: and so for 68, you must make 6, and thereto 8: and so of al other sortes.

But now if you wold represent 100, either any number aboue it, you must doe that with the right hand, after this maner.

100 You must expresse 100 in the righte hande with the little finger, so bowed as you did ex­presse 1 in the left hand.

[Page]And as you expressed 2 in the lefte hande, the same fashion in the right hande doeth de­clare 200.200

The fourme of 3 in the right hand standeth for 300.300

The forme of 4 for 400.400

Likewise the forme of 5, for 500.500

The forme of 6, for 600. And to be shorte:600 looke how you did expresse single vnities and tenthes in the left hande, so must you expresse vnities and tenthes of hundreds, in the right hand.

Scholer.

I vnderstande you thus: that if I woulde represente 900, I muste so forme the 900 fingers of my right hande to expresse 9. And as in my lefte hande I expresse 10, so in my right hand must I expresse a 1000.1000

And so the forme of euerie tenth in the lefte hand, serueth to expresse the number of thou­sands, so the summe of 40 standeth for 4000.4000

The summe of 80, for 8000.8000

And the forme of 90 (which is the greatest) for 9000, and aboue that I can not expresse 9000 any number.

Mayster.

No, not with one finger, howe be it, with diuerse fingers you maye expresse 9999. and al at one time, & that lacketh but [Page] 1 of 10000. So that vnder ten thousande you maye by your fingers expresse anye summe. And this shall suffise for Numeration on the fingers. And as for Addition, Subtraction, Multiplication, and Diuision (whiche yet were neuer taught by any man as farre as I doe knowe) I will instruct you after the trea­tise of Fractions: and now for this time fare well, and looke that you ceasse not to practise that you haue learned.

Sc.

Sir, with most hartie minde I thanke you, both for your good learning and also your good counsel, which (God willing) I truste to follow.

FINIS.

¶THE SECONDE part of the Arithmetike touching Fractions, brief­lie set forth.

Scholer.

ALbeit I perceiue your manifolde businesse doth so occupie, or ra­ther oppresse you, that you can not as yet cō ­pletelie end that trea­tise of Fractions A­rithmeticall, whyche you haue prepared, wherein not onelie sun­drie workes of Geometrie, Musicke, and A­stronomie be largelie set forthe, but also di­uers conclusions and naturall woorkes, tou­ching mixtures of metals, and compositions of medicines, with other straunge examples, [Page] yet in the mean season. I can not stay my ear­nest desire, but importunelie craue of you some briefe preparation, towarde the vse of Fractions, whereby at the leaste I maye be able to vnderstande the common workes of them, and the vulgare vse of those rules, whi­che without them can not wel be wrought.

Maister.

If my leasure were as great as my will is good, you shoulde not néede to vse anye importunate crauing, for ye attaining of that thing, whereby I maye be perswaded that I shal anye waies profite the common wealth, or helpe the honest studies of anye good mem­bers in the same: wherefore, while myne at­tendaunce will permitte me to walke and talke, I am well willing to helpe you as I may.

VVhat a Fraction is.Therefore firste to beginne with explica­tion of this name Fraction, what take you if to be?

Scholer.

Marie sir, I thinke a Fraction (as I haue heard it often named) to be a broken number, that is to say, to be no whole nūber, but a part of a number.

Mayster

A Fraction in déede is a broken number, and so consequentlie, the part of an­other number: but that muste be vnderstan­ded [Page] of suche an other number, as can not bée diuided into any other partes thā Fractions: for although I may take the third part of 60, or the fourth part of it, and so of other partes diuerslie, yet these partes be not properlie, nor ought not to be called Fractions, bycause they maye be expressed by whole numbers: for the third part of it is 20: the fourth part is 15: the twelfth part is 5, and so forth of other parts, which all be whole numbers.

Wherefore properlie a Fraction expresseth the partes or part onelie of an vnit,VVhat a Fraction in properlie. that is to saye, that the number which is the whole or entire summe of anye Fraction, may not be greater than one: and therefore it followeth, that no one Fraction alone can be so gret, that it shall make 1, as by examples I will de­clare as soone as I haue taught you to knowe the forme howe a Fraction is expressed or re­presented in writing.

NVMERATION.

BVt first to begin with the expressing of a Fraction, which is the numeration of it, you must vnderstand that a Fraction is repre­sented by 2 numbers, set one ouer the other, and a line drawen betwéene them as thus, ⅓. [...]/4.⅘ 10/17 which foure Fractions you muste pro­nounce thus: [...]/3 one thirde parte: ¾▪ thrée quar­ters: ⅖ two fifte partes: 10/17. tenne seauentéene partes.

Scho.

I vnderstande the forme of theyr ex­pression and pronunciation, but their mea­ning or valuation séemeth more obscure: yet I think that by the two first Fractions I vn­derstand the valuation of the two later Fra­ctions, and so consequentlie of other.

M.

Value them then, that I may perceyue your taking of them

Scholer.

⅖ betokeneth two fifte partes, that is to say, if one be diuided into 5 parts, that Fraction doeth expresse ij. of those fifthe [Page] partes: 10/17 doth signifie, that if one be diuided into xvij. partes, I must take tenne of them. And this I gather of the two firste examples: for ⅓. that is one thirde parte, doth easily de­clare, that if anye one thing be diuided into three partes, I muste take but one of them: so ¾ that is thrée quarters, doeth declare that one being diuided into four quarters, I must take (for this Fractiō) thrée of those quarters.

If there be no more difficultie in their Nu­meration, thē I pray you go forward to their Addition and Subtraction, and so to the other kinds of workes for I vnderstande that the same kinds of workes be in Fractions, that be in whole numbers.

Maister.

There are the same kynds of workes in bothe, albeit the order of them is diuerse, as I will anone declare: but yet more in Numeration before we leaue it. You muste vnderstande, that those two numbers whiche expresse a Fraction, haue seuerall names.Numera­tor, and Denomi­nator. The ouermost whiche is aboue the line, is called the Numerator, and the other beneath the lyne, is called the De­nominator.

Scholer.

And what is the reason of theyr diuerse names? For in mine opinion both bee [Page] Numerators, séeing both they do expresse the numeration of the Fraction.

Maister.

You are deceiued: for one onelye (whiche is the ouermoste) doeth expresse the Numeration: and the denominatour doeth declare the number of partes into whiche the vnit is diuided, as in this example, when I say: Diuide a pounde weighte of Golde be­twéene foure men, so that the firste man shal haue 2/15 the seconde 2/15 the thirde 4/15 and the fourth 6/15.

Now do you perceiue ye by the denominator (whiche is one in al foure Fractions) it is in­tended, that the pounde waight shoulde be di­uided into so manye partes I meane 15, and by the foure seuerall numerators is limitted the diuerse portion that each man shold haue, that is, that whē the whole is parted into 15, the firste man shall haue 2 of those 15 partes: the second man thrée of them: the third man 4: and the fourth man 6. And so may you sée ye seueral offices (as it were) of those two num­bers, I meane of the Numerator and the de­nominator.

And hereby you perceiue, that a man can haue no more parts of any thing than it was diuided into, nether yet aptlie so many: so that [Page] it were vnaptly sayd: You shall haue 15/15. that is xv fiftéene partes of any thing, séeing it were better sayde: You shal haue the whole thing.

Sc.

So doth it appeare reasonablye: for the labour is vaine, to diuide anye thing, and than to applie the Diuision to no vse. And much lesse reasonable were it to say 16/15: for if the whole be diuided into 15 parts on­ly, it is not possible to take 16 of them, that is to say, more than altogither.

Maister.

This is true touching the proper and apte vse of the name of a Fraction: yet improperlye, and after a vulgare acceptation (for easinesse in worke) both those formes be called Fractions, because they be writtē like fractions, although they be none in déede for 15/15, and generally all suche other: where the Numerator and Denominator be equal, are not Fractions: but the whole thing with all his partes. And so 16/12 is not to be called a fra­ction, but a mixt number, of a whole number and a Fraction: for it is as muche, as 1 4/12, that is one whole one, and 4 twelue partes, as shall be declared in Reduction. Therefore they doe abuse the names, that [Page] call them Fractions, where the Numerator is either equall or greater than the Deno­minator.

Sc.

But is there any néedefull cause why they should so abuse the name?

Mai.

There is cause why they shal some­times, for easinesse in worke, write some nū ­bers after that sorte, like fractions: but they néeded not to call them fractions, but as they be whole numbers or mixt numbers (that is whole numbers with Fractions) expressed like fractions.

Nowe must you vnderstande, that as no fraction properly can be greater than 1, so in smalnesse vnder one the nature of Fractions doeth extende infinitelye: as the nature of whole numbers is to increase aboue one infi­nitelye, so that not onely one, may be diuided into infinite Fractions or parts, but also eue­rye Fraction maye be diuided into infinite Fractions or partes, whiche commonlye bee called Fractions of Fractions, and they be expressed diuerslye: As for example, 3/ [...].⅔.½, that is thrée quarters of two third partes, of one halfe parte. Whereby is signifyed, that if one be diuided into two halfes, and the one halfe into thrée partes, and two of [Page] those thrée partes, be diuided idyntlye into foure quarters, this Fraction of Fracti­ons doeth represente three of those quar­ters.

Scholer.

I praye you lette me prooue by an example in common money, whether I doe rightlye vnderstand you or no. One Crowne, which I take for an vnit, doth con­taine 60 pennies, therefore the halfe of it is thirtye pence: ⅔ of that halfe is 20 pence, whereof 3/ [...] is fiftéene pence, so then 15 pence is 3/ [...].2/ [...].½ of a Crowne. And so 3 pence is ¾.⅔.½. of a shilling.

Mayster.

You perceyue this well y­nough, but how happened that you founde no doubte in the forme of writing these Fra­ctions, séeing the two latter Fractions haue no line betwéene their numbers, as the firste hath?

Sc.

Because I had forgotten (as Scho­lers oft times doe) that that was tolde me before: but I praye you, expresse the reason thereof.

Mai.

This forme is but voluntarye, and therefore hath none other reason than the will of the diuiser, which forme many do fol­low. Some other doe make lines betwéene e­uery [Page] Fraction, and adde wordes of distincti­on, after this sorte, ¼ of ⅔, of ½, which forme is good also.

Some other expresse them thus [...] in slope forme, to distincte them from seuerall Fractions of one whole number, for if they were set in one right line thus, ¾ ⅔ ½. then oughte it to be pronounced, thrée quarters, and two thirde partes and an halfe, which maketh al­most two whole vnits, lacking but one xij. part. And so is it nothing agréeable with the other Fraction of Fractions, wherefore it is a great ouersight in certayne learned men, which doe expresse them so confusedly with such seuerall Fractions, that a man can not know the one from the other.

Therefore some men (as Stifelius) doe expresse without a line numbers of proporti­on, being applied to Addition or Subtracti­on: because they must be takē as two, where the line in Fractions maketh them to be ta­ken for one: for of the Numeratour and De­nominatour is made one number.

Scholer.

Three se­uerall varieties.Then I perceiue there be thrée seuerall varieties in Fractions: First when one only Fractiō is set for one nūber, as 4/ [...], yt [Page] is foure fifth parts. The second, is whē there be set two or more seuerall Fractions of one number, as ⅘ 2/5, that is iiij. ninth partes, and two fift parts. The third sort is Fractions of Fractions, as 4/9 2/5, that is 4 ninth parts of two fifth parts.

Ma.

You haue said well, if you vnderstand well your own wordes.

Scho.

If it shall please you, I will by an example in the parts of an old Englishe An­gell expresse my meaning.

Mai.

Let me heare you.

Scholer.

The olde Englishe Angell did containe 7 shillings 6 d, that is 90 d. Nowe ⅘ of it, is 72 d. And of the same 90 pence, if I take ⅘ and ⅖, that is foure ninth partes, and 2 fifth partes, 4/9 is 40, and ⅖ is 36, which both make 76: but if I take 4/9 of ⅖, that is foure ninth partes of two fift partes, séeing ⅖ is but 36, then 4/9 of 36 will yield but 16: for 1/9 of 36, is but 4, and that taken foure times maketh 16.

Maister.

This is plainely expressed, and truely and hereby (I doubte not) but you doe perceiue, yt as great a differēce as is betwéen 16 & 76, so much differēce is betwéene these two Fractions 4/9 and ⅖: and 4/9 of ⅖. [Page] And now that you vnderstande these varie­ties, I will procéede to the rest of the works: first admonishing you, that there is an other order to be followed in Fractions than there was in whole numbers, for in whole num­bers this was the order: Numeration, Addi­tion, Subtraction, Multiplication, Diuision, and Reduction, but in Fractions (to followe the same aptnesse in procéeding from the easi­est workes to the harder) we must vse this order of the workes: Numeration, Multipli­cation, Diuision, Reduction, Addition, and Subtraction.

Scho.

That Multiplication and Diuision shoulde goe togither, and Subtraction to followe Addition, naturall order doeth per­swade: but why Multiplication shoulde be first in order here next to Numeration, and Reduction in the middle, I desire to vnder­stand the reason

May.

As in the Arte of whole numbers order woulde reasonablye beginne with the easiest, and so goe forwarde by degrées to the hardest, euen so reason teacheth in Fractions the like order. And considering that Addition or Subtraction of Fractions can very seldom be wrought without multiplication and Re­duction: [Page] and contrariwayes, Multiplication and Reductiō may be wrought without this forme of Addition or Subtraction. Therfore was it orderly required, that Multiplication and Reduction shoulde goe before Addition and Subtraction. And the same reason ser­ueth for the placing of Multiplication before Reduction.

Sch.

Then if Multiplication be the easi­est, I pray you declare the forme of it first by rule, and then by example.

May.

Your example is good.

MVLTIPLICATION.

THerefore when anye two Fractions be pro­poned to be multipli­ed togither, ye Nume­rator of the one must be multiplied by the Numerator of the o­ther: and the summe that amounteth therof, must be set for a new numerator: likewise the Denominatour of the one must be multiplied by the Denomi­nator [Page] of the other, and that that amounteth, shal be set for the common Denominator: & this new third Fraction expresseth the Pro­duct of the multiplication of the two first fra­ctions proponed, whereof take this example, ⅗ multiplied by 5/12, doth make 15/6 [...].

Scholer.

I perceiue then, that 3 being the Numeratour of the first Fraction, is multi­plied by 5, being the Numeratour of the se­conde Fraction, whereof amounteth 15, the Numeratour of the thirde Fraction. And so likewise, 5 being Denominatour of the first Fraction, is multiplied by 12 the Denominator of the second fraction, where­of amounteth 60 the newe Denominator: so that I perceiue howe the worke is done, but I doe not perceiue howe 15/60 is greater than ⅖: For if I shall vse my former maner of examination by the partes of some Coyne, I sée that ⅗ of a Crowne is 36 d, and 5/12 of a Crowne, is 25 d, whereof the one multiply­ed by the other, doth make 900 d, whiche is 15 Crownes: but by your multiplication there amounteth [...]/60, which is but 15 d, and that is much lesse then anye of both the firste Fractions.

Mayst.

That difference is betwéen mul­tiplication [Page] in whole numbers, and multipli­cation in broken numbers that in whole nū ­bers the summe that amounteth, is greater than both the other whereof it came: but in Fractions it is contrarywaies: for the sum that amounteth is lesser thā any of the other two fractions, whereof it came.

Sc.

I desire much to vnderstande the rea­son thereof.

May.

Although I purposed to reserue the reasons of workes Arithmeticall for the per­fecte Booke of Arithmetike, yet I will shew you this, because of the straungenesse of the worke.

You sée in whole numbers, that of two numbers being multiplied together, is made the third number: which third number doth beare the same proportion to the nūber mul­tiplyed, that the multiplier doth beare to an vnit. And so in Fractions, the third number which amounteth of multiplication, beareth the same proportion to eache of the two firste fractions, that the other of those two fractiōs doth beare to an vnit.

Scholer.

Sir I vnderstande your wordes thus: when 40 is multiplied by 12, there doth amount 480, whiche 480 doeth con­tayne [Page] 40 so many times in it, as twelue doth contayne vnits, that is to say: twelue times. And so it appeareth, that 480 doeth contain twelue so many times also, as 40 doeth con­tayne Vnites, that is 40 times. But now I see not how the thirde number in this exāple of Fractions can contain any of the two for­mer (as it happened in whole nūbers) séeing it is lesser than eyther of them.

Mai.

No maruaile if you cannot sée that thing which is not possible to be séene of anye man, how the third number in multiplicati­on of Fractions should be greater than anye of the two former Fractions, but yet this may you sée (which I sayde) that the thirde number in Fractions so multiplyed, doeth beare the same proportion to any of the two former fractions, that the other of those 2 fra­ctions doth beare to an vnite, as in your ex­ample ⅗ being multiplied by 5/12, doeth make 15/60. Now saye I, that 15/60 doeth beare the same proportion to ⅗, that 5/12 doth beare to an vnit, as you may in your own forme of examina­tion by coyne trie it. For in an olde Angell are 180 halfe pence, whiche I set for the in­tire vnit whose parts (according to the Fra­ctions aforesayde) are these, for 15/60 sette 45 ob. [Page] for ⅖ take 160 ob and for 5/12 put 75 ob Nowe doeth 45 beare the same proportion to 108 that 75 doeth beare to 180: for 45 is 5/11 of 108, and so is 75 also 5/12 of 180. And for easi­er applying of ech comparison, consider this forme of setting all these nūbers before your eyes, where the secōd demōstration towards your right hand is answerable to the firste in euerye proponed part, where for ⅗ (of 180) stands his value 108: for [...]/ [...] stands 75: and for 15/60 is 45.

[...]

But these reasons may be better reserued till another time, whē the knowledge of pro­portions in due order shall be taught. Yet in the meane season I will shewe you howe it commeth to passe that in Fractions the third summe must néedes be lesser then any of the other two.

Consider thus, that when a Fraction is pro­poned, as in the former example ⅗, if it bée multiplied by more thā 1, it will make more [Page] than one entire number. As if I multiplie by 5, that is to saye if I take it 5 tymes, it will make thrée entire vnits: example in a Crowne, ⅗ of it maketh 3 s, which if I take fiue times, it will amounte to 15 shillinges, that is thrée intire Crownes: so if I take the same ⅗ but twice, it will yielde 6 s, that is one entire Crowne and ⅕. Now if I take it but once it cannot be more thā it was before, that is, 3 s. And if I take it lesse then once, it cannot be so much as it was before. Then seeing that a Fraction is lesse than one, if I multiplie a Fraction by another Fraction, it followeth that I doe take that first Fraction lesse than once and therfore the summe that amounteth, must néedes be lesse than the first fraction.

Sc.

Sir, I thanke you much for this rea­son, And I truste I doe perceiue the thing, as by example of this same Fraction ⅗ I wil expresse If I take ⅗ of a Crowne once, that is to say, if I multiplie ⅗ by 1, it will be as it was before, but 3 s: so if I doe multiplie it by ½, that is, if I take it but half one time, then will it be but halfe so muche: likewise if I multiplie it by ½, that is, if I take but the thirde part of once, it will yielde but 12 [Page] pence, that is the thirde part of the first Fra­ction.

And so to make an ende. If I take it but the twelfth part of once, that is, if I doe mul­tiplie it by [...]/ [...], it will yielde but the twelfth part of the firste Fraction, which is but thrée pence. And it followeth that if 1/ [...]2 make 3 pence, then 5/12 must néedes make fiue tymes so muche, that is 15 pence, which was the summe that hath giuen the occasion of all this doubt.

Maister.

Then I perceiue you haue suf­ficient vnderstanding in this sorte of multi­plication for this time, wherefore I will o­mitte that I might saye more of Multiplica­tion, till we come to reduction, and wil passe to the other workes, and firste to Diuision, whose place followeth Multiplication, both by naturall order, and also in eāsinesse of worke.

DIVISION.

WHen so euer two fra­ctions bée proponed, that the one shoulde be diuided by the o­ther, I muste sette downe firste the Fra­ction that shall be di­uided (which is called the Diuidend) and then after it the other, whiche is the Diuisor. Then shall I mul­tiplie the numerator of the diuidend by the denominator of the diuisour, and that which amositeth, I must put for a new numerator. Agayne, I shall multiplie the denominator of the diuidend by the numerator of the di­uisor, and the number that amounteth there­of, I must put for the new denominator. And this third fraction is the quotient of the sayd diuision.

Scholer.

This séemeth easie in forme, as by example, thus: If I would diuide ⅝ by 2/6, first I must multiplie 5 (being the numera­tor of the diuidend) by 6, whiche is the deno­minator [Page] of the Diuisor, and thereof riseth 30: then I multiplie 8 (being the denomi­nator of the diuidend) by 2, being Nu­merator in the diuisor, and so riseth 16, the whiche I muste make in a thirde Fraction, thus 30/16.

Ma.

Me séemeth you are quicker in vn­derstanding nowe, than you were when I taught you the arte of whole numbers: but that is no maruell, for the more knowledge that any man getteth, the readier shal he find his wit, and quicker in vnderstanding: but yet of 2 thinges I will admonish you, which you mighte haue obserued here for ease of worke and lightnesse of vnderstanding the nature of the Quotient.

Whensouer you diuide one Fraction by an other, either they be both equall togither eyther else the one is greater than the other: if they be equall, their quotient shal be such, that the numerator and the denominator of it shall be equall also. And if ye 2 firste fractions be vnequall, their quotient shall declare the same by the vnequalitie of the numeratour and denominatour, as in these examples fol­lowing shall appeare.

[Page]First of equall Fractions: 4/9 and 12/2 [...] bée e­quall togither: and if the one be diuided by the other, the quotient will be 108/108, as you may perceiue by that rule aforesayde.

Now in the vnequal Fractions, as 4/9 and 3/10 the quotient wil be 40/27: where the Numera­tor is greater than the denominator.

Sch.

I sée it is so, but I see not the reason why it should be so.

Maister.

Note hovve [...] 2 numbers.The reason is this, when anye Fraction is diuided by an other, the quotient declareth what proportion the diuidend bea­reth to the diuisor. So ½ diuided by ¼, ma­keth 2, which must be sounded, not two, but twice: declaring that ¼ is contained twice in ½.

And note this, that the Numerator in the Quotient, representeth the Diuidend, & the Denominator representeth the diuisor▪ And this is alwayes true, whether, the greater fraction be diuided by the lesser, or the lesser by the greater. But this proportion will not be exactly knowne, till you haue learned the art of proportions: notwithstāding somwhat of it will I declare in the next rule of Redu­ction. But now for the easie remembrance of the Quotiēt in diuision, as soone as you haue [Page] set downe your two Fractions, the one a­gainste the other, then make a streighte line for the quotiente: and as soone as you haue multiplyed the Numerator of the diuidende, by the Denominator of the diuisor sette the number that amounteth, ouer the said line, and then multiply the other two numbers, & set their totall vnder the same line.

Scholer.

I perceiue you woulde not haue me trust to memorie til I wer better expert, least oftentimes I happen by misse remem­braunce to be abused. This example I take for that declaration.

If I woulde diuide ⅔ by ¾ I must set the numbers one against the other, [...] (as here doeth appeare) & then make an other line for the Quotient in some good distaunce, where I maye set the num­bers of the Quotient, as soone as any of them is multiplied: So then as soone as I haue multiplied 2 by 4, which maketh 8, [...] I shal set that ouer that line thus. And then multiplye [...] by [...], whiche yéeldeth 9: and that 9 muste I set vnder the same line, and then will the whole quotient appeare thus 8/9.Note. Whereby appeareth (as I remember your wordes) that ⅔ is in propor­tion [Page] to ¼, as 8 is to 9: but howe maye I per­ceiue that?

Mayster.

Althoughe you shall better per­ceiue it by the rule of Reduction, yet this ex­ample may be declared in common coine, as in a common shilling of xij. pence, of whiche [...]/2 maketh 8 d, and ¾ dothe make 9 pence, and so you maye easily see that their proportions doe agrée. And if you had taken this example before, when you tooke the example of▪ and [...]/6, your Quotiēt would appere (as this doth) more easier to vnderstande, whereas that Quotient being 10/16, is not an easie proportion for you to perceiue, being yet little acquain­ted with proportions: whereof to giue you some taste, I will enter to the rule of Redu­ction: in which also I wil declare other wor­kes, both of Multiplication and also of Di­uision, whiche nowe I muste for a time o­mitte, as things that do neede the help of Re­duction.

REDVCTION.

THerefore wil I nowe declare the diuersities of Reduction of Fra­ctions,Fiue varie­ties of Re­duction. whiche com­monly haue fiue vari­eties.

1. First, when there be, sundrie Fractions of one entire Vnitie, they muste be reduced to one denomination, and also into one Fra­ction.

2 Secondarily, when ther be proponed fra­ctions of fractions, they must be reduced like­wise into one Fraction, for other wayes they can not bée brought into one Denominati­on.

3 Thirdly, when an Improper fraction is proponed, that is to say, a fraction in forme, which indéed is greater thā an vnitie, it must be reduced into apt form expressing ye Vnitie or Vnities of it, & the proper fraction distinct­ly. And some times also it shall be néedefull to conuerte such a mixte number of Vnities, [Page] with Fractions into the forme of a Fracti­on, that is into an Improper Fraction, which 2 formes I esteeme but as one, bicause they worke on one kind of number.

4 Fourthlie, there happeneth sometimes Fractions to be written in greate num­bers, whiche mighte be written in lesser numbers, therefore is there a meane to re­duce suche greate numbers into their smal­lest tearmes.

5 Fiftelie, when anye Fraction betoke­neth the partes of a whole thing, whyche hath by common partition certaine partes, but none of like Denomination wyth that Fraction, then maye you reduce the sayde Fraction into an other, whose Denomina­tion shall expresse the common partes of that whole thing.

Scholer.

Thys distinction in doctrine de­lighteth me much, but more with hope than presente fruite, for as yet I doe not vnder­stande scarselie the varieties, and much losse the practise and vse of their workes.

Mayster.

Reduction is an orderlie al­teration of numbers out of one forme in­to an other, whiche is neuer done order­lye but for some néedefull vse, as in euery of [Page] the saide 5 seuerall varieties I wil distinctly declare.

Firste therfore, when two or more seue­rall Fractions of anye Vnite be proponed,The first sort of Re­duction. as for example, [...]3/1 and 4/6: because it is harde to tell what proportion of the entier num­ber those two Fractions doe expresse, there­fore was Reduction diuised, to bée a meane whereby these seuerall Fractions mighte be broughte into one Denomination and Fraction.

And in these Fractions this is the arte for bringing them to one denomination.

Multiplie firste the Denominators to­gither,Hovv to reduce fra­ctions of diuerse de­nominati­ons into one Deno­mination. and the totall thereof you shall sette twice downe vnder two seuerall lines for two newe Denominators, or rather for one common Denominator: Then multiplye the Numeratour of the firste Fraction, by the Denominator of the seconde, and sette the totall thereof for the Numeratour ouer the firste line. Likewise multiplie the Nu­merator of the seconde Fraction by the De­nominator of the first, and set that totall ouer the seconde line for the Numerator of that Fraction, and so are those two first Fractions of seuerall denominations, brought to one [Page] Denomination.

Sch.

If I vnderstand you, as I thinke I do, my example shal declare the same. The Fra­ctions which you proponed were these, [...]/16 and 4/6▪ whose Denominators (being 16 and 6) I multiplie togither, and there amounteth 96, which I set vnder lines, thus. [...] Then I multiplie the Numerator of the first Fraction by the Denominator of the second, saying: 3 into 6 maketh 18, that set I ouer the first line for a newe Numeratour, and it wil be thus. [...]

Likewaies I multiplie the Numeratour of the second Fraction by the Denominatour of the first: saying: 4 times 16 maketh 64, that I set for ye second Numeratour, and the Fra­ction wil appeare thus. [...] So that both Fractions broughte to one De­nomination, must stand thus: [...]

Ma.

You haue done wel.

Scholer.

I beséech you, let me examine it after my accustomed forme, by common parts of coine.

Ma.

Go to.

Scholer.

A new Angell accompted at eight shillings, contayneth 96 pence, whereof [...][Page] that is the xvj. parte, is sixe pence, and 1/16 is 18 pence, that is 18/ [...]6. Againe ⅙ of the same An­gel, is 16 pence, so that 4/6 maketh 64 d, that is 64/ [...]. And so I find the summes to agrée with the other before.

Maister.

So haue you nowe the Arte to bring such two Fractions into one Denomi­nation. And if there be more than ij,Note the Reduction of three Fractions or more to one. then must you multiplie al the Denominators togither, and set the totall therof so many times down as there be Fractions, and then to get for ech one a newe Numerator. Multiplie the Nu­merator of the firste, by the Denominator of the second, and the total therof multiplie by ye denominator of the third, and so foorth if there be more. Likewise multiplie the Numerator of the second, by the denominator of the first, and the total thereof by the Denominator of the thirde. And in the same sorte multiply the Numerator of the third into ye Denominator of the first: & the totall thereof into the Deno­minator of the seconde, and so foorth, if there were mo. So these 3 Fractions 2/5 [...]/4 2/ [...] doeth make by Reduction these other 3. Fracti­ons of one Denomination 24/6 [...] 45/6 [...] 4 [...]/6 [...]. All whiche you may bring into one Fraction by [Page] adding the Numeratours togither, and put­ting that totall for the common Numerator, reseruing still that same common Denomi­nator, And those 3 Fractions make one Im­proper Fraction thus. [...]

Scho.

All this I perceiue, and also that thys laste Fraction is more than an Vnitie, and therefore you did call it an Improper Fra­ction.

M

There be certaine other formes of wor­king in this reduction, whiche I will brieflie touch also, to giue you an occasion to exercise your wit therin.

The first varietie of this Redu­ction.The firste varietie is this. When you haue made and written downe youre common Denominator (as I haue taught before) then to get a Numerator for the first, do thus. Di­uide the common Denominator by the De­nominator of the first Fraction, and the quo­tiente multiplied by the Numerator of the same, yéeldeth a new Numerator for the first new Fraction. So likewise doe with the se­cond and the third, and with all the residue if there be more.

Scholer.

That will I proue in your laste example of these 3 Fractions [...]. When the Denominators be multiplyed, they make [Page] 60 for 5 into 4 maketh 20, and 20 by 3 yel­deth 60, that I sette downe 3 times, thus. [...]: then to haue a Numerator for the firste, I muste diuide 60 by 5, (the Denomi­nator of the firste) & the quotient is 12, which I muste multiplye by 2 (the Numerator of the firste) & that maketh 24, and so haue I for the first Fraction 24/60.

Likewyse for the seconde fraction:The second varietie. I diuide 60 by 4, and there commeth 15, whiche I multiplye by 3, and so haue I 45 and the se­conde fraction 45/60. Then for the third in like sort wil come 40/60.

Mayster.

An other way is this. If it hap­pen so that the lesser Denominator can by a­ny multiplication make the greater, thē note the multiplier, and by it multiplie ye Nume­ratour ouer that lesser Denominatour, and for the lesser Denominatour put the greater, as thus in these two Fractions, 2/ [...]2 and ⅔ thrée being the lesser Denominatour multiplyed by 4, will make 12, whyche is the greater Denominatour: therefore by the same 4, I do multiplie 2, whiche is the Numeratour ouer 3, and that maketh 8: vnder which I doe put 12 being the greater Denominatour, whiche is also made by Multiplication of 4 into [...], & [Page] so haue I these ij. Fractiōs 3/ [...]2 [...], 8/ [...]2: thus short­lye reduced without altering the one Fra­ction.

S

This I vnderstande.

Ma.

The thirde [...]arietie.Then marke this thirde waye: If the denominators doe not happen so, that one by Multiplication may make the other, thē loke whether they both maye be partes of anye o­ther one number, as in [...]/1 [...] and [...]/18, althoughe the lesser taken but twice be to great to make 18, yet they both may be parts vnto 36: ther­fore loke howe manie times 12 is in 36, and that quotient being multiplyed by the nume­ratour ouer 12, the totall shall be putte in steade of the Numerator ouer 12, & for 12 put 36, thus, [...]5/ [...]6. So likewise looke howe often is 18 in [...]6, and because it is twice, therefore by 2 multiplie 7. whiche is ouer 18, and it wyll be 14, set that for the numerator, and in stead of 18 put 36, and then shall youre Fractions reduced, stande thus, 1 [...]/36 14/36 in steade of 5/ [...]2 and 7/1 [...].

Proofe.And if you will proue whether you haue wrought well or no, that maye be proued by Reduction of them againe to their former de­nominations, whiche arte shall be taughte in the fourth kinde of Reduction, where greater [Page] termes of Fractions be reduced into smaller in number, but no smaller in proportiō. And if in suche Reduction the same termes or nū ­bers come again that were before, then is the worke good, else not.

S

Sir, I heare your wordes, but I doe not vnderstand many of thē, which it may please you to declare.

Ma.

With a good will, when conueniente place serueth, but that must be in the said iiij. kinde of Reduction. In the meane season I wil declare the seconde forme of Reduction, which teacheth howe to reduce Fractions of Fractions into one Fraction, and so to one Denomination.

When fractions of fractions be proponed,Reductiō of fractions of fractions into one fraction and deno­mination. you shall multiplie the Numeratours of each into other, and set the totall for the new Nu­merator, and then multiplie all the Denomi­natours likewaies, and take their totall for the new denominator, and so are they speedi­ly reduced.

Sc.

If that be al then I vnderstand it alrea­die, as by this example I wil declare. These be the Fractions, ¼ of ⅔ of 6/7 of 7/9 which I wold reduce to one denomination.

Therfore begin I with the Numeratours, [Page] and multiple them all togither, saying: 3 into 2 maketh 6, and 6 by 6 maketh 36, whiche multiplyed by 7, yéeldeth 352, that [...] I set ouer a line for the Numera­tor, thus:

Then I multiplie the denominatours, 4 by 3 maketh 12, & that by 7 bringeth 84, whiche multiplyed by 9, yéeldeth 756, the new deno­minatour. And so the whole [...] reduced fraction is this, which is to hard a Fraction for me to vnderstand yet.

Mai

You thinke so, and no maruaile, but a­none you shal learn to iudge it easilie, for this Fraction is no more in déede then ⅓ although it be in greater tearmes, and therefore more stranger and more obscure.

And this sufficeth for this Reduction, saue that I will shew you by a figure of measure, the iuste rate and reason of this kinde of Fra­ctions, and also the due vnderstanding of the Reduction.

[Page] The entier measure parted into 9.

123456789
12345677/9 
.1..2..3.6/7 
1234 
123¾ 

Here you sée the longest measure, (whyche standeth for the whole and entier quantitie) firste parted into 9 Diuisions, whereof 7 are seuered by the second measure: and thereof a­gaine are parted out 6. And that 6 being di­stinct into 3 partes, 2 of them are parted by the fourth measure, of which fourth measure, being diuided into 4 partes, the lowest mea­sure doth containe ¾, so that the same ¾ muste be named, not 3/4 of the whole measure, but in déede is ¾ of ⅔ of 6/7 of 7/9 or as I woulde rather expresse it, 3/ [...] 1/ [...] 6/ [...] 7/ [...].

Scholer.

This example is so sensible, that I can not choose but sée it. And furthermore, I sée also, that the same fraction is equall to 3/9 of the entier measure, as the lines whiche runne vp and downe doe expresselie set forth. [Page] Also I sée here, that ⅔.6/7, 7/9 is equall to 4/9 And further yet that 6/7. [...]/9 is equal to 6/5.

Ma.

I am gladde that you see it so wel, not doubting but you wil gather greater light of knowledge hereby.

The third forme of Reduction.But nowe it is time that we come to the thirde forme of Reduction, which teacheth of Improper Fractions, that is to say, Mixt nū ­bers of Vnites and Fractions, although they appeare like Fractions, as this 2/ [...] 6/5, whyche doeth include 5 Vnites wholly, and ⅕ ouer. Wherfore first you shall know them, by that the Numeratour is greater than the Deno­minatour.

Scho.

In déede sir that appeareth reasona­ble, that if the Numerator doe expresse more partes to be taken of any vnitie then the De­nominator doth signifie that vnitie to be diui­ded into, it must néedes follow that such a fra­ction importeth more than the whole, that is to saye, the whole with certaine partes ouer. But what Reduction is there in it?

Ma.

There be two seuerall kindes of Re­duction, concerning suche Fractions. Some­times it shal be néedefull to conuert those fra­ctions into the Vnites and the proper fraction that wil remaine And sometimes contrarie [Page] wayes it shal be mete to reduce mixt nūbers, that is vnities, written with fractions into the forme of one simple fraction, & so be there two wayes.

Sch.

What is the meane of the first waye to turne improper fractions into Vnities wyth their proper Fractions?

M.

That is thus.Reductiō of improper frictions into vnits vvith their proper Fractions. Your Numerator béeing greater than the Denominator, muste be di­uided by the same denominator, & the quotiēt therof expresseth the vnities, ye remainer shal be put for the Numerator of the fraction that resteth, and the denominator must be ye same that was before.

Sc.

For example, I take 17/5. And diuiding 17 by 5, the quotient wil be 2, and there will remaine 2.

Ma.

That must you write thus, 3 ⅖ where (you sée) I haue written, without any line, as entier numbers ought to be writtē, and the 2 that remained, I haue set ouer the former denominator with a line, as a proper fractiō. And this number doth signifie now 3 Vnits, and ⅖ of one.

Scho

Then if I would by Vnites here vn­derstand crowns, so it were 3 crownes, and ⅖, that is 2 s.

M.
[Page]

Euen so, and therfore 17/5 did signifie the same. But this happeneth sometimes, that when the Reduction is so wrought, there re­mayneth nothing. And then it is not a mixts number, but a simple entier number, repre­sented like a Fraction.

Scholer

As [...]/ [...] wil make 3 iuste, and 15/3 wil make euen 6. This I wil remember. But nowe, what is the seconde forme of Reducti­on, that you spake of for these sortes of Fra­ctions?

M.

Reductiō of vvhole num­bers, either alone, or ioi­ned vvith fractiōs into [...]ractions.Whensoeuer you haue any of these two sorts of numbers, that is to saye, whole num­bers without Fractions, or whole numbers with fractions, and you would turne thē into the forme of a fraction you must multiply the whole number by that denominatour, which you wil haue to remaine stil, and to the total thereof adde the numeratour which you haue alreadie, and al that shall you set for the new numerator, kéeping still the former denomi­natour: as if you haue 6 ¾ which you woulde conuert into an Improper Fractiō you must multiplie 6 by 4, whereof commeth 24, and thereto adde the numeratour which is 3, and so haue you 27 for the numerator, and 4 still for the Denominator.

Sc.
[Page]

Then is 27/4 equall to 6 ¾.

Ma.

Euen iust, and so backward (as ap­peareth by the former Reductiō) 6 ¾ maketh 27/4 And thus one of these Reductions may be the proofe of the others worke.

Sc.

This I perceiue, but now if you wold turne whole numbers without fractions in­to any fraction, I sée not how that maye bée done, because there is no denominatour to make the multiplication by.

Ma.

That was well marked: but this you know, that no man intendeth to turne any whole number into a Fraction, but hée hath in his mind that denominator by which the Multiplication must be made: for the proofe whereof I sette downe 7, whiche is a whole number. And if you will haue this nū ­ber conuerted into any certayne fraction, will me to doe it.

Scholer.

I pray you reduce 7 into a Fra­ction.

Ma.

Then you care not what the fraction be, so it be some fraction.

Sc.

No, I passe not for the sort of the Fra­ction.

Ma.

Then how can you thinke that you require me to doe any thing certayne, when [Page] you leaue me to doe as I list? and séeing you stande at that staye, whether thinke you that I must firste intende in mynde what fraction I will make of it, before I can doe it indeede?

Sc.

Else you should doe ignorauntly.

Mai.

Then I will limit my selfe (séeing you will not) to turne it into quarters. And therefore I multiplie 7 by 4 (whiche is the denomination of quarters) and there amoū ­teth 28 to be set for the Numeratour, and the 4 must be set for the Denominator, and the fraction will be thus, 28/ [...].

Sch.

Indéede I perceiue this to be reaso­nable, for without much triall I vnderstand that 28/4 of any thing doeth make 7. And so then if I would turne 8 into fift parts, it wil make 40/5 which is all one with 8. for eyghte crownes turned into fift partes (that is, into shillinges) will make 40 shillinges, that is 40/5 of a crowne.

Ma.

Seing you vnderstande nowe these thrée kinds of Reduction, I will declare vnto you the fourth kinde, that is when Fractions be written in greater Tearmes than they néede, howe they maye be broughte to lesser Tearmes.

Scholer
[Page]

To write anye thing in greater Tearmes than néedeth, seemeth to be a fault,The fourth kind of Re­duction. and so this Rule séemeth to amende that fault.

Na.

It were a fault to do any thing with­out néede which after must be redressed: but in this case it is not so: neither did I say ab­solutely (as you doe) that it néedeth not to ex­presse those Fractions in so greate tearmes, but that the fractions doe not neede, I meane for their value to be vnderstanded: but yet it maye be néedefull for the ease of those works whereto they be applyed, as for example: In the firste kinde of Reduction this was youre owne example: 3/16 and 4/ [...], whiche when you would reduce, you were fayne to turne them first into one Denomination, & so appeared they thus, 18/96, and 6 [...]/96, where the Fracti­ons (for their owne vnderstanding) néeded not to be turned out of smaller tearmes into greater, but yet the easinesse of working née­ded it.

Sch.

Sir, I vnderstand nowe, not onelye the difference of this néede (for the Fractions mighte better be vnderstanded as Fracti­ons seuerall, eche in his value,Tearms of Fractions. when they were in lesser tearmes, although they coulde [Page] not so well be reduced) but also I vnder­stand what you meane by greater Tearmes and lesser Tearmes, whereof before I was in doubt, for I see you call the Numeratour and denominatour, the Termes of the Fra­ction.

Maister.

I am glad you vnderstande it so well. Now then when you woulde value a­ny fractions (because that maye best be done when the Tearms are smallest) you shal re­duce them to the smallest that you can, which thing you may doe thus:Reduction of Fracti­ons into their smal­lest tearms. Diuide the greatest of any such two Termes by the lesser, and if any thing remayne by that remainer, diuide the last Diuisour: and if any thing remayne now, by that diuide the last diuisour (whiche was before the remainer of the first Diuisiō) and so continue still, till nothing do remayne in the Diuision: and then marke your laste Diuisour, for it is the number that will easi­lye reduce your Fraction, if you diuide both the Numeratour and the Denominatour by the same number, and put for the Numera­tour the quotient of his Diuision, and for the Denominatour also his quotient, that riseth by his Diuision.

Scho.

I take for example 18/96, and because [Page] 96 is the greatest number, I diuide it by 18, and the quotient is 5, and there resteth 6: what shall I doe with this quotient?

Maister.

Nothing in this worke, but nowe séeing there remaineth somewhat, by that remainer must you diuide the last diui­sor.

Sc.

If I shal diuide 18 (which was the last diuisour by 6, that was the remayner, so is the quotient [...], and nothing resteth

Ma.

As for the quotient I omitte him yet: but because there doth remain nothing ther­fore is 6 (which was your last diuisour) that number by which you may reduce the fracti­on proponed,

Sch.

Then as you taught me. I muste diuide the Numerator 18 by 6 and the quo­tient is 3, which I must put for [...] the numerator ouer a line, thus. and then by the sayde 6, must I diuide also the denominator 96, and the quo­tient will be 16, whiche I must take for the Denominator, and so is the fraction 3/16. And so me thinketh this Rule doth prooue ye work of the first Reduction.

Maist.

That is true, if the first Reducti­on were made of Fractions in their leaste [Page] tearmes, and else not, withoute some helpe, as the second number in that place will de­clare.

Sc.

The second nūber was [...]/6, which was turned into 64/56, by that rule. Nowe if I shall by this Rule reduce it againe into the leaste tearmes, I must diuide 96 by 64, and there resteth 32, by which 32 I diuide 64, & there remayneth nothing, wherefore I must take that 32 for the Diuisour, to reduce the sayde Fraction. Then doe I diuide 64 by 32, and the Quotient is 2, whiche I sette for my Numeratour. Againe, I diuide 96 by 32, and the Quotient will be 3, and so haue I but ⅔

Ma.

Muse not at the matter, for you haue done well ynough: but you thinke you haue not the fraction that you looked for, that is 4/6, yet haue you one equall to it, as by the parts of a shilling you may prooue.

Sc.

Truth it is, for ech of them will bring forth 8 pence, so that, 8/ [...], and 4/6 and 2/7, bée all thrée equall. And nowe I perceiue that because 4/6 was not written in the leaste Tearmes that it mighte be, therefore this Reduction broughte forthe not it, but that other whiche is written in the leaste [Page] tearmes. Now vnderstande I this rule wel. But is there anye other waye to worke this Reduction.

Mayster.

Yes, but firste note this,An other vvay for to vvorke Reduction. that if you finde no suche diuisor, to reduce the Fra­ction till you come to 1, because 1 doeth make no diuision, therefore that Fraction is alrea­die in his least tearmes, as by 71/100 you may prooue and so of 81/98 and many other like. But now for your better ayde to find the due pro­portion in least tearmes, with more ease for a yong learner, you shall mediate or take the halfe of the Numerator, and also the deno­minator as long as you may vpon a line al­wayes parting them with a dashe of your penne as you worke, which maye easilye be done, if the numbers be euen: as 2, 4, 6, 8, or 10: But if they be odde (though it be but in one of them) then must you ab­breuiate them by [...], by 5, by 7, &c.

And because Examples doe most instruct, I haue in the Page following, set downe the maner of 2 or 3, whose last number at the ende of the lyne, sheweth the least tearme or valuation of that Fraction.

[Page] [...]

Abbreuiated first by 5, then by 293.

[...]

Sc.

Sir I thanke you much, this is verye easie, and good for a yong learner.

Ma.

So it is, but yet notwithstanding, if you can without that diuision by memorie espie the greatest number that maye diuide exactly both Tearmes of your Fraction pro­poned, then néede you not to vse that diuisi­on, as in this fraction 6 [...]/96 I sée that 12 is the greatest number that can diuide them both: and therefore without any work, by memo­rie onely, I turne that into ⅝, but this abi­litie in knowledge is gotten by exercise.

Yet one other waye of easie Reduction in this kinde there is, when your Fraction hath [Page] any Cipers in ye first places of both tearmes, then may you by casting away the ciphers, make a bréefe Reduction, as thus 300/400, here take away the Ciphers, and it wil be ¾, which is the same in value with 300/400.

Scholer.

And so if I haue 400/650 it will be 4/65.

Ma.

You are deceiued, for you take away more ciphers from the Numerator, than you doe take from the denominator, whiche you may not doe.

Sc.

I confesse my fault, whiche came of too much haste, I was more gladder of the rule than wise in vsing it: but now I vnderstād it I trust.

Ma.

Then may I go in hand with the fift or last kinde of Reduction [...],The fift kind of Reduction which teacheth how to turne any fraction proponed into any other denomination that you list: or into a­ny parts of common coynes, waightes, or measures, or such like.

For declaration whereof, firste you shall mark whether your fraction be a simple fra­ction, either else a fraction of sundrie parts, I meane of more tearmes than 2. And if your fraction be a fraction of Fractions, or other­waies compounde, you must reduce it to one [Page] simple fraction. And then marke well the de­nomination of that other fraction, into which you would turne this, for by that denomina­tour you must multiplie the Numeratour of your first fraction, and the totall Producte thereof shall you diuide by the denominator of your first fraction, and that quotient shall be the numeratour to the denominatour pro­poned: as for example I haue this fractiō ⅕, which I would turne into tenth partes, ther­fore I multiplie this 10 by 3, that is the Nu­meratour of my fraction, and there riseth 30, which I diuide by 5, and the Quotient is 6, which must be the Numerator to 10, and so ⅗ will be 6/10.

Sc.

This is easie ynough to doe.

Ma.

Then shall you see an other example of the same fraction that is not so easie: as if I would turne ⅗ into viij. partes, proue you that worke.

Sc.

I must multiplie 8 by 3, and there a­mounteth 24, which I diuide by 5, and the quotient is 4, then is the new fraction 4/8.

Ma.

And see you nothing doubtfull in this worke?

Sc.

I sée that when 24 was diuided by 5, there remayned 4, whiche I did not passe of, [Page] because ye speake nothing of any remayner, but only of the quotient.

Ma.

By likelihoode you remember what I sayd to you in diuision of whole numbers, that you shoulde not passe of the remayner there, but only note it as a summe that could not be diuided without knowledge of Fracti­ons. Wherefore now marke this, that in all Diuisions of whole numbers, when there is any remainer, you shall set it ouer a line as a Numeratour, and set the Diuisour for the Denominatour, and that Fraction doeth make the Diuision complete, and is parte of the quotient: as if I woulde diuide 48 by 5, the quotient will be 9 ⅗: so in your former worke when 24 was diuided by 5, the quo­tient should be 4 ⅘, and so the new [...] Fraction shoulde bée thus: that is 4/8 of the entire number, and ⅘ of 4/8: which you may prooue be example of some coyne.

Sc.

Then I take a Crowne, whose ⅗ is 3 s. Now if I would prooue whether that 3 s bée 4 and ⅘ of 4/8 I shall haue a combrous worke to doe.

Maister.

In déede for whole pennies your example is troublesome: yet tourning [Page] the Crowne into halfe pennies, it is easie y­nough.

Sc.

Now will I doe it.

Ma.

First let me tell you an easie way how to finde any number that will easily be diui­ded into such parts as you desire, which way is this. Set down the parts that you desire, and then by one of them multiplie all the o­ther, the totall whereof shall containe all the partes proponed, as if I would haue a num­ber that may be diuided into 4, 5, 6, and 7 partes, by 4 multiplie 5, and there riseth 20: then multiplie 20 by 6, & it will make 120: which multiplied by 7, will yield 840: and so of any other numbers.

Sc.

Then in our former example where is mention but of 5 partes and 8 partes, I shall only multiplie 5 by 8, which maketh 40, and that number will serue.

Ma.

So will it.

Sc.

Then what is ⅕ of 40?

Mai.

Proue by the same rule whiche you confesse easie ynough: 3 times 40, is 120, which being diuided by 5, maketh [...] 24 and that is iust.

Now to know whether it be equall to 24, firste I sée by the same rule, that 4/8 is 20, and [Page] 2/8 is 5, of which 5, I must take ⅘: [...] and that by the same Rule is 4. So that I sée now, that is equal to ⅗.

Ma.

And by the waye note this forme of fraction how it is written, that is to say, both the Numerator and his Fraction aboue the lyne, although I know it may be written o­therwyse, as thus: 4/8 and ⅘ of 4/8, but I ac­coumpte the other waye more apte a greate deale.

* Scho.

Now I pray you sir let me prooue how this 4/8 and ⅘ of 4/8 of a Crown be equal to ⅘ of a Crown our first proponed fractiō, that hath brought forth these hard fractions to my thinking yet.

First I sée that ⅗ of a crowne is [...] s: which is 36 d, or 72 halfe pence. Now if I can find that this fraction 4/8 and ⅘ of 4/8 be equall vnto 3 s: then am I fully answered.

Because I cannot take 4/8 of a Crowne, I turne the crown into half pence, as you wild me, which makes 120, which I diuide by 8, my quotiēt is 15, which takē 4 times makes 60: now resteth me to haue [...]/5; of the ⅘, wher­of ⅛ is 15, that 15 being parted into 5 parts, ye quotiēt is 3, which takē 4 times makes 12, [Page] which with my 60 before, amounteth to 72: which are then equall to ⅕ my desire.

Ma.

And so may you expresse by an other way then is before mentioned, all [...] Fractions of Fractions, as thus: That is ¾ of ⅝, and so of other, but I remit these fourmes to the arbitrement of euery wise artes man, to vse as he thinketh most apt and readie.

But now one example more for this rule, and then shall we ende it. If I haue [...]/15 of a Soueraine (accounting the Soueraigne 20 shillinges) how many shillinges is that 7/15?

Sc.

I must multiplie 7 by 20, and that maketh 140, which I shall diuide by 15, and the Quotient will be 9 5/15: or else in lesser tearmes, ½.

Ma.

That is 9 s, and one third parte of a shilling, that is 4 d, as by this same rule you may prooue. And this for this time shall suf­fise for Reduction, saue that I must now re­peate a little touching Multiplication and Diuision, and so go forward.

MVLTIPLICATION.

IN Multiplication it happeneth sometyme that there be whole numbers to be multi­plied with Fractiōs: And maye be in two sortes, for eyther the whole number is se­uerall from the Fraction, and is the Mul­tiplyer, or else, the whole number is ioyned with one, or both of the Fractions,Reduction of vvhole numbers into Fractions. and so maketh a mixt number thereof. If it be in the first sorte, then néedeth there no Redu­ction, but onelye multiplie the Numera­tor of the Fraction by that whole number, and the totall thereof set for the new Nume­rator.

Scho.

I vnderstand you thus. If I haue 6/2 [...], to be multiplied by 16, then must I mul­tiplie that 16 with 6, which is the Numera­tor, whereof commeth 96, and that must I set for the new Numerator, kéeping still 23 for the Denominator, and so the Fraction [Page] will be 96/2 [...] that is 4 4/23.

Ma.

And in this sorte of worke you maye abbridge the labour, thus. If it happen the denominator to be such a number, as maye euenly be diuided by the sayd whole number proposed, then diuide it thereby, and sette the quotient of that Diuision for the former de­nominator: but reserue still the Nume­rator, and so is the Multiplication en­ded.

Scho.

Then I fayne this example, 7/20 to be multiplied by 5. And because 5 will iustly diuide 20, therefore I take the quotient of that diuision whiche is 4, and sette in steade of 20, and so the Fraction will be 7/4, that is 1 ¼.

Mayster.

Whiche is all one with 35/ [...]0, that woulde haue followed of the other sort of worke.

Sch.

I perceiue it very well.

Maister.

[...]vv to mul [...]ie mixt [...]he [...]s.Nowe then for the other sorte where the number is mixt, take this waye: firste to reduce the sayd whole number, and fraction into one fraction Improper (as I shewed you in Reduction) and then multi­plie them togither, as if they were proper fractions.

Sc.
[Page]

13 [...]/5; being set to be multiplied by [...]/9, first I muste reduce the mixte number, as appea­reth in the margent, by multiplying 13 by 5, [...] and that maketh 65, wherto I must adde the Numerator 3, and so the fraction will be 68/5, whiche nowe I shal multiplie after the accu­stomed forme, and it wil be 340/40.

Ma

You haue done well: and so maye you sée, that although moste part of the formes of Multiplication maye be wroughte without Reduction, yet some can not, as namelye mixed numbers.

And yet one note more will I tell you of Multiplication, before we leaue it: That is▪ when so euer you woulde multiplye anye Fraction by 2, whiche commonlie is called Duplation, you maye doe it not on­lie by doubling the Numeratour, but also by parting the Denominator into halfe, if he be euen.

Scholer.

Then if I woulde double 5/ [...], I may choose whether I wil make it, 1 [...]/1 [...], or else ⅚. And in déede I see that all is one, but that the diuiding of the Denominatour seemeth the better waye to make smaller tearmes of the Fraction, and so they shall neede the lesse Reduction.

M.
[Page]

It is so: and nowe I shall not néede to tell you that Multiplication is proued by Diuision, and Diuision likewayes by multi­plication, but the like workes that I shewed you in Multiplication, will I shewe you in Diuision also.

DIVISION.

[...]ision to [...]de a [...]ole nū ­ [...] by a [...]ion. WHen any whole num­ber shall be diuided by a Fraction, you must multiplie ye said whole number wyth the Denominator of the fraction, and sette the totall thereof for the newe Numerator, and for the Denomi­nator, let the Numerator of the Fraction.

Scholer.

Then 20 diuided by [...] wil make 60/3, as here appeareth:

Mayster.

[...]iuide [...]ction vvhole [...]er.Euen so. But if you woulde diuide the fraction by the whole number, thē multiplie the Denominatour by the same [Page] whole number, and sette the totall for the Denominatour, without chaunging the Nu­merator.

Scholer.

Then to diuide 20/23 by 4, it wyll by 20/92. As here appeareth in this [...] example.

M.

You say well. And by the same exam­ple you giue me occasion to remember an o­ther briefe way to do the same:Another briefe vvay for if you had diuided the sayde Numerator by 4, and sette the quotient for the Numerator, kéeping stil the olde Denominator, it woulde haue bene not only as well done, but also in a fraction of lesser termes.

Scholer.

I gesse it to be euen so, by a lyke worke that you taughte me in Mul­tiplication. And for proofe thereof 20/23 being the diuidend, and 4 the Deuisour, I diuide the Numeratour 20 by 4, and the quotient is 5, whiche I sette for 20 ouer 23, thus 5/23. And I sée that it is all one with 20/62, as by diuiding or abbreuing both these tearmes by 4, and so reducing them to their leaste De­nomination, I maye easi­lie [...] proue: as appeareth in this example:

M.
[Page]

You cōceiue it wel. And if there bée mixt numbers (either one or both) you must firste reduce that mixte number into an improper Fraction. And then worke as you haue lear­ned.

S.

That was sufficientlie taught in Multi­plication. Therfore I pray you go forward to some other thing.

Ma.

Then take this note yet for diuision. If the Denominatours be like, then diuide the Numeratours as if it were in whole nū ­bers, and the quotient whether it be Fractiō, whole number, or mixt, is a good quotient for that Diuision. And generallie if one of the Numerators may iustlie diuide the other, by that quotient multiplie the Denominator of the lesser Numerator, and set it that doeth a­mounte in the roome of ye same denominator, and then for a Numerator to it, set the deno­minator of the other fraction.

Scho.

Then if I woulde diuide [...]/4 by 12/1 [...] I sée that 3 will diuide 12, and the quotient wil be 4, by whiche I must multiplie the o­ther 4 that is the Denominator vnder 3, and then it is 16, whiche I set for the Denomi­nator 4, and ouer it in steade of the [...], I must set 17, the other Denominator, and so is it [Page] thus, 17/16.

Maister.

And so is 17/16 in steade of 11/48, which woulde haue risen by the com­mon [...] worke: as here appea­reth:

And now for Mediation (which is to diuide by 2) marke this: If the Numeratour be e­uen, set the halfe of it in his place without the Diuisour, and so haue you done: and if the Numeratour be not euen, then double the de­nominator.

Sch.

That is if I would mediate 6/11 I may make the quotient [...]/11. And if I woulde medi­ate [...]/11 I must make it 7/22.

Mayster.

Nowe truste I that you haue sufficiente knowledge in Reduction, Mul­tiplication, and Diuision: and therefore will I goe in hande wyth Addition and Sub­traction, whyche nowe will appeare easie ynough.

ADDITION.

[...] adde [...]ctions of [...]e deno­ [...]nation. WHensoeuer you haue any fractions to be ad­ded, you must consider whether they be of one Denomination or not▪ And if they be of one denomination, then adde the Nume­rators togither, and set ye that amounteth, for the Numerator ouer the common Denomi­nator, and so you haue done. The reason is, bicause that suche differ little in Addition or Subtraction from the worke of vulgare de­nominations, where the Denominators bée no numbers: as 3 pence and 5 pence, make 8 pence, [...]o ad fra­ [...]ons of d [...]rse deno­ [...]nations. where ye denomination is not altered. But & if the fractiōs be not of one denomina­tion, or any of them be mixt of whole nūbers and fractions, then must you first reduce them to one denomination, and after adde them. And if they be manye, then adde first two of them, and to the sum that doth amount of the Addition, add the third, and then the fourth, & so forth, if you haue so many.

Sc.
[Page]

This séemeth easie ynough, now that I haue alreadie learned to multiplie and to re­duce, without which two, I could neuer haue wrought this. And therefore now I see good reason, why you did place Multiplication and Reduction before Addition.

Maister.

It is wel considered, but yet refuse not to expresse your vnderstanding of it, by an example.

Sch.

Then would I adde first 7/18 with 5/18, and because the Denominators are like (and so néedeth no Reduction) I adde 7 to 5, which maketh 12, and then is my sum 12/18, that is in smaller numbers ⅔.

And if I haue many numbers to be added, as here 34/85 9/10, firste I must reduce them (by­cause they haue diuerse denominatours) into one denomination, and then will they bée thus. [...] or in lesse tearmes 15/4 [...] 32/40 26/40, whiche by Addi­tion do make 83/ [...] that is 2 3/ [...].

M

Now may we go to subtraction.

SVBTRACTION.

SVbtraction hathe the same precepts that ad­dition hadde, for if the Denominatours bée like, then muste you subtracte the one nu­meratour from the o­ther, and the rest is to be set ouer the common denominator, and so your Subtraction is ended: but and if you haue manye Fractions to be subtracted out of many, then must you reduce them to one de­nomination, and into two seueral Fractions, that is, all that muste be subtracted into one Fraction, and the residue into an other Fraction, and then worke as I sayde bée­fore.

Scholer

For the first example I take 15/12 to be subtracted out of 17/12, and the reste will bée [...]2/ [...] or ⅙.

For an other example I take 2/4 to be sub­tracted out of 7/3 which I must reduce, and it wil be thus, 24/ [...]2 and [...]8/ [...]2.

Then doe I subtracte 24 out of 28, and [Page] there resteth 4, which I set ouer the common Denominator for a Remayner, thus, 4/32, that is ⅛.

Now for the thirde example, I take ¾ and ⅚ to be subtracted from ⅞ and 9/10. And bycause their denominators be diuers, I do reduce thē thus, 1 [...]/1920▪ 16 [...]/1720, [...]80/1920 17 [...]8/1920.

Then do I adde the two first, & they make 3 [...]/19 [...]. Also I adde the two laste, and they yéeld [...]08/162 [...] Then doe I subtract 3040 out of 3408, and there resteth 368, so is the remainer [...]68/1920 that is in smaller Tearmes, 23/120. And thus haue I done with Subtraction, excepte you haue any more to teach me.

Mai.

Proue one example more of two Fra­ctions of diuers denominations.

Scho

I take these two Fractions, ⅞ and 7/24, which being reduced, wil stād thus, 168/192. & 72/191 Now would I subtract 168 out of 72, but I can not.

Ma.

Then maye you perceiue that you mistooke the Fractions: for you cā neuer sub­tract the greater out of the lesser, althoughe you may adde, multiplie or diuide the greater with the lesser. And albeit that ⅞ hathe bothe hys tearmes lesser than 9/24, yet is 9/2 [...] the les­ser Fraction: for generallie if you multiplie ye [Page] Numerators and denominators of two fra­ctions crosse ways, [...]eatest [...] fra­ [...] that Fraction is the grea­test, of whose numerator commeth the grea­test summe, as in this example: 7 multiplied by 24, maketh 168: and 9 being multiplyed by 8, yeldeth but 72 therefore is the first Fra­ction ⅞ the greatest of these two, so can you not subtract it out of a lesser Fraction.

But and you should subtract a fraction out of a whole number what would you do?

Sc

Marrie I woulde reduce the whole nū ­ber into a Fraction of the same Denomina­tion that my Fraction is, and then worke by Subtraction.

M.

So may you doe, but it is easier much, if your fraction be a proper fraction, that is to say, lesse then an Vnite, to take an Vnite frō the whole number, and then turne it into an Improper Fraction▪ and so worke your sub­traction. As if I woulde subtracte ⅗ from 4, I maye take one from 4, and turne it into 5/5, from whiche if I bate 7/6, there will remayne 3 ⅖: And if the firste fraction be an Improper Fraction, then may I take so manye Vnites from the whole number, that they may make an improper fraction greater then that firste, and then worke by Subtraction: As if there [Page] be proponed 10/3 to be subtracted frō 6, because [...]0/3 is more than 3, and not so much as 4. I muste take 4 from 6, and turne them into thirdes thus. 12/3 then abate 10/3, and there re­steth ⅔ so the whole remainer is 2 ⅔. Or, else you may at your pleasure take 3 ⅓ whiche is 10/3 from 6 whole: Then set one vnder 6. as thus 6/1: And then to reduce those 2 fractions into one Denomination as [...] here appeareth:

Then 10/3 from 18/3 resteth 8/3: which maketh 2 ⅔ youre desire:

And thus wil I make an end of the works of commō Fractions for this time, not doub­ting, but you can applye them both vnto the rules of Progression, and also vnto the Gol­den rule, without any other teaching thē you haue learned before, which might séeme tedi­ous to repeate, saue that in some special di­uersities, which be peculiar to Fractions, I can not ouerpasse, but instruct you somewhat by the way.

THE GOLDEN Rule.

THerefore as touching the Golden rule for the placing of the 3 numbers proponed in the question, wherby to finde the thirde, and for the forme of their worke, with other like notes, I refer you to that which you haue alreadie learned.

But this easie forme of working by fracti­ons shal you note, yt if your thrée numbers bée fractions, for an apt worke and certain, mul­tiply the Numerator of the first nūber in the question, by the Denominator of the seconde: And all that againe multiplie by the denomi­nator of the third number, and the total ther­of shall you kéepe for to be the Diuisor. Then multiplie the Denominator of the first num­ber by the Numeratour of the second, and the whole therof by the Numerator of the third, and the totall thereof shall be youre diuidend. Now diuide this diuidend by ye diuisor which [Page] you founde out before, and that number shall be the fourth number of the question whiche you séeke for: As in this exāple. If ¾ of a yard of Veluet cost ⅔ of a Soueraigne (esteemed at 20 shillings) what shal ⅚ cost?

Scholer.

If it please you to let me make the answere,A question of Yeluet. I woulde first place [...] these thrée numbers, as I learned in whole numbers thus.

And then according to your newe rule, I must multiplie 3 being Numeratour in the first number, by thrée the Denominatour of the seconde, and thereof commeth 9, which I multiplie againe by 6, the Denominatour of the third number, and so haue I 54. which I kéepe for the Diuisor, then multiplie I 4, the Denominator of the first, by 2, the Numera­tour of the seconde, and there riseth 8, whiche againe I multiplie by 5, the Numeratour of the thirde, and it maketh 40: then must I di­uide 40, by 54, and it wil be 40/ [...]4 that is 20/27, in lesser tearmes, and then the figure wil stand thus.

But what that is in [...] money, I can not tell except I shal worke it by Reduction, as you taught me.

Maister.
[Page]

It forceth not nowe, you may re­duce it when you list, but it were disorderlie done here to mingle diuerse workes togither, where we do not séeke the value of the thing in common money, but in an apt nūber, whi­che you haue wel done. And therefore will I yet shew you an other like way of easinesse in worke, how you may chaunge your 3 Fra­ctions into 3 whole numbers, by whyche you shall worke as if the question were proponed in whole numbers. The first nūber you shall finde as I taught you: now to finde the diui­sor of the seconde number, take the Numera­tor for the secōd fraction: and for the third nū ­ber take that, that riseth of Multiplication of the Denominatour of the firste, by the Nu­merator of the thirde, and then worke youre question.

Scho.

A question of siluer.For example hereof, I put this que­stion, If 11/12 of 1 lb waighte of siluer, be worth 11/4 [...] of a Soueraigne what is ½ of 1 lb. weighte worth? For the aunswere, [...] first I place the Fractions in order thus.

Then to turne these fra­ctions into whole numbers, I multiplie 11 whiche is the Numerator of the first, by 4 (yt [Page] denominator of the seconde) and there cōmeth 44, whiche I multiplie by 2 the Denomina­tor of the third, and so amounteth 88, whiche I set for the Diuisor in the first place. Then in the seconde place I set 12, whiche is Nu­merator in the seconde Fraction, and in the third place I set the summe that amounteth of 12, being the Denominator in the firste number, multiplyed by 1, being numeratour in the third number, & so the figure [...] wil stand as here you sée.

Then to worke it forth, I multiplie 12 by 12, and there amounteth 144, which I diuide by 88, and the quotient wil be 1 [...]6/88, or in les­ser termes, 1 7/11 and then the [...] figure wil stand thus.

Ma.

These ij. formes nowe you vnderstand wel ynough And as for any other, at this time I will not repeate, onlie this shall you marke for ye profe of this rule, whether your worke be well wrought or no. Multiplie the first number by the fourthe, and note what amounteth:The proofe of the Gol­den rule. then multiplie the seconde by the third, and marke what amounteth also Now if those two nū ­bers so amounting be equall, then is youre work wel done, else you haue erred. And this [Page] shal suffise for the former rule,The Backer rule. but in the bar­ker rule, this shal you note for ease of worke, that you multiplie the Numerator of the first by the Numerator of the second, and ye whole thereof by the Denominator of the third, and that amounteth therof, shal be the Diuidend. Then multiplie the Denominator of the first by the Denominator of the seconde, and that whole by the Numerator of the third, & that riseth therof shall be the diuisor. Example of this: I did lende my friend ¼ of a Porteguise vij. monthes, vpon promise that he should doe as much for me againe:A question of lone. and when I shoulde borow of him he coulde lende me but 5/12 of a Porteguise, now I demaund how long time must I kéepe his money in iuste recompence of my lone, accompting 13 monethes in the yeare?

Scholer

The first number must be the first money borowed, that is [...]/4 of the Porteguise: the second number the 7 monethes, that is 7/ [...]3 of a yeare: and the thirde number the money that was lent in recompence, that is 5/12 of a Porteguise: then I set the numbers [...] thus.

Then (as you taught me) I mul­tiplie thrée (being Numeratour in the firsts [Page] number) by 7 the Numerator of the seconde number, and it maketh 21, which I multi­plie by 12, the denominator of the 3 & so haue I 252 for the diuidēt: thē I multiply 4 ye de­nominator of the first, by 13 the denomina­tor of the second, and it yéeldeth 52. whiche I multiplie agayne by 5, the Numeratour of the third, and it will make 260, that is the Diuisor. Then must I diuide 252, by 260, so it wil be in ye smallest fractiō, 63/65 of a yeare.

Ma.

And this doe you sée some ease in wor­king, better than to multiplie and diuide te­diously so many Fractions. An other questi­on yet will I propose, to the intent you may sée thereby the reason of the statute of assise of bread and ale, which in al Statute bookes in Frenche, Latine and Englishe,Statute of Assise of breade and ale. is muche corrupted for wāt of knowledge in this art: for the right vnderstanding whereof I pro­pone this question.

When the price of a quarter of Wheate is 2 s the farthing white lofe shal wey 68 s.Question. then I demaunde, what shall such a Loafe weye, when a quarter of Wheate is solde for 3 s?

Scho.

This Question must be wroughte as it is proponed in whole numbers and not [Page] in Fractions.

Mai.

You séeme to say reasonably, how be it, in that Statute of Assise, the rate is made by the proportion of parts in a pound weight Troie, else could it not be a Statute of anye long continuaunce, séeing the shillinges doe chaunge often, as all other monies doe: but this Statute being well vnderstanded, is a continuall rule for euer, as I will anon de­clare by a new table of Assise, conuerting the shillinges into vnces and parts of vnces. Therfore here by a shilling you must vnder­stand 1/20 of a pound weight, and so by pence 1/2 [...] of an vnce, wherefore although ye mighte worke this question proponed by whole nū ­ber well ynough, for ye time when the statute was made, yet to applie it to our time, and to make it to serue for all tymes generallye it is best to worke it by fractiōs, setting for 2 shilling 2/20: and for 68 shillings, 68/20: and so for thrée shillings 3/20, and then will the fi­gure of the question stand thus. [...] In which question because all the denominators be like, you shal worke onely with the numerators

Sc.

Then I shall multiplie 68 by 2, wher­of commeth 136, which if I diuide by 3, the [Page] quotient will be 45 ⅓: but how shal I make a Fraction of that to stand with the other?

Ma.

Haue you so soone forgottē what was taught you so lately? This is his forme.

Sc.

I remember it now and then [...] it signifieth 45 twentie parts, and the third deale of one twentie part.

Ma.

So is it, and that maketh in shillings, 45 s 4 d: wherby you may note one greate error in the Statute bookes, which haue con­stantly 48 s in that Assise. And by this rule, if you examine the Statute you shall finde many summes false, wherefore for the true vnderstanding of that statute and suche lyke as I haue made mention of it, and somwhat recognised it, so doe I wish that al gentlemē and other studentes of the lawes, would not neglect this arte of Arithmetike as vnnéede­full to their studies. Wherfore to encourage them thereto, and to gratifie both them and all other in generall, I will exhibite a Ta­ble of that part of ye statute in two columnes, and in a third columne I wil ad the correcti­on of those errors which haue crept into it.

Here followeth the Table.

The price of a quarter of vvheate.The vveight of a far­thing vvhite lofe by the statute bookes.The correcti­on by iust Assise.
s. d.li. s. d.li s. d.
1 06 16 06 16
1 64 10 84 10 8
2 03 8 03 8 0
2 62 14 4 1/ [...]2 14 4 ⅘
3 02 8 02 5 4
3 62 2 01 18 10 2/ [...]
4 01 16 01 14 0
4 61 10 01 0 2 2/ [...]
5 01 8 2 ½1 7 2 2/ [...]
5 61 4 8 ¼1 4 8 [...]/ [...]
6 01 2 81 2 8
6 60 19 111 0 11 1/13
7 00 19 10 29 5 1/ [...]
7 60 18 1 ½0 18 1 1/ [...]
8 00 17 00 17 0
8 60 16 00 16 0
9 00 15 0 ¼0 15 1 ⅓
9 60 14 4 ¼0 14 3 15/19
10 00 13 7 ½0 13 7 1/ [...]
10 60 12 11 ¼0 12 11 3/7
21 00 12 4 ¼0 12 4 4/ [...]
11 60 11 100 11 9 2 [...]/2 [...]
12 00 11 40 11 4

[Page] In the common bokes there is no farther rate of assise made, than vnto 1 2 s the quarter of wheate: but in an aunciēt copie of 200 years olde (which I haue) there is added the rate of assise vnto 20 s the quarter, but yet was yt assise also eyther wrong cast at ye first pēning, or els corrupt sith that time, for lacke of iuste knowledge in the rule of proportion, whiche I wil adde here also, to gratifye suche as be desyrous to vnderstande truth exactlye.

The price of a quarter of vvheate.The vveight of the far­thing vvhite lofe by the statute bokes.The core­ction of the errors.
s. d.s. d.s. d.
12 611 010 10 14/25
13 015 0 ½10 5 7/1 [...]
13 610 1 ½10 0 8/ [...]
14 09 79 8 4/ [...]
14 69 2 ½9 4 16/20
15 09 1 ½0 0 ⅘
15 69 1 1/ [...]8 9 9/3 [...]
16 09 08 6 0
16 68 68 2 10/11
17 08 38 0 0
17 67 107 9 9/ [...]5
18 07 67 6 ⅔
18 67 37 4 8/ [...]7
19 07 27 1 17/19
19 65 106 11 9/1 [...]
20 05 66 9 ⅗

[Page] These 2 tables I haue set seuerall, because no man should think that I would either ad or take away frō any law those parts which might of right séem either superfluous eyther diminute, but yet I may not be so curious as to neglect manifest errors, which is not only my part, but euery good Subiects dutie with sobrietie to correct. And for auoiding of offēce I haue rather don it in this priuate booke ra­ther than in any booke of ye statutes self, tru­sting that all men will take it in good parte.

Sc.

I would wish so, but I dare not hope so sith neuer good man yt would reforme error, could escape ye venemous tōgs of enuious de­tractors, which because they either cannot or list not to do any good thēselues, do delight to bark at yt doinges of other, but I beséeke you to stay nothing for their peruerse behauiour.

Ma.

I cōsider many things yt some may ob­iect, wherevnto I am not vnprouided of iust answers, but I wil not séem so hasty to make ye answers before I heare their obiectiōs, but as I trust that men are of a bettter nature, & more grateful now thā som hath bin in time passed, as I haue don in ye statute of Assise for bread in rate of s, so wil I set forth the like table in pounds & ounces, & the parts thereof, [Page] that it may be easilie applyed to all tymes: but I mean not by this to alter any word of the statute (being so good an ordināce, & of so great continuance) but onely to make it as a kind of expositiō & declaratiō of ye said statut, trusting yt therby ye statute may be better vn­derstād, & consequētly better put in executiō. And here you shall note,A pounde vveight. yt I haue accounted the shillings after the rate of lx s, to the poūd weight, bicause I estéem it ye most apt rate for our time. Wherfore if in ye first column you find ye price of wheat, directly against it in ye second column, you may find ye weight of the farthing white lofe, in this our time: & if you double yt number (as I haue done in ye thirde columne) then haue you the weight of ye half pēny white lofe & so in ye fourth column is set ye weight of ye pēny white lofe. It néedeth not to tel you that, yt the sight doth testifie, how ye euery colūn is parted into 3 smaller pillers, wherof ye first colūne hath these 3 titles, poū ­des, shillings, & pennies: ye other 3 columnes haue ech of thē these 3 titles, pounds, vnces, & pēnie weights. And as in the first colūne xij d make a s, & 20 s make a pounde, so in the other iii columes xx pence weighte maketh an vnce. and xij ounces doe make a pounde.

[Page]

The price of a quarter of wheate.
lbsd.
030
046
060
076
090
0106
0120
0136
0150
0166
0180
0196
110
126
140
156
170
186
1100
1116
1130
1146
1160
1176
11 [...]0

The weight of the farthing white loafe.
lb.vnc.d w.
69 ½2
46 ¼3
34 ¾1
28 ½2 ⅘
234
111 ¼1 2/7
18 ¼3
162 ⅔
14 ¼1 ⅖
12 ¼1 8/11
11 ½2
10 ½1 1/11
011 ½3 1/7
010 ¾2 ⅕
0104
09 ½2
091 ⅓
08 ½1 15/1 [...]
083 ⅕
07 ¼0 3 [...]
07 ¼
071 21/21
06 2/41
06 ½0 14/15
06 ½0 [...]/ [...]

The weight of the halfe pennie white loafe.
ll.vnc.d. w.
1 374
90 ¾1
69 ½2
55 1/ [...]0 ⅗
46 ¼3
310 ½2 4/7
34 ¾1
30 1/ [...]0 ⅓
28 ½2 ⅘
25 ½3 5/11
234
212 2/13;
111 ¼1 2/7
19 ¾0 ⅕
18 ¼3
174
162 ⅔
153 11/19
14 ¼1 ⅖
13 ½0 6/7
12 ¾1 [...]/11
123 19/29
11 ½2
111 1/25
101 1/12
101

The weight of the penny white lofe.
li.vnc.d. w.
27¼3
181 ½2
1374
1010 ½1 ⅕
90 ¼1
79 ¼0 1/7
69 ½2
60 ½0 ⅔
55 1/ [...]0 3/5
411 ¼1 10/ [...]1
46 ¼3
424 4/13
310 ½2 4/7
37 ½0 ⅗
34 [...]/41
32 ¼3
30 ¼0 1/3
210 ¼2 [...]/19
28 ½2 ⅘
271 [...]/7
25 ½3 5/11
24 ¼2 15/23
234
222 6/25
212 2/13
2 [...] [...]
Sch.
[Page]

Sir, I doe thanke you most hartily for this, not only in mine owne name and in the name of all Studentes, but also in the name of the whole Commons, to whom the restitution of this Assise (I trust) shall bring restitution of the weight in breade, whiche long time hath bene abused. And if you know any like thinges more, wherein you woulde vouchsafe to declare the errors and set forth the truth, you cannot but obtain great thāks of all good harted men that loue the common wealth.

Mai.

I haue sundrie thinges to declare but I haue reserued them for a priuate booke by it selfe, yet notwithstanding because the sta­tute of the rate of measuring of ground is so common that it toucheth all men, and yet no more common than néedefull, but so muche corrupt, that it is to farre out of all good rate, not only in the Englishe bookes of Statutes commonlye printed, but also in the Latine bookes, and in the Frenche also, for I haue read of eche sorte, and conferred them diligēt­lye, I will giue you a Table for the restitu­tion of those errours, as maye suffise for this present time. And first will I propose one question to you touching the vse of that Sta­tute, [Page] whereby you maye perceiue the order how to examine the whole Statute,A question of measure o [...] ground▪ and eue­ry parcell thereof, and the question is this.

When the Acre of grounde doth contayne foure perches in breadth, then must it con­tayne 40 perches in length: then doe I de­maunde of you, howe much shall the length of an Acre be, when there is in the breadth of it 13 perches? but before you shall aun­swere to this question, I will declare vnto you an other Statute, whiche is the grounde of the former Statute. And that Statute is this. It is ordayned that 3 Barlye Cornes, drye and rounde, shall make vp the measure of an inche: 12 ynches shal make a foote,A statute measures. and 3 foote shall make a yarde (the common En­glish bookes haue an elne) fiue yardes and a halfe shall make a perche, and 40 perches in length, and 4 in breadth, shall make an Acre. This is that statute: whereby you may per­ceiue that the intent of the Statute is,An Acre. that one Acre shoulde containe 160 square Per­ches. Now let me heare you aunswere to the question.

Scholer.

As I perceiue by the wordes of that Statute, a perche to be 1/160 of an Acre, so could I make those numbers all in Fra­tions, [Page] and so worke the question: but séeing I may doe it also in whole numbers I take that forme for the moste easie, [...] therefore thus I set the questi­on in forme. Then doe I mul­tiplie 40 by 4, and it maketh 160, which I diuide by 13, and the quotient is 12 4/1 [...].

Ma.

Now turne that 4/1 [...] into the common partes of a perche, as they be named in the former Statute: how be it, it shall be best to take one of the least partes in Denominati­on for auoyding of much labour, as féete, whereof the perche contayneth 16 4/ [...].

Sc.

Then to turne 4/13; into feete, I Multi­plye 16 ½ by 4, and it maketh 66, whiche I muste diuide by 13, and the Quotiente is 5 1/13.

Mayst.

So I finde that if the acre holde in breadth xiij perches it shall containe in lēgth 12 perches, 5 foote, and 1/1 [...] of a foote, which is not fully an ynche, for the ynche is 1/12 of a foote.Note this [...]rour. But here all the Statute Bookes in Latine and Englishe (that I haue séene) doe note it to be 13 perches, 5 foote and 1 inche: which maketh aboue 13 perches to many in the acre, so that I woulde haue thoughte the [Page] errour to haue crept into the printed bookes by the great negligēce that Printers in our time doe vse, saue that in written Copies of great antiquitie, I doe find the same. Yet haue I one frenche Copie, which hath 12 per­ches [...]/ [...], and one foote, and that misseth verye little of the truth.

Sc.

Then I sée it is true that I haue oftē heard say, that the truest copies of ye statutes be the Frenche copies.

Ma.

That is often true, but not generally, as I haue by conference tried diuerslye: but in this statute the frenche booke is most cor­rupt in all other places lightlye.

But now to performe my promise I will set forth the Table for measuring of an Acre of ground onely by suche partes as the Sta­tute doth mention, because at this time I doe of purpose write it for the better vnderstan­ding of the statute, and hereafter with other thinges I intende to set forth this same more at large.

In this Table following, I haue not done as in the other statute before cōpared by re­stitution with the faults crept into the Sta­tute, but onely haue written that true mea­sure, which the equitie of the Statute doeth [Page] pretends. For it were to vile to iudge of so noble Princes and worthie Councellors, as haue authorised & set forth this statute, that they would make one acre in any form grea­ter than an other, but euery one to be iust and equall with ech other, which is the grounde also of my worke, and hereby maye all men perceiue how néedefull Arithmetick is vnto the Studentes of the law. But now I think best to make an end of these matters for this present time, sith the table hath in it none ob­scuritie, that I should néede to declare.

[Page]

The breadthThe length of the acre.
perde.perde.feete.
10160
11149
12135 ½
13125 1/13
14117 1/14
151011
16100
1796 27/34
18814 ⅔
19816 18/19
2080
21710 3/14
2274 ½
23619 18/23
24611
2566 5/ [...]
2662 7/13
27515 5/18
28511 11/14
2958 31/58
3055 ½
3152 41/62
3250
33414
34411 11/17
3549
3647 ⅓
3745 13/37
3843 9/19
3949/13
4040
4131 63/82
42313 6/42
43311 77/86
44310 ½
4539 [...]/ [...]
Sc.
[Page]

In deede Sir, I vnderstand the Table (as I thinke) by those other whiche you sette forth before. For in the first Columne is set the perches of the breadth of any Acre, and then in the 2 columnes following appeareth how many perches and how many foote the same Acre must haue for his length

Ma.

You take it well: how be it to speake exactly of breadth & length, the first columne doth sometime betoken the breadth: & some­time the length, for properly the longest side of any square doth limit his length, and the shorter side doth betokē the breadth, yet it is no great abuse in such tables, where a man cannot well change the title, to let the name remayne, although the proportions of the numbers doe chaunge: for still by the first co­lumne, is expressed the measure of the one side, and by the two other pillers in one Co­lumne, is set forth the measure of the other side. And this shall be sufficient now for the vse of the golden Rule.

[Page] NOwe somewhat will I touch certaine other rules, which for theyr seuerall names maye séeme diuerse rules & distinct from this, but in déede they are but braunches of it: yet bi­cause they haue not onelie seueral workings in appearance, but also pleasant in vse, I will giue you a taste of eche of them. As for the rule of Felowshippe, both single and double, with time and without time, I shall néede to saye little more than I haue alreadie sayde in teaching the workes of whole numbers, yet an example or .ij. wil we haue to refresh the remembraunce of the same, and to declare certaine proper vses and applications of it, as this for one.

Foure men get a bootie or prise in time of warre, the prise is in value of money 8190 lb,A question of vnequal societie. and bicause ye men be not of like degree, ther­fore their shares may not be equall, but the chiefest person wil haue of the bootie the third part, and the tenth parte ouer: the second will haue a quarter and the tenth part ouer: ye third [Page] will haue the sixt part: and so there is lefte for the fourth man a verie smal portion but such is his lot, (whether he be pleased or wrothe) he must be content with one xx. parte of the praye. Now I demaunde of you, what shall euerie man haue to his share?

Sch.

You must be faine to answere to your owne question, else is it not like to be aun­swered at this time.

Maister.

The forme to vnderstande the so­lution of this question, and all suche like, is this: Reduce al the Denominators into one number by Multiplication, except that anye of them be partes of some other of them, for al suche partes you may ouerpasse, and take for them all those numbers, whose parts they be: as in this example the shares be these ⅓ 1/10 ¼ 1/12 ⅙ 1/20 if I multiplie al the Denominatours togither, beginning with 3, and so go on vn­to 20, it will make 144000: but considering that 3 is a part of 6, I shall ommitte that 3, and likewayes 10, whiche is a part of 20, I maye ouerpasse also, and then is there but 3 denominatours to multiplie, that is 4, 6, and 20, whiche make 480, whiche summe I take for my worke, bycause all the Denomina­tours wil be founde in it. Then I take suche [Page] partes of it as the question importeth, that is for the firste man, ⅛ 1/10, the ⅓ is 160 the 1/10 is 48: whiche I put in one summe for the firste mans share, and it maketh 208. Then for the seconde mans share, I take ¼, whiche is 120, and 1/10. whiche is 48, and that maketh in the whole 168. Now for the thirde man whiche muste haue ⅙ I take 80 And for the fourth man there remayneth but 24, whiche is 1/20 of the whole summe: so that if the whole pray had bene but 480 lb. then were the que­stion answered: but bicause the summe was of greater value, by this meanes nowe shall I know the partition of it. I must set my nū ­bers by the order of the Golden rule, putting in the firste place the number that I founde by multiplying the Denominatours, and in the seconde place the summe of the bootie.The reason of this rule. And looke what proportion is betwéene the firste number and that seconde, the same proporti­on shall be betwéene the partes of that first number and the partes of the seconde, com­paring eache to his like. Therefore I muste put in the thirde place, one of the partes or shares, and then worke by the former rule of proportion or Golden rule. And bycause I [Page] haue 4 seueral partes of the first number, by which I would finde out 4 like partes of the seconde number, therefore muste I make 4 seueral figures.

Scholer.

Nowe I truste I can aunswere to your question, as by your fauoure I wyll proue.

[...]

And to trie it, I set the 4 figures thus, mar­ked with A, B, C, D, to shewe their order. And then in eache of them I multiplie the seconde number by the thirde, and diuide their totall by the first, and so amounteth the fourth sum whiche I séeke for, for if I do multiply 8190 by 208, it maketh 1703520, whiche being diuided by 480, maketh in the quotient 3549 for the first mans portion: And so workyng with the other thrée figures, I find for the se­cond man 2866 ½, and for the third mā 1365: and then for the fourth man 409 ½. And so is [Page] euerie mans share set forth in the figure here annexed.

[...]

And thus I thinke I haue done wel.

Ma.

If you misdoubte your working and liste to proue it, adde all the shares togither: and if they make the totall, thē séemeth it wel done.

Sc.

I maye sette them thus:The proofe by Additiō [...] and then by Addition the iuste summe doeth amounte, that is 8190, and therefore (as you saye) it séemeth to be wel wrought.

But I beséeche you, is there anye doubte in this tryall, that you vse that word,The iust proofe. Sée­meth?

Maister.

You maye easilie coniecture, that if you did assigne the firste mans share to the laste, and so chaunge all the rest, that [Page] one had an others share, yet woulde the Ad­dition appeare al one, and therfore is not the proofe exact.

But if you wyl make a iuste proofe for the firste mans parte take [...]/ [...] of the whole sum, and if it agrée with the number in the fi­gure, then it is well done. And so doe for the seconde, thirde, and fourth summes, and this proofe faileth not. Nowe will I propounde certaine other questions whiche haue bene sette foorth by certaine learned men, albeit not without some ouersighte whiche questi­ons I protest heartilie I doe not repeate to depraue those good men, whose labours and studies I muche prayse and greatelie de­lighte in, but onelye according to my pro­fession, to séeke oute trueth in all thinges, and to remoue all occasions of errour, as muche as in me lyeth: and for that cause I will onelie name the questions wythout hurting the Authours name. The firste que­stion is this.

A question of buildingFoure men did builde a house, whiche coste them 3000 crownes, their shares were such, that one man should pay 1/ [...] of the summe, and 6 crownes ouer: the seconde should pay ⅓ and 12 crownes ouer: the third man must lay out [Page] ⅔, abating 8 crownes and the fourth mā shold pay ¼, and 20 crownes more, cā you answere to this question?

Sc

No in good faith sir, and that you knowe best of anye man, for I knowe no more than you haue taught me.

Mayster.

Then I dare say you can not doe it neither yet the best learned man that euer did propose it, for the question is impossible:An impos­sible que­stion. for declaration whereof I wil be bolde to vse first the representation of the nūbers in their aptest form, (Although I haue not yet taught you that manner of worke) bicause it maye apppeare plainelie that the question is not possible, for here I haue [...] set the parts, and added them, and they make the whole summe and ¾ and 30 more. Now howe is it possible to diuide true­ly either gaines eyther charges so, that the particulars shall be more than the total.

Sc.

It is against the forme of proofe by Addi­tion of partes.

Maister.

You say truth. And bycause you [Page] shal perceiue it the better, I [...] wil trie it after the vulgare forme, as in this figure you see where the ½ with 6 ouer is 1506: for the totall is as you heard before 3000: the ⅓ and the 12 more, is 1012: the ⅔ woulde be [...]0 [...]0, but then abating 8, it is but 1992, and then laste of al, the ¼ is 750, and the 20 more maketh 770: which al being added in one summe, doe make 5280, where the totall summe shoulde be but 3000, which sum if you diuide by 4/3, so shall you haue ¾ of it, that is 2250, and thereto adde 30 more, then wil those 3 summes make [...] 5280: wherby you may see how this forme as well as the other, doeth declare that the particu­lars in that question woulde make more than the whole sum by ¼, and [...]0 more: and therefore can that que­stion not be accepted as a possible thing, but yet doe certayne learned men propound suche questions, and aunswere to them. Therefore somwhat to say to their excuse rather of their good meaning than for their doing, I will a­none declare what may be saide for their de­fence: [Page] but in the meane season I will pro­pounde the question as it may be wrought by good possibilitie. As if foure men build a house togither, and it cost them 3000 crownes, and then for the partition they agrée thus: that as often as the firste man doth paye 6 crownes, so often the seconde shall paye foure, the third man 8 and the fourth man thrée. Or els thus: that the firste man shall pay double so muche as the fourth, and the seconde man shall paye ⅔ of the firste mans charge: the third manne shall pay double so much as the second: (And these two wayes are to one ende) but further for their agréement it is appointed also, that the firste man shal giue 6 crownes ouerplus, and the seconde 12, and the fourth shal giue 20, but the third man shal giue no ouerplus, but shal haue 8 crownes abated of his charge. Now is the question possible to be assoyled, and this is the way to doe it. Marke the pro­portion of the seuerall charges, and set out small numbers in that rate, by whiche you may reduce the worke to the Golden rule, as here in the first forme, the nūbers are alredie named, 6, 4, 8, 3: and in the seconde forme, although they be not plainly named, yet they may be the same nūbers: for 6 is double to 3, [Page] and 4 is ⅔ of 6: and againe 8 is double to 4. Now adde these togither and they make 21, whiche 21 must be set in the first number in the Golden rule: for if it with the ouerplus of eache mans charge woulde make the totall sū of the charges, thē were those seueral sums the charges of ech man, besids his ouerplus: but now it is not so.

The rule.But yet this is true, that looke what pro­portion each of these seuerall sums doth beare to 21, the same proportion doth the iust char­ges of euerie man (beside his ouerplus) beare to the totall of the charges, the ouerplus be­ing deducted: wherfore this maye you note, that before you do apply the total of the char­ges to the Golden rule: you must deducte the ouerplus whiche is 6, 12, and 20, that is in the whole 38 but then 8 must be restored for the abatement of the thirde man, and then remaineth to be deducted 30, Take 30 ther­fore out of 3000, and there will reste 2970, whiche I must set in the Golden rule for the seconde summe: and for the third summe I must put ech of the smal numbers before mē ­tioned, whiche although they be not the seue­rall charges, yet they represent them in pro­portion. And so making for euerie mannes [Page] charge a seuerall question, the figures wil be 4, which I marke with foure letters, a. b. c. d. thus.

[...]

Where I haue set for briefnesse the summe of euerie mans charge in the fourthe place, presupposing that you can tel how to trie out that fourth sum by so many examples as yée haue had.

Sch.

As I truste that I vnderstand thys fourme, so I desire muche to knowe what maye be saide for thē that mistooke this que­stion.

Maister.

You séeme so desirous to know this errour, that you haue forgotten to examine whether this worke bee wythoute

Scholer.

Mée séemeth this worke to bée well done, bycause the Addition of the 4 se­uerall numbers doth make the totall summe [Page] of 2970, whiche was to be diuided into suche foure parts.

Maister.

But then haue you forgotten that the firste man must pay 6 crownes more be­sides this share, and the seconde man twelue crownes more: the third mā 8 crownes lesse: and the fourthe man 20 crownes more, for without these, your first total of 3000 crow­nes wil not be made.

Scho.

Then must I adde to the first mans summe 6 more, and it wil be 854 4/7: and to the second summe I must adde 12, and it wil be 577 5/7: from the thirde summe I muste a­bate 8, and then wil the sum be 1123 3/7: then adding vnto the 4 summe 20, it will be 444 2/7: and these 4 sums will make 3000, whiche is the whole charge, as in this example it maye appeare, where firste I [...] gather the 14/7. that maketh [...], and so procéede I in the Ad­dition to the end.

Ma

Nowe haue you wel done, and this worke in the same sums is brought of other learned men for the true solution of the question as it was first proponed, which as (I saide) was impos­sible: and nowe examine it by these seuerall [Page] summes, and sée whether it do agrée with the summes in the question proponed.

The first man must pay 1/ [...] and 6 ouer of the total sum: how thinke you, is 845 4/7 the halfe and 6 more of [...]000:

Sc.

No that it is not, for it would be 1506: and for the second man 101 [...]: and for ye thirde man 1992: and for the fourth mā 770, wher­of not one summe agréeth to this worke. But I maruaile that so wise mē could be so much ouerséene.

Ma.

It is commonlie séene, that when men wil receiue things from elder writers, and will not examine the thing they séeme ra­ther willing to erre with their auncients for companie, than to be bolde to examine theyr workes or writings, which scrupulosity hath ingendered infinite errours in all kindes of knowledge, and in all ciuill administration, and in euerie kinde of arte: but these learned men did not meane anye other thing by this question, than to finde suche numbers as shoulde beare the same proportion togither, as those numbers in the question proponed did beare one to an other: whiche thing you shal perceiue more plainelie by an other que­stion of theirs, that is this.

[Page] A question of a testament.A man lying vpon his death bed, bequea­theth his goods (whiche were worthe 3000 Crownes) in this sorte. Bycause his wife was great with childe, and he yet vncertain whether the childe were a male or female, he made his bequest conditionally, that if his wife bare a daughter, then should the wife haue halfe his goods, and the daughter ⅓, but if she were deliuered of a sonne, then that son should haue ½ of the goods, and his wife but ⅓. Nowe it chaunced hir to bring forth both a son and a daughter, the question is: How shal they part the goods agréeable to the testatour his wil.

Scholer.

If some cunning Lawyers hadde this matter in scanning, they woulde deter­mine this Testamente to be quite voide, and so the man to die intestate, because the testa­ment was made insufficient, sith this condi­tion was not expressed in it, and also it might haue chaunced that she shoulde haue brought forth neither sonne nor daughter, as often hath bene seene: so is the will vnsufficiente in that point also.

Maister.

Suche scanners shoulde séeme to cunning, and yet not so cunning as cruel: for the minde of the Testatour is to be taken fa­uorablie, [Page] for the aid of ye legatories whē there riseth such doubts. But let vs trie this work, not by force of lawe, but by proportion Geo­metricall, séeing the testatour did minde to prouide for each sort of them.

Sc.

If the sonne shal haue ½ by force of the Testament, so must the mother haue ⅓. Again because she hath a daughter also, therefore ought she to haue ½ and the daughter 1/ [...]: that is both wayes ½ ⅓, and ½ ⅓, whiche commeth to the whole goods, and ⅔ more. Wherefore it séemeth also impossible.

Maister.

In this matter the minde of the Testatour is so to be vnderstande, that suche proportion shoulde be betwéene the portion of the wife and the sonne, as is betwéene ⅓ and ½ that is, the sonne muste haue ⅙ for 2/6 to his mother, so shall he haue [...] to 2, that is as much as his mother, and half as much more: and the mother muste haue the like rate in comparison to hir daughter. Then muste I finde out 3 numbers in suche proportion, that the firste may be as muche as the second, and halfe as muche more (that is) in proportion sesquialtera, and the seconde to the thirde in the same proportion, suche numbers be 6, 9, 4.

Sc.
[Page]

I pray you sir, how shal I find out those numbers?

M.

That wil I gladly tel you.

To finde three nūbers in any pro­portion.Whatsoeuer the proportion be of any thrée numbers, multiplie the Termes of that pro­portion togither and the number that amoū ­teth, shall be the middle number of the 3: thē multiple that middle number by the lesser tearme, and diuide that totall by the greater, and the least number of the 3 will amounte. So if you multiplie that middle number by the greater extreame, and diuide that total by the lesser extreme, then wil the greatest num­ber of that progression amount.

Scholer

To finde the proportion betvvene 2. numbers.Then in this example, to finde the proportion of ½ to ⅓, I muste diuide (as you taught me in Diuision) ½ by ⅓, & the quotient will be ½, that is 1 ½, whereby I perceiue that the proportion in this question is, as 3 to 2. Therefore (as you taughte me euen nowe) I multiplie 3 by 2, and the summe is 6, which must be the middle number: then I multiply the middle number 6 by 2, which is the least terme, and the summe is 12, that doe I diuide by 3, being the greater Terme, and the quotient is 4, so is 4 the leaste num­ber of the 3. Then I multiplie 6 by 3, wher­of [Page] commeth 18, and that I diuide by 2 and so haue I 9, which is the greatest number of the 3.

Ma.

An other way yet maye you finde the third number in any progression, if you haue 2 of them: for if the middle number be one of them which you haue, then multiplie it by it self (as in this example 6 by 6 maketh 36) and that totall diuide by the other number which you haue, and the third number will be the quotient.

Sc.

Then if I diuide 36 (which commeth of 6 multiplied by it selfe) by 4, the quotient will be 9, & if I diuide 36 by 9, the quotient will be 4. But what if I knowe the first nū ­ber and the thirde, and would haue the mid­dle number?

May.

Multiplie the two numbers togi­ther, and in their totall you must séeke the roote of that number, and it shall be the mid­dle number: but because as yet you haue not learned how to extract rootes, therfore vse the first forme which I haue taught you, till I teache you to extract rootes. And now go for­warde with the aunswere to the same que­stion.

Scholer.
[Page]

I perceiue then that the son muste not haue ½ of the goods, neither the mother ⅓, nor yet the daughter ⅓, but yet muste the goods be diuided in suche proportion, that the sonne shall haue 9 crownes for 6 to hys mo­ther: and the mother shal haue 6 crownes for euerie 4 to the daughter. Then I applie it to the Golden rule in thrée [...] examples thus: where the firste number is the Addi­tiō of those thrée numbers 9, 6, 4 and the thirde is one of them seuerallie: the seconde is the totall of the goods in the testament: & then by the worke of the Golden rule I finde out ye fourth number in euerie work that is for the sonne 1705 1/11: for the mother [...] 1136 16/15: and for the daughter 757, 17/15, which thrée summes added togither do make the sū of the whole goods, as may be séene by this example.

And this (me thinketh) I doe perceiue, that bicause in this case ther is a necessary remedy diuised againste an vrgente inconuenience, [Page] therfore those lerned mē thoght they might vse the like liberty in that other question.

Maister

Your gesse is good, but they had so good reason for them in the one, as they haue in the other: as in another example of theirs, it may better appeare, that is this:

A man left vnto his iij.An other question of [...] Testament. sons 7851 crow­nes, to be parted in this sorte, that the firste sonne should haue ½, the second sonne ⅓ and the third sonne ¼, which is not possible, for ½ ⅓ ¼ doth make 2/2 0/4: or 1/1 [...]/2;, that is 1 [...]/12, so is it more than the whole: but reduce these fra­ctions into one denominatiō, the least that they wil come to, and they wil be 6/12, 4/12, 3/12, and so may you part the goods in such pro­portion as these 3 Numeratours beare to­gither: that is, the firste to haue 6 for euery 4 to the seconde: and the seconde to haue 4 as oftē as the third hath 3: and so their por­tions wil be for the firste, 2623 7/13: for the second 2415 0/13: and for the thirde 1811 1 [...]/13, and those 3 shares added togither, [...] will make the totall summe of the whole goodes, as you may easily sée in this example Another question is there pro­poned thus:

[Page]There is 450 Crownes to be diuided be­wéen 3 men, so that the first man must haue ½ ⅓, the second man ⅓ ¼, the thirde man shall haue ¼ ⅕.

Scholer.

I maruaile that anye manne should be so ouerseene to propound that que­stion as a thing possible, sith ½ ½▪ 1/ [...] ¼▪ ¼ ⅕, doe make 1 ⅓ ⅕, that is almost double the whole summe.

But I perceiue it might be thus proponed, that as often as the first man did receyue 50 Crownes, so often the second man should re­ceyue 35, and the third man 27, for ½ ⅓, is equall to 50/60, and so is ⅓ ¼ equall to 1/6 5/ [...], and ¼ ⅕ is 2/6 7/ [...], and so working the question, the 3 figures will appeare in this forme: where­by the firste mannes [...] portion is founde to bée 200 50/56: the se­conde mannes parte is 140 15/56: the third mans share is 108 24/76: which in ye whole doth make 450 crou­nes yt was the whole summe to be diuided betwéene them.

Mayster.
[Page]

And thus you are (I thinke) sufficiently instructed in the rule of Felow­ship.

The Rule of Alligation.

NOw will I go in hād with the rule of Alli­gatiō,The rule of mixture. which hath his name, for that by it there are diuers par­cels of sundrie prices, and sūdry quantities alligate boūd or mix­ed togither, whereby also it mighte be well called the rule of mixture, and it hath great vse in composition of medicines, and also in mixtures of metals, and some vse it hath in medicines of wines, but I wish it were lesse vsed therein than it is now a dayes. The or­der of the rule is this:The reas [...] of this ru [...] When any summes are proponed to be mixed, set them in order one ouer an other, and the common number wherevnto you will reduce them, set on the left hand, then marke what summes be lesser than that common number, and whiche bée [Page] greater and with a draught of your perme, e­uermore linke 2 numbers togither, so that one bee lesser than the common number, and the other greater than hee, for two greater or two smaller can not well be linked togither, and the reason is this, that one greater & one smaller may bee so mixed, that they wil make the meane or common number very wel, but 2 lesser can neuer make so many as the com­mon number, being taken orderly: no more can two summes greater than the meane, ne­uer make the meane in due order as it shal a­peare better to you hereafter. And as it is of necessity to lynke euery smaller (once at the leaste) with one greater, and euerye greater with one smaller: so it is at libertie to linke them oftner than once, and so may there bée to one question many solutions. When you haue so linked them, then marke how muche eche of the lesser numbers is smaller than the meane or commō number, and that differēce set against the greter numbers which be lin­ked with those smaller eche with his match still on the right hande, & likewise the excesse of the greater numbers aboue the meane, you shall set before the lesser numbers which bée combined with them. Then shall you by Ad­dition [Page] bring all these differences into one summe, which shal bée the first number in the Golden rule: and the seconde number shal be the whole masse that you wil haue of al those particulers: the thirde summe shal be ech dif­ference by it selfe and then by them shall bée founde the fourth number, declaring the iust portion of euery particular in that mixture. As nowe by these examples I will make it playne.

There is foure sorts of wine of seueral pri­ces,A question of mixing of vvine. one of 6 d a gallon, an other of 8 d the thirde of 11 d, and the fourth if 15 pens the galon, of al these wines would I haue a mix­ture made to the summe of fiftie galons, and so that the price of eche galon may be 9 pens. Now demande I howe much must bée taken of euery sort of wine?

Scholer.

If it shall please you to worke the first example, that I may marke the ap­plying of it to the rule, then I trust I shall be able not only to doe the like, but also to sée reason in the order of the worke.

Maister.

Marke then this forme and the placing of euery kinde of number in it.

[Page] The com­mon price. ☞ [...]

Here (you sée) I haue sette downe the seue­rall prices which be 6, 8, 11, 15, and haue linked together 6 with 15, and 8 with 11. The common price 9, I haue set on the lefte side: And the difference betwéene it, and e­uery particular price, I haue set on the right hand not against the summe, whose differēce it is, but against the summe that it is linked withall: so the difference of 15 aboue 9, is 6, which I haue set not against 15, but against 6, that is linked with 15, and the difference betweene 6 and 9 (that is 3) I haue set a­gainst 15. So likewise ye difference betwene 8 and 9 is but 1, that haue I set against 11, and ye difference of 11 aboue 9 (which is 2) I haue set against 8. Then adde I all those 4 difference, and they make 12, which I sette for the first number in the Golden rule: the seconde number I make 50, which is the [Page] summe of gallons that I woulde haue, and the thirde summe is euerie particular diffe­rence. Nowe if you worke by the Golden rule, you shall finde the number of Gal­lons that shall be taken of eache sorte of wine: For the better distinction whereof, I haue sette these letters abcd both agaynste the numbers for which the workes do serue, and ouer the workes also, whiche seuerallye serue for eache of them. And nowe if you liste to examine the truthe of these workes, adde those foure summes togither,The proo [...]e of [...]. and they wyl make fiftie, that is the [...] totall whiche I would haue, as by this exam­ple you may easily per­ceiue. And for to proue how ye prices do agrée, doe this. Multiplie this totall summe 50, by the common price 9, and it will make 450: then kéepe that summe by it selfe, and after­ward Multiplie euerie seuerall summe of Gallons, by the price belonging to the same Gallons, and if that summe doe a­grée with this, whiche you haue kepte firste, [Page] then is your worke well done. As here, 25 is the number of gallons of 6 d price, multi­plie then 25 by 6, and it maketh 150, whiche you shall set downe: [...] then multiplie 8 2/6 by 88 which is the price for ye number of Gal­lons, and it will make 66 4/6: so again 4 ¼ multiplied by 11 doth make 45 5/6. And last of al 12 3/6 multipli­ed by 15, maketh 187 ⅙. And these added to­gither doe make 450, as in the example an­nexed you may sée: wherefore séeing it doth a­grée with the former sum of 50, multiplyed by 9, I may iustlie affirme this worke to bée good and wel done.

The variati­on of this question.And now to proue how you can do the like, I propounde the same question, only willing you to vse some other forme of combining or linking the summes.

Scho.

That shall I proue with your fa­uoure, and therefore I combine 8 with 15, and 6 with 11, and then the forme wyll be as foloweth: [Page] [...] whereby amounteth the same summe in to­tall of the differences, as did before: and yet nowe the differences be altered, as the combi­nation is chaunged, whereof I vnderstande the reason by your former worke. And ther­fore here appeareth no straunge thing, but that nowe I muste haue 8 2/6 gallons, of sixe pence and 25 gallons of 8 d and 12 gallons and ⅙ of 11 d, and so conse­quently [...] 4 gallons and ⅙ of 15 d, so ye multiplying 8 2/6 by 6, it maketh 50, and thē 25 multiplied by 8, maketh 100: likewise 12 3/6 multi­plyed by 11, yéelded 137 3/6, and 4 ⅙ multiplied by 15, maketh 62 3/6, whi­che foure summes added in one, will yéelde in the totall 450, whiche agréeth wyth the Multiplication of 50 (being the total summe [Page] of gallons) by 9 the common or meane price.

Mai.

Séeing you conceiue this worke so wel, I wil propound an other example vnto you of more varietie in the Alligations or cō ­binings: as thus.

A question [...]f spices.A Merchaunt being minded to make a bar­gaine for spices in a mixte masse, that is to say, of Cloues, Nutmegges, Saffron, Pep­per, Ginger, and Almonds, the Cloues being at 6 s apounde, the Nutmegges at 8 s. Saf­fron at 10 s. Pepper at 3 s. Ginger at 2 s. and Almonds at 1 s.

Now woulde he haue of eche sorte some, to the value of 300 lb, in the whole, and ech poūd one with an other to beare in price 5 s. howe much shal he haue of ech sort?

Sch.

That wil I trie thus.

First I set down those sixe seuerall prices, and at the left hand I set the common price 5 s. Then I linke thē thus, 1. with 10, [...], wyth 6, and 3 with 8. As in the example follow­ing.

[Page] [...]

Maister.

I hadde minded to haue combi­ned them in more varietie, but I am content to sée your owne worke firste, and then more varieties in combination maye followe a­none.

Scholer.

Then to continue as I beganne, I séeke the difference betwéene 1 and 5 (which is 4) and that I set against 10: then againste 1 I set 5, whiche is the excesse of 10 aboue 5: so I gather the difference betwéene 2 and 5, whiche is 3, and that I set against 6, bicause it is combined with 2: and likewise the dif­ference of 6 aboue 5 (which is [...]) I set against 2. Then take I the difference of [...] from 5, whiche is 2, and that I set against 8, and be­fore that 3 I set the difference of 8 aboue 5, whiche is 3. Then gather I al these differen­ces [Page] by Addition, and they make 18, which I set for my first number in the Golden rule, & so appeareth by those workes, yt of Almonds I must take 83 lb ⅓, of Ginger 16 lb ⅔, of pep­per 50 lb, of Cloues 50 pound, of Nutmegges 33 pound ⅓ and of Saffron [...] 66 pounde ⅔. Then for try­all hereof, I multiplie eue­rie parcell by his seuerall price, as 83 1/ [...] whiche is the summe of Almondes, I multiplie by 1, whiche is their price.

Also 16 ⅔ the summe of Ginger I multi­plie by 2, which is the price of it. And so each other in his kind, as this table annexed doeth represent: and then adding them altogither, I finde the total to be 1500, which also will a­mounte by the multiplication of the grosse masse of 300 by the common price 5, where­fore it appeareth wel wrought.

Ma.

Nowe will I make the Alligation to proue your cunning somewhat better: but bycause you shall not thinke your selfe pres­sed so much, I will also note the differences, as in this example you may sée. [Page] [...] where I haue alligate 1 with 6 and 8: and therefore haue I set against 1, both their dif­ferences: that is 1 and 3. Likewise bycause 2 is combined with 8 and 10, I set before hym their differences, 3 and 5. Againste 3 I haue sette onlie 5, whiche is the difference of 10, with whome 3 is combined onelye: like­wise 6 is onelie Alligate to 1, and therfore is the difference of 1 onlie set againste it: 8 is lincked with 1 and 2 and therefore hathe hée against him both their differences, 4 and 3: and 10 is ioyned with 2 and 3, therefore hath be their differences 3 and 2. And because of ease for you, in an other columne I haue set the differences reduced into one number, for [Page] euerie seuerall sort, and haue also added thē togither, wherby appeareth that they make 33, and so consequently you sée the workes of the golden rule set forth for ye sixe seueral drugges: I haue added letters a, b, c, &c as before. But I would not wish you to cleane stil to these elemētary aides, but accusiome memorie to trust hir self, so shal occasion of negligence be best auoyded. And as for the proofe, trie it at more leysure, because yt time now is short, and you sufficientlie instruc­ted in that proofe. And there resteth diuerse things behinde yet, of whiche I woulde gladlie giue you some taste before our de­parture.

Scholer.

But if it may please you to lette me sée al the variations of this question, be­fore you go from it, for me thinketh I could varie it two or three wayes more yet.

Ma.

I am content to sée you make two or thrée variations, but I would be loth to stay to sée al the variations, for it may be varied aboue [...]00 wayes although manye of them would not wel serue to this purpose.

Sc.

I thought it impossible to make so ma­ny variations.

Ma.

Meruaile not therat, for some questi­ons [Page] of this rule may be varied aboue 1000 wayes, but I woulde haue you forget suche fantasies, till a time of more leysure. And now go forward with some variation of this question.

Scholer.

For the first variation, I linke the first number 1 with 8 and 10, and 2 I combine with 6 and 10, then ioine I 3 wyth 6, 8, and 10, as in this forme.

[...]

And so doeth there appeare the portion of weight for euery kind of drugge in this mix­ture. Now for the triall.

Maister.

Nay stay there, you shal not néed to make triall in one example so often, or if you liste to do it by your selfe, I am content. But nowe sette foorth (for declaration that you conceiue the rule) two or thrée examples of seueral combinations, and then will wée [Page] and then will we passe to some other exam­ple and so ende this rule.

Scholer.

As it pleaseth you so will I doe. And these be the varieties in whiche as the [...] combinations are seuerall, so doth it plainely appeare, that the differences by whyche the proportion of eache seuerall kinde is taken, are also seuerall. And yet I sée in the thrée first of these fiue varieties, and in one other, before, the totall summe of the differences to [Page] be one, that is to say 18, whereby I perceiue that the varietie of their mixture doth depend of the varietie of their differences seuerall, and not of the varietie of their totall summe.

Maister.

So is it. And séeing you con­ceiue it so well, I will make an ende of thys rule, onely exhibiting to you one question or two of the mixture of metalles, that by it you may deuise other like, and exercise your self therein also, bicause the vse of it serueth often in businesse of charge, not so much for Gold­smithes, as for coynage in mintes. Firste I demaunde of you this question. If a Minte­maister haue golde of 22 karectes, and some of 23 karectes, some of 24: Againe, some of 15, some of 16, and some of 18 karectes, and would mixe them so, that he might haue 100 ounces of 20 karects, howe much shal he take of euery sorte?

Scholer.

To knowe that, I aunsweare in order thus.

[Page] [...]

Maister.

You haue wrought the question well, but howe chaunced you made no doubt of that newe name, Karecte?

Scholer.

Because I thoughte it out of time to demaund suche questions now, séeing you make so much haste to ende: and againe in this case the proportion of the numbers is sufficient for my purpose in this worke, tru­sting, that an other time you will instructe me as wel of this, as of sundry other things, which I haue heard you talkē of, so I haue a great desire to knowe them.

Maister.

Your aunsweare is reasonable: and your request and trust with Gods helpe I intende to satisfie. And to goe forwarde with this matter, let me sée your examinati­on of this last worke.

Scholer.

First for the one part I adde to­gither [Page] all the particular summes as [...] they appeare in the worke, and they make 100, as here by their Additi­on it doth appeare.

And so it seemeth, that the sum­mes are well gathered, but for the farther triall of them, I multiplye first 20. which is the common or meane sum [...] of the karectes by 100, whiche is the summe of the whole masse which I woulde haue and it ma­keth 2000. Then I multiply e­uerye particular summe by the karects that it doeth containe, as 10 by 15, and that maketh 150.

Likewise I multiplye 15 by 16, and it yéeldeth 240: so 20 by 18 maketh 360. And 25 by 22 yéeldeth 550: likewise 20 by 23 bringeth forth 460: and last of al 10 multiplyed by 24, yéeldeth 240: whiche summes all ioined togither make 2000, that doeth agree with the like summe before: wherefore I may well saye, that the worke is good. And nowe if it please you I would sette forth some varieties of this que­stion, to proue my witte.

Maister.

Goe to, let me sée.

Scholer.
[Page]

Here be foure varieties.

[...]

And more yet I coulde make, but not like is the number that you spake of in the varia­tion of the other question.

Maister.

That will I teache you at more leisure, séeing it is a thing rather of pleasure, than of any necessitie.

But nowe for youre exercise in this rule, one other question I will propose. A minte maister hathe 6 ingottes of siluer of sundrie finenesse, some of 4 ounces fine, and some of [Page] 5 ounces, some of 6, and other of 8, some of 11, and other of 12: and his desire is to mixe 500 pound weight, so that in the whole masse euery pound weight shoulde beare 9 ounces of fine siluer, howe muche shall he take (saye you) of euery sort of siluer?

Scholer.

To finde [...] out that I sette the numbers thus in or­der.

And gathering the differēces, it will appeare, that of the firste sort there must be 43 ½ ½ of the secōde like muche: of the third sorte, 65 5/23: and of the fourth sorte as muche: of the fifth sorte 195 ½ 5/ [...]: and of the sixth sorte 86 2/2 ⅔, whiche in the whole wyll make 300 lb waight: and in ounces after 9 ounces fine 4500, that is of the firste sorte 173 2/2 ½: and of the second sorte 217 9/23: of the third sorte 391 7/23: of the fourth sorte 521 ½ 7/3: of the fifth sorte 2152 4/2 [...]/3, and of the sixth sorte 1043 ½ ⅓, whiche al togither doe make 4500 ounces, agréeable to the multiplication of 9 by 500.

Maister.
[Page]

This is well done of you, there­fore nowe make thrée or foure variaties, and so an ende of this rule.

Sc.

These 4 varieties I set for example.

[...]

Maister.

And by these it appeareth, that you can find out more, with which I wil not nowe meddle, saue onely for to shewe you an easie help in drawing the lines of Combina­tion, I wil set forth two varieties here.

[Page] [...]

And this shall suffise now for the rule of Alligation or mixture, for by these examples may you easily coniecture suche other as doe appertaine to it, as wel for the due working, as for variety of drawing the lines of combi­nation.

Scholer.

Sir, albeit it pleased you ere while, to put me from my musing at the ma­nifolde varieties, that may fall in these com­binations, and termed them fātasies, yet my fantasie giueth me, that the consideration of this shoulde in many other examples and ca­ses of importance be very néedefull, and the knowledge of it most profitable. Therefore ye may wel thinke, that at another time con­uenient I will request you to aide me héere­in.

Maister.

Truth it is, that this considera­tion may fall in practise as wel Politicke, as Philosophicall, and sundrie wayes in them [Page] be applyed, therefore when time shall fall [...] for the discussing of this consideration, you shal not want my helping hande.

The rule of Falsehode.

NOwe wil I briefly al­so teach you somwhat of the rule of Falshod, whiche beareth hys name,The occasi­on of the name. not for that it teacheth any fraude or Falshoode, but for that by false numbers ta­ken at all aduentures, it teacheth howe to finde those true numbers that you séeke for.

Scholer.

So might any other rule be cal­led the rule of Falshoode, for they worke by wrong numbers, and by them finde out the right numbers, so doth the rule of Alligation, the rule of Felowship, and the Golden rule partely.

Maister.

In the Golden rule, the rule of [Page] Felowship, & the rule of Alligation, although the numbers that you worke by, be not the true numbers that you séeke for, yet are they numbers in iuste proportion, and are founde by orderly worke: whereas in this rule, the numbers are not takē in any proportion, nor founde by orderly worke, but taken at all aduentures.

And therefore I sometimes being merry [...] with my friends, and talking of suche questi­ons, haue caused them that proponed suche questions to call vnto them suche children or ideots, as happened to be in the place, and to take their answeare, declaring, that I would make them solue those questions, that semed so doubtfull.

And indéede I did answeare to the questi­on and worke the triall thereof also, by those answeares which they happened at al aduen­tures to make: which numbers séeing they be taken as manifest false, therefore is this rule called the rule of false positions, and for briefnesse, the rule of Falshode, which rule for readinesse of remembrance, I haue com­prised in these few Verses following, in form of an obscure Riddle.

Gesse at this worke as happe doth leade,
By chaunce to truth you may proceede.
And firste worke by the question,
Although no truth therein be done.
Such falsehoode is so good a grounde,
That truth by it wil soone bee founde.
From many bate to many mo,
From to fewe take to fewe also.
With too much ioine to fewe againe.
To too fewe adde to many plaine.
In crosse waies multiply contrarie kinde,
All truth by falsehoode for to finde.

The sense of these Verses, and the summe of this rule, is this:

When any question is proponed apper­taining to this rule, firste imagine any num­ber that you liste, whyche you shall name the firste position, and put it in stéede of the true number, and then worke with it as the que­stion importeth: and if you haue missed, then is the laste number of that worke, eyther too greate or too little: that shal you note as here­after shall be taught you, and you shall call it the firste errour.

Then beginne againe, and take an other number whiche shall be called the Seconde [Page] position, and worke by the question: if you haue missed again, note the excesse or default as it is, and call that the second errour. Then multiply crosse waies the first position by the second errour, and againe the seconde positi­on by the firste errour, and note their totalls seuerally by the names of Totalles. Then marke whether the two errours were bothe like, that is to say, both too much, or bothe too little: or whether they be vnlike, that is, the one too much, and the other too little, for if they be like, then shall you subtract the one totall from the other (I meane the lesser from the greater) and the Remainer shall be your diuidend, so muste you abate the lesser error out of the greater, and the residue shal be the diuisour. Now diuide the diuidend by that diuisour, and the quotient will shew you the true number that you séeke for: But and if the errours be vnlike then must you adde both those totalles (whych you noted) togy­ther and take that whole number for the di­uidend, so shall you adde both the errours to­gither, and that whole number shall be the diuisour, and the quotient of that Diuision shall giue you the true number that the que­stion séeketh for: and thys is the whole rule.

Scholer.
[Page]

This rule seemeth so vnlike any other, that without some example I shal not easily vnderstande it

Maister.

Therefore take this example: A Mason was boūd to build a wall in 40 days, and it was couenaunted so with him, that euery daye that he wrought, he shoulde haue for his wages 2 s, 1 penny, & euery daye that he wrought not, he shoulde be amerced 2 s, 6 d, so that when the wall was made, and the reckning taken of the dayes that he wrought, and of the other that he wrought not, the Ma­son had clearely but 5 s, 5 d, for his worke. Nowe doe I demaund, how many dayes did he worke of those 40, and how many did hée not worke?

Scholer.

I praye you expresse the order of the worke, that I may partely by imitation, and partly by comparing it with the rule, bée able againe to do the like.

Maister.

This order shall you kéepe in the worke of this rule: firste take some number (as you list) at aduenture, as for example: I saye he played 12 dayes, and wrought 28 dayes. Nowe caste you the wages of euerye daye, and sée whether it will agrée with the summe of 5 s, 5 d.

Scholer.
[Page]

The 28 dayes that he wrought after 25 pence the daye, yéeldeth 700 d. Then the 12 dayes that hée wrought not, at 30 pence eche daye, doth amount to 360 pence, whiche if I abate out of 700 pence, there resteth 340: but you say he had not so much.

Maister.

He hadde but 65 pence, and by this supposition he shoulde haue hadde 340: therfore is this summe too much by 275 whi­che summe I muste set downe after this sort, as you sée here, where firste I [...] haue made a crosse (common­lye called Sainct Andrewes crosse) and at the ouer corner on the left hand I haue sette the firste position 12, and at the other corner vnder it, I haue set 275 which is the first er­roure, with this figure 4, whyche betoke­neth too muche, as this line, — plaine without a crosse line, betokeneth too little. On the right hande of the crosse I haue lefte two like rowmes for the second position and his errour. Therfore to prosecute the worke, I suppose he played 16 dayes, and wrought 24.

Scholer.

I was a while in doubte why [Page] you named the dayes of hys working, séeyng they be not set in the figure: and I doubted howe you knewe them, or else whether that you did suppose them at all aduentures, as you didde the dayes that hee played: but now I gather, that seeing 40 dayes is the whole time limited, then the dayes that hée played being supposed the rest of 40 muste néedes be the dayes that he wrought, and therefore 28 followed 12 of necessitie and 24 foloweth 16 also of necessitie: but yet I scarce perceyue why you set not in the figure as well 28 as 12.

Maister.

It forceth not whiche of them I take, so that in the seconde position I take the numbers of the same nature that is here bothe of working dayes, or bothe of ydle: but nowe examine you this seconde positi­on.

Scholer.

If he played 16 dayes, then aba­ting 16 times 30 d the summe will be 480 d. And for 24 dayes that he wrought, euery day yéelding 25 d, the totall is 600 d: so that abating 480 out of 600, there resteth 120: and as you say it shoulde be but 65, therefore it is too much by 55, that must be sette on the right hand of the figure at the neather parte, [Page] and ouer it on the same [...] side 16 which is the se­conde position, thus. And as I gather by your words, it were al one if I did set 28 in steade of 12, and 24 in steade of 16.

M.

So were it. But this shall you marke, Note: that of what nature so euer the two positions be, of the same nature is the quotient. There­fore when the positions in this question are 12 and 16,The profe of this rule. which both being numbers of the playing dayes, the quotiente shall declare the true numbers of playing dayes, where as if the positions had bene 28 and 24, whyche are supposed to be the working dayes, then woulde the quotient declare the true number of the working dayes, & not of playing dayes as it will doe nowe. And therefore to con­tinue the worke of this question, and to find the true number of playing dayes, I muste multiplie crosse wayes the firste position 12 by 55, that is the seconde erroure, and the totall will be 660, then I multiplie 275 by 16, and it yéeldeth 4400. Now bicause the er­rours are like, that is to saye, both too much, I muste subtracte 660, out of 4400, and so [Page] remaineth 3740, whiche is the diuidend. A­gaine I must subtract the lesser errour 55 out of 275 that is the greater errour, and there wil remaine 220, which shall be the diuisor, then diuiding 3740 by 220, the quotient wil be 17. Wherefore I saye nowe constantlie, that 17 is the true number of dayes that the Mason played: and then it followeth, that he wrought 23 dayes, and so is the question an­swered.

Nowe for the order of triall of this worke there néedeth none other proofe but only thys, to worke with this number according to the question, and if it agrée, then appeareth the number to be it that you would haue. As here nowe séeing he wrought 23 daies, and muste haue for euerie day 25 pence, the whole sum commeth to 575. Then again séeing he play­ed 17 dayes, and muste abate 30 pence for e­ueriedaye, the whole summe of the abate­ment will be 510: therefore I subtracte 510 out of 575, and there wil remaine 65, which maketh 5 s, 5 d. the cleare wages of the Mason for his worke, according to the que­stion.

Scholer.

Nowe I trust I vnderstand the worke and the rule so well (and the better by [Page] thys proofe) that I can be able to do the like. And for a proofe I take the same question all saue the laste number, where I will suppose that he hadde 10 s, for his wages cléere. And now to gesse at the number of ye days that hée wrought, I suppose first that he wrought: 20 dayes, then say I, if he wrought 20 dayes his wages must be 500 d, then did he play other 20 dayes, for whych must be abated 600 d, and then he leeseth 100 d. And so am I at a staye, for it is not like vnto your former worke.

Ma

You shoulde haue required of me some question, and not haue taken a question of your owne fantasying, vntill you were more expert in this arte: for so might you as well happen on an impossible question as on a pos­sible: but now to go forwarde, consider that this number is too little by 220, séeing he should gaine by your supposition 120 d, and in this positiō he léeseth 100, those both make 220, whiche you shall set downe for the first error with this signe—, betokening to little, as here in this forme following doeth ap­peare.

[Page]And nowe for the rest go for­warde [...] youre selfe once a­gaine,

Scholer.

As my errour hath vttered my follie, so it hath procured me better vnderstanding. Nowe therefore consi­dering this position not to solue the question, I take an other, supposing that he wroughte 30 dayes, then for his wages he must be allo­wed 750 d, and for the 10 dayes whyche hée wrought not, he muste abate [...]0 [...] d, and so remaineth cleare 450 d: but it should be one­ly 120 d, therfore is it to much by 330, whi­che I sette downe in the figure with the for­mer position, and his erroure and the figure appeareth thus.

Nowe must I mul­tiplie [...] in crosse wayes 220, by 30, and it will be 66000. Then againe I multiplie 330 by 20, and it will be also 6600. Where­fore if I shall subtract the one out of ye other, there will remaine nothing to be the Diui­dend.

Ma.

In this you forget your selfe again: for in as much as the signes in the errors be vn­like, [Page] therefore must you worke by Addition, adding togither those two totals to make the diuidend, and also adding the two errours to make the diuisor. And bycause you shall no more forgette this part of the rule, take this briefe remembrance:

Vnlike require Addition,
And like desire Subtraction.
Sch.

You meane, that if the errours haue like signes, then muste the diuidend and the diuisor be made by Subtraction, as is taught before: And if those signes be vnlike (as in this laste example they be) then muste I by Addition gather the Diuidend and the diui­sor. Therefore must I adde 6600 to 6600, and it will be 13200, whiche shall be the di­uidend. Then againe I adde 220 to 330, and it will be 5 [...]0, whiche muste be the diuisor: wherefore diuiding 13200 by 550, the quo­tient will be 24, whereby I knowe that the Mason wrought 24 dayes: and then it follo­weth that he played 16 dayes.

M.

Examine your worke whether it bée a­gréeable to the question or no.

Sc▪

For 24 dayes worke, the wages muste [Page] be 600 d. and for 16 dayes whiche the Ma­son wrought not, there muste be abated 480, and then remaineth cleare to the Mason 220 pence, as the question importeth, wherefore it is euident, that 24 is the true number of the dayes that he wrought.

Maister.

Althoughe you séeme nowe to vn­derstande this worke, yet to acquainte youre minde the better with the newe trade of this rule, I thinke it good to propone to you fiue or sixe examples more, before I make an end of it.

Sch.

Sir I thanke you, that you do so consi­der my commoditie and profit in knowlege, for vndoubtedlie it is practise & exercise that maketh men prompt & expert in euerie kinde of knowledge.

Maister.

You say well so that they follow some certaine preceptes to gouerne and rule their practise by, else maye practise procure custome of error, and a repugnance to exact­nesse of knowledge, namelie as long as the error is not plainelie knowen to the vulgare sorte. But to returne to our worke. There is a seruant that hath boughte of the veluet and da­maske for his maister 40 yeardes, the veluet at 20 s, a yeard, and the Damaske at 12 s, & [Page] when he commeth home,A question of vvares. his maister deman­deth of him howe muche he hath boughte of ech sort: I cā not tel (saith he) exactlie, but this I knowe, that I paide for damask 48 s. more than I paide for veluet, nowe must you gesse how manie yeardes there is of each sort.

Scho

Although the gesse séemeth difficulte, yet I wil proue what I can do: for I remem­ber your saying, that it forceth not how fonde or false the gesse be, so it be somewhat to the question, and not an answere of a contrarie matter.

Therefore first I imagine that he boughte 20 yeardes of Damaske, for which he should paye after the former price 240 shillings: then muste he néedes haue of veluet other 20 yeardes (to make vp the 40 yeardes) and that woulde coste 400 s. So that the total of the price of the damaske is lesse than the summe paide for veluet 160 s, and should be more by 48. therefore the first errour is 208 too little. Then begin I again, and suppose he boughte of Damaske 30 yeardes that cost 360 s, then had he but 10 yeardes of Veluet, which coste 200 s: and nowe the price of Damaske is greater than the price of the Veluet by 160 [Page] shillings, and shoulde be but 48, therefore is the second erroure 112 too muche, whiche I sette in forme of a figure as here doeth ap­peare. Then doe I [...] multiplie in crosse wayes. 280 by 30 and the sum wyll be 6240. Also I multiplie 112 by 20, and there wil amounte 2240. And in as muche as the signes of the errours be vnlike, I knowe I muste worke by Addition, therefore adde I those two to­tals togither, and they make 8480, whiche is the diuidend: then adde I also the two errors togither. 208 and 112, and they make 320, whiche is the diuisor. Wherefore diuiding 8480, by 320, the quotient wil be. 26 ½, whi­che is the true summe of yeards of Damaske that he boughte: and in Veluet 13 yeardes ½, and that appeared by examination thus: 26 ½ yeardes of Damaske at 12 s. the yeard ma­keth 318 s, then in Veluet he hadde but 13 yeards and ½. that cost 270 s at 20 s. ye yeard. Nowe Subtracte 270 out of 318, and there wil remain 48, which is the number of shil­lings that the Damaske did coste more than the Veluet.

M
[Page]

Now shal you haue a questiō of an other kinde.A questio [...] of debt.

There are thrée men that do owe money to me, and I haue forgotten what the total sum is, and what the particulars be.

Scho

Why? then is it impossible to know the debt.

Maister.

Peace ye are to hastie: there is more helpe in it than you yet sée: I haue thrée seuerall notes, whereby it appeareth that I did conferre their debts togither, and founde the debt of the first and the seconde to amount to 47 lb, the debt of the first man and the third did make 71 lb and the second man his debte with the third, did rise to 88 lb. Now can you tell what euerie mā did owe, and what was the whole total?

Scholer.

Naye in good faith: but as I per­ceiue that it must be founde by coniecture, so wil I gesse at it, supposing that the firste man did owe 20 lb, and the second mā 30, and the third.

M.

Nay stay there for you are to far gone alreadie, you maye not suppose a seueral sum for euerie mā, for it is ynough to suppose one summe for the firste man, and let the other rise as the question importeth. Therefore sée­ing [Page] you set the first man his debt to be 20 lb, the seconde man can not owe 30 lb, for the de­claration is that their debtes added togither, did make 47 lb. so must the seconde man hys debte be but 27 lb. Nowe this seconde debte with the thirde muste make 88, therfore sub­tract 27 out of 88, and there wil remaine 61, as the third man his debt. Then saith the de­claration, that the first and third mens debts do make 71: but by this suppositiō they make 8 [...] that is 10 too much: whiche I muste set for the [...] error. Now worke you the second po­sition.

Sc

I suppose the first mans debt to be 24 lb, then must the second mans debt (by your de­claration) be but 2 [...] lb. séeing both they make but 47 lb. Also the seconde man his debt wyth the third, doe make 88 lb, and the second man oweth but 2 [...], therefore the thirde man must d [...]e 65 lb. Now the third mans debt with the first, shoulde make by the declaration 71 lb, & they do make 89 lb: that is 18 lb too muche: and that is the seconde errour, which I sette downe with the first, and [...] their positiō in this forme and then do I multiply in crosse wayes 20 by 18, & [Page] it is 360. Also 10 by 24 maketh 240. And be­cause the signes of the errors be like, I must worke by subtraction: therfore I subtract 240 out of [...]60 and there resteth 120, whiche is the diuidend: then doe I subtract 10 out of 18 by the same reason, and so is the diuisor 8, which is found 15 times in 120, therefore I say that the first man did owe 15 lb, and then the second man muste owe 32 lb, for those 2 doe make 47 lb, and the third man his debt is 56 for so much remaineth if I bate 15 out of 71, or if I take 32 out of 88.

M

For the third exāple take this easie que­stion for ye variety in worke.The third question. Two mē hauing seueral sums which I know not, do thus talk togither: ye firste saith to the 2, If you giue me 2 s of your money, thē shal I haue 3 times so much money as you: the 2 answereth: It wer more reason, that our sums wer made equal, and so will it be, if you giue me [...] s of youre mony. Now gesse what ech of them had.

Scholer.

I imagine that the firste had 9 s.Note:

Maister.

Consider euermore in your ima­ginations that you take a likelye summe, as in this question take suche a sum that hauing 2 added vnto it, may be diuided into 3 partes euen.

Scholer.
[Page]

Why? I remember you said be­fore, it forced not howe fondely so euer I ges­sed.

M

As for the possibilitie of the solution it is truth, but for easinesse in worke, the aptest numbers are most conuenient.

Scholer.

I thoughte no lesse, and there­fore I toke 9 as an apte number to be parted into: but I perceiue I shoulde haue conside­red the aptnesse of that partition after the ad­dition of 2 vnto it, and then 7 had bene more méeter.

M

That is trueth, and then shoulde the se­conde man his sum be 5: for although he haue nowe but the third part of 9 that is 3, yet you must remember that he lent the first man 2, and so had he 5.

Scholer

Then to goe forwarde: if the se­conde man had 3 of the firste mā, then should he haue 8, and the first man but 4, so hath hée double to the first man: yet he said in the que­stion they should haue equall: wherfore it ap­peareth that he hath 4 to much. Therefore I note that error with his supposition, and gesse againe that he hath 10 s: whereunto I adde 2 shillings borrowed of the seconde man and then hath he 12 shillings, so the seconde [Page] man hath remayning but foure, wherevnto if I adde the 2 that he lent to the firste man, so had he but 6 s at the beginning. Thē take 3 shillings from the first man, and giue to the seconde, then hath the first man but 7, and the seconde hath 9, whiche are not equall, but there are 2 to manye, [...] wherfore I set down bothe the positions with their errors as here you sée, and mul­tiplie a crosse, so commeth there 40 and 14: and bycause the signes be like. I take 14 out of 40, and so resteth 26 to be the diuidend, thē likewise I take 2 out of 4, and there resteth 2 by which I diuide 26, and the quotient wyll be 13, which is the summe that the firste man had. And so appeareth that two being added thereto, the summe will be 15, so hath the se­cond man nowe but 5, and before he had 7: then take thrée from the first, and put to hys seuen so haue eache of them 10, and that is e­qual, as the question would.

Maister.

For the fourth example take this question. One man saide to an other:The fourth example. I think you had this yeare two thousand lambes: so had I saide the other: but what with paying [Page] the tith of them, and then thrée seueral los­ses they are muche abated: for at one time I lost halfe as many as I haue now left: and at an other time the thirde time of so many: and the third time ¼ so many. Now gesse you how manie are left.

Sch.

Bicause here is mention made of cer­taine parts, I must take a number that may haue all those parts: that is to say, [...]/2, 1/ [...] ▪ and [...]/ [...], whiche wil be 24, howbeit 12 hath the same partes. Therefore firste I take 12 to be the number that doth remaine, so hath he loste 6, 4, and 3, that is 13: and in the whole 25, but it shoulde be 2000.

Maister

Yée are deceiued yet stil: you haue forgotten the 10 part, whiche must be de [...]al­ked, that is 200, so there remaineth but 1800 and now go on againe.

Scho.

Then to finde the error, I take 25 out of 1800, and there remayneth 1775 to fewe, whiche I set for the firste errour. Then for the second position I take 24, whose halfe is 12, the third part 8, & the quarter 6, where by riseth 50, which is too little by 1750, ther­fore I set downe both the positi­ons [...] with their errors thus.

And multiplie in crosse ways 1775-1750- [Page] 1775 by 24, whereof commeth 42600. Also I multiplie 1750 by 12, and there ariseth 21000. And bicause the signes are like, I doe subtract the one from the other, and so remai­neth the diuidend, 21600: then do I subtracte 1750 out of 1775, and there resteth 25: by whiche I diuide 21600, and the quotiente is 864, wherof the halfe is 432, and the thyrde part is 288, the quarter is 216, which [...] all being added togither, will make 1800. And if you adde thereto the tenth which was abated before, then wil the whole sum be 2000. And nowe doeth there come a question to my memorie which was demaunded of me, but I was not able to answere to it, and now me thinketh I could solue it

M.

Propone your question.

Sch.

There is supposed a Lawe made that (for further tillage) euerie man that doeth kéepe shéepe,A question [...] Of sheepe and tillage. shall for euerie [...]0 sheepe eare and sowe one acre of grounde: and for his al­lowance in shéepe pasture, ther is appointes for euerie foure shéepe one acre of pasture Nowe is there a riche sheepemaister [...] hathe 7000 acres of grounde, and woulde gladlie kéepe as manye shéepe as he might by [Page] that Statute, I demaunde how many shéepe shal he keepe.

M.

Answere to the question your selfe.

Scho.

First I suppose he maye keepe 500 shéepe, and for them he shall haue in pasture after the rate of 4 shéepe to an acre, 125 acres, and in arable grounde 50 acres, that is 175 in al: but this error is to litle by 6825. Ther­fore I gesse againe, that he may kéepe 1000 shéepe, that is in pasture 250 acres: and in til­lage 100 acres, which maketh 350: that is too little by 6650.

[...] These both er­rours wyth their positions I sette downe as you sée, and multiplie in crosse 6825 by 1000, & it maketh 6825000. Then I multiplie 6650 by 500, and it doeth amounte to 3325000, whiche summe I doe subtract out of the firste and there remaineth 3500000 as the diuidende. Also I doe sub­tracte the lesser error out of the greater, and so remaineth 175, by which I diuide the said diuidend, and the quotient wil be 20000, so that I sée, that by this rate he yt hathe 7000 acres of grounde, may kéepe 20000 shéepe: [Page] and thereby I coniecture, that many menne may kéepe so many shéepe, for many men (as the common talke) haue so manye acres of ground.

Maister.

That talke is not likely, for so much ground is in cōpasse aboue 48 ¾ miles, leaue this talke and returne to your questi­ons, leaste your pointing be scarce well ta­ken.

Scholer.

Indéede I doe remember, that the Egiptians did grudge so muche againste sheepeheardes till at length they smarted for it, and yet they were but smal shéepemaisters to some men that be now, and the sheepe are waxen so fierce nowe & so mightie, that none can withstand them but the Lion.

Maist.

I perceiue you talke as you heare some other:An other vvay of vvorking. but to the worke of your questi­on: both this laste question, and the nexte be­fore might be wrought without the seconde position, by the rule of proportion, as this. When in this question ye found in the firste errour, that for 500 shéepe, there muste bee 175 acres, then might you reduce it to the Golden rule, thus

If 175 acres wil ad­mit [...] in allowance 500 [Page] shéepe than 7000 will haue 20000. And so by one position with the helpe of the Golden rule may you answeare that question. Like­wise for the question of Lambes, when you [...] had founde that 12 came of 25, you mighte haue set the figure thus as yée see & haue said: If 25 do leaue but 12, what shall 180 leaue? and it woulde appeare to be 864.

Scholer.

Sir, I thanke you for this ayde, for it doeth muche shorten the worke of thys rule.

Maister.

An other vvay yet.Yet againe I will shewe you an other way, to answeare to this laste question without this rule of False position, and that by the rule of Felowshippe, for it appeareth in the proponing of the question, that 10 shéepe must haue in pasture 2 acres and ½, and for them must there be eared but one acre: so it followeth, that for two acres eared, there must be fiue set to pasture. And if you putte them both into one summe, they wil make 7. Therfore looke what proportion 7 being this totall, doth beare to 5 and to 2, such proporti­on shall any totall in this question beare to the pasture ground, and the eared ground.

Scholer.
[Page]

This serueth wonderous aptly. Therfore to proue it, I demaund this by the former supposition: If a man haue [...]00 a­cres, how much shall he leaue in pasture, and howe much shal he turne to tillage? You say that as 7 is to 5, so shall 300 be to the acres of pasture: and as 7 is to [...], so is [...]00 to the acres of tillage, whereof for both I haue sette examples here following, [...] whereby appeereth that of pasture there shall be 214 2/7 acres, and of tillage 85 [...]/7 which both summes ad­ded togyther, doe make 300.

Maister.

Now take an other example: A man hath three siluer cuppes with one couer, the couer wayeth 18 ounces the seconde cup weyeth euen halfe the waight of the first and the third. Now if the couer be put to the first cup, they wey iuste as muche as all the thrée cups doe wey: and if the couer be ioined with the seconde cuppe, they wey as muche as the second twice, and the third: and if the couer be put to the thirde cup, they wil make twice as much as the first and the second cup. Now trie you what was the iust waight of euery cup.

Scholer.
[Page]

I doe set the waight of the firste cup to be 9 ounces: then in as much as these two (that is to say, the couer and the first cup) do wey the waight of the thrée cups, I sée that the three cuppes must wey 27 ounces, for so much is 18 and 9. Also because the firste and the third do wey double so much as the secōd, therefore is it the third parte of that waight, that is 9, and then woulde it followe, that the third cup also should wey 9 ounces, but then the question saith, that the couer being ioined to the second cup, they wey as muche as the second twice, and the third once, that should be 27, and so it doth: then being ioined with the third cup, they should wey twice as much as the first and the second, that should be 36, and they wey but 27, so is that errour 9 too little. Then beginne I againe, and saye, that the firste cup doth wey 12 ounces, whiche I ioine with the couer, and they make 30 oun­ces: then séeing the second is ⅓ of that waight, it muste néedes wey 10 ounces, and the third muste wey 8 ounces, seeing the first and the third must wey 20 ounces. Now putte I the couer to the seconde cuppe, and they wey 28 ounces, which should be euen so: then ioine I the couer with the thirde Cuppe, and so [Page] should it wey twice the firste, and the second, that is 44 ounces, and they doe wey but 26, that is 18 too little: those [...] errours with their posi­tions I set downe, and multiply in crosse ways 9 by 12, whereof com­meth 108. Also 9 by 18, and that yéeldeth 162: and in as much as the signes be like, I abate the lesser out of the greater, and there doth remaine 54. Then doe I also abate the lesser errour from the greater, and so remai­neth 9, by which I diuide 54, and the quoti­ent is 6: which I take for the true waight of the first cuppe: which being ioined with the couer muste wey as much as the thrée cups, so do they wey but 24 ounces. Then séeing the secōd cup is the third part of that weight, for the other two cuppes (you say) muste wey double his weight, the weight of the second cuppe is 8 ounces, and so the waight of the the thirde must be 10 ounces. Nowe put the couer to the seconde cuppe, and it will make 26 ounces: that muste be the waight of the seconde twice, and the thirde once, that is twice s, and once 10, and so is it. Againe, putte the couer to the third cuppe of 10 oun­ces, [Page] and they must wey twice as much as the firste and the second, that is 28: and so is all agréeable.

Maister.

Then aunsweare to this questi­on.

A question of vvater.There is a Cesterne with foure cockes, containing 72 barrels of water: and if the greatest cocke be opened the water wil auoid cleane in sixe houres: at the seconde cocke it wil aske eight houres: at the thirde cocke it will auoide in no lesse than nine houres: and at the smallest it wil require twelue houres. Nowe I demaunde, in what spaes will it a­uoide, all the cockes beeing set open?

Scholer.

Firste I imagine that it will a­uoide in two houres.

Maister.

Then muste there auoide by the first cocke 1/ [...] of the water, that is [...]4 barrels, and by the second cocke ¼, that is 18, and by the third cocke 2/ [...] that is 16 barrelles, and by the smallest cocke ⅙, that is 12 barrelles, all which summes put togither do make 70, as by their addition it doth appéere, but it should be 72, therefore the errour is 2 too fewe.

Scholer.
[Page]

Then I begin [...] againe by youre fauour, by­cause I think I vnderstand the worke, and putte thrée houres for the due time: so shall there runne out at the greatest cocke ½, that is 36 barrels, and at the seconde hole [...]/8, that is 27, and at the thirde cocke [...]/3 that is 34, and at the smallest hole ¼, that is 18 barrels, which al togither do make 105, and should be but 72, so is it too muche by [...]3, therefore do I set the [...] errors in order of the figure with their positions, and worke by multiplication, in crosse, saying: 2 times 3 is 6 and 2 times 33 maketh 66: and because the signes are vnlike, I must adde those two to­talles togither, which make 72: also I adde the two errours, and they make 35, by whi­che I diuide 72, and the quotient riseth 2 2/25, whereby I sée that all the cockes beyng set o­pen, the water wil auoide in 2 houres, and [...]2/35 of an houre.

Maister.

This exercise maketh you to grow expert in the rule. Therefore I wil in­ure you somewhat more wt a questiō or two.

[Page]There were two men that had bene parte­ners, and had in accompt betwene them 300 duckets: whereof the one shoulde haue for his parte 180, and the other 120: but in the parting of them they fel at variannce, so that eche of them catched as many as he coulde: yet afterwarde being reconciled, they agréed that he which had gotten most parte of them, shoulde lay downe ¾ of them againe, and hée that had gotten least, shoulde laye downe ⅓ of those which he had taken, and then parting them vnto two equall partes, eache man to haue halfe thereof, and so had they their iuste portions, as they ought: nowe I demaunde of you what eache of them had gotten by the scambling?

Scholer.

I suppose he that had leaste, gotte 108 duckats, then the other had 192: where­fore in laying downe againe of the 192, there was put downe ¾ that is, 144, and so had he left but 48. Also of the 108: there was layde downe 36, that is [...]/ [...], and so he had lefte 72. Then I put togither 144, and 36, and it ma­keth 180 which I parte into two partes e­uen, and so commeth 90 to be giuen to eache of them: which summe put to 72, maketh 162, and ioined to 148, it maketh 238: and now I [Page] doubt how I shal go forwarde.

Maister.

You néede not to take but one of them which you list, the greater or the smal­ler, for all commeth to one purpose: and so may you compare it that you take to anye of the other summes, remembring that you make comparison to the same in the seconde worke: as for example of the firste parte, If you compare 138 with the lesser summe due, that is 120, so is it 18 too muche: and if you compare it with the greater summe, then is it 42 too little. Againe, if you compare 162 to the greater summe, the errour will be 18 as it was in the other: but it wil haue a con­trarie signe: and if you compare it with the lesser summe it will be 42 too much: so that the errour both wayes is eyther 18 or 42: & as for the signes it little forceth, for in them is nothing considered here, but likenesse and vnlikenesse, which in this case, doth neyther further nor hinder. But now go on with the worke.

Scholer.

If it be so, then am I out of my greatest doubt Then I ioine that 90 (which I founde as the halfe of the latter partition) vnto 48, which is left with the one man, and so hath he 138, whiche (I may say) is 18 too ma­ny [Page] for the least should be but 120: that error doe I note, and then make a newe position, supposing the one man to haue 204, and the other to haue 96, wherefore of the 204 there must be laide downe 153, and so remaineth with him 51. Also of the 96 there muste bée laid downe ⅛, that is 32, and so resteth with that man. 64. Nowe of the 153 and 32 I make one summe as 185, whiche I muste diuide into 2 equall partes. and so eche man shall haue 92 ½, wherevnto if I adde their former portions reserued, then the one shall haue 156 ½ and the other hath 145 ½. Wher­fore I take the lesser summe nowe agayne, as I did before, that is 143 ½, and finde that he hath too many by 23 ½, for he shoulde haue but 120, so haue I for my two positions two errors, which I set down, [...] as here may be seene, eche errour vnder his position, and then by the rule I doe multiplye in crosse wayes 108 by 23 ½ and there riseth 2538 whiche I note then againe I multiplye 96 by 18, and thereof amounteth 1728. Now because the signes are both like, that is bothe too ma­ny, I must work be Subtraction, and so aba­ting [Page] 1728 out of 2538, there wil reste for the diuidend 810: then for the diuisor I subtract 18 out of 23 ½ and there remaineth 5 ½, by whiche I diuide 810, and the quotient will be 147 [...]/33 [...], which is the iust portion of him that had the least summe. And if I doe sub­tracte it out of 300 being the totall summe, then wil there remaine 152 9/1 [...], as the portion that the other did get.

Maister.

For the proofe of this worke, you may choose whether you will examine those numbers according to the forme of the que­stion, or else worke by other two positions for to finde the second number: and if those positions bring the same numbers that didde amount by the first two positions, then dothe eche worke confirme other.

Scholer.

By your patience, I will proue both wayes, not only to see their agréement, but also to accustome my mind to those wor­kes: for I perceiue it is exercise that must bée the chiefe engrauer of these rules in my me­morie.

Maister.

You consider it wel: then goe to.

Scholer.

Firste I will by two other po­sitions trie to finde the portion of him which [Page] had moste.

Maister.

Although you may doe it with a­ny positions, yet to sée the agréement of your work the better, take the same positions that you did before, comparing them nowe to the greater, as you did before vnto the lesser.

Scholer.

Then I suppose, that he that had moste, had 192, so had the other 108. Nowe if I take ¼ of 192, that wil be 144, and there will reste to that man but 48. And from the second which had 108, if I take ⅓, that is 36, there wil remaine to him 72: then ioyning 144 with 36, it will make 180, the halfe whereof being 90. If I adde to eche of those two mens portions remaining with them, the one shal haue 138, and the other 162, of which two I take the greater (that is 162) and sée it to be 18 too fewe, for it shoulde bée 180, that errour I note vnder his position. Then for the seconde position I take (as I did before) 204 for the one, and so resteth 96 for the other: then take I ¾ of [...]04 and it wil be 153, and there resteth to him 51. Also of the 96 I take ¼ that is 32, and there remay­neth to him 64. Now put I that 32 to 15 [...], and it yéeldeth 105: whiche being parted in equall valewes, maketh 92 ½. to be added to [Page] eche mans remainder, and so the one hathe 143 ½, and the other 156 ½: wherefore I take the greatest summe, and it is 23 ½ too lit­tle, that doe I note also, and sette both these errours vnder their positions, as in this ex­ample folowing doth appeare.

And then multiplying [...] 192 by 23 ½, there doth a­rise 4512.

Again, I multiply 204 by 18, & it maketh 3672, whiche I doe subtracte out of 4512, because the signes be like, & there resteth 840 for the diuidend: then subtracting 18 out of 23 ½, there will remaine 5 ½, which I must take for the Diuisor. And so diuiding 840 by 5 ½, the quotient wil be 152 8/11, whereby I haue found an agréeable summe to that whiche I found by the former positions, for hym that had moste, whiche if I doe subtracte out of 300, that is the totall, there wil rest 147 [...]/11, which was the portion of him that hadde the least parte.

Maister.

So by diuers positions you sée, that one doeth confirme the worke of the o­ther. Nowe examine those two numbers by the forme of the question, and so shall you [Page] proue your worke good also.

Scholer.

If that he whiche gate most, had 152 3/11, then muste he laye downe ¾ of hys summe, that is 114 6/11▪ and so shall remaine with him, but onely 38 2/11 The other which had leaste, that is 147 3/11. muste put downe of his sum ½. that is 49 1/11, and so doth there remaine with him yet 98 3/1 [...]. Then doe I adde togither 114 6/11 and 49 1/11, and it wil make 163 [...]/1 [...], whiche I muste part into two equall partes, and that will be 81 9/11 to bee giuen to eche of them: so putting 81 9/11 vnto 38 2/11, there doth amount 120 iuste, whyche is the true portion of him that shoulde haue the lesser summe: and adding 81 9/11 to 98 2/11, the totall will be 180. the true portion of the other. And so is the worke by this proofe al­so tried to be good. And this I marke by the way, that in their scambling, hée gate moste (as it chanceth often) that ought to haue had least by iust partition.

Maister.

Let your study be to learne truth and iuste arte of Proportion, and to distri­bute and parte according therevnto, as often as occasiō shal be ministred. And here would I make an ende of this rule, saue that I re­member [Page] one pleasant question whiche I can not ouerpasse, which I wil declare somwhat largely, because you shal as well vnderstand some reason in the pleasaunt inuention, as apte procéeding in the wittie working there­of.

Hiero King of the Syracusanes in Sicilia, An example of mixture of Gold and Siluer. hadde caused to bée made a Crowne of Golde of a wonderfull waight, to be offered for hys good successe in warres: in making whereof, the Goldsmith fraudulently tooke out a cer­taine portion of Golde, and putte in siluer for it, so that there was nothing abated of the full weight, although there was much of the valewe diminished. Which thing at length being vttered, (as no euill can alwayes lye hidde) the King was sore moued, and beyng desirous to trie the truth without breaking of the Crowne, proponed the doubt to Archi­mides, vnto whose wit nothing séemed vn­possible, whiche althoughe presentlye hee coulde not aunsweare vnto, yet hée had good hope to deuise some pollicie for that inuenti­on. And so musing thereon, as he chanced to enter into a baine full of water to washe him, he obserued that as his body entred into the baine, the water did runne ouer the tub: [Page] whereby his ready wit of suche small effectes coniecturing greater workes, conceyued by and by a reason of solution to the Kings que­stion, & therefore reioicing excéedingly more than if he had gotten the Crowne it selfe, for­gate that he was naked, and so ranne home, crying as he ran, [...], I haue founde, I haue founde. And there vppon caused twoo massie péeces, one of golde, and an other of siluer to be prepared of the same weight that the saide Crowne was of: and considering that golde is heauier of nature than siluer, and therfore golde of like waight with siluer, must néedes occupie lesse roume, by reason it is more compact & sound in substance, he was assured, that putting the masse of golde into a vessel brimme full of water, there would not so much water run ouer, as when he shoulde putte in the siluer masse of the like weight. Wherefore he tried both, & noted not onelye the quantities of the water at eche time, but also the difference or excesse of the one aboue the other, wherby he learned what proportiō in quantitie is betwéene gold and siluer of e­quall waight. And then putting the crown it self into the vessell of water brimme full (as before) marked how much water did run out [Page] then, & comparing it with the water that rā out when the gold was put in, noted howe much it did excéede that: & likewise compa­ring it to the water that rā out of the siluer, marked how much it was lesse than that: & by those proportions found out the iust quā ­titie of gold yt was taken out of the crown, & how much siluer was put in stéede of it. But séeing Vitruuius whiche writeth this histo­rie, doth not declare the particular worke of this trial, it shal be no inconuenience to sup­pose an example for declarations sake, wher­in although the true and iust proportions be not expressed, yet the forme of triall shall be truely set forth And for an example, I sup­pose the weighte of the Crowne to be 8 lb, and so of each of the other two Masses. And when the masse of Golde was put into the water, I imagine that there ran out 2 poūd of water: and when the masse of siluer was put in, I suppose there ran out 3. pound ½ A­gaine when the crowne was put in, there rā out 2 pound ¼ Now to know what quanti­tie of siluer was in the Crowne, worke by the rule of false position, and imagine that there was 2 pound of siluer: then must there be 6 pounde of Golde▪ Then say thus [Page] by the rule of Proportion: If 8 pound of gold doe expell 2 lb of water, what shal 6 lb. expell? and it wil be 1 pound ½. Againe for the siluer: If 8 lb of siluer expell [...] lb ½ of water, what shall 2 lb of siluer put out? it will be ⅞. Nowe adde those two weightes of water togither, and they will make 2 lb 3/ [...] and it shoulde be by the supposition 2 lb [...]/ [...], so is it too muche by ⅛

Sch▪

Nowe doe I vnderstande the worke as I thinke, therfore I pray you let me work the rest of the question. And bycause this first supposition did erre, I note that positiō, and his errour, and take a newe position, estée­ming the siluer to be but one pound, so muste there be in Golde 7 pounde, Then say I: If 8 lb of Gold yéeld 2 lb of water, what shall 7 lb yéelde? and it will be 1 lb. ¾. Againe if 8 lb, of siluer expel 3 lb. ½ of water what shall 1 lb ex­pell? and it wil be [...]/2 7/6. Nowe muste I adde those two sums togither, and they make 2 lb, [...]/16 and they sh [...]ulde make 2 lb ¼ so is it too lit­tle by 2/16 Therfore I set ye positiōs with their errours in order, as here [...] foloweth. And thē I mul­tiplie in crossewaies 2 by 6/11 and it maketh ⅛: like­wise 1 multiplied by ⅛: [Page] maketh 2/8. And because the signes be vnlike, I must adde those two summe, whiche make ¼ and that is the diuidend. Again I must adde ⅛ to 1/16, and it wil be [...]/ [...] ▪ that is the diuisour. Now I shall diuide 1/ [...] by [...]/ [...] and the quotient wil be [...]/ [...] that is, 1 ½, whereby I knowe that there was put 1 lb and 1/ [...] of siluer into the Crowne, and so muche Golde taken out for it.

M

Proue it now by examinatiō according to the question.

Scho.

If there were 1 pounde [...]/3 of Siluer then was there of Golde 6 pounde ⅔. Nowe say I by the rule of proporti­on: [...] if eighte pound of Golde expell two pounde of water, what shal 6 pound ⅔ expel?

[...] It wil be one pounde ⅔. Againe, if 8 lb of Syluer expell 3 lb ½ of water, what shal 1 ½ expel? It wil be [...]/1 7/2.

Now must I ad togither 1 lb ½. and [...]/1 7/2 and they wil make 2 lb, 9/ [...]6, that is 2 lb ¼, according to the supposition of the question, whereby I perceiue the worke to be wel done. And as I can not but muche reioyce of thys excel­lent [Page] inuentiō, so my desire is kindled vehe­mently to be perfectlye instructed in euerie part therof, and namelie in this point, whe­ther the portion betwéene water and golde be such, that for 8 lb of gold into a vessel full of water, there shall run out 2 lb of water: & for as much siluer, whether 3 lb ½ of water would auoide?

Ma.

I perceiue your meaning, and conie­cture your imagination to be thus: that if you knewe the exacte proportion betwéene Gold and Siluer and Water both in theyr waight and quantities, then coulde you ea­silie finde out the mixtures of them, whiche thing I haue reserued for an other worke that intreateth such matters speciallie. And at this time you muste consider, that you learne Arithmetike, which intreateth of the maner to solue doubtful questions touching number, without regarde what matter is signifyed by that number, else were it ne­cessarie in Arithmetike to teach all arts, sée­ing in it may be moued questions of al arts. But seeing you are so desirous to know this thing, I wil tell it you in suche a sorte, that you shall practise your arte in finding it, and propounde it in forme of a question. Gold [Page] beareth greater proportion to water than sil­uer doth, and their two proportiōs be in pro­portion togither as 4 [...]/25. But to help you some­what in this riddle, you shall note that the proportion of quicke siluer vnto water, is the iust middle number proportionall in Pro­gression Geometricall, betweene the propor­tions of Gold and siluer vnto water. And his proportion is as 29 [...]/ [...]1. Now if you wil know the iust numbers of these 3 proportions then must you finde out 3 numbers in Progressi­on geometrical, wherof the middlemost must be 290/21, and the first must be vnto the last, as 25 to 48. And thus I will leaue you to finde those numbers when you be at leasure.

Scholer.

Yet sir I thanke you heartilie for this muche, for nowe I sée the possibilitie to finde them out. Howbeit, bycause this questi­on séemeth straunge, if it might please you to instructe me somewhat in the order of wor­king for it, I should the more easilie finde the true working.

M.

You desire too much ease if you wil stu­die for nothing: therefore to occasion you to studie ye better, I will leaue this doubt wholy to your own search. But as touching the ge­neraltie of the rule, Archimedes néeded not [Page] to take two masses of golde and siluer equall in waight with the crowne, for the proporti­on might as wel be foūd in any other waight yea althoughe the masse of golde were of one waight and the masse of siluer of another. As for example. If the crowne were of 8 pounde waighte, as I did suppose, and I haue not so muche other fine golde, but onely 1 lb, and trying that by water, & finding that it doth expell but [...]/4 of an ounce of water, yet then by it may I inferre, that 8 pound of gold would expell 6 ounces of water And likewise of the siluer: wherof if I had but 2 pound, and finde that it doth expel thrée ounces of water, then might I affirme that 8 pound woulde expell 12 ounces, that is 1 lb waight. And so is it, as good as if the 3 masses were al of one weight. And thus for this time I wil make an end of this other part of Arithmetike.

Sc.

Although I can not sufficientlie thanke you for this, yet your promise made me to loke for the art of extraction of rootes, wherof hitherto I haue learned nothing.

Maister.

I wil not breake my promise, but intend (God willing) to performe it within these thrée or foure monethes, if I perceyue this my paines to be well taken in the mean [Page] season. And you shall not repent the tarrying for it: for it shal be increased by the tarrying. And in the meane time, you shall take thys Addition, not for the second part of Arithme­tike which I promised, but for an augmenta­tion of the firste parte, vnto which I woulde haue annexed the extraction of Rootes square and cubike, namely for examples of the Sta­tute of Assise of wood, but that in the seconde parte I muste write of diuers other rootes, and thought it beste to reserue those rules al­so with their examples vnto the same seconde parte.

Scholer.

Sir, althoughe I can not recom­pence your goodnesse, yet I shall alwayes do mine endeuour to occasion you not to repent your benefite on me thus employed.

Maister.

That recompence is sufficient for your parte.

FINIS.

The thirde parte or Addition to this Booke en­treateth of briefe rules, called rules of Practize of Rare, Pleasant and com­modious effect, abridged into a brieffer Method than hitherto hath bene published:

VVith diuers other neces­sarie Rules, Tables, and Questi­ons not only profitable for Mer­chants, but also for Gentlemen, and all other occupiers whatsoeuer, as by the Contents of this Booke may ap­peare.

Set foorth by Iohn Mellis Scholemaister.

The firste Chapter of this Addition entreateth of briefe Rules, called Rules of Practize, with diuerse necessarie questions pro­fitable, not onlie for Merchaunts, but also for all other occu­piers whatsoeuer.

THe working of Mul­tiplicatiō in Practize, is no other thing, than a certaine manner of multiplying of one kind by another: wher­vpon is brougt foorth the product of the pro­poned number whych is accomplished by the meanes of Diuision in taking the halfe, the third, the fourth, the fifte, or such other parts of the summe whiche is to be multiplyed.

And for the better vnderstanding of suche conuersions: you shall vnderstand that in the manner and vse of these Rules of Practize, you oughte first to knowe the euen or aliquot parts of a shilling, whiche in this Table fol­lowing doth appeare.

[Page]Item d

  • 6 is the ½ of a s.
  • 4 is the ⅓ of a s.
  • 3 is the ¼ of a s.
  • 2 is the [...]/ [...] of a s.
  • 1 is the [...]/12 of a s.

Wherin as you sée according to the order of these rules of Practise at 6 d ye yeard of a­ny thing, you must take the [...]/2 of your number whiche is to be multiplied, and the product, that commeth thereof shal be shillings, if any vnitie do remaine it is 6 d.

For 4 d take the ½ of the number that is to be multiplied and the product also produ­ceth shillings if anye vnities doe remaine, ech one shal be worth in valew 4 pence. The like is to be vnderstoode of the other 3 &c.

Example I.

At 6 d the yearde what 379 yeardes [...]

II.

At 4 d the yearde: what are 104 yeardes worth [...]

[Page] III.

At 3 pence the yearde [...]:

IIII.

At 2 pence the yearde [...]

V.

At 1 pennie the yearde [...]

Here you may sée in the first example ye 379 yeards at 6 d the yeard, are worth 189 s 6 d in taking the ½ of 379. And in the seconde ex­ample the 104 yeardes at 4 d the yeard: are worth 34 shillings 8 d: in taking ye ⅓ of 104.

Likewise in the third example 5014 yeards at thrée pence the yearde bringeth forth 1253 s 6 d in taking the ¼ of 5014. Also in ye fourth example at 2 pence the yearde, maketh 88 shillings 8 d.

And lastly in the fifth example: 409 yeards [Page] at 1 d the yeard, amounteth to 34 s and 1 d, in taking the 1/12 of 409: And so is to be done of all other questions the like, when the num­ber of the pence is anye of the euen or aliquot parts of 12 d.

Item to bring the productes of these shil­lings and all other the like in poundes is ve­rie easie in diuiding of it into your minde by 20, for it is to be vnderstoode that as often as 20 is found in that product: So many pounds doth it containe, whiche with facilitie to per­forme, alwaies strike of the figure to­warde your right hande, with a right downe dashe of your penne for the 0 that appertay­to 20: And then beginne at the lefte hand, in taking the ½ of the rest. And if at the laste any vnitie do remaine, the same shall be ioyned with the figure that is cut of, which shall re­present the odde shillings contained in that worke.

As for example in your third question at 3 d the yearde whiche amounteth to 1253 s. 6 d: the producte whereof maketh [...] 62 lb 13 s 6 d: as here you maye sée is easily performed in the mer­gent.

[Page]Item also for the working of 1 pennie the yearde, it is something harshe and harde to take the 1/12; part of some products: Therefore to ease that hard worke you shall first bryng your deliuered summe into groats, by taking the ¼ part of the product. And if any vnites re­maine of that ¼ part, as somtimes there may they are pence: and must be signifyed wyth a line from the groates with theyr title of pence: And because that 60 groates ma­keth a pounde or twentie shillings, strike of the firste figure towarde your righte hande for the 0 that apperteyneth to 60 (as you did euen nowe for the 0 that belongeth to 20:) then in taking the ⅙ of that product, if there do remaine any vnities the same shal you ioyne with the figure that you cut of, estéeming thē as groates: whiche kéepe in your mind. And by taking the ½ part of them, you shall turne into shillings: And so haue you done as for ex­ample by a question or 2 hereafter proponed shal more plainly by the worke appeare.

At 1 d the yearde [...]

[Page]Here in taking the ⅙ part of 1359: in com­ming to the last work the ⅙ part of 39 being taken, the remainer is 3 whiche ioined with the 2 that was cutte off, maketh 32 groates: which conuerted into shillings by taking the ⅓ part: maketh as appeareth 10 s 8 d: Many other wayes there are, but none more apter for a yong learner to vnderstande than this: wherfore this one way wel impressed in me­morie is better thā 20 waies doubtfully vn­derstoode.

At 1 d the yeard, what 4533 yeards [...]

At 1 d the yeard what 64768 yeardes [...]

Nowe followeth also to be vnderstood yt if the number of pence be not an aliquot part of 12,2. Rule. you must reduce them into some aliquot part of 12. And after the aforesaid maner, you shall make of them 2 or 3 products as néede shal require: And adde them togither into one sum: And here for thy furtherance appeareth a note of the order of their partes, as they are to be taken.

[Page]For pence

  • 5. take. 3 & 2 or 4 and 1
  • 7. take. 4 & 3 or 6 and 1
  • 8. take. 4 & 4 or 6 and 2
  • 9. take. 6 & 3 or 4.4 & 1
  • 10 take. 6 & 4 or 4.4 & 2
  • 11 take. 6▪ 4 & 1 or 4.4 & 3

Here in the firste note of this table at 5 d, you shall first take for 3 d the ¼ of the num­ber that is to be multiplied: And likewise for 2 d: the ⅙ of the same number, adding togi­ther both the products. But if you wil worke by 4 and 1 you must for 4 d firste take the ⅓ of the number that is to be multiplied: And for 1 d take the 1/12 of the whole summe or ra­ther, which is more better for 1 d. you maye take the ¼ of the producte whiche did come of ye 4 d: Bicause ye 1 d is ye ¼ of 4 d: The total sums of these two nūbers shall be the soluti­on to the question. And in like maner is to be done of all others: As by these examples fol­lowing shal appeare.

[Page] I.

At 5 pence the yearde What will —758 yeards amount to [...]

Otherwise.

At 5 d ye yard what are 758 yeardes worth [...]

II.

At 7 d the ell what 562 elles [...]

III.

At 8 d the lb what 112 pounds [...]

[Page] Otherwise.

What coms — 112 pound at 8 d the pound [...]

IIII.

At 9 d the Ell What coms — 356 elles to [...]

V.

At 10 d the péece What coms — 795 péeces to [...]

[Page] VI.

At 11 d the pound What — 757 [...] pound [...] maketh [...]

Here in this first exāple where it is demā ­maunded (at 5 d the yeard) what will 758 cost: First for 3 d I take the ¼ of 758: And thereof commeth 18 [...] s — 6 d: Then for 2 d I take the ⅙ of the same product whi­che amounteth to 126 s 4 d: these two sum­mes added togither do make 315 s 10 d: And so much are the 758 yards worth at 5 d the yard.

Item also for the same again: First for 4 d I take the ½ of 758: and thereof commeth 252 s —8 d: then for 1 penny I take the ¼ of the same product, that is to say of 252 s — 8 d, and it yéeldeth me 63 s 2 d: whiche both added togither make 315 s — 10 d, as before.

Item, for 7 d there is take then ½ and the 1/ [...] of the whole summe: which is to be multi­plyed, [Page] and adde them togither, that is to say, first, for 4 d there is taken the ⅓ of 563: whi­che coms to 187 s -8 d as appeareth by the worke: and for 3 d there is taken the 1/ [...] of the whole sum which amounteth to 140 s -9 d. Both which products added togither maketh 328 s—5 d: And so much coms 563 elles to at 7 d the Ell.

Item, for the first 8 d there is taken for 4 d the ⅛ of the whole summe: and an other ⅓ for the other 4 d, which added togither as in the example doth euidently appeare, amoū ­teth to 74 s — 8 d.

Againe, for the second work of 112 lb, there is taken first the ½ of the whole summe for 6 d, whiche coms to 56 s: then for the 2 d you haue to take ⅙ of the whole summe, or if you will the ½ part of the product that came of 6 d either which maketh 18 s 8 d. These two sommes being added togither doe make 74 s 8 d: as in the third example appeareth.

Item, for 9 d there is taken for 6 d, the ½ of the whole summe: and the ¼ of the whole summe for 3 d, or otherwise for the 3 d you may take the [...]/2 of ye product that came of 6 d, bicause 3 d is the ½ of 6 d: which added togi­ther as plainly appéereth in the fourth exam­ple, [Page] amounteth to 267 s—0 d.

Item, for 10 d, first there is takē for 6 d the ½ of the whole summe, which amounteth to 397 s—6 d. Then for 4 d there is foūd 265 s: bothe whiche added togither maketh 662 s—6 d as appeareth in the fift exam­ple: it may also be wrought, as appeareth by the second note in the table by 4 d twice ta­ken, and the ½ of the product of 4 d: or els by the ⅙ of the whole summe, &c.

Item, for 11 d, there is first taken the ½ for 6 d: then the ⅓ of the whole summe for 4 d: lastly, the ¼ of the last producte for 1 d: All which 3 summes added togither maketh in s 6947-5 d, & in pounds 347-7 s—5 d.

Item, likewise by the same reason,3. Rule▪ when you will multiply (by shillings) any number that is vnder 20 s you shal haue in the pro­duct pounds, if you know the euen or aliquot partes of 20, which are here in this little ta­ble set downe to sight.

Item s

  • 10 is the 1/ [...] of one lb
  • 5 is the 1/ [...] of one lb
  • 4 is the [...]1/5 of one lb
  • 2 is the 1/10 of one lb
  • 1 is the [...]/20 of one lb

[Page]So that for 10 s which is the ½ of a poūd you may take the ½ of the number whiche is to be multiplyed: and you shal haue in your product pounds: if a vnitie do remaine, it shal be worth 10 s.

Likewise for 5 s you must take the ¼ of the number whiche is to be multiplyed: And if there doe remaine any Vnities, they shall be fourth partes of a pound, euery Vnitie being in valewe 5 s.

For 4 s take the ⅕ of the number which is to be multiplied: And if there doe remaine anye Vnities, they shall be fifte partes of a pound, eche vnitie being worth 4 s.

For 2 s you must take the 1/10 of the num­ber to be multiplied: wherefore to take the 1/10 of any number: you must cut off the laste figure of the same number (whiche is nearest your right hand) from all the other figures with a small right downe line or dash with a pen, and so haue you done: for all the other figures which do remaine toward your lefte hand from the same figure that you doe sepa­rate shal be the saide 1/10 of a pound: And that figure so separated towards your right hand shall be so manye péeces of 2 s the péece: the whiche figure you muste double to make [Page] therof the true number of s, as by the exam­ple shall appeare.

Finally, for 1 s, néedeth smal worke, for it is so many shillings as be proponed in the summe, whiche to bring into poundes hathe bene already taught in the firste Rule.

Example.

At 10 s the péece [...]

At 5 s the Ell [...]

At 4 s the yarde [...]

At 2 s the pound waight [...]

At 1 s the péece [...]

[Page] 4. Rule.Nextly, nowe followeth in order to bée vnderstoode, that if the number of shillings be not some euen, or aliquot parte of 20, you must then conuerte the same number of shil­lings into the aliquot parts of 20: And ther­of make two or thrée products, as néede shall require: which done, adde them togither, and bring them into poundes. And here for thy furtherance I haue set down a note of the or­der of their parts, as they are to be taken.

s    s  
3of2 & 1or 13of10.2 & 1
64 & 25. & 11410. & 4
75 & 2 1510. & 5
84 & 45.2.11610.5.1
95 & 44.4.11710.5.2
1110 & 1 1810.4.4
1210 & 2 1910.5.4

For 3 s according to the tenor that you sée is expressed in the Table, you muste firste take for 2 s the 1/1 [...] of the number that is to be multiplied: Then for 1 s you muste take the ½ of the product which didde come of the same 1/20 parte, and adde those two sums ad­ded [Page] ther, produceth the effecte desired.

Item, for 6 s according to the note set forth in the table, first for 4 s I take the ⅕ of the number that is to be multiplied: Then for 2 s the ½ of the product that came of 4 s, and adde them togither.

Or else, as appeareth also in the table, for 5 s you may take the ¼ and the 2/ [...] parte of the product that came of 5 s, and adde them togi­ther.

Item, for 7 s, firste take for 5 s the 1/ [...] of the producte, that is to be multiplied, then for 2 s, take the 1/ [...] of the number that is to be multiplied, and adde them togither, &c.

Item, for 8 s, according to reason, and the intent of the Table, for the firste 4 s take the ⅕ of the product, and the same number a­gaine for the other 4 s: and adde them togi­ther.

Item, for 9 s: firste for 5 s take the 1/ [...]: then for 4 s take the ⅕: and adde them togi­ther.

Otherwise as you sée by the intente of the table, work twice for 4 s, as was taught euē now for 8: and then take the ¼ of the last pro­duct [Page] for the 1 s: But 5 and 4 is the shorter.

Itē, for 11 s: first dispatch 10 s: for which you must take the ½ of the product: then last­ly for 1 s take the 1/10 parte of the summe pro­duced of the ½ of the product and adde them togither.

Item, for 12 s where I will end wyth the firste part of my Table: First take the ½ for 10 s: And then for 2 s take the ⅕ of the sum that came of 10 s, and adde them togither: or else, if you please for 2 s you may take the ½ of the whole giuen number.

To write more of the maner of taking the true parts, I thinke superfluous. The desi­rous practitioner will (no doubt) conceiue it. Also the Table is some aide to helpe the vn­perfect: wherevpon by & by I will set downe thrée or foure of these notes in examples: and the rest I wil leaue to thine own industrie & practise to labour vpon.

This is the order most commonly vsed in Practise when the number of the s is not an aliquot part of a pound. But louing Reader) after I haue touched the euē or aliquot parts of a lb that falleth out in d and s, I will deli­uer 2 new Rules that shal drowne this com­mon order quite and cleane: wherein shal be [Page] comprehended in one line, or working bothe euen and odde part of s vnder [...]0: without regard whether it be an aliquot or not an ali­quot parte: which 2 Rules, when they come in place, I committe to thy friendly iudge­ment in working: Nowe followeth the ex­amples vpon the notes before saide.

At 6 s the yard [...]

Otherwise by multiplication of 6: [...]

At 7 s the Ell [...]

Otherwise by multiplication of 7: [...]

[Page]At 8 s ye péece what 7563 péeces [...]

Otherwise by Multiplication.

[...]

At 13 s yt péece what 401 péeces [...]

Otherwise by Multiplication.

[...]

[Page]These & such like questions of Compound numbers, which I haue here in this fourth rule for orders sake set down, I count but as superfluous. For, in the seconde parte of my new promised Rules shall appeare, that the giuen price of any odde nūber of Shillings, either vnder or aboue 20: shall bee wrought at two wor-kings at the moste howe diffi­cult so euer the question be.

Item, there resteth yet a kind of Practize, howe to bring pence into poundes at the first working: wherevpon you must vnderstand, that 240 pence maketh one pound, or 20 s, I cutte off the laste figure or 0: and there re­maineth but 24 (of whiche 24) 8 d is the ⅓ parte thereof: 6 d is the ¼ parte, 4 d the ⅙ parte: and 2 d is the 1/12 parte thereof.

Wherevpon if it were demaunded what 1486 yeardes or poundes of any thing com­meth to: at 8 d the yeard, in pricking or cut­ting off the firste figure towardes your right hande: for the 0 that appertaineth to 240: There is remaining of the saide summe 148: whereout I take the ⅓ parte: and it cōmeth to 49 lb: and there resteth one: which 1 I putte to the 6: that I pricke or cutte off, and it maketh 16 péeces of 8 pence, whiche I [Page] double to make into groates and they make 32. whereof the [...] part maketh 10 s and ther remaineth [...] s: which is 8 pence, whereby it followeth, that the 1486 yeardes at 8 pence the yeard, maketh 49 lb 10 s 8 d: as by the example shall appeare.

Item for [...] pence, take the 1/ [...] parte of the number from the prickt figure: And if any v­nities do remaine, they are so many sixepen­ces, whereof taking the 1/ [...], they are shillings, if there do remaine yet one, it is in valewe 6 pence.

Item for 4 pence, take the ⅙ parte of the number from the prickte figure: If any vni­ties remaine, they are so many groates, whi­che to conuert into shillings, take the ⅓ part: And if any thing yet remaine, they are thirds of shillings, echcone in valewe being worth 4 pence.

Item, for 3 pence, take the [...] parte from the prickt figure, if any vnities remayne, they are so many péeces of [...] pence wherof in taking the 1/ [...] part, maketh shillings: If anye thing yet remaine, they are fourth partes of shillings, echone being in valewe 3 pence.

Item, for 3 pence, as appeareth also by the table, take the 1/12 parte of the number from [Page] the prickt figure: If any thing remaine, they are so many peeces of 2 pence: whiche by ta­king the ⅛ parte, you shall turne into shil­lings: and if any vnities remaine, they are so many sixte parte of shillings, or péeces of 2 pence, whether you will.

If one pound cost — 8 d [...]

If one cost 6 d [...]

If one yeard cost 4 d [...]

At 3 d the yeard [...]

[Page]At 2 d the ell what 7894 [...]

6. Rule.But if your number of pence be not an ali­quot or euen part of 24: then must you bring them into the aliquot partes of 24, and make thereof diuers products, which must be added togither, as by the questions hereafter follo­wing shall appeare.

Item, for 5 d, first take for 3 d, then for 2 d: and adde them togither according to the instruction of the second Rule: Or else firste take for 4 d, then for 1 d.

Item for 7 d, first take for 4 d: then for 3 d and adde them togither.

Item, for 9, first take for 6 d: then for 3 d, and adde them togither.

Item, for 10 d, firste take for 6 d: then for 4 d, and adde them togither.

Item for 11 d firste take for 8 d then for 3 d and adde them togither: as by these ex­amples folowing doth appeare.

[Page] Examples.

If one yearde cost 5 d what 7596 [...]

Otherwise.

[...]

If one cost 7 pence what 987 [...]

Otherwise.

[...]

[Page]If one cost 9 pence what 987 [...]

Otherwise.

[...]

If one yearde cost 10 d what 987 [...]

If one cost 11 pence what 987 [...]

But if you haue any shillings, & pence to be multiplied togither: Then are you to take for the shillings according to the enstruction of the third Rule: And for the pēce according to the first Rule before mentioned: vnlesse [Page] you can spie the aduauntage therof: and ther­by helpe your selfe: as appeareth in this se­conde example, where first I worke for 6 d: which is to be rebated out of the giuen num­ber, and I haue 719 lb 11 s my desire.

At 10 s 6 d: the yearde What 738 yeardes [...]

The like againe is done by rebating as by these 2 examples appeareth:

Item, 418 elles at 18 s [...]

Item 517. at 16 s [...]

[Page] 7. RulesAnd now I wil touch a little the euen parts of a pound that falleth out in pence and shil­lings, wherof for those partes you shall take such like part of the giuen number that is to be multiplied, as the price of that giuen nū ­ber beareth in proportion to a pound whiche also for thy better aide is here set down.

  • 1 s. 8 d is the 1/12 of the lb.
  • 2. 6 is the ⅛ of a lb.
  • 3. 4 is the ⅙ of a lb.
  • 6. 8 is the ⅓ of a lb.

Item first for 1 s 8 d take the 1/12 parte of the giuen number & if any thing do remaine, they are twelue parts of a pounde, eache one being in value 1 s 8 d.

Item for 2 s 6 d take the ⅛ part of the nū ­ber that is to be multiplied. And if any thing do remaine they are eight parts of a pounde each one being in value 2 s 6 d.

Item for 3 s 4 d as appeareth by the ta­ble, you must take the ⅙ part of the giuen nū ­ber. And if anye thing do remaine they are 6 parts of a lb: each one being in value 3 s 4 d.

[Page]Item for 6 s 8 pence take the ⅓ part of the number that is to be multiplied: And if anye vnities do remaine, they are thirds of a pound euerie one being worth 6 s 8 pence.

Other infinite numbers there are, that may be reduced by abbreuiation into the proporti­onate parts of a pounde: as 16 s 8 pence ma­keth ⅙: whiche 16 s 8 d is easilie reduced into groates by multiplying 16 by 3: & ther­to adde 2: which maketh 50 groates: Then set 60 the groates of a pounde vnder 50, cut­ting of the 2 Ciphers, as is here [...] performed in the margent. And then haue you broughte 16 s 8 pence into the knowen partes of a lb which maketh ⅚.

But yet gentle Reader, for thy further enstruction, I haue herevnto annexed in a table, howe pence and shillings beareth pro­portion to a lb: which I cōmitte to thy friend­lie beneuolence, it will be some aide vnto the vngrounded practitioner: but I counte him the best workeman that can presentlie reduce his giuen price vnto the knowen and proportionate parts of a lb.

[Page]

sdlb
021/120
031/80
041/60
061/40
081/ [...]0
101/20
131/16
181/12
201/10
26
303/20
34
392/ [...]6
40
5 ¼
6 1/10
6320/16
68
7 7/20
76
8 
845/12
897/16
9 9/20
10 ½
11 11/2 [...]
1137/16
1187/12
12 
13 1 [...]/2 [...]
134
1391/1
14 7/1
15 ¾
16 4/5
168
17  [...]7/2 [...]
176
18 9/10
18411/12
18915/16
191919/20

Here followeth 4 examples vpon the 4 notes deliuered.

[Page]At 1 s 8 pence the yearde What 3884 yeardes [...]

At 2 s 6 pence the yearde What 4562 yeardes [...]

At 3 s 4 pence the yearde What 583 [...] yeardes [...]

At 6 s 8 pence the yearde What 7562 yeardes [...]

Nowe by custome you are able to worke by all sortes of summmes, being deliuered in shillings & pence, as 1 s 1 pennie: [...] s [...] pence 3 s 3 pence, and so of all other: wishing you to haue some considerations of your questi­ons, when they are set downe, for there are many subtill abbreuiations, and great aduā ­tages to be gotten, and easilie to be perceiued

  • As [...] s. 8 d of 2 s & 1 lb 8 d.
  • 4 s [...] d: of [...] s 4 d: and 10 d whiche 10: is [...]/4 of 3 s 4 d
  • 5 s 8 d. of 4 s: and 1 s. 8 d.
  • 5 s. 10 d, of 5 s and 10 d: whiche 10 d is ⅙ of 5 s·

[Page]And by this meane when you haue taken one product, you maye oftentimes vppon the same take an other more briefelie then vpon the sum which is to be multiplied &c.

8. Rule.Nowe gentle Reader that you haue séene the vertue of the euen or aliquot partes of a lb: in shillings alone, And also in the aliquot parts of shillings and pence: according to my promise hereafter followeth a briefer and ea­sier method for any euen number of shillings either vnder or aboue 20, then euer yet hath bene published: Notwithstanding Maister Humfrey Baker, whose trauel is worthie cō ­mendation, And whom for knowledge sake I reuerence hath in some part touched thys first parte: though not in this method: The worke of the Rule is both pleasante, readie and briefe. As by the varietie of the exam­ples deliuered therevpon shall appeare. And first I wil set forth a question: Thereby the better to expresse or teach you the order ther­of: which is this.

If one yearde cost 6 s what 8574 [...]

[Page]To the vnderstanding of this exāple, after you haue set down your giuen nūber in form of the rule of 3, with a line drawen vnder it: you shal presētly set a prick vnder your first fi­gure 4, towards your right hād, drawing frō the pricke as heretofore hath bene practised, a little short line, thereto sette downe the shil­lings anone, which done, multiplie the first fi­gure 4 by 6. the value of your price, (whyche here you sée standeth in sight aboue the line.) it maketh 24: which is 1 lb 4 s. The 1 lb kéep to carrie to the next place, & the 4 s set downe at the end of the prescribed line towards your right hande: Thus haue you done nowe with 6 aboue the line, and also with 4 in the firste place (for the pricke vnder the 4. doeth repre­sent that 4 hath done his office.) Then secō ­darily for a general rule take but the ½ of the giuen price whiche here is [...], which 3,Note. A general rule. is the number that shal now continue the reste of ye multiplication and end the worke, whervpon I multiply 3 into 7 standing in the seconde place it maketh 21, and with the 1 lb I kept in minde 22, set downe 2 & kéepe 3 in minde working according to the rule of multiplica­tion, deliuering the tens in mind in their due place, which done, the product from the pricke [Page] to your left hand representeth the pounds and the other at the ende of the line the shillings: as appeareth by the examples.

If one yearde cost 2 s what 7536 [...]

If one yearde cost 4 s what 8792 [...]

If one péece cost 6 s what 9537 [...]

If one cost 8 s what 7509 [...]

If one cost 12 what 5794 [...]

If one cost 14 s what 3705 [...]

If one cost 18 s what 5703 [...]

[Page]If one cost 22 s what 953 [...]

Let these suffise gentle reader for an en­treance into euen numbers: And now I wyll shew the like rule for any od or vneuen parts of a pound.

To help you to the vnderstanding of these other questions yt hereafter followeth: where in my first example the giuen nūber is 6487.9 Rule. At 3 s the yeard: I multiply 3 aboue the line into 7. it maketh 21: The 1 shilling I set down & the 1 lb I kéepe: Nowe am I to take the ½ of 3: which because it is an odde number I cannot. Therefore I shal kéepe and conti­nue my multiplication by 3 stil: And worke by the ½ of the rest of the giuen figures or nū ­bers: To wit 648: And first the ½ of 8 whiche is 4 multiplied into [...] maketh 12 therto ioine ye 1 lb in minde, it maketh 1 [...]: set down [...] kepe one. Then againe multiply by 2 the ½ of 4 it maketh 6, and with 1 in minde it maketh 7. Then lastly take the ½ of 6 which is 3, saying 3 times 3, is 9: whiche 9 set downe and so is the question aunswered as appeareth by the practise, and the examples following.

[Page]At 3 s the yearde what 6487 [...]

If one yearde cost 5 s what 4769 [...]

At 7 s the elle what 6489 [...]

If one elle cost 9 s what 2807 [...]

At 11 s the pistolet what 8263 [...]

If one piece cost 13 s what 4629 [...]

But nowe note gentle Reader, when the giuen price falleth vppon anye odde number. As 3.5.7.9.11.13. &c: Then it is to be pre­supposed, that the giuen summe to be multi­plied muste be a summe made of euen num­bers, as 2.4.6.8.0 &c. else can not that questi­on be wrought at one line or working.

[Page]Prouiding alwayes that it maye beare an odde figure in the firste place towardes your righte hand: as appeareth in these 6 Exam­ples which last were wrought, and such like &c. which may beare an odde number for the price, and be done at one line or working ve­ry wel.

But if the giuen price be an odde number, and the summe to be multiplyed odde num­bers also: Thē can it not be done at one wor­king, but requireth the aide of 2 workings: for odde with odde will not agrée, which not­withstanding to bring to passe. Take this for a general rule: First work for the euen num­ber, contained in that question, or giuen price, according as you haue learned, And thē afterwards for the one odde shilling,A general rule. take the ½ of the summe giuen to be multiplied, o­mitting the first prickt place, As was taught for ye working of one shilling in my first rule of practise, And adde those two togither. And you shal haue your desire.

Example.

At 3 s the yearde what 7539 [...]

[Page]At 7 s the ell what 7539 [...]

At 13 s the yearde what 7534 [...]

And thus haue I abbridged into these two Rules how to bring any number of s: what­soeuer they be into pounds, wt a brieffer me­thod, then euer yet hath bene published, whi­che I commende vnto thy friendlye censure and iudgements in the vse of practise there­of.

If one cost 6 s 5 d what 1231 [...]

[Page]At 14 s 2, d what 2825 [...]

At 16 s 4 d what 2531 [...]

At 3 s the Pistolet what 8325 [...]

At 7 s the crowne what 6529 [...]

At 9 s the péece what 6567 [...]

These thrée last questions may séeme some thing harde, yet are they easie ynough, if you marke them well, if I should explaine them, then are they too easie: therfore I leaue them to whet the minds of the desirous.

[Page] [...]0. Rule.Item, when any one of the summes whi­che is to be multiplied, is composed of manye Denominations: and the giuen number but of one figure alone: Then shall you multi­plye all the denominations of the other sum, by the same one figure, beginning first with that summe which is least in valew towards your right hande, and bring the producte of those d into s, and the producte of the s into lb ▪ as by this example doth appeare.

[...]

11. Rule.But if in any of the summes that are to be multiplied ther be a broken number: First worke for the whole according to the instru­ctions that you haue learned: and then take suche part of the giuen price: as that broken number beareth in proportion to the price, as in the example: after you haue wrought, for 3 s and for 6 d: then are you to take the [...]/ [...] of 36 d for the ½ yeard: and adde that to the summe: So adding all 3 productes togither which maketh 43 lb — 2 s — 11 d the iuste price of 246 ½ Els: and thus muste you do of all other.

[Page]At 3 s 6 d the Ell what 246 ½ [...]

At 16 s 4 d the péece What [...]

If one péece coste [...] What [...]

[Page] The Proofe.

If 12 peces cost 50 lb· 2 s· 6 d what one pece [...]

12. Rule.Item, touching the manner howe to vn­derstande the order of this proofe, and others the like: first seeke howe many times 12 is contained in 50: maketh 4: resteth 2 lb whi­che conuerted into shillings, and ioined with the other 2 s, maketh 42 s: wherein is foūd 12 thrée times: resteth 6 s which turned in­to pence, putting thereto the 6 d in the firste place, it maketh 76: wherein 12 is founde 6 times, resteth 6 d, which containeth 12 but ½ a time, put that ½ to the 6 d: And then the solution is 4 lb — 3 s —6 ½ as appeareth by the practise thereof.

13. Rule.Item, the like is to be done of any thing that is bought or solde after 5 score to the hundreth, or the Quintall: As for exam­ple.

[Page]If 100 lb cost 27 lb — 13 s — 4 d What one pound.

[...]

I haue wrought this at lēgth for ye aide of ye yōg learner, bicause he should vnderstād how al ye Mul­tiplication is set downe.

[...]

But to works it more neatly, it is by a little vn­derstanding en­ded thus.

Item to the vnderstanding of this and suche like questions, the right downe line is all the guide, which is pulled down close by 20, as you sée in the example, where 27 lb — 13 s is reduced all into s: maketh 552.

The 5 towards your lefte hād being sepa­ted [Page] with the hanging or right downe line, is the iust number of shillings: that aunswea­reth to the question: Nextly, 53 s is multipli­ed by 12 to reduce them to pence, putting to the 4 d: it yéeldeth for the multiplication of the first figure two: 1 10: the one beyond the line towards the left hande: is 1 penny to­wardes the reste of the price: then 53 also multiplied by 1 yéeldeth 53: but the 5 be­hinde the line towards the left hande, is also 5 d more, towards the price, which 1 and 5: I adde togither vnder the line: it maketh 6 d: So is there found nowe as appeareth by the Titles of s and d: 5 s 6 d.

Finally, I come nowe on this side the line, towards the right hand: and vnder 12: I find first 10: and then 3: whiche added to­gither maketh 40: vnder whiche 40, you muste putte the 100: and it maketh— 40/1 [...]0 which abbreuiated commeth to ⅖: So the iuste price of one pounde after 5 score to the hundreth, maketh — 5 s — 6 ⅖ d.

One example more, and so will I leaue this rule.

[Page]If 100 cost 10 ¾ d What [...]

Also the like maye be done of our vsuall waightes here in England (whiche is 112 lb for euery hūdreth waight) in case you know the Aliquot parts of a hundreth waight, whi­che are these, 56 lb, 28 lb, 14 lb, and 7 lb: For 56 lb is the ½ of 112 lb, 28 lb is the ¼ of 112 lb, 14 lb is the ⅛, and 7 lb is the 1/16.

Therfore for 56 lb, take the ½ of the summe of mony that 112 lb waight is worth.

For 28 lb take the ¼ of the summe of mo­ney that 112 lb waight is worth.

[Page]For 14 lb, take the ⅛ of the summe that 112 lb is worth.

And for 7 lb, the 1/16 of the summe of mo­ney that C. is worth.

As for example: at 17 lb — 19 s the hun­dreth poundes waight, that is to saye, the 112 lb, what shall thrée quarterus and 7 lb coste?

[...]

The second Chapiter entreateth of the Re­duction of diuers measures to others valewe by Rules of Practise.

13. Rule.NOW will I shewe a fewe examples of Practise in reducing of measures: as Elles Yeardes, Braces, pawnes of Iea­nes &c. Muche more I woulde haue touched but that I feare the booke wil rise to too great a volume.

[Page]In 864 elles of Antwerpe, howe ma­ny yeardes of London?

[...]

Item, in these and such like questions of Flemmish measure to be brought into yards Englishe: firste take the ½ of the giuen num­ber, as appeareth in the first exāple towards your lefte hand: Then take the ½ of that pro­duct: or the ¼ of the giuen number: and adde those 2 products togither, they shal be yeards Englishe, as by the example you maye per­ceiue.

The second example towards your right hand is yet briefer than the first, whose work is this: take the ¼ of the deliuered number, and that product, subtray out of the gyuen number: and the rest sheweth your desire: of these two wayes vse whiche you thinke best.

[Page] The Proofe.

In 648 yeards of London, how many Elles of Antwerpe [...]

Item for the vnderstanding of this work: first take the ⅓ part of the yeards of London, which found, adde that ½ part, and the y [...]ards togither, as appeareth by the practise: and the product sheweth the Elles of Antwerpe.

In 320 yeards of London, how many Elles of Antwerpe maketh 426 2/ [...] Elles.

[...]

Proofe. [...]

Other Reductions.

Item you shall vnderstand, that for as much as 6 Braces of Millane make 5 Elles [Page] of Antwerp, wherevppon, according to the Rules of Practise, you maye reduce the one into the other by the like Reasons aforesaide in taking the ⅙ parte, and then subtraye the same to make Elles of Antwerp: And againe by the contrary in taking the ⅕ part, with ad­ding the giuen number, to turne the Elles to Braces, as for example.

In 876 Braces how many elles of Antwerp

[...]

Thus appeareth, that 876 braces by pra­ctise, make 730 Elles Flemmishe: whiche Elles Flemmish reduced into English year­des by the Rules aforesaide, make 547 d yeardes.

[Page] [...]. Rule.So againe vpon the same firste Question of Braces: I woulde knowe howe manye yeardes English they make.

After the rate that 100 Braces are worth 62 ½ yeardes.

[...]

Item, to the vnderstanding of this worke and suche like, firste take the ½ of the giuen Braces: And after take the ¼ of that halfe: or the ⅛ of the giuen number, and adde them togither: And the product are also yeards En­glishe.

18. Rule.Item 3 Elles of Rochell make 5 Elles at Lisbone: So likewise 3 Elles at Lions make 5 Elles at Antwerpe.

To worke these and such like, double the Elles of Lions, and the Elles of Rochel: and from their products Subtray the ⅙: And the rest shall be Elles of Antwerpe, or Elles of Lisbone.

[Page] Example.

In 63. Elles of Lyons how many Els of Antw. [...]

In 100. Elles of Rochel how many Elles of Lisb. [...]

Touching the proofe or returne of these & such like questions for a generall Rule, you shal first take the ⅕ of the giuen number: And adde that ⅕ and the giuen number togither. And the ½ of that producte shall be your de­sire.

Example.

In 105. Elles of Antw. how many Elles of Liōs [...]

In 166. ⅔ elles of Lisbon how many elles of Roch. [...]

The thirde Chapiter treateth of the order and worke of the Rule of three in broken Numbers, after the trade of Merchants, digressing some­thing from Master Records, which is comprehen­ded in 3 Rules.

NOw that I haue som­what intreated of the Rules of Practise, I will giue a fewe in­structiōs after my simple order, for the wor­king of the Rule of thrée in broken num­bers, wherein I shall néede to saye the lesse, because I hope the studious Learner, that hath trauelled any thing in the Grounde of Artes, is not vnfurnished of knowledge ca­pable to vnderstande me. But before I de­liuer any instructions for broken numbers, I will propone a question, whiche shall bée wrought 3 sundrie wayes, thereby to shew as it were 3 degrées of comparison: how far the Rule of thrée, in broken, for more spéede [Page] of worke, differeth from whole, which I ra­ther set downe for a view, that the studious herein may be more desirous to attaine bro­ken: leauing any more so discourse in Dia­logue forme: but only to giue instructions, where néede is: and in the rest to putte forth the questions with their aunsweares.

My first question is this.

If one yeard cost 6 s — 8 d What are —789 worth at that rate [...]

Here the product of the summe are pence according to the nature of the midle nūber.

[...]

I aunsweare 263 lb [Page] [...]

Here the producte of the summe is s, ac­cording to the nature of the middle number.

[...]

Here the producte is poundes according to the title of the second number.

[...]

Now that you haue séene the 3 former ver­tues of the rule of thrée, whose products hath firste broughte forth d, nexte s, and lastlye, poundes: I will deliuer 3 notes in order fo­lowing: And with them a dosen questions: [Page] that shall shewe the worke of the Rule of thrée in broken numbers or Fractions.

  • 1 The firste foure shall bée sundrie Questions of a Fraction comming in the second place.
  • 2 The second foure shall be of 2 Fra­ctions comming in the seconde or thirde place.
  • 3 The thirde foure of Fractions in all thrée places.

My first question is this.

If one yeard cost [...] me 3 s — 4 d what are 756 worth at that price.1. Rule.

In setting downe the Question to per­forme the worke I turne 4 d into the part of [...] s.

TO the ready working of this question, & all such other like, my first note is this: which take for a generall rule, that when a­ny one Fraction shall come either in the se­cond or third place: that the Denominator of that Fraction or Fractions, must alwayes be brought vnto the number or Numerator of the first place: and thereby multiplyed the one into the other.

[Page]And this benefit is alwayes gotten by the vertue of bringing the Denominator of the second numbers fraction vnto the first place. For the fraction in the midle number is now released: and the producte that commeth of the Multiplication, is of the nature and lyke Denomination of the whole number in the second place which here are shillings.

Wherevppon now to worke the question I bring 3 the Denominator of the Fraction in the second place, vnto my firste number 1 with a line set vnder 1 thus: and the 3 vn­der it ⅓ thus▪ saying, once 3 is my Diuisor: That done, reduce 3 ⅓ saying, 3 times 3 is 9, and the 1 ouer 3 make 10: my second num­ber in the Rule of 3: by whych 10 I do mul­tiply my last number 756 as appeareth by ye worke thereof: And it yéeldeth 7560 s my diuidend.

Then diuiding 7560 by 3 my diuisor, it yéeldeth in Quotient 2520 s: whiche, as ap­peareth by the worke maketh 126 poundes.

At 3 s 4 d the yeard what 756 yeards [...]

[Page] [...]

If one yearde of cotten cost 8 ¼ d what 859. [...]

This question was also wrought like the first and bringeth forth 29 lb — 10 s — 6 ¾ d the price of 859 yeardes.

If 7 pounde of anye thing cost 3 lb 10 s What comes 987 lb to. [Page] [...]

Item I will worke vpon my first questi­on now againe: but altered into the proporti­on it beareth to a lb: for that 3 s 4 d is ⅙ of a pound.

[...]

As soone as I haue carried 6 the denomi­nator of my middle number vnto my firste place, as afore hath bene taught: I pul down one, the numerator of 6, with a line vnder 6/1 thus: And that one of custome I pul downe in sight being the figure yt I shal multiply my last number by▪ According to the tenor of the [Page] Rule of 3: And because one can neither mul­tiplie nor yet diuide (thoughe here it is sette downe in forme of multiplication,) the producte of the multiplication, according vn­to the declaration of my first note, is conuer­ted into the title of my seconde number whiche here are poundes: nowe followeth the diuision performed by my diuisor 6, to make an end of the question.

[...]

Notes vpon my second Rule for two Fractions cōming in the second and third place.2. Rule.

My first question is this.

If one ell cost 13 s 4 d: what halfe a quar­ter or ⅛ of an ell?

Answer. Firste bring 13 s 4 d into the parts of a lb: which is ⅔ and then wil the que­stion stand thus. 1 —⅔—1/ [...].

[Page]Item for the performance of this worke do as before was taught in the first Rule, firste bring 3 the denominator of the second fracti­on vnto your first number 1: setting a line vnder 1 thus: Saying once 3 is 3: that done bring 8 the denominator of the third fraction setting it vnder 3: and multiplye them togi­ther, saying 3 times 8 makes 24: which 24 is your diuisor: (Now haue you done with the denominator 3. and also with the denomina­tor 8.) Therefore you shal put a line vnder 3 thus. And the like line also vnder 8: setting or pulling downe vnder them their own nu­merators, that is 2 vnder 3, and also 1 vnder 8, as appeareth in the example, which Nume­tors for a general rule are euermore to be pulled down, of custome in sight, to multiplie the one by the other according to the tenor of the Rule of thrée. Then I multiplie the one by the other saying once 2 is 2: which signifyeth 2 lb: being of the Nature and like denomina­tion of the middle number, which 2 lb is to be reduced into shillings, otherwise it can not be diuided by my firste number 24: Then diuiding 40 by 24: the quotient bringeth foorth 1 ⅔ s: So muche is ⅛ of an ell worthe [Page] after that rate. Otherwise although 2 pound coulde not be diuided by 24: yet it might haue bene abbreued to 1/12 of a pounde: whiche is worth 1 s 8 pence, as before.

[...]

Second question.

If one pound of any waighte coste 13 shil­lings 4 pence: what are ⅞ of the pound worth after that rate: Answere. Reduce the 13 shil­lings 4 pence into the partes of a pounde: which is ⅔: and then will the question stand thus.

[...]

Item for the vnderstanding of this, if you marke wel the last example, this and the rest lyeth open, and néedeth small instruction. For [Page] as you did laste. So nowe againe bring the Denominator of the seconde and third fra­ction vnto the first figure, 1, multiplying the one into the other which maketh also 24, as before your Diuisor.

Then making a line vnder 3 thus, and a line vnder 8 thus, And pulling downe theyr Numerators vnder each figure, that is, 2 vn­der 3, and 7 vnder 8, whiche as I said before for a generall Rule I pull downe of custome in sight: to be the two numbers that of dutie ought to be multiplied togither, whiche done I bring 2 being ye lesser figure vnder 7: mul­tiplying them togither, it maketh 14: whiche are of the nature of the middle number. That is to wit pounds: which 14 cannot aptlye bée diuided among 24: Therfore are reduced in­to s, as is plainly to be séene in the example. Then 280 s parted among 24: yéeldeth for his quotient 11 s 8 d: your desire: and ye iust price of ⅞ of an ell. Otherwise, 14, thoughe it could not be diuided by 24: might by media­tion or diuision in broken numbers haue bin diuided or abbreuiated to 7/12 whiche in effect being reduced to his knowen partes maketh 11 s 8 d as before. But my good wil & mea­ning is to aide yong beginners. Therefore [Page] haue I reduced the 14 lb into s: which is the easier way.

Now followeth the Example. [...]

The third example.

If one yearde coste me 2 s 6 d what 345 [...]/4 yeardes.

Answer. First put 6 d into the parts of a s: and then the question standeth thus.

[...]

Itē to the readie vnderstanding of this & all such like, according as before hath bene decla­red: Bring the denominators of the second & third fractions vnto the first place, multiply­ing them the one into the other, al which ma­keth 8. your diuisor cōmon. Thē next reduce your second number, saying 2 times 2 is 4: [Page] and 1, is 5: as appeareth in the example. Lastly, reduce your third number 345 ¼ all into fourths, and they make 1381: whiche 1381 is to be multiplied by 5, according to the tenor of the Rule of thrée: whiche done, maketh 6905 s: And diuided by 8 your Di­uisor: yéeldeth in Quotient 863 ⅛ s whyche maketh in poundes 43 lb— 3 s — 1 d ½: And so muche are the 345 and ¼ yeardes worth at that price.

The same question wrought again but 2 s 6 d: is now conuerted into the parts of a lb, and standeth thus: [...]

Item, after I haue brought here my se­cond and third fraction vnto my first place, & found 32 to be my deuisor: hauing thus fur­nished my firste place with all thinges vnto him belonging (whiche is meant of bring­ing and multiplying the Denominators of the second and third Fractions into him) I then goe in hand to sée what is to doe in my second place, where presently of custome I pull downe my Numerator 1 vnder 8: bée­ing [Page] the figure in sight that shal multiply my third number.

Then lastlye I reduce 245 ¼ all into fourthes, as afore was practised, whych ma­keth 1381, the whyche 1281 I am to mul­tiplie by one my seconde number: they are nothing encreased, but by the Methamorph of my worke, they are nowe 1381 pounde: being of the nature of the middle number, as I haue often shewed you, whiche diuided by 32 my Diuisour, yéeldeth 42 pounde and 5/32: whiche 5/32 of a lb reduced into knowen numbers, make 3 shillings 1 d ½ as be­fore.

Example. [...]

[Page]Now followeth 4 other questions which are in al: [...] Rule. places, broken numbers or whole and broken togither.

Item firste for the finding out of your diui­sor: you shal take this for a most certaine and generall rule. That you must multiply the numerator of the first number in the question by the denominator of the second: And also al that againe by the denominator of the third: and the total therof shal be your diuisor.

Secondarily for a generall rule to find out your diuidend, multiplie the denominator of the first number by the numerator of the se­conde, and the whole thereof by the denomi­nator of the third. And the total therof shal e­uermore be your diuidend.

Nowe for an example I propone this que­stion thereby to make my meaning the more plaine, and to shew you as I haue done in the rest the manner and order of the worke.

If 3/2 of any waight or measure cost [...]/8 of a lb or 20 s what are 2/8 of the like waight or measure worth after that rate.

[Page] Example. [...]

Item for the more plainer vnderstanding hereof, and all other the like, in broken num­bers: First you shal pul downe 2 the Nume­rator of the firste number or fraction, with a line vnder 3/2 thus: that done according as you haue learned before, bring 6 the denomina­tor of the second fraction, and set it vnder 2 multiplying the one into the other whiche maketh 12. Then lastly bring 8 the denomi­nator of the third fractiō: and set it vnder 12, multiplying that 12 by 8: which amounteth to 96: (or else for more briefe multiply 6 by 8: saying 6 times 8 makes 48: which 48 sette vnder 2, and multiplie the one into the other, maketh 96 as before) And this 96 is the first nūber in the rule of thrée. That shal alwaies for a most general rule be your diuisor.

Secondly to worke for your diuidend you shal as hath bin sufficiēttie declared afore, pul down 5 the numerator of your second fractiō. And set it vnder 6 with a line vnder 6 thus. [Page] That done as you knowe, you are to pull downe 3 the numerator of the third fraction and set it vnder 8. with a line vnder 8 thus multiplying the one into the other according to the tenor of ye rule of 3: which maketh 15: thē according to my note, forget not to bring the Denominator of the first fraction which is 3 vnder 15: And multiplie them togither, which maketh 45: which 45, is your diuidēd.

Which 45 are of the nature or denominatiō of the middle number, as I haue ofte taught you before And therefore are 45 lb, whiche aptly cannot be diuided by 96: Therfore you shal reduce that 45 lb into s as you sée is per­formed in the example, which amounteth to 900 s whiche diuided by 96, your diuisor it yéeldeth 9 s & [...]6/96 of a s which in lesser termes is 3/8 which 3/8 in money maketh 4 ¼ d: And so much wil the aforesaid 3/8 cost, as by the work following shal appeare.

Example. [...]

[Page]Otherwise though 45 coulde not be diui­ded by 96: yet by diuision in brokē numbers it might haue bene abbreuiated to 15/32 of a lb, which redused into knowen parts will make 9 s 4 ¼ d as before.

Now my second example shal be the proofe of this question.

If ⅜ yeards cost 15/32 of a lb: or 20 s what shal ⅔ cost?

Answer. Worke as was taughte you be­fore, and you shal haue your desire.

[...]

Here as appeareth by the worke, the mul­tiplications being ended 240 is to be diuided by 288: which to some perchance may séeme harde, yet notwithstanding is the work good: Therefore abbreuiate 240 by 288: as you sée here is practised: and the end of your abbreui­ation shal come to ⅚ your desire. [...]

[Page]Otherwise. [...]

Otherwise. [...]

The third question.

If 2/4 elles cost 13 s 4 d what 156 ½ elles?

Answer. To worke this question the shor­test way: reduce 13 s 4 d into the partes of a lb which is ⅔.

Then as you did afore after, you haue sette downe the question, the numerator of ye firste Fraction 3, is pulled down vnder 4. and the denominators of ye other 2 fractiōs multiply­ed into him which maketh 18 your diuisor.

Then the Numerator of the second fracti­on 2: is pulled down vnder 3 of custome now in sight readie to multiply my third number by: which is performed as soone as the laste number 156 ½ is reduced into halfes.

Then lastly I multiply that product by 4: the denominator of my firste fraction: if yéel­deth 2504: which I diuide by 18: And my quotient is 129 lb & 1/ [...] of a lb remayning whi­ch is worth 2 s 2 ⅔ d: And so much wil 156 ½ elles cost as by the worke following doth ap­peare.

[Page] [...]

The fourth Example.

If 2 ½ Elles coste 1 ⅔ lb what commeth 29 ¼ elles to?

Item to the workmanship of this questi­on: firste reduce your firste number to one direct Numerator: in saying, [...] times 2 is 4, and 1 is 5: Then bring the Multiplication of the Denominators of the seconde and thirde Fractions, which maketh 12: and multiplie that 12 by 5 your first Numerator, it maketh 60, which is your diuisor.

Then the reduction of the second number, which is 5 multiplied by 117 the product of ye laste numbers reduction, make 585, whiche 585 yet resteth to bée multiplied by 2, [Page] the denominator of the fraction in the firste place yéeldeth 1170: whiche diuided by your diuisor 60: yéeldeth 19 lb — 10 s as appea­reth by the worke therof.

Thus hauing now touched the 12 questi­ons wherof I first pretended, which with di­ligence and oft practise I trust are sufficient to aide the desirous, vnto the working of any broken numbers, therefore I will propone a question or two more, and so ende this trea­tise of the Rule of thrée in broken num­bers.

Example. [...]

If ⅔ of an ell cost 3 s 4 d what one ell. [...]

[Page] Proofe.

If one Ell cost 5 s what ⅔ [...] If one péece of Kersy cost 2 lb— 5 s, and one yeard thereof sold for 2 s— 4 d, how many yeards long was the whole péece.

[...]

A Grocer hathe bought a bagge of Al­monds wayghing 385 lb: tare 4 ¼ lb at 27 s — 6 d the C: The question is what they amoūt to in money.

[...]

[Page] [...]

The fourth Chapiter treateth of Loste and Gaine, in the trade of Merchandise.

IF one yard cost 6 s—8 d: and the same is sold againe for 8 s — 6 d: the Que­stion is, what is gained in 100 lb laying out on such commoditie.

Answere, the Rule of thrée direct, appli­eth twoo manner of wayes to doe the same: the one is to say: If 6 ⅔ giue 8 ½, what giueth 100? Multiply and diuide, and looke what your quotient bringeth forth aboue your lay­ing out, is the neat gaines, and the solution to your Question: If you follow the worke, your Quotient wil bring forth 127 lb — 10 s.

[Page]Item, to worke it the other way, which I take the nearest, séeke the difference betwixt the iust price, and the ouer-price, whiche is 1 s — 10 d: Then say by the Rule of thrée: If 6 ⅔ s gaine 1 ⅚ s what shall 100 lb gaine: Multiply and diuide, and you shall finde — 27 lb 10 s: and so much is gained in 100 lb laying out.

Vse which of these two wayes you thinke good.

The Proofe.

If a yeard of cloth be deliuered for 8 s— 6 d, wherevpon was gained after the rate of 27 lb — 10 s in 100 lb laying out: The Question is what the yard cost at the first hand?

Answer. Put your gains to 100 lb, al ma­keth 127 lb— 10 s: then say, if 127 lb— 10 s giue but 100 lb, what giueth 8 ½ s: worke, and you shall finde 6 s—8 d, the true solu­tion to your question.

Yet an other Branch or proofe vpon the same first Question.

If one yeard cost 6 s —8 d: the question [Page] is, what price the same is to be solde againe for, to gaine 27 lb — 10 s in 100 lb laying out.

Answere, say by the Rule of thrée, if 100 lb giue 127 lb — 10 s: what giueth 6 ½ s: multiply and diuide, and you shal finde 8 s — 6 d, your true solution.

If one Ell cost 7 s — 8 d, and solde a­gaine for 8 s — 6 d Question: what is gained in 20 lb laying out, in such commo­dities.

Answere, Séeke the difference betwixte the iust price & the ouer-price, which is 10 d, and then apply the Rule of thrée, as before is taught: saying, if 8 ½ giue ⅚ s, what giueth 20 lb: multiplie and diuide, and you shal find 2 lb — 3 11/22 s: And so much is gained in 20 lb laying out.

The Proofe.

A Merchant hath bought Holland cloth at 8 s—6 d the Ell, whiche proueth not to his expectation: wherevppon he is con­tent to lose 2 lb—3 s—11/23 s in 20 lb lay­ing out: The question is what price ought to be made of the Ell abating this losse.

[Page] Answere, doe as before in gaines hathe bin taught: putting 2 lb — 3 11/2 [...] s to your 20 lb, all togither maketh 22 — 3 11/2 [...] s: Then say by the Rule of three: If 22 — 3 11/23 s giue but 20 lb, what shall come of 8 ½ s: worke and you shall finde 7 s — 6 d, the iust price that the Ell ought to be sold for after the rate of this losse.

Thus you sée as in companye the Rule is appliable as wel to gaines and losse.

If 20 ¼ yeards cost 36 lb — 10 s howe shall I sel the same againe to gaine ⅓ of the principall: or to make of 3.4: whyche is all one.

Answere, by the Rule of thrée: if 3 doe do giue 4: what will 36 1/ [...] giue? Multiply & diuide, and you shall finde 48 lb — ⅔: Then say againe, if 20 1/ [...] yeards do giue 48 ⅔ poūds, as well principall as gaine: what will one yeard be worth at that price? Multiplie and diuide, and you shal finde 2 lb — 8 9/4 [...]/3 [...]/3 s.

If one Ell of Cloth cost me 8 s — 8 d: And afterwardes I sell, 10 ½ Elles ther­of for 5 lb — 12 s — 4 d: I would know whether I winne or lose: and how much vpon the 100 lb of money.

[Page] Answere. Sée firste, at 8 s — 8 d the Ell, what 10 ½ elles commes to, and you shall finde 4 lb — 11 s: and I solde the same for 5 lb — 13 s — 4 d: So that I did gaine vp­on the 10 ½ yeardes 1 —2-4 d: Then if you would know how much is gained in the 100 lb, say by the rule of thrée: If 4 lb — 11 s did gaine 22 ½ s what will 100 lb gaine: Multiply and diuide and you shall finde — 24 lb — 10 s —10 1 [...]/10 d: And so much is gai­ned in the 100 lb of money.

If 12 ½ yeards cost me 11 lb — 5 s: And I sel the yeard againe for 16 s: the questi­on is, whether I do win or lose, and howe much in or vpon the pound of money.

Answeare. Looke what the 12 ½ yeardes come to at 16 s the yeard, and you shall find 10 lb: But they cost 11 lb — 5 s: So there is loste vpon the whole 1 lb — 5 s: Then to know how much is lost in the pound: Saye by the rule of 3: if 11 ¼ lb do lose 1 ¼ lb, what will 1 lb lose: Multiplie and diuide, and you shall finde 6 ⅖ d: and so much is lost in the lb of money.

If I sel the C. waight of any cōmoditie, for 4 lb: wherevpon I do lose after 10 lb in the 10 [...] lb: I demaund howe muche I shall [Page] lose or gaine in the 100 lb, if in case I had solde the same for 4 lb — 10 s.

Answer. Say if 90 lb yeeld 10 [...], how much wil 4 giue? Multiplie and diuide, & you shall finde 4 [...]/9: Then say againe, if 4 4/9 giue me 4 ½ what wil 10 come to? Multiplie & diuide, and you shal find 101 lb ¼ which is more thā 10 [...] lb by 1 lb — 5 s: And so muche is gained in the 100 lb.

A Merchant hath solde Currans for the sum of 430 lb: & he hath gained therein af­ter 10 lb in the 100 lb: The question is, to know how much he gained in all?

Answere, Say by the Rule of thrée: If 110 lb do gaine 10 lb, what will 430 lb gain: Multiplie & diuide, and you shall find 39 lb - 1 — 9 [...]/11 d, And so much hath he gained in al.

If one yeard be worth 28 ½ s, for howe much shall 10 yeards be solde to gaine af­ter 8 lb — 6 s — 8 d in the 100 lb.

Answere. First adde 8 lb — 6 s — 8 d to 100: thē say, if 100 lb do giue 108 1/ [...] for prin­cipal and gaine, what will 28 ½ s principall yéelde? Multiplie and diuide, and you shall finde 30 ⅞ s: Then saye againe by the Rule of thrée: If 1 yearde doe giue 30 ⅞ s (whyche is as well the principall as the [Page] gaine) what shall 10 yeardes giue? Multi­plie and diuide, and you shal find 15 lb — 8 s —9 d: And for the same price shall the 10 yeards be solde, for to gaine after the rate of 8 lb —6 s — 8 d vpon the 100 lb.

A Branch or Proofe out of this Question.

A Merchant hathe solde Clothes for 15 lb — 8 s — 9 d, and he hath gained in the whole, the sum of 1 lb — 3 s — 9 d: The question is to know howe muche hée hath gained in the 100 lb.

Answere, to knowe this, firste rebate the gaines from the price, and there will re­maine 14 lb — 5 s — 0 d: Then saye by the Rule of thrée direct, if 14 lb ¼ giue me — 1 lb — 3 s — ¼ d: what will 100 lb giue? Multiplie and diuide, and you shall finde — 8 lb — 6 s — 8 d the effect desired: the proofe is apparant in the question before.

Yet an other Branch or Proofe of the first Question.

If — 10 yeardes be deliuered for — [Page] 15 lb 8 — 9 wherevpon was gained after ye rate of 8 lb — 6 s — 8 d vpon the 100 lb: the question is, what the yeard did coste at the first hande.

Answere, first say by the Rule of thrée, if 10 with principall and gaine yéelde 15 lb — 8 ¾, what shal 1 yéelde? Multiplie and di­uide, and you shall finde 30 ⅞ s: Then saye againe by the Rule of thrée: If 108 ⅓ princi­pall and gaine giue but 100: what shall 30 ⅞ s of principall and gaine yéelde: work, and you shall finde 28 ½ s: And so muche did the yeard cost at the firste penny.

If one yeard cost 36 s how much shall 12 yeardes be solde for to gaine after the rate of 10 lb in the 100 lb.

Answere, Firste say, if 100 giue 110 lb principall and gaine, what will 26 s giue? Multiply and diuide, and you shal find 39 ⅗ s Then saye againe by the rule of thrée: If 1 yeard of principall and gaine yéelde 39 ⅗ s, what shall 12 yeards gaine? Multiplie, and diuide, and you shall finde 23 lb — 15 ⅕ s, which ⅕ s is 2 ⅖ d: And for the same price shall the 12 yeards be sold, to gaine after the rate of 10 in the 100.

[Page] The Proofe.

If 12 yeards be solde for 23 lb — 15 s — 2 ⅖ d wherevpon is gained after 10 lb in the 100 lb: The question is, what the yeard cost at the first peny?

Answere. First say, if 12 giue 23 lb — 15 ⅕ s, what 1 yeard? Multiplie and diuide, and you shall finde 39 ⅗ s: Then saye againe by the Rule of thrée: if 110 lb giue but 100, what shall 39 ⅗ giue: worke and you shall finde 36 s, the iuste price of the yeard at the firste hand.

Itē, when one Merchant selleth wares to another, and he giueth to the buyer 1 lb — 6 s — 8 d vpon the score, or 20 lb: The question is, howe muche shall the buyer gaine vppon the 100 lb after that rate.

Answere. Firste adde 1 lb — 6 s — 8 d vnto 20 lb, and they are 21 ⅓: Then say, if 20 lb giue 21 ⅓, what shall 100 giue: multi­plie and diuide, and you shall finde 106 [...]/3: So [Page] the buyer getteth after the rate of 6 ⅔ lb vpon the 100 lb.

Gentle Reader other necessarie questions appertaining to Losse and Gaine, you shall haue in the seauenth Chapiter of this Trea­tise.

The fifth Chapiter entreateth of Losse and Gaine vppon Time, wrought by the double Rule of three: or by the Rule of three composed, whiche is contained in foure speciall selected braunches or questi­ons of diuers formes, eche one of them springing from the firste questi­on, and eache one of them also beeing a proofe to other, &c.

IF one yeard cost me 2 s 8 d readie mo­ny: and after I sell the same againe for 2 s 10 d to be paide for it at the ende of 3 moneths: the question is, what I gaine vpon the 100 lb in 12 moneths?

Answere. First saye, if 2 ⅔ gaine 1/ [...] what shal 100 lb gaine: Multiplie, and diuide, and you shal finde — 6 ¼ lb: Then saye againe [Page] by the Rule of thrée: if 3 moneths gaine 6 ¼ lb what shall 12 moneths gaine: Worke, and you shall finde 25 lb: and so muche shall I gaine in 12 moneths after that rate.

Itē you may also work it at one working by ye first part of the Rule of 3 composed: say­ing, if 2 ⅔ s in 3 moneths do gaine ⅙ of a s, which is 2 d, what wil 100 lb gaine in 12 moneths: whiche for thy further encourage­ment, the worke of this one Example I wil here putte downe, to verifie that I affyrmed when I deliuered in the firste parte of this Ground of Artes, that this Rule, and so all others more reioiceth in Broken than in Whole.

[...]

[Page]If a yeard be deliuered for 2 s — 10 d: wherevpon was gained after the rate of 25 lb in the 100 for 12 moneths: The que­stion is nowe, what the yeard coste at the first hande.

Answere. firste saye, if 12 moneths gaine 25 lb, what shal 3 moneths gaine: and you shall finde 6 ¼ lb: Then say againe the secōd time, if 106 ¼ lb giue but 100, what shall 2 ⅚ s giue? worke, and you shall finde 2 ⅔ s, which is the iust price that the yeard coste at the firste hand.

If one yeard of cloth cost me 2 s — 8 d ready mony, for what terme shal I sel the same again for 2 s 10 d: So that I might gaine after the rate of 25 lb vpō the 100 lb in 12 moneths.

Answere. First say, if 2 ⅔ gaine ⅙ what shall 100 lb gaine: Multiply and diuide, and you shall finde 6 1/ [...] lb. Then saye againe for the second worke, if 25 lb become of 12 mo­neths, what shal come of 6 1/ [...] lb: Work, and you shall finde 3 moneths: the iuste terme of time that the cloth ought to bée deliuered at [Page] 2 s 10 d, to gaine 25 lb, vppon the 100 lb in 12 moneths.

If one yeard coste me 2 s 8 d readye mony for what price shal I sel the same a­gaine to be paid at the end of 3 moneths: So that I may gaine after the rate of 25 lb in the 100 lb for 12 moneths?

Answere. Firste saye, if 12 gaine 25 lb what shal 3 moneths gaine? Multiplie, and diuide, and you shal finde 6 ¼ lb: then saye for the second worke: if 100 lb gaine 6 ¼ lb, what shall 2 ⅔ s gaine? worke, and you shall find 2 d, whiche muste be added to 2 s — 8 d: and then it maketh 2 s — 10 d: and for that price muste the yeard be solde to gaine after the rate of 25 in the 100 for 12 moneths, you may also worke it by the first part of the rule of three composed, saying if 100 lb in 12 mo­nethes doe gaine me [...]5 lb? what shall 2 ⅔ s gaine in [...] moneths: work and you shall find [...]/2 [...] of a lb, which in lesser termes is 1/1 [...], and is in known mony worth 2 d, as before.

Many other of these questions I might heere haue deliuered, but for feare the booke woulde rise to too thicke a vo­lume, and so to make the price so much [Page] the dearer, whereby it mighte not bee so partable to my Countrymen as I wish it. But these foure, I haue of purpose framed in this order, hauing relation one to an other: Assuring you, that what questions soeuer maye bee propo­ned within the compasse of this rule, you shall finde by one of these foure to make a solution: And moreouer, diuers other are yet to be deliuered: where the Cre­ditour giueth diuers dayes of payment, which can neuer bee well wrought, nor yet vnderstoode, vnlesse you can firste finde by Arte, the iust time that al those payments, how different soeuer they be, ought to be paide at once: wherevppon first I thinke good here to giue some in­structions into such a Rule, for it is the onelie aide for the finishing of such que­stions as hereafter shall follow.

The sixth Chapiter entreateth of Rules of Payment, which is a right ne­cessary Rule, & one of the chiefest handmaids that attendeth vpon buying and selling, &c.

Example.

A Merchant doth owe a summe of money, whereof the ½ is to be paid at 6 moneths, the ½ at 8 moneths, and the rest at a yeare, If he woulde paye at one payment, the question is, what time ought to be gyuen hym.

Answere I haue omitted the quantitie of the summe, for you shal vnderstande, the Rule is appliable, and yéeldeth a true soluti­on to what sum soeuer shal be proponed. But now for orders sake in teaching, I doe ima­gine the summe to be 60 lb: wherevppon the maner of this worke is to multiplie the pro­portionate parte of the mony by the time, as in company: Then 20 being the firste pay­ment, and the ⅓ of 60, whiche ⅓ multiplied in broken numbers by 6: his time of pay­ment, maketh 6/ [...] whiche in whole numbers, [Page] as appeareth by the exam­ple [...] in the margēt, maketh 2 monethes: next 30, whi­che is the ½ multiplyed by his tearme 8, yéeldeth 4 monthes, then ye rest which is 10 lb must néedes be ab­breuiated into the propor­tion it beareth to 60. which is ⅙: which ⅙ multiplied by his time 12 mon­thes produceth 12/6: maketh 2 monthes. All whiche added togither as appeareth in the margente. maketh 8 monthes: whiche is the iust time that all those payments ought to be paide at once.

A Merchāt hath 800 lb to pay, the ⅙ ther­of readie money the ¼ at two monethes, the ½ at foure monthes, and the rest at a yeare. The question is, if he woulde paye all at one payment, what time ought to be giuen him.

[Page] Answer▪ The readie money [...] is neuer multiplyed: then ¼ multiplyed by 2 monthes as you did before, maketh ½ then ½ by 4 produceth 2 monthes, as appeareth here in the mar­gent: But nowe for the rest of the money you can not multi­plye it vntill you haue sought what proportion it beareth to 800 lb. Therefore you must subtract the rea­die money: the ¼ and the 1/ [...] out of the princi­pall: The rest wil be 66 ⅔ lb: which you must looke what parte it beareth to the principal, which you shal finde to be 1/12: The same you must also multiply by his time 12 monthes. And it yéeldeth 1 month: So all make 3 ½ monthes as appeareth in the margent.

A Merchant is to paye 1200 lb: in [...] ter­mes, That is to wit, 400 lb. at 2 wéekes And [...]0 [...] lb at 4 monthes, lastly 200 lb. at 5 monthes. The question is in what time, they ought to be paide at once.

Answer. Proportionate the partes, and you [Page] [...]hal finde for 400 ⅓ and for 600 ½. And 200 [...]s the ⅙ part: which multiplied by their times [...]s before, and you shal haue ⅔ wéekes: more [...] wéekes, and lastly 3 ½ weekes, which togi­ther maketh 12 wéekes, or 3 monthes youre [...]esire.

A Merchaunt is to paye 600 lb in 6 ter­mes, whereof 100 lb is paid present, more 300 lb at 20 dayes: And the rest at 5 mon­thes, accompting 30 dayes to a month. The question is, what time oughte these payments to be payde at once.

I answer two monthes.

The seuenth Chapter entreateth of buying and selling in the trade of Mar­chandise, wherin is taken part readie money, and diuerse dayes of pay­ments giuen for the rest: & what is won or lost in the 100 lb ▪ for­bearance for 12 monthes more or lesse according to the quantitie of mo­ney, or proportion of time &c.

A Merchant hath bought Sattins whiche coste 8 s the yearde readie money: And [Page] he selleth the same again to another mā for 10 s the yearde: But he giueth two dayes for the payment: That is to say thrée mon­thes for the one half, and fiue monthes for the other half: The questiō is to know how much the seller doth gain vpon 100 lb in 12 monthes after that rate.

Aunswer. Séeke first by the Rules of pay­ment, at what time those two paymentes ought to be paide at once, and you shall finde 4 monthes, at whiche time the seconde Mer­chant oughte to haue paide the whole entire payment: And therefore say by the first parte of the rule of thrée cōposed: If 8 s in 4 mon­thes doe gaine two shillings, what wil 100 pounde gaine in twelue monthes multiplye and diuide and [...] you shall finde 75 lb as appea­reth in the ex­ample, and so much doth the firste Merchaunte gaine vppon 100 lb in 12 monthes.

A Merchaunt hath sold 50 clothes at 9 ½ lb the péece, to be paide the one ½ at 4 monthes: [Page] the ⅓ at 5 monthes, & the ⅙ at 7 monthes: And ye sellers minde is to take no more but after 8 lb in the 100 for 12 monthes. The question is now what the first Merchaunt gaineth in the sale of these clothes after that rate.

Answer. First looke what the 50 clothes come to at that price: and you shall finde 475 lb. Then secondly, according to your directi­on in the Rules of paymente, séeke at what time all the payments are to be performed at once. And you shal finde 4 ⅚ monthes. Then thirdly say by the firste part of the Rule of 3 composed: If 100 lb in 12 monthes gaine 8 lb what wil 475 lb gaine in 4 ⅚ monthes: work and you shal finde 13 lb and 7/36 of a lb: whiche is the neate gaines that the firste Merchaunt hath after the rate aforesaid:

A Merchant hath bought Holland at 7 s 3 d the ell readie money: And he selleth the same againe, for 8 s 4 d the ell, to be paide ¼ part in readie mony, more ⅓ parts at thrée monthes, and the reste at foure monthes. The question is nowe to knowe [Page] how muche the first Merchant doth gain [...] vppon the 100 lb in 12 monthes after th [...] same rate.

Answer. According to the direction deli [...]uered you in the rule of payment, the ready money is not to be multiplyed: Then wor [...]king for the other 2 paymentes, to finde ou [...] the true proportion at what time they ough [...] to be paide at once, you shall finde for ⅓ at monthes, ⅔ of a mōth: And the rest of the mo [...]ney which is 5/12 multiplyed by his tearme [...] monthes, yéeldeth 1 ⅔ monthes: both which [...] added togither make 2 and ⅓ monthes: The [...] iust time, that both the payments ought to be performed at once. And therefore saye by the first part of the Rule of thrée composed, if 7 ¼ in 2 ⅓ monthes do gaine 13/240 of a lb: what shal 100 lb gaine in 12 monthes after that rate, worke and you shall finde 76 172/20 [...] poundes. And so much doth he gaine vpon 10 pounde [...] in 12 monthes.

A Merchant hath bought 30 clothes at 6 lb the péece for readie money: Afterwarde he selleth 10 of them for 7 lb the péece, for thrée monthes tearme. And the other 20 he [Page] selleth for 8 lb the péece for foure mo­nethes terme: The question is nowe, what hee gaineth vpon 100 lb in 12 mo­nethes?

Answere. Firste finde the value of the 30 Cloths, which amount to 180 lb: Secon­darily, seeke what the ten péeces come to, at 7 lb: and what the 20 péeces come to at 8 lb the one comes to 70, and the other to 160: both which togither make 230, which is 50 lb more than they coste: Thirdly, as I haue taught you in the Rule of payment, proporti­onate the first & .ij. prices, vnto the proporti­on they beare vnto 230: the producte of their two prices [...] and you shall finde 7/2 [...] for the firste, and ½ 6/ [...] for the latter. Then fourth­ly, multiply those partes, by their times: and you shall haue 21/23 and 6 [...]/2 [...]: both which togither maketh whole moneths, and 1 [...]/23 of a mo­neth, which is the iuste time that both those payments are to be paid at once.

Thē say by the first part of the Rule of 3 cōposed: If 180 lb in 3 [...]6/2 [...] months do gain 50 lb, what shal 100 gaine in 1 [...] months? [Page] multiply and diuide and you shal finde 90 10/51 lb. And so muche doth he gaine vpon a 100 lb in 12 monthes.

A Merchāt hath bought Synamon which cost him 9 s the lb readie mony: The que­stion is now at what price he ought to sell the C waight: To wit 112 lb: to be paide the ¼ at 2 monthes, and the residue at the end of 3 monthes, so that he may gaine after the rate of 9 lb vppon a 100 lb for 12 monthes.

Answer. Séeke firste by the Rules of pay­ment what tearme both the payments ought to be paid at once, where the ¼ multiplied by his terme 2 monthes maketh ½ monthes: Likewise the next paimēt which is ¾ multi­plyed by his tearme 3 monthes maketh 2 ¼ monthes: both which added togither maketh 2 [...]/4 monthes: which is the time, that both the payments ought to be paide at once. Thē say by the Rule of 3: if 12 monthes doe giue me 10 lb what wil 2 [...]/4 monthes giue? Multiplie and diuide and you shal finde 2 ⅝ lb. Thē saye againe by the rule of 3: If one pound cost me 9 s what wil 112 pound cost: multiplye and [Page] diuide and you shal finde 50 lb 8 s. Then say once againe if 100 lb do giue 102 ⅝ what wil 50 ⅖ lb giue? multiplie and diuide & you shall finde 20 lb — 18 — 8 13/25 d: And for that price ought I to sell 112 lb of Synamon to be paid at two seueral payments aforesaid: To gain therby after the rate of 10 lb vpon the 100 lb in 12 monthes.

Briefe Rules for our hundreth waight here at London which is after 11 [...] lb for the C.

Item who that multiplyeth the pence that one pound waight is worth by 7: & diuideth the product by 15: shal finde how many poūds in money the 112 pounde waighte is worth.

And contrariwise, he that multiplieth the poundes that 112 lb waight is worth by 1 [...]. And diuideth the product by 7: shall finde howe manye pence the pounde waighte is worth.

[Page] Example.

At 10 d the pound waight, what is 112 lb waight worth?

Answer. Multiplye 10 by 7 and thereof commeth 70: the which diuide by 15: and you shal finde 4 ⅔ lb. And thus the 112 lb is worth 4 lb — 13 — 4 d after the rate of 10 d the lb a­foresayde.

At 6 lb the 112 lb waight what is one lb worth?

Answer. Multiplye 6 lb by 15 and thereof commeth 90: the which diuide by 7: And you shal finde 12 d 6/7: So muche is one pounde worth when the 112 lb did cost 6 poundes.

The eight Chapter entreateth of tares and allowances of merchandise solde by waight, and of losses and gaines therin &c.

AT 16 lb the 100 suttle what shall 895 lb suttle be worth in giuing 4 lb waight vp­on euerie 100 for treate?

[Page] Answer. Adde 4 vnto 100, and you shall haue 104. Then saye by the Rule of thrée if 104 be worth 10 lb what are 895 lb worthe? Multiply and diuide, and you shal finde 237 lb [...]13-10 2/13 d. And so much shal the 895 lb waight be worth.

Item at 3 s 4 d the pound waight what shal 754 ½ be worth in giuing 4 lb waight vpon euerie 100 for treate?

Answer. Sée first by the Rule of thrée, what the 100 pound is worth, saying, if 1 cost 3 ⅓ s what 100? multiplie and diuide and you shal finde 16 lb 2/ [...]: Then adde 4 vnto 100 and they are 104: Then say again by the rule of thrée, if 104 be solde for 16 ⅔: for howe muche shall 754 ½ be solde for? Multiplye and diuide and you shal finde 120 lb—18-3 1 [...]/53 d: And for so much shal the 754 ½ be sold for, at 3 s 4 d the pound in giuing 4 vpon the 100.

Item if 100 lb be worth 36 s 8 d what shal 860 lb be worth in rebating 4 pounde vpon euerie 100: for tare and cloffe?

[Page] Answer Multiplye 860 by 4: and thereof commeth 3440: the which diuide by 100 and you shal haue 34 2/ [...] lb: abate 34 ⅖ from 800: and there wil remaine 825 ⅗: Then saye by the rule of thrée. If 100 lb cost 36 ⅔ s what wil 825 ⅖ cost after that rate? Multiplie and diuide: and you shal finde 13-15 ⅕ s And so muche shall the 800 cost in rebating 4 pound vpon euerie 100: for tare and cloffe.

Item whether doeth he lose more that gi­ueth 4 lb vpon the 100: or he that rebateth 4 lb vpon the 100?

Answer. First note that he yt giueth 4 lb vpō 100, giueth 104 for 100: And he which reba­teth 4 lb vpon the 100 giueth the 100 for 96: Therefore say by the Rule of thrée, if 104 be deliuered for 100: for how much shall the 100 be deliuered? multiplye and diuide and you shal finde 96 2/12: and he which rebateth 4 in ye 100, maketh but 96 of 100, so yt he loo­seth 4 in ye 100, And ye other which giueth 4 vpon the 100, looseth but 3 [...]/1 1/ [...] vpon the 100: Thus you may sée that he which rebateth 4 in the 100: looseth more by 11/12 in the 100 lb. than the other whiche gaue 4 vpon the 100: for tare and cloffe.

[Page]If 100 lb of any thing coste me 22 s 4 d: The question is howe I shall sel the lb to gaine after the rate of 10 lb vpon the 100 pound.

Answer Saie by ye rule of 3, if 100 lb giue 110 lb. what shall 23 ½ s giue? multiply & di­uide, and you shal finde 1 lb 17/60: Then saye a­gaine if 100 lb be worth 1 17/60 lb: what is one pound worth? multiplye and diuide, and you shal finde 3 d 6/75: And so muche is the pounde worthe in gayning 10 pounde vpon the 100 pounde.

Item a Grocer hath bought C waighte of a commoditie for 6 lb 10 s: The questi­on is now to know how many poūds ther of he shal sel for 33 s 4 d: to gaine 20 shil­lings in the C. waight.

Answer. Adde 20 s vnto 6 lb 10 s: and they make 7 lb 10 s Then say if 7 ½ yéeld me 112 lb, what shal 1 ⅔ lb yéeld? multiplie and diuide and you shal finde 24 lb 8/9. And so many pound ought he to sel to gaine 20 shillings in his C. waight.

[Page]If one pounde waight cost 3 s 4 d and I sel the same againe for 4 s what is gained in 100 pound?

Aunswer. You may saye if 3 ⅓ s giue 4 s what will 100 lb giue? But then when you haue sound you must subtract the product out of 100 lb, the rest is your neate gaine: Or else to produce the neate gaine in your worke at the firste: Then subtract the iust price out of the ouer price, as I taught before in the firste beginning of losse and gain: And your conclu­sion shal be al one, multiply & diuide by whi­ch of the two wayes you thinke good, and you shal find that he gaineth 16 lb 13 s 4 d in the 100 pound.

Item if the pound waight which cost 4 s be sold again for 3 s 4 d: I demaund what is lost in the 100 lb of mony?

Answer. Say if 4 s loose: ⅔ what shal 100 lb loose? Multiplie and diuide and you shal find 25 lb: and so much is lost vppon the 100 lb of money.

Item if C waight of any commoditie cost 45 lb: And the buyer repenting would loose 5 lb in the 100 lb of money: I demaūd how [Page] the pound may be solde: his losse to be nei­ther more nor lesse than after the rate a­foresaide of 5 by the hundreth?

Answer. By the Rule of thrée, if 100 lb loose 5 lb what shal 45 lb léese? Work and you shal finde 2 ½ lb: which rebated from the prin­cipal 45: resteth 42 lb 15 s: Lastly say if 112 lb yéeld but 42-15 s: what 1 pound? multiply & diuide, and you shal find 7 s 7 d 17/28. And so much is the pound worth after that losse.

A Grocer hath bought 2 péeces of reasōs: waying 175 ½ lb 182 ¼ lb 191 lb: tare for eache fraile 2 ¼ lb: at 25 ½ s the C waight. The question is what they amounte too in money?

I answere 6 lb 8 s [...]/40.

A Grocer hath bought 3 sacks of Almonds waying 267 ½ lb tare 2 lb: 257 ½ lb tare 2 ½ lb 252 lb tare 3 lb at 2 s 10 ½ the pounde what amount they too in money?

I answere 110 lb—11-7 ⅛ d.

The ninth Chapter treateth of lengthes and breadthes of Arras, and other clothes with o­ther questions incident vnto length and breadth.

IF a péece of Arras be 7 els and ¼ long: & 5 els and ⅖ broad: how many els square doth the same péece containe?

Answer. Multiply the length by the bredth that is to say 7 ¼ by 5 ⅔: And therof wil come 4 [...] 11/12 elles: so manye elles square doeth the same péece containe.

Item more a péece of Arras doeth con­taine 22 elles square, And ye same being in length 3 1/ [...] elles I demaunde how manye elles in bredth the same péece doth cōtaine?

Answer Diuide 22 elles by 2 1/ [...] and therof commeth 6 10/13: So many elles doth ye same containe in bredth

Item more a Merchant hath 3 ¼ elles of Arras, at 1 ⅔ elles broade which he wyll chaunge with another man for a péece of Arras, that is 7/8 el square. The question is howe manye elles of that squarenesse ought the first Merchant is to haue.

[Page] Answere. Multiplie the first Merchantes péece his length by his breadth, and you shall find it containeth 5 5/12 elles, which 5 5/12 elles you shall diuide by ⅞ and you shall finde 6 4/21 elles: and so many elles of that squarenesse, ought the latter Merchant to giue the first.

Item, a student hath bought 3 [...]/2 yards of broade Cloth, at 7 quarters broade, to make a Gowne: and should line the same throughout with Lambe, at a foote square eche skin: the question is now how many skinnes he ought to haue?

Answeare. Séeke firste the number of yards square that his cloth containeth, which to doe, multiplie 3 ½ his length, by 1 ¾ hys breadth, and you shal find 6 ⅛ yeards square: then say by the rule of thrée: if 1 yeard square giue 9 foote, what shal 6 ⅛? worke, and you shall finde 55 ⅛ skinnes.

Item more, a Lawier hath a rich péece of séeling come home which is 34 foote, and thrée inches long: and 7 foote and 2 ½ inches high: the Ioiner is to be paide by the yard square: the question is, how many yeards [Page] this péece containeth?

Answere. Multiplie his length by hys breadth, that is to wit, 24 ¼ foote by 7 5/24 foote and you shall finde 174 77/96 foote square, which 174 you shall diuide by 9 (for so many foote make a yeard square) and you shall finde 19 yeardes, 3 foote, and 77/96 of a foote: and so ma­ny yeards doth this péece holde.

Item, bought a péece of Hollande Cloth containing 36 elles ⅓ Flemmishe: The question is, how many Elles Englishe it makes?

Answere. You muste note, that 5 Elles Flemmish do make but 3 Elles Englishe: Therfore say by the Rule of thrée: if 5 elles Flēmish make but 3 elles english, how ma­ny Elles Englishe will 36 ⅓ Elles Flēmish make? Multiplie and diuide, and you shall finde 21 ⅘: and so many Elles English doth 36 ⅓ Elles Flemmish containe. The like is to be done of all others.

Item more, I haue bought 342 Elles Flemmish, of Arras worke at two Elles broade, Flemmish, and I woulde line the same with Ell broad Canuas of English [Page] measure: The question is, howe many [...] Elles English will serue my turne?

Answere. For as much, as 3 elles En­glish are worth 5 elles Flemmish: therfore put 3 elles English into his square: in mul­tiplying 3 by himselfe, whiche maketh 9: Likewise multiplie the English ell which is 5 quarters euery way into himself squarely, and you shal finde 25: Then multiplie 342 whiche is the length of the péece, by 2 whiche is the breadth, and thereof commeth 684: then say by the rule of 3, as before: if 25 elles square of Flemmishe measure be worth 9 elles square of Englishe measure, what are 684 of Flemmish measure? multiply and di­uide, and you shal find 246 6/25 elles English.

The same is also wrought by the backer Rule of 3, in séeking the squares contained in the Flemmish ell of 2 elles broade (which are 18): and also in séeking the squares con­teined in the English ell (which are 25:) then say by the Rule of 3 backward: if 18 quar­ters require 34 elles, what shal 25 quarters giue? Multiply, & diuide by ye Rule of 3: Re­uerse, & you shal finde as before 246 6/25 elles Englishe.

[Page]Item more, at 3 s 4 d the Flemmishe Ell what is the Englishe Ell worth after the rate?

Answere. Say, if 5 Elles Flemmish be worth 3 Elles Englishe, what is one Ell Flemmish worth? Multiplie, and diuide, and you shall finde ⅗ of an Englishe Ell: Then say by the Rule of thrée, if ⅗ of an Ell bée worth 3 ½ s, what is one ell English worth? multiplie and diuide, and you shall finde 5 s 6 4/9 d?

Item more, at 8 s 4 d the Flemmish El square, what is the English El worth after that rate.

Answere. Say by the aforesaide reason: if 25 Elles Flemmish square be worth 9 els square Englishe, what is one Ell square Flēmish worth? work, & you shal find 9/25 of a an Ell square English: Then saye, if 9/25 of an Englishe Ell be worth 8 ½ s, what is 1 square Ell worth? Multiplie and diuide, & you shall finde 2 [...] s—1 7/9 d: and so much is the Englishe Ell worth.

[Page]Itē, more at 6 s 8 d ye Ell square, what shall a peece of cloth cost that is 7 ½ Elles long, and 3 ¼ Elles broade?

Answere. Multiplie the breadth by the length, and you shall finde 24 ⅜ elles square: Thē say by the Rule of thrée: if 1 Ell square costa 6 ⅔ s what 24 [...]/8? Multiplie and diuide and you shal finde: 8 lb— 2 s6 d: and so muche the same péece of cloth shall coste.

Item more, a Mercer solde 2 péeces of silke. To wit, 24 ¼, 24 ⅓, and 25 yeards at 9 ¾ s the yeard: and was glad to receiue in parte of payment againe, a Cloth con­taining 34 ½ yeardes at 7 ⅔ s the yeard: The question is now, what the Debitor is in the Creditors debt: Worke, and you shall finde, he oweth the Mercer 22 lb— 3 s— 2 ¼ d.

The tenth Chapter entreateth of the reducing of the Pawnes of Geanes into Englishe yeardes.

NOte, that 100 Pawnes doe make 26 yeardes: wherevpon [...] Pawnes 11/13 do make 1 yeard, and 1 Pawne after that rate and proportion is 13/5 [...] of a yeard.

In 4563 Pawns of Geanes, how ma­ny yeards Englishe?

Answere. Say by the Rule of thrée, if 100 Pawnes do make 26 yeards, what will 4563 Pawnes make? Multiplie, and di­uide, and you shall finde 1186 yeards 19/5 [...]: so many yeardes doe 4563 Pawnes make.

Otherwise, take some other number at your pleasure, as 10 Pawns, which is ye 1/1 [...] part of 100: then to find his proportiō take ye 1/10 parte of 26, which is 2 ⅗: and then saye also by the Rule of thrée: if 10 Pawnes giue 2 [...]/5 yeardes, what wil 456 Pawnes giue? worke, and you shall finde 1186 19/50 yeardes [Page] as before.

More, at 2 s 6 d the Pawne of Geanes what will the Englishe yeard bée worth after that rate?

Answere. Say by the Rule of thrée, if 1 [...]/5 [...] of a yeard cost 2 ½ s what one yeard? Mul­tiplie, and diuide, and you shall finde 9 s— 7 5/13 d.

More, if 346 ½ Pawnes coste 30 lb— 13 s—4 d sterling, what is that ye En­glishe yearde after the rate?

Answere. Saye by the Rule of thrée: if 346 ½ Pawnes cost 30 ⅔ lb, what are 3 11/13 Pawnes worth (for so many Pawnes make a yeard:) Multiplie, and diuide, and you shall finde 3804/27017 partes of a pound, whiche in knowen numbers is worth 2 s—9 d— 20439/ [...]0 [...]77.

The eleauenth Chapiter entrea­teth of Rules of Loane and Interest, with certaine necessarie Que­stions and Proofes inci­dent thervnto, &c.

ITē, lent my friend 326 lb for 5 ½ mo­neths simply without any Interest, vp­pon condition, to haue the like curtesie a­gaine when I néede: But when I came to borrowe, he could spare me but 149 lb — 8 s — 4 d: the question is now how long time, I ought to haue the vse thereof, to counteruaile my friendship before tyme shewed him?

Answeare. Saye by the Backer Rule of thrée: if 326 giue 5 ½ moneths, what time will 149 lb 5/12 giue? Multiplie, and diuide, and you shall stade 12 moneths: and so long time ought I to vse his mony.

The Proofe.

Item, lent my friend 149 lb—8 s—4 d, for 12 moneths: The question is nowe, [Page] howe muche money he ought to lende me againe for 5 ½ monethes to recompence my friendshippe shewed him?

Answere. Say by the backer or reuerse Rule of 3: if 12 moneths giue 149 5/12, what shall 5 ½ moneths giue? worke: and you shal finde 326 lb: and so much ought he to lende me to requite my gentlenesse or good turne.

Two other Braunches yet more for Proofe out of the same Questions.

Item, lent my friend 149 lb—8 s— 4 d — for 12 monethes, to haue the like friendshippe againe when I néede: And comming to borrowe of him he very cur­teously tooke me 326 lb (for that he coulde well then spare the same:) The question is nowe, how long I ought to occupie it, not vsurping frienshippe, but in his due time to restore it againe.

Answere. Say by the Rule of thrée Re­uerse, if 149 5/12 giue 12 moneths, what shall 326 lb giue? Multiplie, and diuide, and you [Page] shall finde, that at 5 ½ monethes terme, I ought to restore it againe.

Proofe.

Item lent my friend 326 lb for 5 ½ mo­nethes: The question is nowe, how ma­ny pounds he ought to lend me for 12 mo­neths to recompence the pleasure againe.

Answere. Worke by the rule of thrée Reuerse, as you haue done before, and you shall finde 149 lb—8 s—4 d.

Againe, foure other selected questions of Loane and Interest, all out of one braunch, and eche one also a necessarie Question, and a particular proofe to other.

ITem, lent my friend 430 lb at Interest for 3 moneths to receiue after the rate of 8 lb in the 100 for 12 monethes: The question is, what the Interest commeth it?

[Page] Answere. Say by the firste parte of the Rule of 5 numbers forwarde: if 100 lb in 12 monethes gaine 8 lb, what shall 430 gaine in [...] moneths? Multiplie the firste by the seconde for your Diuisor: and the other three the one into the other for your diuidēd: and you shall finde 8 lb — 12 s.

Proofe.

Item a friend of mine receiued of mée 8 lb — 12 s for the Interest and Vse of 430 lb for 3 monethes terme: the questi­on is now, what he tooke in the 100 lb for 12 moneths after that rate.

Answere. Say by the first part, or rule of 5 numbers forward: if 430 lb in 3 mo­neths did pay 8 lb—12 s, what doth 100 lb in 12 moneths, take after that rate? worke, and you shall finde 8 lb: and so much he tooke vpon the 100 lb for 12 monethes.

A third question and Proofe also wrought by the backer rule of 5 Numbers.

Item, lente my friende 430 lb to receyue for the Interest thereof: after [Page] the rate of 8 lb in the 100 lb for 12 mo­nethes: The question is now, how long time my friend ought to haue the vse ther­of, that it may be returned with 8 lb 12 s gaines.

Answere. Say by the Backer Rule of 5 numbers: if 100 lb in 12 monethes doe gaine 8 lb: how long time shall 430 lb be a gaining of 8 lb — 12 s? Multiplie the firste and the second into the laste for your diui­dend: and the thirde and fourth multiplie togither for for your diuisor: And then diuide and you shal finde 3 moneths: the iuste time that my friend ought to vse it, to retourne it with 8 lb— 12 s gaine.

A fourth deriued question out of this branch which is a Proofe of this last, and also of the other two going before.

ITem, how much money ought a Mer­chant to deliuer after 8 lb in the 100 for 12 moneths that in 3 moneths I may gaine 8 lb — 12 s.

Answere. You maye also if you please [Page] worke it by the Golden Rule of thrée at twice, firste saying if 3. moneths gaine 8. lb. what 12 months gaine? you shal finde 34 lb: Then say againe, if 8 lb— become of 100 lb what shall come of 34 lb—8 s? worke, and you shall finde: the answere to the question, whiche is 430 lb: and so muche ought the Merchant to deliuer.

But moste briefly it is aunswered by the Backer Rule of 5 numbers, where I argue thus, saying: if 100 lb be 12 monethes a gai­ning of 8 lb: then but for 3 moneths terme, onely to take 8 lb — 12 s muste néedes be a good rounde summe: to worke it, sette your number thus, 100 — 12 — 8 — 3 — 8 ⅗: multiplying the firste into the second: and al­so by 43 the product of the fift for your diui­dend: and the third and fourth togither with 5 the Denominator of your Fraction, for your Diuisor: then diuide, and you shal find as before 430 lb: The true solution to your question.

The tvvelfth Chapter treateth of the making of Factors which is ta­ken in twoo sortes.

THe first is when the estimation of the Factor, is taken vppon the sending of the Merchant: as if the estimation of his per­son be 1/ [...], it is vnderstoode, that he shall haue ¼ of the gaine, and the Merchaunte the o­ther ¼.

The other sorte is when the estimation of his making is out of the sending of the Merchaunt: as if the order and agréement betwéen them were such, that the Merchant shall putte in 800 lb: and the Factor for hys making shall haue ¼: neuerthelesse he shall haue but ⅕ of gaine or profit: for the ¼ of 800 is 200 (for the estimation of his making) which with the 800 lb make 1000 lb; wher­of the 200 lb is ⅕.

A Merchaunt dothe putte in 800 lb [Page] into the handes of hys Factor: vnder suche condition, that the saide Factor shall haue ¼: And after certayne time, they finde in profite 124 lb—6 s— 8 d I demaunde howe muche the Merchant shall haue hereof, and howe muche oughte the Factor to haue?

Answere. When the estimation of the Factor is out of the sending of the Mer­chaunt, it maketh [...] for the Merchant [...] for the Factor

But if that his estimation be at the sen­ding of the Merchaunt, then it maketh but [...] for the Merchant [...] for the Factor.

For the Merchaunt is then to haue ¾ and the Factor ¼.

[Page]A Merchant doth putte into the handes of his Factor 800 lb, & the Factor 400 lb to haue the ⅕ of the profite: I demaunde nowe, for howe much his person is estée­med: when the same is counted vpon the sending of the Merchant.

Answere. According to the tenor and order before prescribed in the firste Rule: That is, if his estimate be ¼, he shall haue the [...]/4 of the gaine. Therefore saye by the Rule of 3 direct: If ¼ taken putte in 400 lb what is ye estimate, or putting in of ⅕ taking? Multiplie, and diuide, and you shal find 320 lb: and so much is the person of the Factor e­stimated.

Otherwise.

To finde the estimation of the person of the Factor, you shall consider, that séeyng it was agréede betwéene them, that the Fa­ctor shoulde take the ⅕: then the Merchaunt shall haue the residue, which are ⅘: where­fore the gaine of the Merchant, vnto that of the Factor is in such proportion as 5 vnto 4: Then if you will know the estimation of the person of the Factor: Say, if 5 giue 4, what [Page] will 400 giue? multiply and diuide, and you shal find 320 lb: And so much is the person of the Factor estéemed to be worth.

Other conditions then these aforesaid, may also be betwéene Merchauntes and Factors without respect, either of sending or not sen­ding of the Merchaunt: where most commō ­ly the estimation of the bodie of the Factor is in suche proportion to the stocke whiche the Merchaunt layeth in, as the gaine of the saide Factor is vnto the gaine of the Merchaunte. As thus: if a Merchant do deliuer into ye hāds of his Factor 400 lb & he to haue half the pro­fit: The person of the said Factor shal be estée­med to bée worth 400 lb And if the Factor do take but ⅓ of the gaine: he shoulde haue but ½ so much of the gaine as the Merchant taketh: which muste haue ⅔: wherefore the person of the Factor is estéemed but the ½ of that which the Merchaunte layeth in. That is to saye 200 lb.

And if the Factor did take the ⅖ of the gain, then the Merchant shal take the residue whi­che are ⅖: wherefore the gaine of the Mer­chaunt vnto the Factor is then in suche pro­portion as 3 vnto 2: wherevpon if you wyll [Page] then know the estimation of the person of the Factor. Say if 3 giue 2: what shal 400 giue? work and you shal find 266 ⅔ pounds: And so much is the person of the Factor estéemed to be worth.

And if the Merchaunte shoulde deliuer vnto his Factor 400 pounde and the Fa­ctor woulde lay in 80: and his person to the ende he might haue the ½ of the gaine I demaunde howe muche shall his person be estéemed?

Answer. Abate 80 from 400: and there wil remaine 320. And at so muche shall hys person be estéemed.

A Merchaunt hath deliuered vnto his Factor 900 lb to gouerne in the trade of merchandise, vpon condition that he shall haue the 1/ [...] of the gain, if any thing be gai­ned: and also to beare the ⅓ of the losse if any thing be lost: Now I demaunde howe much his person was estéemed at?

Answer. Séeing that the Factor taketh the [...]/3 of the gaine, his person ought to be estéemed [Page] as muche as ½ of the stocke, whiche the Mer­chant layeth in. That is to saye the ½ of 900 pound which is 450: The reason is, because ⅓ of the gaine that the Factor taketh: is the ½ of the 2/ [...] of the gain that the Merchant taketh, and so the Factor his person is esteemed to be worth 450 pound.

A Merchaunte hathe deliuered vnto hys Factor 600 pound. And the Factor layeth in 250 pound and his persō. Now bicause he layeth in 250 pound, and his person: it is agréed betwéene them, that he shal take the ⅖ of the gaine. I demaunde for howe much his person was estéemed?

Answer. For as muche as the Factor ta­keth ⅖ of the gaine, he taketh ⅔ of that which the Merchant taketh: for ⅖ are the ⅔ of ⅗. And therefore the Factors laying in, ought to bée 400 pounde, which is ⅔ of 600 pounde that the Merchant laid in: Then Subtract 250, whiche the Factour did laye in from 400 pounde whiche shoulde haue bene his whole stocke: And there remaineth 150 pound: For the estimation of his person.

[Page]More, a Merchaunt hathe deliuered vn­to hys Factour 840 lb vpon condition that the Factor shal haue the gaines of 160 lb as though he laide in so muche readie mo­ney: I demaunde what portion of the gain the said Factor shal take?

Answer Sée what parte the 160 lb (which the Factor layde in) is of 950 whiche is the whole stocke of theyr company: And you shal find 3/19: And such part of the gaine shall the Factor take.

But in case, that in making theyr co­uenauntes, it were so agréede betwéene them: that the Factour shoulde haue the gaine of 160 lb of the whole stocke whiche the Merchaunt layeth in: That is to saye of the 800 lb: then shoulde the Fa­ctor take ⅕ of the gaine: for 160 is ⅕ of 800 pounde.

The thirtenth Chapter entreateth of Rules of Barter, and exchanging of Merchandise, which is distinct into 7 Rules, with diuerse other ne­cessarie Questions inci­dent therevnto.

1. Rule.

TWo Merchauntes willing to chaunge theyr Merchaundise, the one with the o­ther: The one hath 24 broade clothes at 10 lb 10 s the péece: The other hath Mace, at 12 s the pounde. The question is howe manye pounde of Mace, he oughte to giue him for his clothes, to saue himself harme­lesse and be no loser.

Answer. Séeke first by the Rule of thrée, what ye 24 clothes cost at 10 lb 10 s the péece. And you shall finde 252 lb, Then to finde the quantitie of Mace: Say againe by the rule of thrée, if 12 s buy one pound what shall 252 lb buy me? Worke and you shal finde: 420 lb of Mace. And so many pounde oughte he to giue for his clothes.

[Page] The proofe.

Two barter, the one hath 420 lb of Mace at 12 s the pound, to barter or change for broade clothes at 10 lb 10 s the péece, The question is howe many broade clothes he ought to giue for all his mace.

Answer. First saye if 1 cost 12 s what 400? you shal finde 5040 s: then say againe if 10 ½ lb giue 1 cloth, what shall 5040 s giue? worke and you shall finde 24 clothes: youre desire.

2. Rule.

Two chaunge merchaundise for mer­chandise the one hath Pepper at 2 s 4 d the pound: to sel for readie money: But in barter he will haue no lesse then 3 s the pound. And the other hath Holland at 5 s 6. d the ell readie money. The questi­on is nowe at what price he ought to deli­liuer the ell in barter to saue him selfe harmelesse.

[Page] Answer. Saye by the Rule of thrée di­rect: if 2 ⅓ s readie money giue 3 s in barter what shal 5 ½ s giue in barter? you shal finde 7 1/14 s: and at that price oughte the seconde Merchaunte to sell hys Hollande in bar­ter.

The proofe.

Two barter the one hath Holland at 5 s 6 d in the ell to sell for readie money: And in barter he will haue 7 1/14 s: the other hath Pepper at 2 s 4 d the lb to sel for rea­die money. The question is now howe he ought to sel it in barter.

Answer. Say by the Rule of thrée direct if 5 ½ redie mony giue 7 1/14 s in barter, what ought 2 ⅓ s to take in barter? multiplie and diuide and you shal finde 3 shillings your de­sire.

3. Rule.

Two barter, the one hath cloth of Arras at 30 shillings the ell readie money: but in barter hée will haue 35 ½ shillings. [Page] And the other hath white wines, which he deliuered in barter for 16 lb for a Tunne. The question is now what his wines cost the Tunne in readie money.

Answer. Say by the rule of thrée direct, if 35 ½ s in barter giue but 30 readie money: what did 16 lb in barter cost? Work and you shal finde 13 lb—10 [...]/ [...] s: and so much cost his wines for a Tunne readie money.

The proofe.

Two barter merchandise for merchan­dise. The one hath wines white: at 13 lb 10 10/ [...]1 s the Tunne to sell for readie mo­ny: But in barter he deliuered it for 16 lb. The other to make his matche good and saue himselfe harmelesse: deliuereth Ar­ras at 35 ½ s the ell: The question is nowe what an ell of his Arras coste in readye money.

Answer. Saye by the Rule of thrée directe if 16 lb in barter giue but 13— 10 30/71 s in re­die money: what shal 35 ½ s yéelde in barter? [Page] worke and you shall finde: 30 shillings your desire.

4. Rule.

Two barter, the one hath Carsies at 14 lb the péece, readie money: But in barter he wil haue 18 lb. And yet he wil haue the ⅓ part of his ouerprice in readie money: And the other hath Ginger at 8 groats the puund to sel for readie money. The questi­on is how he ought to deliuer the Ginger by the lb in barter to saue himselfe harme­lesse and make the barter equal.

Answer Item, for the working of thys question and suche other the like, you muste vnderstande, if the partie ouerselling his wares require to haue also some portion in readye money: as [...] &c. Then shall you rebate the same demaunded part whatsoeuer it be from the ouer price And also from the iuste price. And those two numbers that shal remaine after the subtraction is made, shall be the two first numbers in the Rule of thrée. And the iuste price of the same merchandise [Page] shall be the thirde number, whiche by the operation of the Rule of thrée directe shall yeelde you a true solution: howe and at what price, you shal ouersel that your merchandise to saue your selfe harmelesse, and make the barter equal.

Example.

Take the ⅓ (of eightéene) which is the ouerprice of his cloth: which ⅓ of eightéen: is sixe, whiche as appeareth here in the margent you must subtract [...] from 18: there resteth 12. And also abate it from 14 which is the iuste price of the cloth: and there remai­neth 8: which 8 and 12, are the two firste numbers in the Rule of thrée. Then take 8 groates or 2 [...]/1 shillings for the third nū ­ber. Then say by the Rule of thrée directe: if 8 s giue 12 s what shall 2 ⅔ s giue? Multiply and diuide, and you shal finde 4 s: And for so much shal the second Merchāt sel his Ginger, or his commoditie in bar­ter, to ballaunce the same equal.

[Page] The proofe.

Two barter, the one hath Fine Carsies at 14 lb the péece readie money: But in barter he will haue 18 lb. And yet he will haue the ⅓ part of his ouerprice in readie mony: And the other hath Ginger, whiche he hauing cunning ynough to make the barter equal, deliuered for 4 s the pounde. The question is nowe what his Ginger cost him in readie mony.

Answer. After you haue made the sub­traction, abating 6, the ⅓ part of 18: both frō 18 and 14: as before was taught you, then wil there remain 8: and 12 for your two first numbers in the Rule of thrée. Then say, if twelue giue but eighte: what shall come of 4 the ouerprice of the pounde of Ginger? Mul­tiplye and diuide, and you shall finde 2 s 8 d your desire.

[Page]Two Merchaunts barter Merchandise for merchaundise, the one hath Denshire whits at 7 lb — 13 s 4 d the péece readie money: but in barter he doth them awaye for 8 lb — 3 s — 4 d. And yet he wil haue the ⅓ parte of his ouerprice in readie mo­ney. And the other hath Cottens at 3 lb the peece readie money. The question is now at what price he oughte to sel or exchange his Cottens in barter to saue him selfe harmelesse, and make the barter equal.

[...]

Answer. First séeke ⅓ parte of 8 lb — 3 s — 4 d: whiche is 2 lb — 14 — 5 ⅓ d which rebated from 8 — 3 —4 d, there resteth as appeareth by the example aboue saide 5 —8 — 10 2/2 d, which ⅓ of 8— 3 — 4 d also reba­ted from 7 — 13 — 4 d there resteth 4 18— 10 ⅔ the two firste numbers in the Rule of thrée. And the 3 lb which is the neate price of the péece of Cotten is the thirde number. Then saye by the Rule of thrée derect: as was taught before: if 4 — 18— 10 ⅔ d [Page] giue 5-8 — 10 ⅔ d what shall 3 lb giue? mul­tiple and deuide and you shall finde 3 lb — 6 s — 1 91/292 d the iuste price that he ought to deliuer his Cottens in barter.

5. Rule.

Two Merchauntes wil chaunge Mer­chaundise for Merchandise, the one hath Carsies at 40 s the péece to sell for ready monie: And in barter hée will sell them for 56 s 8 d and he will gayne after 10 lb vpon the 100 lb: And yet he will haue the ½ of his ouerprice in ready monie: The other hath Flaxe, at 2 d the pound readie monie: The question is nowe howe he shall sell the pound of his Flaxe in barter.

Answer. Sée firste at 10 lb vppon the 100 lb what the 56 ⅔ s commeth to, in say­ing by the Rule of thrée direct, if 100 lb giue 110 lb what 55 ⅔? multiplie and deuide and you shall finde 3 lb — 2 s — 4 d of whiche the [...]/2 that he demaundeth in ready monie, is, 1 lb — 11 s — 2 d: the same 31 s 2 d abated from 40 s, and also from 56 s 8 d: [Page] there will remayne 8 shillings 10 pence: and 25 shillings 6 pence, for the two first num­bers in the Rule of thrée: And 3 pence the price of the lb of flax for the thirde number. Thē Multiply and diuide, and you shal find, 9 [...]8/5 [...] d. And for so much shal he sel the pound of flaxe in barter.

6. Rule.

Two are willing to exchaunge mer­chaundise: the one hathe Norwiche Gro­graines at 35 shillings the péece redie mo­ney: And in barter he will haue 30 shil­lings, and he will haue the ¼ parte of his ouer price in readie money: The other hath Norwich Stockings at 40 shillings the Doosen to sell for readie money: But in as much as the first Merchaunts Gro­grains are no better, he woulde deliuer them so to ballance the barter, that he may gaine after 10 lb in the 100 lb, The que­stion is now how he shall sell his hose the doosen in barter.

[Page] Answere. Say, if 100 giue 110, what shall 40 s giue, which is the iuste price of the dozen of stockings? multiplie, and diuide, and you shall finde 44 s: Then take the ¼ of 30 s whiche is 7 s — 6 d: And subtracte it from 25 s, and also from 30 s: And there will remaine 17 s — 6— and 22 s — 6 d, for the two firste numbers in the Rule of thrée: and 44 s which is the iust price (with his gaine in the dozen of stockings) for the thirde number: Then multiplie and diuide, and you shall finde 56 s — 6 6/7: and for so muche he is to sell his dozen of stockings in barter.

7. Rule.

Two Merchantes will chaunge theyr merchandise one with the other: the one hath 720 Elles of Cambricke at 5 s the Ell to sell for readie money: but in bar­ter he requireth 6 s — 8 d: And yet notwithstanding hée loseth by it after 10 lb vppon the 100 lb: wherevppon he requireth the ½ of his ouer price in readye money: And the other Mer­chant hauing skill ynoughe to make the [Page] barter equal deliuereth English Saffron at 30 s the lb: The question is now what his Saffron coste the pounde in readie money.

Answer. You muste firste séeke what is lost vpon ye 100 lb, which to do you may say if you please, if 100 lb loose 10? what shal 6 ⅔ s loose? worke and you shall finde ⅔ shillings (or eight pence) whiche muste be rebated from 6 s 8 d: So resteth 6 shillings still: or you may say if 100 lb giue me but 90 lb what shal 6 s 8 d giue? Worke this waye either and you shall finde also as before, directly in your quotient 6 s: your desire. Then are you next to cast vp what the 720 elles of Cābrick commeth to at 6 s 8 d the ell and you shall finde 240 pounde: the ½ whereof the Cam­bricke Merchaunt wil haue in readie money (which is 120 pound) nextly you muste caste what the Cambrick cōmeth to after his losse in the 100 lb whiche as you founde is but 6 s an ell: and you shal find 216 lb: now must you subtract (his readie money which is 120 lb) out of 240 lb: & also of 216 lb. And there wil remaine 120 lb & 96 lb for your two first numbers in the Rule of thrée, and 30 s the o­uerprice of your Saffron for the third nūber. [Page] Then multiply and diuide, and you shal find 24 s: and so muche didde hys Saffron coste in readie money.

Two Merchants barter, the one hath 50 Clothes, to put away for readie mony at 11 lb the Cloth: and in barter putteth them awaye for 12 lb: taking Hollande Cloth at 20 d the Flemmish Ell, whych was worth no more but 18 d: The que­stion is nowe, what Holland payeth for the Cloth: and what he winneth or looseth by the bargaine?

Aunsweare. 50 Clothes at 11 lb the Cloth, commeth to 550 lb: and put away at 12 the péece, maketh 600 lb: Then to finde what Holland payeth for the Cloth: Say by the Rule of thrée direct, if 20 d buy 1 Ell: what 600 lb? worke, and you shall finde 7200 Elles: Nowe to finde the estate of his gaine or losse, you must séeke what his 7200 Elles commeth to at 18 d the Ell: worke by the Rule of Proportion direct, and you shal finde 540 lb, which is not so muche as his Clothes were worth in readie mony, by 10 lb: and so much lost the first Merchant [Page] by his exchange.

A Venetian hath in London 100 pée­ces of Silke, to put away for ready mony at 3 lb the péece. But in Barter he dely­uereth thē for 4 lb the péece, taking woolles of a Felmonger at 7 lb 10 s the C. waight which was worth no more but 6 lb the C. in ready money: The question is now, what woolles payeth for the Silkes, and whiche of them winneth or looseth by the barter.

Answer. 100 péeces of Silkes at 3 lb, is 300 lb: and at 4 lb is 400 lb: Then to find what woolles payeth for the Silke: Saye by the rule of thrée direct: If 7 ½ d buy me 1 C. waight, what 400 lb? worke, and finde 53 ⅔ C. waight of wooll: Nowe to finde the estate of their gaine or losse, caste vppe his wooll at 6 lb the C. (for so muche they were worth readie mony) and you shal find 320 lb, which is 20 lb more than the Silkes were to be solde for in readie money: wherevppon the Venetian gained 20 lb by the Barter.

A Merchant hathe 53 ⅓ C. waight of [Page] wooll at 6 lb the C. to sel for ready mony [...] but in barter he will haue 7 lb — 10 s: and an other doeth barter wyth hym for Silkes which are worth 3 pounds a péece ready money: The question is now, how he ought to deliuer his Silkes the péece in barter? and howe manye payeth for the woolles.

Answere. Say by the Rule of Propor­tion, or the rule of thrée direct: If 6 lb for a C. waight readie money yéelde me 7 lb—10 s what will 2 lb yéelde, which is the iust price of a péece of Silke in barter? To make the Trucke equall: worke, and find 3 lb—15 s the price of a péece of Silke in barter: then saye, if 3 lb—15 s require 1 péece of Silke, how many péeces of Silke are bought wyth 400 lb, whiche is the valewe of the 53 ½ C. waight of wooll at 7 lb— 10 s: worke by the Rule of thrée direct, and you shall finde 106 péeces of Silke, and ⅔ of a péece: and so many péeces of Silke payeth for the woolles, and neither partie hath aduantage of other.

Two Merchants wil change merchādize ye one wt the other: The one of thē hath béere, at 6 s 8 d [Page] the Barrell to sell for ready money: but in barter he will sell the barrell for 8 s: and yet he wil gaine moreouer after 10 lb vpon the 100 lb: and the other hath white Spanish wooll at 20 s the Roue to sell for ready mony: the questiō is now, how he shal sell the Roue of wooll in barter?

Answere. Saye if 6 ⅔ s whiche is the iuste price of the barrell of Béere be solde in barter for 8 s, for how much shal 20 s (whi­che is the iuste price of the Roue of wooll) bée solde in barter? worke by the Rule of thrée direct, and you shall finde 24 s: Then for because the firste Merchant will gaine after 10 lb vpon the 100 lb, he maketh of his 100 lb — 110 lb: And therefore say by the Rule of thrée, if the second Merchant of 110 lb doe make but 100 lb, howe much shall he make of 24 s? Multiply, and diuide, and you shall finde 21 s—9 d 9/11 of a penny: And for so much shal he sel the Roue of wooll in barter.

Two Merchants wil change their cō ­modities the one with the other: The one of them hath white Paper at 4 s the resme to sell for ready mony: And in bar­ter [Page] he will doe it away for 5 s: and yet he wil gaine moreouer, after the rate of 10 lb vpon the 100 lb: and the other hath Mace at 14 s — 6 d the pound waight, to sel in barter: Now I demaund what the poūd did coste in readie money?

Answere. Say, if 5 s whiche is the ouer price of the paper in barter be come of 4 s the iuste price, of howe muche shall come 14 s ½, which is the surprice of the pound of Mace in barter? Multiplie, and diuide, and you shall find 11 s — 10 d: Then for because the first Merchant of Paper will gaine after the rate of 10 vpon the 100: Say, if 100 do giue 110, what shall 11 ⅚ s giue? worke, and you shal finde 13 s — 0 d ⅕: and so muche didde the pounde of Mace coste in readie money.

The fourteenth Chapter entrea­teth of Exchaunging of money from one place to an other.

EXchaunge is no other thing then to take or receiue money in one Citie, to ren­der or pay the valewe thereof in an other Ci­tie, [Page] or else to giue mony in one place, and re­ceiue the value thereof in an other, at terme of certaine dayes, moneths, or fayres, ac­cording to the diuersitie of the place.

But this practise chiefly consisteth in the knowledge of the Mony or Coines in diuers places, of which for thy benefite, (after a few examples giuen to the Introduction to thys worke) I wil set down by certaine notes of diuersitie of the common and vsuall Coines in most places of Christendome for trafique.

And first I will beginne at Antwerpe, where they vse to make their Accomptes by Deniers de gros: that is to say by pence Flē ­mish, whereof 12 doe make 1 s Flemmish, and 20 s doe make 1 lb de Gros.

Item, a Merchaunte deliuered at Ant­werpe 400 poundes Flemmishe, to re­ceyue in London, 20 s sterling for euerie 23 s — 4 d Flemmishe: The question is nowe, howe muche sterling money is to be receyued at London for the saide 400 pounds Flemmish?

[Page] Answere. Saye by the Rule of thrée, if 23 ⅓ Flemmishe giue 20 s sterling, what 400 poundes Flemmishe? worke, and you shall finde 342 lb — 17 s — 1 5/7 d: and so muche sterling shal I receiue in London for the 400 lb Flemmishe.

Otherwise also wrought by Rules of Practise in taking the 1/7 of the Flemmish money deliuered: and abating the same from the principall, the rest is Englishe money sterling, as before.

[...]

A Merchant at London deliuereth 200 pound sterling for Antwerpe at 23 s 5 d Flemmishe the pounde sterling: The question is, how muche he muste receiue at Antwerpe.

Answer. Say by the Rule of thrée, if 1 lb sterling giue 23 s — 5 d Flēmish, what [Page] 200 lb sterling? worke, and you shall finde 234 lb — 3 s 4 d: So many pounds Flesh­mish shall he receiue at Antwerp for the said 200 lb sterling.

Otherwise also by Practise.

[...]

In Londō 200 lb sterling is deliuered by exchange, for Antwerpe at 23 s — 9 d Flemmishe the lb sterling: The questi­on is, what rate the Flemmishe money ought to be retourned to gaine 4 lb vppon the 100 lb sterling at London?

Answer. First say by the rule of 3 direct: if 1 lb sterling giue 23 2/4 Flemmishe, what 200 lb sterling? Multiplie, and diuide, and you shall finde 237 lb — 10 s: The whiche to returne to gaine 8 lb sterling in London. Say by the Backer Rule, if 200 lb sterling [Page] require the exchāge 23 s — 9 d Flemmish, what the exchange to make 208 lb styrling? worke by the Rule, and finde 22 s — 10 d 1/26 d Flemmish, the effect in the question re­quired.

If I take vppe money at Antwerpe af­ter 19 s — 4 d Flemmish, to pay for the same at London 20 s sterling: and when the day of payment is come, I am forced to returne ye same mony againe in Londō to pay my Bill of Exchange: So that for 20 s whiche I take vppe here at London, I muste paye 19 s — 6 d at Antwerpe, I demaunde whether I do winne or lose: and howe muche in or vpon the 100 lb of money?

Answer. Say by the rule of thrée: If 19 ½ giue 19 ⅓ what will 100 lb giue? Mul­tiplie, and diuide, and you shall finde 99 lb — 2 s 106/117 whiche being abated from 100 lb, there will remaine 9 s 11/117: and so muche do I lose vppon the 100 lb of money.

[Page]If I take vp at London 20 s sterling to pay at Antwerpe 22 s 4 d: and when the daye of payment is come my Factor is constrained to take vp money againe at Antwerpe, wherewith to pay the foresaide summe: and there he doeth receiue 23 s 4 d Flemish, forthwith I muste pay 20 s at London: the question is now, whether I do winne or loose, and howe muche vp­on the 100 lb of money after that rate.

Answere. Say by the rule of Proporti­on: if 22 ⅓ s giue 23 ⅓ s, what will 100 lb giue? Multiplie, and diuide, and you shall find 104 lb — 9 111/201 s: from the which abate 100 lb, and there will remaine 4 lb 9 5 [...]1/201 s, and so much is there gained vpon the 100 lb of money.

In Antwerpe is deliuered 200 lb Fle­mish by exchaunge for London, at 20 s sterling for euerie 23 s 4 d Flemmishe: The question is, at what rate the same is to be returned to gaine 5 lb vpō the 100 lb Flemish in Antwerp.

Answere. First say by the rule of thrée: if 23 ⅓ Flemish giue 20 s, what shall 200 lb [Page] giue? worke, and you shall finde 171 lb 8 s 6 6/7 d: Then say againe by the Rule of thrée direct, if 171 lb — 8 s — 6 6/7 sterling giue me 210 lb Flemishe, what shall 20 s sterling giue? worke and you shall find 24 s — 6 d Flemish. And at the same rate ought the same to be returned at Antwerpe to gaine 10 lb vppon the 100 Flemish.

A Merchaunt of Antwerpe deliuereth 234 lb — 3 s — 4 d Flemish, to receiue at London 200 lb sterling: the question is nowe, how the Exchange goeth after this rate.

Answere. Say by the Rule of 3 direct, if 200 giue 20, what giueth 234 ⅙? Mul­tiplie, and diuide, and you shall find 23 s 5 d and for so muche goeth the Exchaunge.

Item, the Exchange from London into France, is not like as it is in Flanders, but is deliuered by the French Crowne, whi­che is worth 50 soulx Turnois the péece.

Wherevpon also you muste note, that in France they make their accōpts by Franckes, Soulx [Page] and Deniers Tournois, whereof 12 Deni­ers maketh 1 Soulx Tournois, and 20 soulx maketh 1 lb Tournois, whiche they call a Liure or Franc. But the Merchauntes to make their accompts do vse French crowns, whiche is currant among them for 51 soulx Tournois: But by exchange it is otherwise, for it is deliuered but for 50 Soulx Tour­nois the Crowne, or as the taker vp of the money can agrée with the deliuerer. And note that this 🜄 Caracter representeth the Crowne by exchaunge, and is euer 50 soulx Tournois or French money.

A Merchaunt deliuereth in London 240 lb sterling after 5 s — 6 d sterling the Crowne, to receiue at Paris 50 soulx Tournois for euerie Crown, I demaund howe muche Tournois or French mony payeth ye billes for the said 240 lb sterling.

Answere. Saye by the Rule of thrée, if 5 ½ s sterling giue me 50 s Tournois, what shall 240 lb sterling giue? Reduce ye pounds into shillings: then multiplie and diuide, and you shal finde 2181 Liuers — 16 soulx, — 4 Deniers, and 4/11 Tournois, and so much pai­eth ye bils at Paris for ye said 240 lb sterling.

[Page]A Merchant deliuereth in Roā, or else­where in Fraunce, 1430 lb, or Francks: the whiche Francke or lb is 20 soulx or pound Tournois, to receiue in London 6 s 4 d sterling for euery 🜄 of 50 soulxe Tournois: The question is howe much sterling mony I ought to receiue at Lon­don for my 1430 pound Turnois?

Answere. Say, if 2 ½ lb giue me 6 ⅓ what wil 1430 giue me? worke, and you shall find 3622 s ⅔ sterling, which maketh 181 lb 2 s —8 d: and so much money is to be re­ceiued at London for the saide 1430 Liuers Tournois, after 6 s — 4 d for euery crown of 50, soulxe.

In London is deliuered 200 lb sterling by exchange for Paris, at 5 s — 9 d the 🜄 of 50 soulx Tou [...]nois: the question is at what price, the saide Crowne is to bée returned to gaine 6 lb vppon the 100 lb sterling at London.

Answere. Firste say by the Rule of thrée direct, if 5 ¾ sterling giue 50 soulx Turnois, what shall 200 lb sterling giue? worke, and [Page] you shall finde 1739 Franckes, or Liuers, 2 soulx 14/2 [...]. Then the which to returne and gaine [...] lb vpon the 100 lb in London: Saye by the Rule of three direct: if 17 [...]9 Francks 2 soulx 14/23 yeelde 1 lb. what the 🜄 of 50 soulx? worke, and finde 6 s — 1 d 7/50 the ef­fect required in the question.

A Merchant deliuered in London 160 lb sterling, to receiue in Biskaie for euerie 5 s — 6 d 1 Duckate of 374 Marueides, the question is, howe many Marueides I ought to receiue at Biskate.

Answere. Say, if 5 ½ s sterling giue 374 Marueides, what shall 100 lb sterling giue? Multiplie, and diuide, and you shall finde 217000 Marueides, and so many I oughte to receiue at Biskie for my 160 lb sterling.

A Merchant deliuereth in Bayon, 20000 Marueides. to receiue in London 5 s —8 d sterling, for euery Duckate of 374 Mar­ueides: the question is now howe muche sterling money payeth the Billes of Ex­change for the saide 20000 Marueides.

[Page] Answere. Say, if 374 Marueides make 1 Duckate, what 20000 Marueides? Mul­tiplie, and diuide, and finde 106 Duckates 178/187.

Then saye againe, if 1 Duckate giue 5 2/ [...] s: what giueth 106 178/187 Duckates? worke, and finde 30 lb — 6 s and 34/56 [...] s whiche is worth [...]/561 partes of a penny.

Otherwise it is wrought more briefer at one working, as in the laste question before, in considering, that 5 s — 8 d containeth 1 Duckate, or 374 Marueides. Therefore say by the rule of 3: if 374 Marueides giue 5 ⅔ s what 40000 Marueides: worke, and you shal also finde in your quotients: 30 lb — 6 s 34/561: and so many pound sterling is to be receiued for the 40000. Duckats.

In London 200 lb deliuered by Ex­change for Vigo 374 Marueids the Duc­kate, of 5 s — 10 d sterling, maketh 256457 1/7 Marueides: the whiche io re­turne and gaine 10 lb vpon the 100 lb in London: Saye by the rule of thrée di­recte, if 220 lb require 256457 1/ [...] Mar­ueides, what 5 s — 10 d? worke, and finde 340 Merueides, prises of euerie [Page] Duckate in returne, which is the effecte in the question required.

These may séeme sufficient for enstructi­ons.

NOtwithstanding for thy further aide and benefite hereafter followeth 6 spe­ciall and moste briefe Rules of Practise for English, French, and Flemmish money.

  • 1 teacheth how to turne Flemish to English sterling.
  • 2 teacheth how to turn English sterling to Flemish.
  • 3 teacheth how to turne Flemmish to French.
  • 4 teacheth how to turne French into Flemmish.
  • 5 teacheth how to turne sterling into French.
  • 6 teacheth & lastly, how to turne French into sterling.

The fifteenth Chapter entreateth of the saide 6 Rules of breuitie, and of valuation of English, Flemish, and French money, and how ech of them may easilie bee brought to others value.

How brieflie to reduce lb, s, and d Fle­mish, into lb, s, and d Englishe, Sterling.

IT is to be noted, that 7 pound Flemish maketh but 6 lb. sterling, 7 s Flemishe, maketh 6 s sterl. and 7 d flem. 6 d sterl. So that 7 yéeldeth but 6. Wherin is euidēt, that there is lost 1/7, (if it may be so called) when it is reduced into English money. Wherefore to know how much 233 lb. 13 s, 4 d, flemish maketh English, you must subtract from it 1/7, beginning with the pounds, &c. and that whi­che resteth after this subtraction is the sum required: so that 233 lb, 13 s, 3 d flem. ma­keth 200 lb, 5 s, 8 4/7 d. sterling.

[Page] Example. [...]

An other Example. [...]

To reduce lb s. and d. ster. into lb s d flem.

Note that a lb sterling, maketh 1 lb, 3 s, 4 d flem. that is 1 lb ⅙: 1 s ster. maketh 1 s ⅙ flem. and 1 ster. maketh 1 ⅙ Flem. So that there is gained (if it may so be called) ⅙ of the summe being thus reduced to Flem. For of 6/6 is made 7/6▪ which is 1 whole, and ⅙. Then to knowe how much 237 lb 7 s 6 d ster. ma­keth Flem. subtract from your ster. the ⅙ of the whole summe. and adde it to the same summe, and it maketh 276 lb 18 s 9 d, whi­che is the summe required.

Example. [...]

An other example. [...]

Ye shal note, that the equalitie of Flemish and French mony is this, that is to say, the lb [Page] Flemish, maketh 7 lb ⅕ French or Turnois 1 s Flemish maketh 7 s ⅕ French, & a great Flemish, maketh 7 d ⅕ French.

Wherefore to knowe howe muche 143 lb 4 s 9 d Flemish maketh French. Ye must multiplie the whole number twice by 6, be­ginning at d, and so forwarde: and the pro­duct of your second multiplication, diuide by 5, so that worke is finished. Or multiplie the saide summe by 7, and take out of it ⅕ adding it to the producte of your multiplication by 7, and that is your number required. So that as well by the one, as by the other, 143 lb 4 s 9 d Flemish, maketh 1031 lb 6 s 2 d ⅖ French or Tournois.

Example. [...]

An other Example. [...]

[Page] Another example. [...] or thus. [...]

A briefe Reduction of lb s and d French, into lb s and d Flemish.

Multiply 233 lb, 8 s, 4 d, fr. by 5, and diuide the product twice by 6, that is the saide num­ber by 6, and the product againe by 6: and the quotient of this seconde diuision is the thing required. So that 233 lb, 8 s, 4 d, fren. ma­keth 32 lb, 8 s, 4 d, 5/9 flemish.

Example. [...]

Another. [...]

To reduce lb, s and d Sterling, into lb s and d French or Tournois.

The lb ster. maketh 8 lb, 8 s french, that is to say, 8 lb ⅖: the s maketh 8 s ⅖, and the pe­ny 8 d ⅖ frenche. Wherefore to know what 231 lb, 13 s, 4 d ster. maketh french, ye must multiply your whole sum by 42, that is by 7, and the product of it by 6, and diuide thys se­cond product by 5, and that is the sum requi­red.

Otherwise multiply the sum ster. by 8, and adde twice to the product ⅖, and it shall pro­duce the sum required. So that both waies, 231 lb, 13 s, 4 d ster. maketh 1946 lb french. As here vnder followeth.

The same otherwise. [...]

[Page] An other Example. [...]

The same. [...]

To reduce lb s and d fren. into lb s d ster.

To know how much 1256 lb 12 s 6 d fren. maketh in sterling money, multiplie the sum by 5, and diuide the producte by 7 and 6 at twice, and the last quotient shal be the thing required that is to say, 1256 lb 12 s 6 d ma­keth 149 lb 11 s 11 d 4/7 sterling.

Example. [...]

An other Example. [...]

[Page]Note, that when any money is giuen by exchange at London for Roan at 71 d ½: or ra­ther 71 1/7, for the crown of 50 s french, there is neyther gaine nor losse, for it is one mony for an other, accompting 8 lb 8 s French for 1 lb sterling So the Gyuer loseth the time of payment which is about 15 dayes, & hée that taketh it, hath gaine of the same.

They of Rean that putte sorth, or take mo­ney by exchange for London, ought to haue like consideration.

Item, when any man giueth at London 64 d ⅓, or rather 64 d 2/7, to haue at one of the Faires of Lions a crowne de Marc, he that so giueth his mony, loseth the time, and he that taketh it, gaineth the same: for 62 d 2/7 is e­quall in value to 45 s French. He that put­teth or taketh money at Lions for London, ought to consider the same.

Item, when anye deliuer in Antwerpe 75 d, to receiue at Lions a crown of Marcke, hée that putteth it foorth, looseth the tyme, and hée that taketh it, gaineth the same: For 75 groates Flemish is equall in valewe to 45 s French.

[Page]Thus for this time I make an ende of the practise of exchaunge and the enstructions therevnto belonging, and according to my promise gratify such as are desirous to know the common coynes vsed for traffique a­mong Merchauntes in these Cities follow­ing: Here followeth a briefe declaration of their monies and ye recknings and accompts of them.

The sixteenth Chapter contay­neth a declaration of the valuation and diuersitie of coines of most places of Chri­stendome for traffique: And the manner of exchaunge in those places from one ci­tie or towne to an other, whiche knowne is righte necessarie for Merchauntes, by meanes whereof they doe finde the gaine or losse vpon the exchaunge.

ITem for as much as the greatest diuer­sitie of money of exchaunge is at Lions Therefore I will beginne duely of the mo­ney of that place.

At Lyons they vse Franckes, Soulxes and Deniers Tournois: a Francke maketh 20 [Page] Soulx, and one Soulx 12 Deniers: But the Merchants to kéepe their bookes of accompts doe vse French Crownes of the marke at 45 Soulx the péece, and doe diuide it into 20 s, 1 s and 12 d.

Item a Marke of golde 65 🜄 of the Marke, whiche serueth for exchaunge. And diuide it into 8 ounces. The ounce into 24 pēce or Deniers, the Denier into 24 graines: And so the sum or whole by imagination or gesse.

Also at Lyons there are 4 fayres in a yere, at the which they do commonlye exchaunge, whiche are from thrée monthes to thrée mon­thes.

At Geanes they vse the Soulx: on Duc­ket maketh lb. 3.

At Naples they vse Duckets, Tarie, and Graines: The Ducket maketh 5 Taris, & one tarie 20 graines, but they take 6 Duc­kets (whiche maketh thirtie taries) for the ounce.

[Page]A Ducket maketh 10 Carlins, & a Carlin 10 graines, so that 2 Carlins make a Tarie, and 100 graines make a Ducket.

At Rome they vse Duckets of the Cham­ber, one Ducket is worthe 12 Guylis, and a Guili 10 Soulx.

At Ʋenice they vse Duckets Curraunts at 124 Soulx a peece or 24 Deniers, & one De­nier maketh 32 picolis.

At Falerine and Messine they write, after ounce, tary, & graynes, and 1 ounce is worth 6 Duckets, or 30 taris, and 1 tary is twenty graines, and 1 graine 6 picolis, One Ducket is also worth 24 Carlins,

At Milan they vse lb. s. d. of Duckettes imperials, and 🜄 of exchaunge is worthe 4 lb.

At Lucques, Florence and Aucone they vse the 🜄 of gold: in gold the French Crowne is worth lb. 7: but at Buloigne, lb. 3.10 s

At Barselon they vse the soulx, the Ducket of exchaunge is worth 22 soulx.

At Valence and Saragosse they vse the Liuer, Soulx and Denier, the Frenche crowne of exchange is worth 20 soulx, and 1 soulx is 12 Deniers.

[Page]At the Fayres of Castill they vse the Mer­uaidies, the Ducket is worth 375 Meruai­dies.

At Lisbone they vse the Raies, one Duc­ket of exchaunge is worth 400 rayes.

At Noremburge, Franckford, and Auguste in Germanie they vse the Krentzers, whereof 60 make a Floryn.

At Antwerpe they vse lb. s and d de Gros, and they exchaunge into the Denier de Gros. To wit our English peny.

At London they vse the 1 lb sterling and 1 d sterling and they exchaunge in 1 d ster­ling.

The exchaunge of Lyons at sun­drie places.

Item at Lyons there is exchaunge in thrée sorts, at the cities and townes following.

Firste they deliuer at Lyons one Marke to haue or receiue at Naples almoste 41 ½ Duc­kets: at Venice, 70 Duckets corrant, at Rome 63 Duckets of the Chamber, Luques and Florence 65 🜄 of Gold, at Milan 82 🜄.

And contrariwise at the saide Cities a­foresaide they doe giue so muche of money to haue a marke at Lyons.

[Page]Secondlie they giue at Lisbone one 🜄 of Marke of 45 soulx Turnois a péece to haue at Gennes, almost 68 Soulx. At Palerme and Messine almoste 24 Carlins: at Barselone 22 soulx at Ʋalence or Saragosse 20 soulx. At the fayre at Castili 350 Meruaides: at L [...]sbone 360 Rats: in Antwerpe 57 Deniers de Gros: and at London 70 d sterling.

And contrariwise they do giue in the said Cities almoste as muche of their money to haue a Frēch Crown of the Marke at Lyons.

Thirdlye they doe giue at Lyons a 🜄 of the sunne to haue almost 93 Krentzers at Franck­forde, Auguste, Norenberge, or other Cities in Almaine.

Also at Lyons only they do pay the chaunge the 2/ [...] in gold, and 1/ [...] in mony, or else al in mo­ney in giuing 1 ½ for the hundreth.

Chaunges at Naples and other Townes.

Item at Naples they giue or deliuer al­most 112 Duckets to receiue at Rome, 100 Duckets of the chamber at the old value.

Through Luques and Florence they deliuer 100 Duckets Carlins to receiue there al­most 86 🜄 of gold.

[Page]Through Palerme & Messine one ducket of 5 Tary to receiue there almost 164 graines.

Throughe Milan one Ducket to receyue there almost 90 Soulx.

Throughe Geanes one Ducket to receyue there almost 65 soulx. The whole sum to be paide within 10 dayes after the sighte of the bil of exchaunge.

Also at Naples they deliuer one Ducket to receiue in Antwerpe almost 67 d or Deni­ers de Gros. within 2 monthes: At London almost 60 d sterling, in [...] months: At Barse­lone almost 20 Soulx within 2 monthes: At Ʋalence almost 18 soulx wtin 2 monthes: At Lisbone 333 Raies, within 3 monthes: and at the fayre at Castil, almost 340 Merueydes at the same faire.

Chaunge of Venice to other places.

At Venice they deliuer 100 Duckets curraunte to receiue in Almayne almoste 140. Florenes at 60 Krentzers the péece.

At Lucques and Florence almost [...]8 🜄 of gold in 10 dayes.

Likewise at Ʋenice they deliuer a Duc­ket curraunt to receiue at Palerme and Mes­sine, almoste 21 Carlins, at Milan almoste 93 [Page] Soulx. At Geanes almost 62 soulx, the whole at 10 dayes ende.

Of the Pair or Pari.

As touching the exchaunge, it is neces­sarie to vnderstande or knowe the Pair which the Italians call Pari which is no other thing than to make the money of the change of one Citie or towne to or with the money of an other, by meanes whereof they doe finde the gaines or losse vpon the exchange.

Example.

Item hauing receiued letters of credite of one of Antwerpe that the 🜄 of the sunne is there worth 7 soulx. The question is what the same is worth at London when the Pair or exchaunge goeth for 23 s?

Answer. Saye if 23 giue but 20 what gi­ueth 7: worke and finde 6 s 1 1/23 d: and so muche is the 🜄 of the sunne worth at Lon­don.

The seuenteenth Chapter contei­neth also a declaration of the diuersitie of the waightes and measures of moste places of Christendome for traffique. At the ende of whiche discourse are two tables, the one for waighte, and the other for measure, proportionate and reduced to an equalitie of our Englishe measure and waighte, by the aide whereof the ingenious may ea­silye by the Rule of three, conuerte the one into the other at their pleasure &c.

AT London and so all Englande throughe are vsed two kinds of waights and mea­sures, As the Troy waighte and the Haberde­poize: from the Troy waighte is deriued the proportion and quantitie of all kinde of drye and liquid measures, as Peckes, Bushels quarters &c. wherwith is bought and sold all kind of graine and other commodities mette by the Bushell. And in liquid, Ale, Béere, Wine, Oile, Butter, Honie, &c. vppon these [Page] groundes and statutes, is Bread made and solde by the Troy waight. And so is golde, siluer, pearle, pretious stones, and Iewelles. The least quantitie of this Troy waight is a graine, 24 of these graines make a penny waight, 20 penny waights an ounce: and 12 ounces a pound: 2 lb or 2 pintes of this wai­ghte maketh a quarte. And so ascending in­to bigger quantities, is produced the Mea­sures, whereby are solde our other naturall sustenaunce, vz. Ale, or Béere, with also o­ther necessarie commodities, as Butter, Honny, Herrings, Eeles, Sope, &c. Al which last before rehearsed, though their Measures (wherein they are contained) be framed and deriued from the Troy waight: yet are they in traffique, with diuers commodities, as Lead, Tinne, Flare, Waxe, with all other commodities both of this Realm, & of other Forraine Countries whatsoeuer, bought & solde by the Haberdepoise waight, after 16 ounces to the pounde, and 112 lb to the C. waight. And vnto euerie C. is allowed 12 lb weight at the common beame. From hence is also deriued the wey of Suffolke Chéese whyche containeth 32 Cloues, 8 lb to a Cloue, and weygheth in all 256 lb: And [Page] also the barrell of Suffolke Butter is or shold be of like waight with the wey of chéese: vz. 256 lb. More 14 of these lb make a stone: And 26 stone cōtaineth a sacke of english Wooll. Forraine Woolles, to wit, French, Spanish, & Estrich, is also solde by the pound or C. wai­ghte, but most commonly by the Roue, 25 lb to a Roue: other commodities of tale are bought and sold by the C. fiue score to the C. Except headed ware, to wit, cattel, nailes, & Fish, whych are sold after sixe score to the C.

Ther is also two other sorts of Measures, to wit, the Ell, and the Yeard. By the Ell is vsually mette linnen Cloth, as Canuas, &c. And by the Yeard, Silks, wollen Cloths, &c.

Antwerpe.

At Antwerpe are also 2 sorts of waights, their golde & siluer waight, & their common waight gold & siluer is weighed by ye Marke, the Marke is 8 ounces, the ounce 20 Ester­lings, and the Esterling 32, as our graines, The Goldsmithes diuide that into smaller, but not the Merchantes: the proofe of Golde is made by Caractes, whereof 24 maketh a Mark of fine Gold: the Karact is 24 graines: the proofe of the money is made by Deniers, [Page] 12 deniers is 1 s fine: that is a Marke of fine siluer, the Denier also is diuided into 24 graines, and the graine into 4 quarters.

Item, 100 Markes in Antwerp, Troy wai­ghte, maketh at Lions 103 Markes, 2 ½ oun­ces, and 20 graines 23 At Norem­burg 103 Markes, 2 ½ ounces, 2 quints, 3 Deniers: at Franckford 105 Markes: at Au­sburge, 104 Markes, 3 ounces, 1 quint: At Venice 103 Markes, 1 ounce, 7 deniers, 18 graines: At London 66 lb.

The Marke of Golde or Siluer at Ant­werp Troy waight, which is 8 ounces maketh 7 ½ ounces common waight with which all other merchandize is weighed: So that the Troy waight is greater than the common waight by 6 ¼ in the C. By this waighte of Troy they also wey Muske, Amber, Perle, &c.

All Silkes are bought at Antwerpe, by the Bruges Ell, whiche is greater than the com­mon measure, by which they retaile by 2 in the C. Their common Ell is [...]/4 of our yeard, and ⅖ of our Ell.

Lions.

At Lions is vsed 3 sortes of waightes, whereof the firste is the common Towne [Page] waight, with whiche they wey all kinde of Spicerie, and diuers other merchaundize. The seconde is called Geneua waight, which is 8 in the 100 greater than the common waight, with which they weigh Silkes, &c. The third is French waight, called commō ­ly the Marke waight, and 100 lb therof, ma­keth 106 ¼ lb Geneua and 114 ¾ of their com­mon waight, with which French waight is weyed al things that payeth custome or toll.

At Lions is also vsed two sortes of Elles or Aulnes: The one wherewith they measure grosse Clothes, as Canuas, and suche like. The other is called the French El or Aulne, with which they measure all other kinde of merchandize, whereof 7 common Towne Elles maketh 11 ordinarie French Elles.

Roan.

At Roan 6 ½ Muydes of Salte, being the measure of ye place, make an hūdreth at Ar­muiden in Zeland, and the C. of Bronage, mea­sure of Armuiden maketh at Roan, 11 Muids, 30 Mines maketh a Last of Corne, & 16 a last of Dates, 100 lb waight there maketh at London 114 ¼ and 109 2/8 at Antwerpe: And 100 Elles make at London 115 [...]/8.

Noremburge.

A 100 lb waight of Noremburg, maketh at London 111 ¾ at Antwerpe 107 ½: And 100 Els of Norēburg make at London 75 ⅖ at Antwerp 95 ⅖ &c.

Lisbone.

The C. waight at Lisbone maketh 4 Roues, euerie Roue 32 lb: So that their C. waight is 128 lb, and their pound containeth 14 ounces, and 100 lb of their waight ma­keth at London 113 ⅛.

Their Silke, cloth of Gold and Wollen is measured with a measure which they call a Cubite, containing about 3/ [...] of a Varre of Castile: Howbeit, their common Measure is called a Varre which maketh 5 Palmes & containeth 1 1/ [...] of a Varre of Castile: our ell of London is equall with the Varre of Lisbone.

All kinde of Merchandise brought from Flaunders, Roane, or Brittaine, payeth at Lisbone, as a duetie or custome to the King, 20 in the C. whiche they call the tenth in Merchandize, and the other tenth in money.

Note also, that all kinde of Merchandize comming to Lisbone by land, payeth lesse in custome than that that commeth by water.

Ciuill.

The Roue of Ciuill is 30 lb, 4 Roues make their C. waight which is 120 lb: The 100 lb of Ciuill maketh at London 102 lb: Their other common Measure is a Varre, whereof 100 maketh at London 74 Els: and at Rome 40 Canes, &c.

Venice.

At Ʋenice be 2 sortes of Waightes, the one called La Grosse, the other La Suttle, with the Grosse is weyed all kinde of greate wares: and with the small, al kinde of Spi­cerie, and suche like: 96 lb of grosse waight there maketh at London 100 lb: And 100 lb of Spicerie there without any tare, or alow­aunce, make at London 64, and with tare 56.

Their other cōmon measure are Braces, whereof 100 make at London 55 ½ Elles, at Antwerpe 92 ½, &c.

Florence.

At Florence the 100 lb waight maketh at Aquila, for Saffron 110: and 145 lb of Flo­rence make at Roan but 100 lb: the waight of Florence, and that of Luke is all one.

[Page]Their other measures are Braces, wherof 100 maketh at Antwerp Burges measure 81 ⅔ Elles, 100 Braces there make at London 49 Elles, &c.

Lucque.

The Lucque Sattens are cōmonly solde at Lions by waight, and 133 ⅓ lb, maketh at Lions 100 lb: So that 1 lb ⅓ maketh at Lions but 1 pounde.

Their other measures are Braces, wher­of 100 of them make at London 50 Elles, at Antwerpe 83 ⅓ Elles, &c.

Aquila.

At Aquila their 100 lb maketh at London 71 ¼, their 136 ⅔ lb of Saffron maketh at Geneua but 100: And 11 pounde of Geneua maketh 15 pound at Aquila.

Valentia.

At Valentia be 2 sorts of waights, a great and a small: The C. waight of great waight containeth 4 Roues: The Roue 36 lb: So the C. great waight is 144 lb: and the C. [Page] waight small containeth but 120 lb: and is also parted into 4 Roues whiche is 30 lb to a Roue: By the small is solde the Scarlet graine, with all other kinde of Spicerie, and by the great is solde Wooll with all such like grosse wares: The 1 ½ lb of Silke at Valen­tia maketh at Lions 1 lb Geneua waight: The Charge of greate Merchaundize at Valentia, containeth 432 lb, and in smal wares 360 lb: The waight here, and at Barcellone is al one: Their 100 lb waight maketh at London 78 lb: and at Antwerpe 75.

Dansicke.

At Dansicke or Spruce lande the Rule is, that whosoeuer buyeth anye Merchaundize there, buyeth it by the Shippound, which is 320 lb: 20 Lispoundes make a Shippounde, and the Lispounde containeth 16 pounde: whiche Shippound of Dansicke maketh at Antwerp 266 ⅔ lb: Their 100 lb waight ma­keth at London 86 ⅝, &c.

Their other commō measures are Elles, whereof 100 make at London 72 ¼: And at Antwerp 120 ½ Elles.

Toulouse.

At Toulouse 6 Cabes of Woad, maketh a Charge, 2 Cesterns of Corne, and all kinde of graine maketh a Charge: the Cester wey­eth 160 lb waight of that place. Their 100 lb in waight maketh at London but 91 ¼ lb.

Geanes.

At Genua or Geanes, a 100 lb of their waight maketh at London, 71 ¼: And at Ant­werpe, 68 2/8: 100 lb waight at Genua maketh at Venice, to wit, Suttle 106 lb.

Their other cōmon Measures are Palmes, whereof 100 make at London 20 ⅘ Elles: & at Antwerpe 34 ⅗.

The rest are supplyed in 2 Tables which hereafter followeth: whereby the ingeni­ous may gather his desire.

[Page] The agreement of the Waightes of diuerse Countries, the one with the other, being reduced to an Equalitie, and drawn into a Table, as followeth.

112 pounds waight at London, make at

Antwerp
107 ⅝
Franckeford
099.
Collen and Ausburge
102 ¼
Noremburge
100 ⅛
Roan
098
Paris
102 ¼
Lions
118 ½
Diepe
100 ¼
Geneua
090 ⅛
Towlouse
122 ¾
Rochel
124 7/8
Marcellis
124 ¼
Ciuill, &c.
109 ¾
Venice grosse waight
105 ⅜
Venice suttle waight
166 ⅞
Aquila
157 ¼
Vienna
089 ⅜
Preslaw
134 ⅝
Leibzig
101 ¼
Dansicke
129 ¼
Lubecke
097 ⅜
Barcellon
144 ½
Lisbone
099
Geanes
157 ¼

[Page] The other Table of the agreement of Mea­sures of diuers Countries reduced vnto an equalitie, by the aide wherof you may with the vse of the rule of three conuerte either more or lesse of anye one measure vnto other.

Elles or [...]eards [...]ondon [...]e at

Antwerpe
100 Elles
Norenburg
104 ½ Elles
Franckford
125 Elles
Leibsig
125 Elles
Preslaw
125 Elles
Dansicke
83 Elles
Vienne in Austi
87 Elles
Lions in Fraunce
60 [...]0/41 Aulnes
Paris in Fraunce
57 Aulnes
Roan in Normandie
52 Aulnes
Lisbone
60 Aulnes
Ciuill in Spaine
81 Varres
Castile in Spaine
81 Varres
Methera Iles
62 Varres
Ʋenice
108 Braces
Luques
120 Braces
Florence
122 ½ Braces
Millan
138 Braces
Rome
90 Canes
Geanes.
288 6/13 Palmes

The eightenth Chapter treateth of Sportes and pastimes, done by Number.

IF you would know the number that a­ny man doth thinke, or imagine in hys minde, as though you coulde diuine. Bid him triple it, or putte twice so muche more to it, as it is: which done, aske him whether it bée euen or odde: if he say odde, bid him take 1 to it, to make it euen: and for that 1 kéep 1 in your minde: now after he hath taken 1 to it, to make it euen, bidde him giue away halfe, and kéepe the other halfe for himselfe, which when he hath done, bid him triple that halfe: and againe after he hath tripled it, aske hym whether it be euen or odde: if he saye odde: then bid him take 1 to make it euen againe: and for that last 1 kéepe 2 in your mind, now after he hath made his number euen, bidde him caste away the one halfe, and kepe the o­ther still: From which halfe that he kepeth, cause him sutlely to put away or giue you 9 out of his nūber, & for eche 9 that he giueth you kéepe 4 in your minde, and therevnto ioine the 3 which I bade you kéepe, and you [Page] shal haue your desire.

Example.

Imagine he thought 7: the triple whereof to 21: and because it is odde, he is to take 1 to make it euen: which first 1 giuen is 1 for you to kéepe in minde: Then the halfe of his 22 being caste away, he reserueth still 11: which after you haue bidde him triple, it ma­keth 33: then in giuing of him 1 againe to make it euen: vpon that laste 1 reserue 2 in your mind: then his halfe of 34 maketh 17: From whence he can giue you 9 but once: Therefore that yéelding to you 4: and the 3 that you kéepe make 7, your desire.

An other kinde of Diuination to tell youre frend, how many pence, or single peeces, reckoning them one with an other, hee hath in his purse, or should thinke in his minde.

Which to doe firste bid him double the péeces he hath in his purse, or the number he thinketh: if he participate hys number or [Page] secreacie vnto some one friend that setteth by him that can but multiplie, & ad neuer so lit­tle: if their number be greate, then shal they worke as you bidde them so much the surer.

Nowe after he hath doubled his number, bid him adde therevnto 5 more, which done, bidde him multiply that his number by 5 al­so, whiche done, bidde him tell you the iuste summe of his laste Multiplication, whiche summe the giuer thinking it nothing auaile­able, because it is so greate aboue his preten­ded imagination: yet thereby shal you pre­sently wyth the helpe of Subtraction tell his proposed number.

The Rule is this.

Imagine he thought 17: double 17, and [...] it maketh 34, wherevnto if you adde 5, it maketh 39: whiche multiplied by 5, as here is practised in ye margēt, it yéeldeth 195: which 195 is the sum deliuered you in the work: then for a gene­ral rule, you shal euermore cut off the last figure towards your right hād, wt a dash of your pen, as here is performed, as a figure [Page] nothing auaileable vnto your worke: and then rebate 2 from your firste figure, after 5 is cutte off: and the reste shall euermore be your desire, as by this example doth appeare.

If in any company, you are disposed to make them merry by manner of Diuining, in deliuering a Ring vnto any one of them, which after you haue deliuered it vnto them, that you will absent your selfe from them: and they to deuise after you are gone, which of them shall haue the kéeping thereof: And that you at your returne wil tell them what person hath it, vpon what hād, vpō what fin­ger, & what iointe. Which to do, cause ye per­sons to sit down al on a rowe, & to kéepe like­wise an order of their fingers: nowe, after you are gone out from them to some other place, say vnto one of the lookers on, that hée double the nūber of him that hath the Ring, and vnto the double bidde him adde 5: And then cause him to multiplie that Addition by 5: And vnto the product bidde him adde the number of the finger, of the person that hath the Ring. And lastly, to ende the work beyond that number towards his right hād, let him set downe a figure, signifying vppon which of the ioints he hath the Ring, as if it [Page] bée vppon the seconde ioint, let him put down 2: Then demaund of him what number hée kéepeth. From the whiche you shall abate 250. And you shall haue thrée figures remai­ning at the least: the first towards your left hande shall signifie the number of the person which hath the Ring: the seconde or middle number shall declare the number of the fin­ger, and the laste figure towardes your right hande, shall betoken the number of the ioint.

Example.

Imagine the seuenth person is determi­ned to kéepe the Ring vppon the fifth finger, and the third ioint: first double 7, it maketh 14, thereto adde 5, it maketh 19, whiche multiplied by 5 yéeldeth 95: vnto which 95, adde the number of the finger, and it maketh 100: and beyond 100 toward the right hand, I set downe 3 the number of the ioint, al ma­keth 1003, which is the number that is to be deliuered you, from which abating 250, there resteth 753, whiche prefigureth vnto you the seauenth person, the fifth finger, and the third ioint.

[Page]But note, that when you haue made your subtraction, if there doe remaine a 0: in the place of tens, that is to say, in the seconde place, you must then abate 1, from that fi­gure which is in the place of Hundreds, that is to wit from the figure which is next your left hand, and that shall be worth 10 tenths, signifying the tenth finger: as if there should remaine 803, you must say, that the seuenth person vppon his tenth finger, and vppon his third ioint, hath the Ring.

And after the same manner, if a man doe caste 3 Dice, you may knowe the points of euerie one of them. For if you cause hym to double the pointes of one Dye, and to the double to adde 5: and the same summe to multiplie by 5: and vnto the product adde the pointes of one of the other Dice. And behind the number towards the right hand to putte the figure which signifieth the pointes of the laste Die: and then to aske what number he kepeth, from which abate 250: and there wil remaine 3 figures, which doe note vnto you the pointes of euerie Die.

Another.

[Page]If thrée diuerse things are to be hidden of thrée diuerse persons, and you to diuine whiche of the thrée persons hathe the thrée diuerse things doe thus: imagine the thrée things to be represented by A.B.C Thē secondly kéepe wel in your minde whiche of the persons you meane to be the first, seconde and third: Then take 24 counters or stones, and your thrée things, And giue A. vnto the partie whome you imagine to be your firste man: and there withal giue him one of your 24 counters in his hand: And B. vnto your se­conde man: and ther withal 2 counters: And C vnto your thirde man, and there withall 3 counters. And leaue the reste whiche are 18 stil among them, which done, seperate your self from them, & afterwards bid them chāge the things among them as they shall thinke good, whiche done after they are agréed, byd him that hathe suche a thing, as before you haue represented by A for euery counter that he hath in his hand to take vp as manye moe, And for him that hathe B for euerie one in hys hande to take vppe two: And for hym that hathe C. for euerye one in hys hande to take vp 4: And the rest of them to leaue still vpon the boorde. These thrée things [Page] and the thrée persons being fullye printed in your minde, come to the table, and you shall euermore finde one of these sixe num­bers 1.2.3.5.6 or 7 If therefore one remaine stil vpon the boorde, then haue they made no exchaunge, but kéepe them still as they were deliuered vnto them: So that the firste man hath A. the second B and the third C. But if 2 remaine, then the firste man hathe B. your se­cond man A and your thirde man C: the reste of the worke and the order therof are here ap­parant by the table following.

11A
2B
3C
21B
2A
3C
31A
2C
3B
51B
2C
3A
61C
2A
3B
71C
2B
3A
Another Diuination of a number vpon the casting of two Dice.

First let the caster cast both the Dice, and marke wel the number: then let him take vp one of them it maketh no matter which: and looke what number it hath in the bottom, and adde altogither: then cast the die againe, and kéepe in his minde what altogither maketh: then let the Dice stande: bring 7 wyth you and therevnto adde the rest of the pits that you sée vpō the vp­per side of the Dice, and so many did the ca­ster cast in all.

FINIS.

I. D. To the earnest Arith­metician.

MY louing friend to Science bent,
Something thou hast by this booke woonne:
But if thou wilt be excellent,
Another race thou must yet runne.
Supplyes thereto but (few do) neede,
And none but such as in our phrase,
(By Records pen) thou maist wel reade:
Proceede therefore: Be not stunt dwase.
The ground most sure, wheron this race
With speedeful courage must be past,
Of late hath turnde his Greekish face,
By English tilth, which aye wil last.
The famous Greeke of Platos lore,
EVCLIDE I meane Geometer:
So true, so plaine, so fraught with store,
(As in our speach) is yet no where.
A treasure straunge, that booke wil proue,
With numbers skil, matcht in due sort,
This I thee warne of sincere loue,
And to proceede do thee exhort.

Plus oultre.

THus gentle Reader I end this my trea­tise, with earnest request to accept it in good parte. And let my good wil counter­uaile the basenesse of the stile: praying thee also to thy better furtherance of perfection, to amende in the Margente of the booke, these faultes that haue escaped in the Prin­ting, which I haue here in this table of erra­ta following collected.

Vale
I.M. Norwicensis.

Faults escaped in the Printing, which I desire thee good Reader to correct with thy penne, for thine owne ease and benefit.

E. 16. page. line. 7 there lacketh 4 lb 2 s.

S. 12. page. line. 26. read as you work into s.

Dd. 1. page line. 5. for 5/8 read ⅚.

Gg. 2. page. line. 8. for ⅙ read 3/6.

Gg. 6. page. line. 11. there lacketh. 666 ⅔.

Ll. 10 page. line. 10. for ⅛ read ⅓.

Mm. 1. page. line. 13. read for 2 s take the 1/10.

Mm. 2. page. line. 12. for ½ read 1/10.

Mm. 6. page. line. 2. read wherof the ⅓.

Mm. 9. page. line. 23. Item for 3 d. take [...]/8.

Mm. 15. page. line. 2. What 3884 yeardes.

[Page]Mm. 15. page. line. 26. read which 10 d is ⅙ of 5 s.

Nn. 7. page. line. 4 reade 23.

Nn. 9. page. line. 12. mende 48. to 4 s 4 d.

Nn. 13 page. line 7. vnder 2/4 put ¼.

Oo. 8 page, line 13. read saying once 3 is 3.

Oo. 9 page. line. 6. in the exāple, say if 1 yeard cost 8 ¼. d.

Oo. 10. page. for 7/17 mende it to 7/14.

Oo. 11. page. line. 24. for ⅓ make it ⅔.

Pp. 8. page. line. 3 for 18 s make 10 s.

Qq. 3. page. line. 5. for the seauenth make it the eight.

Qq. 4 page. line. 13. read whē I deliuered it.

Qq. 5 page. line. 23. for 9 ¼ read 6 ¼.

Qq. 9. page. line. 5. for ½ make it 8/2.

Qq. 11. page. line. 1. put a pricke at 400. to seuer him & ⅓ asunder, the like do at the end of 600: for to seuer ½:

Qq. 16. page. line. 11. after the rate of 9 lb. read 10 lb.

Rr. 1. page. line. 5. for 20.18.8 13/25: reade 51 lb. 14.5 13/25.

Tt. 14. page. line. 10 put out, by: reade notes of the.

Xx. 1. page. line. 7. read of gold maketh 65. 🜄

This keyboarded and encoded edition of the work described above is co-owned by the institutions providing financial support to the Text Creation Partnership. Searching, reading, printing, or downloading EEBO-TCP texts is reserved for the authorized users of these project partner institutions. Permission must be granted for subsequent distribution, in print or electronically, of this EEBO-TCP Phase II text, in whole or in part.